ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY

(Accredited with A Grade by NAAC)

KARAIKUDI 630 003 TAMILNADU

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION
(Recognized by Distance Education Bureau (DEB), UGC, New Delhi)

POST GRADUATE PROGRAMMES

REGULATIONS AND SYLLABI

Copy Right Reserved

For Private use only

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY, KARAIKUDI

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION
REGULATIONS AND SYLLABI

PG. PROGRAMMES
Sl.No.

Course

Page No.

M.Com

2-13

M.Com(F&C)

14-24

M.A.(Tamil)

25-32

33-41

M.A.(English)
M.A.(History)

M.A.(Education)

55-73

74-86

M.A.(Sociology)
M.A.(Personnel Management & Industrial Relations)

M.A.(Master of Journalism and Mass Communication)

98-108

10

109-120

11

M.A.(Child Care & Education)

M.Sc(Mathematics)

12

M.Sc(Information Technology)

132-155

13

M.Sc(Computer Science)

156-172

14

Master of Library and Information Science (MLIS) (One year)

173 -181

15

M.Sc(Physics)

182 - 202

16

M.Sc(Chemistry)

203 227

17

228 241

18

M.Sc(Botany with Specialization in Plant Bio-Technology)

M.Sc(Zoology)

19

M.A. (Economics)

263-273

20

M.Sc.,Psychology

274-297

21.

MCA

298-3326

22.

MSW

327-398

42-54

87-97

121-131

242 262

Course

M.Com.

Mode
Duration
Eligibility

:
:
:

Medium

Distance Education
Two years
Any degree from a recognised University with
Commerce/ Accountancy as a subject
English and Tamil

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Marks

I YEAR
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

Management Concepts
Advanced Accounting
Business Environment
Management Accounting
Financial Services

100
100
100
100
100

Marketing Management
Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management
Financial Management
Advanced Cost Accounting
Principles of Personnel Management

100
100
100
100
100
1000

II YEAR
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Total

Paper 1.1: MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS

UNIT I
Management: Definition Nature Scope and functions Evolution of management
thought Relevance of management to different types of organisation like, Insurance,
Hospitals, Universities, Hotels, Social Service organisations etc.
UNIT II
Planning: Nature, importance and strategic considerations in planning Planning
premises Components of planning as objectives, policies, strategies, procedures, methods,
rules, projects and budgets Planning process Decision making Meaning Importance
Types Process.
UNIT III
Organising: Nature, purpose and kinds of organisation Structure Principles and
theories of organisation Departmentation Span of control Line and staff functions
Authority and responsibility Centralisation and decentralisation Delegation of authority
Committees Informal organisation.
UNIT IV
Staffing: General principles and importance Motivation: Meaning Importance
Types Theories Communication: Meaning Types Process Barriers Overcoming
barriers Leadership: Meaning Styles Essential qualities.
UNIT V
Controlling: Objectives and process of control Devices of control Integrated
control Special control techniques Coordination Need and techniques.
UNIT VI
Recent trends and new perspectives in management - Strategic alliances Core
competence Business process reengineering Total quality management Bench marking.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Stoner and Wanker: Management, Prentice Hall.
2. Koontz and ODonnel: Management: A Systems Approach, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Weihrich and Koontz: Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill.
4. John Argenti: Management Techniques: A Practical Guide.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur: Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Griffin: Management.

Paper 1.2: ADVANCED ACCOUNTING

UNIT I
Accounting Systems: Cash and mercantile systems Accounting concepts
Principles Accounting standards.

UNIT II
Single Entry System: Calculation of profit Statement of Affairs method
Conversion of single entry into double entry system Preparation of profit and
loss account and balance sheet under single entry system.

UNIT III
Partnership Accounts Admission, retirement and death of partners
Amalgamation of firms Dissolution Piecemeal distribution Sale to a
company.

UNIT IV
Company Final Accounts Profit prior to incorporation.
UNIT V

Accounting for company amalgamation Absorption External

reconstruction Capital reduction and internal reconstruction.

UNIT VI
Holding Company Accounts Computation of capital profit, revenue
profit, minority interest Cost of control/ capital reserve Preparation of
consolidated profit and loss account and balance sheet.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Jain and Narang: Advanced Accountancy.
2. Arulanandam and Raman: Financial Accounting.
3. Shukla M C: Advanced Accounting.

Paper 1.3: BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

UNIT I
Business Environment:
Concept Significance Factors
Environmental influence on business Environmental Scanning for business
planning.

UNIT II
Social and Cultural Environment: Demographic trend Indian social
structure Caste and communal systems Interplay of various systems.

UNIT III
Entrepreneurial Culture: Emerging entrepreneurial class Ethos:
Business ethics Meaning Need Enforcing agencies Social Responsibility:
Responsibility towards various interest groups Social cost benefit analysis.

UNIT IV
Political Environment: Fundamental rights Directive principles of State
Policy Centre-State relations Impact of political environment on business Economic Environment: Basic economic systems Capitalism, socialism,
communism, mixed economy Characteristics of Indian economic system.

UNIT V
State Policies: Monetary policy Control of money supply and credit
control impact on business Fiscal Policy Public debt, budgets, direct and
indirect taxation impact on business Industrial Policy New industrial policy.

UNIT VI
Technological Environment: Choice of technology Problems in
selecting appropriate technology Implications to business.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Adhikary: Business Environment.

Dutt and Sundaram: Indian Economy.
Srinivasan N P and Gupta: Enterepreneurship Development.
Cherunilam: Business and Government.
Mamoria and Mamoria: Business Planning and Policy.

Paper 1.4: MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

UNIT I
Management Accounting: An introduction Definition Scope Objectives
Functions Role Importance Limitations Management accounts Vs Financial accounting
and Cost accounting Installation of management accounting system Tools of management
accounting Reporting.
UNIT II
Financial Statement Analysis: Financial Statements Nature and limitations of
financial statements Analysis and Interpretation Comparative statements Common size
statements Criticism of published accounts and cost accounting.
UNIT III
Ratio Analysis: Types Profitability ratios Turnover ratios Liquidity ratios
Proprietary ratios Market earnings ratios Factors affecting efficiency of ratios How to
make effective use of ratio analysis Uses and limitations Construction of profit and loss
account and balance sheet with ratios and relevant figures.
UNIT IV
Fund Flow, Cash Flow Analysis:
Fund Flow: Need and meaning Preparation
of schedule of change in working capital and the fund flow statement Projected fund flow
statement Managerial uses and limitations of fund flow analysis - Cash Flow: Need
Meaning Preparation of cash flow statement Managerial uses of cash flow statement
Limitations Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis.
UNIT V
Budgeting: Meaning of Budget and Budgetary Control Importance Limitations
Classification of budgets and budgets preparation Fixed and flexible budgeting
Performance budgeting Zero-base budgeting.
UNIT VI
Marginal Costing and Break Even Analysis: Definition Marginal costing Vs
Absorption costing Justification for marginal costing Marginal cost sheet Segregation of
semivariable costs Contribution Key factor Managerial uses of marginal costing Pricing
decisions Level of activity planning Mix of sale Profit planning techniques Make or buy
decisions Break-even Analysis: Break-even Analysis Break-even chart and graph P/V
ratio Margin of Safety Assumptions of break Even analysis Limitations of break-even
analysis Advantages and limitations of marginal costing Differential costing.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Maheswari: Management Accounting.
2. Srinivasan N P: Management Accounting.
3. Khan and Jain : Financial Management.

Paper 1.5: FINANCIAL SERVICES

UNIT I
Nature and various facets of financial service industry Analysis of financial
services Ned for financial innovation Financial services and market environment
Development of financial markets Global integration of financial market Finance
Companies: Functions, strengths and weaknesses.

UNIT II
Commercial Banking and their fund based and non-fund based financial
services Leasing, hire purchase financing: Salient features, guidelines, functions
Mutual Funds: Types of mutual funds Floatation Asset management company of
mutual funds Regulations.

UNIT III
Factoring Forfeiting Securitisation Venture capital Consumer finance
and credit cards: Salient features, guidelines, functions Strategies involved in
financing.

UNIT IV
Merchant Banking including public issue management Underwriting
Portfolio management Stock and security broking Merger and Takeover: Salient
features Guidelines Functions.

UNIT V
Foreign Exchange Broking Bills discounting Financial consultancy
Corporate advisory services Credit rating services Salient features Guidelines
Functions.

UNIT VI
Non-banking Financial Companies: Regulations of RBI Role of NBFCs.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Prasanna Chandra: Financial Management.

Avadani: Investment Management including Securities Market.
Varma: Merchant Banking.
ICSI Study Materials: Financial Management.
ICSI Publication: A Manual of Capital Issues.

Paper 2.1: MARKETING MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Marketing: Meaning Scope Importance Approaches to the study of Marketing
Marketing Concept Market Segmentation: Meaning Bases for segmentation Uses.
Marketing Mix: Four Ps in marketing Marketing Planning Importance Types of planning.
UNIT II
Marketing Environment External factors Internal factors Consumer Behaviour
Meaning and importance Consumer buying process Determinants of consumer behaviour
Theories and their relevance to marketing.
UNIT III
Product Mix Management: Product planning and development New Product
development Product Life Cycle Meaning Stages Managing PLC Product positioning
Branding Packaging.
UNIT IV
Price Mix Management: Factors affecting pricing Pricing and pricing policies
Objectives Procedures Methods of price fixation Administered and regulated prices.
Physical Distribution Mix: Distribution channel policy Types Factors determining
choice of channel Channel management Middlemen functions.
UNIT V
Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs Impersonal selling Personal selling process
Steps in selling Compensation plans Evaluation of salesmen performance Advertising:
Importance Objectives Media planning and selection Factors influencing selection
Advertising copy Layout Evaluation of advertising Advertising budget Sales Promotion
methods Publicity Sales promotion tools.
UNIT VI
Marketing Research & Marketing Information System: Meaning Scope Need
Elements Research Process Steps involved Consumerism: Meaning Consumer rights
Consumer movement in India Salient provisions of Consumer Protection Act.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. William Stanton: Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill.
2. Mamoria & Joshie: Fundamentals of Marketing.
3. Armstrong and Kotler: Principles of Marketing.

Paper 2.2: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Investment: Concepts and goals Types of investment: Financial, Real, Business,
Personal and Institutional Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling and hedging
Concept of portfolio management: Goals Risk and return trade-off.
Financial Investment Avenues: Fixed income and Varying income securities.
UNIT II
Investment Analysis: Aspects of analysis Return Analysis: Concepts, measures and
computation of return of individual security and portfolio Risk Analysis: Concepts, types,
measure, computation of risk of individual security and portfolio Valuation Analysis: Share
and bond valuation Price Earnings Analysis.
UNIT III
Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental Analysis: Concept and components
Tools of economy, industry and company analysis Technical Analysis: Concept and tools
Assumption Theories: Dow theory Contrary opinion Confidence index, Breadth of
market and Relative strength analysis Moving average analysis Chart patterns.
UNIT IV
Portfolio Construction and Choice: Markowtz diversification Efficient frontier
Risk-return indifferent curves Portfolio choice Single and two factorial models Lagrange
multiplier method.
UNIT V
Capital Asset Pricing Model Assumptions and application Capital market line and
security market line Efficient market hypotheses The weakly efficient, semi strongly
efficient and strongly efficient market forms Random-walk theory.
UNIT VI
Portfolio Performance Measures: Sharpe, Treynor and Jensen Portfolio Audit and
Portfolio Revision: Need and methods Formula plans.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1.
Francis J C: Investment Analysis and Management.
2.
Francis J C: Management Investments.
3.
Bhalla V K: Investment Management.
4.
Preeti Singh, Investment Management.

Paper 2.3: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Financial Management: An introduction Concept, nature, evaluation
and significance Finance functions Managerial and operative Investment
Function, meaning and scope Financing function Meaning and scope
Dividend function Goals of Financial Management Types Maximisation of
profit, profitability/ wealth/ liquidity/ solvency Minimisation of risk, cost of
capital, dilution of management control etc. Risk Return trade off
Maximisation and minimisation vs optimisation.

UNIT II
Long Term Capital Resources Equity and debt sources Equity share,
preference shares and debentures as sources of long term capital Relative
merits, demerits and uses Significance of convertible issues and right issues
Borrowings from term lending institutions The institutional framework
Types of assistance Public deposits.

UNIT III
Working Capital: Concept and types Determinants Financing
approaches Conservative Aggressive and hedging approaches Their risk
Return features and significance Sources of working capital finance Working
capital financing by commercial banks.

UNIT IV
Capital Planning Determinants of capital structure Optimum capital
structure Capital structure theories Net income and net operative income
theories M.M. Theory Traditional theory Their assumptions Significance
and limitations.

UNIT V
Cost of Capital Concept Cost of debt, equity, preference share capital,
retraining earning Weighted average cost Book weight, market weight
Marginal cost of capital use and computations.
Capital Budgeting: Concept Significance Methods of appraisal:
Payback periods, ARR, IRR, NPV, Simulation and Certainty equivalent
methods.

10

UNIT VI
Leasing: Concept Types Significance General considerations
Economics of leasing Evaluation Present value and IRR methods Leverage
Concept Types Degree of operative leverage Financial leverage and total
leverage Implications of high and low degrees of leverages.
Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gorden and Walter theories
Dividend irrelevance under M.M. Theory Assumptions Limitations
Dividend policy Different policies and practices Factors affecting dividend
decision.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Prasanna Chandra : Financial Management.
2. Van Horne: Financial Management.
3. Khan and Jain: Financial Management.
4. Weston and Briham: Managerial Finance.

11

Paper 2.4: ADVANCED COST ACCOUNTING

UNIT I
Cost Accounting Principles: Meaning of cost and cost accounting Objectives of cost
accounting Installation of a costing system Elements of cost Cost concepts Cost
classifications Methods, systems and techniques of costing Cost sheet.
Cost Accounting for material cost control Need for material cost control Purchase
control Stores control Stock levels EOQ analysis Pricing of stores issues Perpetual
inventory control ABC analysis VED analysis Treatment of waste, scrap, defectives and
spoilage.
UNIT II
Labour Cost Control Time keeping and time booking Treatment of idle time and
overtime cost Wage rates for costing Systems of wage payment Time wage and piece rate
Incentive schemes of wage payment Labour turnover.
UNIT III
Overhead Cost Control Classification of overheads Allocation and appointment
Absorption of overheads Different methods Treatment of under absorption and over
absorption of overheads.
UNIT IV
Methods of Costing Job costing Contract costing Profit on incomplete contracts
Cost plus contracts Target costing Escalation clause Cost sheet Unit costing.
Process Costing Features Job costing Vs Process costing Process cost accounts
Inter-process profits Accounting for joint products and by products.
UNIT V
Standard Costing Definition Advantages and limitations of standard costing
Variance analysis.
UNIT VI
Reconciliation of cost and final accounts Cost control and cost reduction Meaning
Tools and techniques Essentials for success of cost control and cost reduction Distinction
between cost control and cost reduction Areas of cost reduction and control Advantages.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Bhar B K: Cost Accounting.
2. Iyengar S P: Cost Accounting.
3. Horngren : Cost Accounting.
4. Batty: Management Accounting.

12

Paper 2.5: PRINCIPLES OF PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Personnel Management Definition Objectives and functions Role and
structure of personal function in organisations Personnel principles and policies.

UNIT II
Human Resource Planning: Characteristics Need for planning Human
Resource Planning Process Job Analysis Job Design Job Description Job
Specification.

UNIT III
Selection Process: Placement and induction Training and development
Promotion Demotions Transfers Separation.

UNIT IV
Wage and Salary Administration: Factors Principles Compensation plan
Individual Group Incentives Bonus Fringe benefits Job evaluation systems
Wage and salary administration in relation to personal taxation.

UNIT V
Employee maintenance and integration Welfare and society Accident
prevention Administration of discipline Employee motivation Need and measures.

UNIT VI
Personnel Records / Reports:
Objectives Scope and importance.

Personnel Research and Personnel Audit:

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Venkataratnam C S and Srivastava B K: Personnel Management and Human
Resources.
2. Arun Monappa: Industrial Relations.
3. Dale Yodder and Paul D Standohar: Personnel Management and Industrial
Relations.
4. David A Decenzo and Stephen P Robbins: Personnel / Human Resource
Management.

13

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:

M.Com. (Finance and Control)

Distance Education
Two years
Any degree from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Total Marks

I YEAR
1.1

Management Concepts

100

1.2

Financial Accounting and Analysis

100

1.3

Cost and Management Accounting

100

1.4

Quantitative Techniques

100

1.5

Business Law

100

2.1

Financial Management

100

2.2

Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management

100

2.3

Financial Services and Institutions

100

2.4

Global Financial Management

100

2.5

Taxation and Tax Planning

100

II YEAR

Total

14

1000

UNIT I

Paper 1.1: MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS

Concept of Management Definition of management Nature and

process Need for management Management thought: History and evaluation
Major schools of management thought Contribution by F.W. Taylor, Fayol,
and Peter F. Drucker Management by objectives.
UNIT II

Managerial planning Meaning and characteristics Elements Policies,

strategies, procedures, rules, budgets Planning process Types of plan
decision making: Meaning Forecasting and decision making Decision
making under uncertainty.
UNIT III

Organizing Organizational structure Organizational chart

Organizational relationship Formal and informal organization Span of
management Departmentation Line staff Functional committee
Delegation of authority and responsibility Centralization and decentralization.
UNIT IV

Staffing Job analysis, job evaluation Manpower planning Selection

training and development Needs Methods Performance appraisal
Methods.
UNIT V
Direction Methods Motivation Theories Communication:
Importance of communication Types of communication process Barriers to
communication Leadership: Definition Leadership theories and styles
Managerial grid.
UNIT VI

Control Meaning and process of control Management control

techniques Budgetary and non-budgetary control Modern techniques
PERT, CPM, management audit Requirements for effective control system.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Koontz H, ODonnel FE, Management, McGraw Hill.
Louis A Allen, Management & Organisation, McGraw Hill.

15

Paper 1.2: FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND ANALYSIS

UNIT I
Accounting Definition Accounting for historical function and managerial function
Scope of accounting Financial accounting: Accounting concepts Conventions Principles
Accounting standards International accounting standards.
UNIT II
Double entry system of accounting Accounting books Preparation of journal and
ledger Subsidiary books Errors and rectification Preparation of trial balance and final
accounts Accounting from incomplete records Statement of affairs method Conversion
Method Preparation of trading, profit & loss account and balance sheet from incomplete
records.
UNIT III
Company final accounts & Balance sheet Schedules Treatment of various items.
UNIT IV
Financial statement analysis Financial statements Nature of financial statements
Limitations of financial statements Analysis and interpretation Types of analysis External
Vs internal analysis Horizontal Vs vertical analysis Tools of analysis Trend analysis
Common size statements Comparative statements Ration analysis Types Profitability
ratios Factors affecting efficiency of ratios How to make effective use of ratio analysis?
Uses and limitation of ratios Construction of profit and loss account and balance sheet with
ratios Construction of profit and loss account and balance sheet with ratios and relevant
figures Inter-firm, intra-firm comparisons.
UNIT V
Fund flow statements Need and meaning Preparation of schedule of changes in
working capital and the fund flow statement Managerial uses and limitations of fund flow
statements Cash flow statement Need Meaning preparation of cash flow statement
Managerial uses of cash flow statement Limitations Differences between fund flow and
cash flow analysis.
UNIT VI
Inflation accounting: limitations of historical accounting Methods of accounting for
price level changes General price level accounting or current purchasing power accounting
Current cost accounting An appraisal of the CPP and CCA methods Human resource
accounting Approaches Methods of valuation accounting Human resource accounting
models Computer applications in accounting.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

Arulanandan M A & Raman K S, Advanced Accounting

Jain S P & Narang, Advanced Accounting
Maheswari S N, Management Accounting and Financial Control
Khan M Y, Jain P K and Katyal, Management Accounting.

16

Paper 1.3: COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

UNIT I
Cost Accounting: Meaning of cost Objective of costing Installation of a costing
system Elements of cost Cost concepts Cost classifications Cost sheet preparation.
UNIT II
Material cost control Stock levels EOQ analysis Pricing of stores issues
Perpetual inventory control ABC analysis VED analysis Treatment of waste, scrap
Treatment of idle time and overtime cost Systems of wage payment Labour turnover
Overhead cost control Classification Allocation apportionment and absorption of overheads
Different methods.
UNIT III
Methods of costing: Job costing process costing Accounting for inter process
profits Accounting for equivalent production.
UNIT IV
Management accounting: definition Scope and importance management accounting
Vs financial accounting Functions Limitations.
UNIT V
Budgeting and budgetary control Sales budget Cash budget operating budget
Master budget Flexible budgeting Zero base budgeting Performance budgeting
Programme budgeting Capital budgeting Nature and significance Methods of evaluation
of alternative capital expenditure programmes.
UNIT VI
Marginal costing Break even analysis Costing Standard costing Variance
analysis Responsibility accounting Cost control and cost reduction techniques Value
engineering.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

Jain S P and Narang K L, Advanced Cost Accounting

Katyal, Management Accounting

17

Paper 1.4: QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES

UNIT I

Concept and use and quantative techniques Investment decision making

Sources of data: Primary and secondary Methods of data collection
Classification Construction of discrete and discrete and continuous frequency
distribution Charts.
UNIT II

Measures of central tendency: Mean Median Mode Geometric mean

Harmonic mean Weighted mean.
UNIT III

Measures of dispersion: Standard deviation coefficient of variation

Skewness Kurtosis.
UNIT IV

Concept of probability Types Theoretical probability distributions:

Binomial Poisson Normal.
UNIT V

Testing of hypothesis: Equality of mean and difference between means

and equality standard deviation differences between standard deviations.
UNIT VI

Linear correlation and regression as applied investment decisions

Forecasting Decision theory: Criteria for risk and uncertainty linear
programming Return maximizing exercise under graphic and simplex methods.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Gupta S P, Sanchetti and Kapoor, Statistical Methods

Kothari C R, Quantitative Techniques.
Levin, Statistical Methods in Management.
Levin at al, Quantitative Approach to Management.

18

Paper 1.5: BUSINESS LAW

UNIT I
Law of Contract: Definition of contract Essential elements of a valid contract Kinds
of contracts Rules relating to offer and acceptance Consideration Capacity of parties
Free consent Legality of objects and consideration Void agreements Contingent contracts
Performance discharge of contracts Quasi contracts Remedies for breach of contract.
UNIT II
Special contracts: Indemnity and guarantee Bailment and pledge Agency Types of
agency Rights, duties and liabilities of agent and principal Termination of agency.
UNIT III
Sales of Goods Act: Definition and essentials of a contract of sale Sale Vs agreement
to sell Kinds of goods Price Stipulation as to time Conditions and warranties Transfer
of property Performance of contract of sale Rights of an unpaid vendor.
UNIT IV
Negotiable Instruments Act: Negotiable instruments Definition characteristics
Cheque, bill of exchange and promissory note Definition and characteristics Holder
Holder in due course Presentation of negotiable instruments Negotiation Endorsement
Dishonor and discharge Banker and customer Crossing Paying banker Collecting
banker Their protection.
UNIT V
Insurance: Definition Types Principles of insurance contracts Life insurance
Life policies Claims and settlement Fire and marine insurance Types of policies Claims
Marine losses Total and partial Settlement.
UNIT VI
Laws of Carriage of Goods: Contracts of carriage of goods Classification of carriers
Rights, duties and liabilities of carrier by road/rail carriage of goods by sea and air
Documents used Rights, duties and liabilities of carrier by sea and air.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kuchhal M C, Mercantile Law
2. Kapoor N D, Mercantile Law.

19

Paper 2.1: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT & CONTROL

UNIT I
Financial Management An introduction: concept, nature, evaluation and significance
Finance functions risk return trade off Maximization and minimization Vs optimization.
UNIT II
Long term capital resources Equity and debt sources Equity share, preference
shares and debentures Uses Significance of convertible issues and right issues Borrowings
from term lending institutions Institutional frame work Types of assistance General
procedure and conditions Public deposits: meaning, scope and regulations.
UNIT III
Working Capital Concept and types Determinants Financing approaches
Sources of working capital Financing working capital Financing by commercial banks:
Types of assistance working capital gap Recommendation of tendon committee and chore
committee reports.
UNIT IV
Capital structure planning Determinants of capital structure Optimum capital
structure Capital structure theories Significance and limitations Cost of capital: Concept
Cost of debt, equity, preference share capital, retained earning weighted average cost.
UNIT V
Management of current assets Forecasting of current assets needs Management of
cash and liquidity Objectives budgeting Planning the optimum level of cash: Inventory
model, stochastic model Model of miller and orr Payment and collection practices,
management of receivables Credit policy Credit period Credit terms Collection policies
Control of receivables Inventory management: Meaning and importance Inventory costs
Inventory levels Inventory levels Inventory management techniques Stock out cost
determination techniques.
UNIT VI
Leasing Concept Types Significance Economics of leasing Evaluation present
value and IRR methods Leverage: Concept Types Computation of degree of leverages
Implications of leverage analysis Dividend theories Valuation under Gordon and Walter
theories Dividend irrelevance under M.M. Theory Assumptions and limitations Dividend
policy Different policies and practices Factors affecting dividend decision.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

Jain, Khan, and Pandey I M, Financial Management

Solomon Ezra and Priyle John, An introduction to Financial Management
Prasanna Chandra and James C Van Horne, Financial Management and Policy.

20

Paper 2.2: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Investment: Concepts and goals Types of investment Financial Real business
Personal Institutional Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling Hedging
Concepts of portfolio and portfolio management Goals Risk and return trade off Financial
investment avenues Fixed income Varying income securities.
UNIT II
Investment Analysis: Aspects of analysis Analysis Return analysis Concepts,
measures and computation of return of individual security and portfolio Risk analysis
Concepts, types, measure, computation of risk of individual security and portfolio Valuation
analysis Share valuation Bond value Price earnings analysis.
UNIT III
Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental analysis Concept and components
Tools of economy, industry and company analysis Technical analysis Concept and tools
Assumption Theories Dow theory Contrary opinion The confidence index, breadth of
market and strength analysis Moving average analysis Chart patterns.
UNIT IV
Portfolio Construction and Choice: Markowtz diversification Efficient frontier
Risk-return indifferent curves Portfolio choice Single and two factorial models Lagrange
multiplier method.
UNIT V
Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions and application Capital market line and
security market line Efficient market hypotheses The weakly efficient, semi strongly
efficient and strongly efficient market forms Random-Walk theory.
UNIT VI
Portfolio Performance: Measures Sharpe, Treynor and Jenson Portfolio audit and
portfolio revision Need and methods Formula plans.
REFERENCES :
1. Francis J.C, Investment.
2. Francis J.C, Management of Investments.

21

Paper 2.3: FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSTITUTIONS

UNIT I

Financial Services: Concept and scope of financial services Functions

concerning public and private placement of capital issues - Lead management
Issue pricing and promotion Disclosure norms Issue underwriting
Collecting banker SEBI regulations regarding lead managers and merchant
banking functionaries.
UNIT II

Mutual Fund Services Concept, need and scope Mfs in India: Types of
schemes Performance Portfolio performance evaluation measures
Regulations regarding mutual funds.
UNIT III

Credit Rating: Objectives Institutions: CRISIL ICRA CARE Debt

and deposit rating equity rating procedures Reading different grades of rating
International credit rating institutions.
UNIT IV

Role of UTI and LIC as investment institutions Portfolio management

services Concept and need Services of NBFC to investors.
UNIT V

Development Financial Institution Role on functions of IDBI, IFC,

ICICI and IRBI RBI and management of gilt securities market.
UNIT VI

Stock Exchanges: Role and organizations of BSE and NSE OTCEI

SEBI and stock exchange Investor information and education Role of SEBI
Role of investor association and investment consultancies.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Raghunathan V, Stock Exchanges and Investments
Avadhani V, Security Market
Varma, Merchant Banking
22

Paper 2.4: GLOBAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Global Finance: Concept and scope Types of Global Finance: Multilateral and private
Direct and Indirect Macro and Micro Multilateral Finance Institutions: WB, IDA, IFC and
IMF: Functions and achievements.
UNIT II
International Financing methods Equity instruments Foreign equity GDRS and
ADRS Debt instruments and forms Debt Vs equity in the context of a firm and nation.
UNIT III
Global Investments: Need and significance for recipient and investor entities
Portfolio implications direct investment and portfolio investment nature and features.
UNIT IV
Foreign Direct Investment by MNCs Appraisal of capital projects: Adjusted present
value and CAPM techniques Handling political and economic risk.
UNIT V
International working Capital Management: Cash management tools netting, leading,
lagging, transfer pricing, intercompany loans, inventory management - Overview & Tools
Outstanding and overseas production Credit management - Policy variables Letters of
credit.
UNIT VI
Foreign Exchange Management: Types of quotations Spot and forward market
Purchasing power and interest rate parity theorems Forex derivatives options, features and
swaps Managing exposures Transaction and operating exposures International strategies
and external strategies.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

Apte P G, International Financial Mangement

Alan C Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management

Paper 2.5: TAXATION AND TAX PLANNING

UNIT I

23

Definition and concepts Basis of charge Concept of tax planning Tax evasion and
tax avoidance Residential status and scope of total income Income exempted from tax.
UNIT II
Computation of income under the head salary Basis of charge Allowances
Perquisites Deductions from salary Income-tax planning relating to salary income.
UNIT III
Computation of income from house property Chargeability Determination of annual
value Allowable deductions Tax planning practices.
UNIT IV
Computation of Income from Profits and Gains of business/profession Charging
provision Provisions governing assessment of business income Deductions Scope for tax
planning Capital gains Computations of total gains Transfer of capital assets Deductions
Exempted capital gains Areas of tax planning income from other sources.
UNIT V
Set-Off and carry forward of losses Clubbing of income Deductions from gross
total income.
UNIT VI
Assessment of individuals, firms and companies.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Vinod K Singhania, Direct Taxes - Law and Practice
2. Bagawati Prasad, Gaur and Narang, Income Tax Law and Practice
3. Lal B B, Income Tax Law and Practice
4. Sukumar Battacharya, Indian Income Tax.

24

ghltFg;gpd; ngau; vk;.V. jkpo;

top
njhiyepiyf; fy;tp
tFg;gpd; fhyk
;,uz;L fy;;tpahz;Lfs;
Nru;f;iffhd jFjp
gp.V/gp.ypl;. jkpo; /VNjDk; xU
gl;lg;gbg;gpy;
jkpo; ghlj;Jld; Nju;r;rp.
ghlq;fs; kw;Wk; Nju;T Kiw
t.vz;.

ghlq;fs;

nkhj;j
kjpg;ngz
;

Kjyhkhz;L

100

1.1

,f;fhy ,yf;fpak;

100

1.2

mw ,yf;fpaq;fSk; rka ,yf;fpaq;fSk;

100

1.3

,yf;fzk;-1 njhy;fhg;gpak; vOj;jjpfhuk;>

,sk;G+uzk;

100

1.4

,yf;fzk;-2 njhy;fhg;gpak; nrhy;yjpfhuk;>

Nrdhtiuak;

100

1.5

jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;

100

,uz;lhkhz;L
2.1

,yf;fzk;-3 njhy;fhg;gpak; nghUsjpfhuk;>

,sk;G+uzk;

100

2.2

rq;f ,yf;fpaq;fs;

100

2.3

fhg;gpaq;fs;

100

2.4

Rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fs;

100

2.5

,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpay;

100

nkhj;jk;

25

1000

jhs; 1.1 - ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak;

$W-1:- ftpij
ghujpahu;-Rje;jpug; gapu; (jz;zPu; tpl;Nlh tsuj;;Njhk;) njhz;L
nra;Ak; mbik t.c. rpf;F tho;j;J (Ntshsd; rpiwGFe;jhd;)ghujpjhrd; mofpd; rpupg;G (Jtf;fj;jpypUe;J %d;W ghly;fs;) ghujpjhrd;
ftpijfs; 2-Mk; njhFjp - rpWj;ijNa ntspapy; th (G+l;ba ,Uk;Gf; $l;bd; fjT..)
jkpo; ,af;fk; - khztu;.
$W-2
fz;zjhrd;: fz;zjhrd; ftpijfs; - NeU gw;wpa ifaW epiyg; ghly; rpw;gp : xspg;gwit(mfypif ,d;W fhj;jpUf;fpwhs;)- kPuh : fdTfs; +
fw;gidfs; = fhfpjq;fs; - eh. fhkuhrd;: fWg;G kyu;fs; njhFg;gpy; - fWg;G
kyu;fs; kl;Lk; - mg;Jy; uFkhd;: Neau; tpUg;gk;(tlY}Uk; thu;jhTk;)
$W:- ehlfk;
mwpQu; mz;zh: Ntiyf;fhup - n[ae;jd;: epidf;fg;gLk; (mfuk;>
rptfq;if) - #.,d;dhrp: [Q;rpW FO(Xuq;f ehlfq;fs;) E}ypy; ,U ehlfq;fs;mk;gyj;jhbfs;> fl;rpkhwpfs;
$W:- rpWfijfs;
GJikg;gpj;jd;: GJikg;gpj;jd; fijfspy; rhgtpNkhrdk; kl;Lk;
-K.tujuhrd;: Fwl;il xyp(kl;Lk;) n[afhe;jd;: Afre;jp (kl;Lk;) Rr{yh: jil
Xl;lq;fs (kdpjidj; NjLfpd;Nwd; kl;Lk;) - ma;f;fz;: Ntu;fs; njhFg;gpy; Nkd;kf;fs; fij kl;Lk; - ntw;wp - epytd;: #tl;if (tpujk; nfhz;l Ntu;fs;).
$W:- Gjpdk;
gpugQ;rd;: khDlk; nty;Yk; - Njhg;gpy; Kfk;kJ kPuhd;: xU flNyhuf;
fpuhkj;jpd; fij.
$W:- ciueil
uh.gp.NrJg;gps;is: flw;fiuapNy (jpUts;Stu;> ,sq;Nfhtbfs; kl;Lk;)
jpU.tp.f: rPu;jpUj;jk; my;yJ ,sik tpUe;J (jkpo; khzhf;fu; kfhehL gFjp
kl;Lk;).
$W:- ciueil
kiwkiy: Kw;fhy gpw;fhyk; jkpo;g; GyNthu; (Gytu;fNs
ehfupfj;jpw;Fj; jhafk;> gz;ilg;Gytu;> jkpo; Xk;gpdik)- t.R.g. khzpf;fk;:
ts;Stk;( ts;Stu; neQ;rk; kl;Lk;)
$W:- ciueil
fz;zjhrd;: khq;fdp

26

jhs; 1.2: mw ,yf;fpaq;fSk; rka ,yf;fpaq;fSk;

$W:-1
1 jpUf;Fws;: Kg;ghy;fspYk; Kjy; %d;W mjpfhuq;fs;
$W:-2
ehybahu;: el;ghuha;jy;> $lh el;G - gonkhop: fy;tp> fy;yhju;>
mwpTilik.
$W:-3
xsit: ey;top (Kjy; 20 ghly;fs;) - ,d;dh ehw;gJ: Kjy; gj;Jg; ghly;fs; - ,dpait
ehw;gJ: Kjy; gj;Jg; ghly;fs;
$W:- 4
fhiuf;fhy; mk;ikahu;: jpU ,ul;il kzpkhiy - mg;gu;: Nghw;wpj; jpUj;jhz;lfk;
- rk;ge;ju;: jpUePw;Wg; gjpfk;> NfhsW gjpfk;- kzpthrfu;: rptGuhzk;.
$W:-5
ek;kho;thu;: Kjy; gj;J - cau;T mw vd;Dk; Kjy; jpUtha; nkhopAk;
tPLkpd; vd;Dk; ,uz;lhk; jpUnkhopAk; - Mz;lhs;: jpUkzf; fdit ciuj;jy;>
tyk;Gupf;Ff; fpilj;j NgW - FyNrfuho;thu;: CNdW -jpUNtq;flKilahd; tp\ak;

$W:-6
gl;bdj;jhu;: jpUtpil kUJ}u; Kk;kzpf;Nfhit- jpU%yu;: mwQ;nra;thd;
jpwk;> mwk; nra;ahd; jpwk;
RW:- 7
jhAkhdtu;: gupG+udhde;jk; ghly;fs; - ts;syhu; : nja;tkzp khiy.
$W: 8
Fzq;Fb k];jhd; rhfpG : guhhuf; fz;zp - Njrpa tpehak;gps;is: Mrpa
N[hjp.
jhs; 1/3 ,yf;fzk; - 1
njhy;fhg;gpak;: vOj;jjpfhuk;: ,sk;G+uzk;
jhs; 1.4 ,yf;fzk;-2
njhy;fhg;gpak;: nrhy;yjpfhuk;: Nrdhtiuak;

27

jhs; 1.5: jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;

$W:- 1
jkpof tuyhw;wpw;Fupa rhd;Wfs;> gy;ytu;> Nrhou;> ghz;bau;
nrg;NgLfs;- fy;ntl;Lfs;> ,yf;fpaq;fs;> ntspehl;lhu; Fwpg;Gfs;>
jkpofj;jpy; gioa fw;fhyk;> Gjpa fw;fhyk;> ,Uk;Gf;fhyk; Mfpatw;wpf;fhd
rhd;Wfs;> rpe;Jntsp ehfupfk; - jpuhtplu;.
$W:- 2
jkpofj;jpd; njhd;ik> Fkupf;fz;lk; - rq;ffhyr; Nruu;> ghz;bau;>
Nrhou;; tuyhW - rq;ffhyr; r%fepiy - ngz;bu; - fy;tp - rq;ffhyk; jkpofj;jpd;
nghw;fhyk; - fsg;gpuu; Ml;rpapy; jkpofk;.
$W:-3
gy;ytu; Njhw;wKk; tuyhWk; - Kw;fhyg; gy;ytu;fs;> ,ilf;fhyg;
gy;ytu;fs;> gpw;fhyg; gy;ytu;fs; - gy;ytu;fspd; Ml;rp Kiw- rKfepiy
ngz;bu; epiy fy;tp epiy.
$W:- 4
gpw;fhyr; Nrhou; tuyhW Kjy; ,uhruhrd; Kjy; ,uhNre;jpud;
MfpNahhpd; jdpr;rpwg;G NrhoUk; ,uhl;bu $lUk; - NrhoUk; Nkiyr;
rhSf;fpaUk; - jkpofj;jpw;Fk; ,yq;iff;Fk; cs;s njhlu;G gpw;fhyr;
Nrhohpd; r%f epiy - ngz;bu; - ,ir> eldk;> rka epiy.
$W:- 5
Kjy; ghz;bag; NguuR> ghz;ba ehl;by; Nrhouhl;rp - ,uz;lhk;
ghz;bag; NguuR - ,Ryhkpaupd; tUif ghz;bau; Ml;rpapy; r%f epiy
ngz;fs; epiy ghz;bau; Ml;rpapy; fly; fle;j tzpfk;.
$W-6.
jkpofj;jpy; ,Ryhkpau;> tpraefu kugpdu;> kuhl;bau; Ml;rp
gw;wpa nra;jpfs; - kJiu ehaf;fu; tuyhW- ehaf;fu;fspd; ghisag;gl;L Ml;rp
Kiw r%f epiy.
$W:-7
Mq;fpyf; Fk;gpdpahu; Ml;rpj; jkpofj;jpy; Nt&d;wy; - r%f epiy
fy;tp epiy nghUshjhu epiy Mq;fpNyau; Ml;rpia vjpu;j;j G+ypj;Njtd;>
fl;lnghk;kd; - kUJ rNfhjuu;fs;> NtY}u;f; fofk;
$W:- 8
,e;jpa tpLjiyg; Nghuhl;lj;jpy; jkpofj;jpd; gq;F> Ntjhuz;zpak;
cg;Gr; rj;jpahf;fpufk; - fhq;fpu]; - ePjpf; fl;rp> Rakupahij jpuhtpl
,af;fq;fspd; tpLjiyg; Nghuhl;lg;gzp.

28

ghu;it E}y;fs;
1. Nf.Nf. gps;is> jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;> jkpo;ehl;Lg; ghlW}y;
epWtdk;> nrd;id.
2. b.tp. rjhrptg; gz;lhuj;jhu;> ghz;bau; tuyhW> irt rpj;jhe;j
E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk;.
3. b.tp. rjhrptg; gz;lhuj;jhu;> gpw;fhy Nrhou; tuyhW> mz;zhkiy
gy;fiyf;fofk;.
4. kh. ,uhf khzpf;fdhu;> gy;ytu; tuyhW> irtrpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf;
fofk;> nrd;id.
5. Nf.tp. ,uhkd;> ghz;bau; tuyhW> jkpo;ehl;L ghlE}y; epWtdk;>
nrd;id.
6. m.njl;rpzh%u;j;jp> jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;> jQ;rhT+u;.
7. m.fp. gue;jhkdhu;> kJiu ehaf;fu; tuyhW.
8. k..ngh. rp. ,e;jpa tpLjiyg; Nghupy; jkpofk;.
9. R. tpj;jpahde;jk;> jkpou; rhy;G.
10. M.NtYg;gps;is> jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpy; fhyKk; fUj;Jk;/
11. f.neLQ;nropad;> ,e;jpag; gz;ghl;by; jkpOk; jkpOfKk;.
12. M.,uhkrhkp> jkpo;g; NguuRfspd; rupTk; tPo;r;rpAk;.
jhs; 2.1 ,yf;fzk; - 3
njhy;fhg;gpak;: nghUsjpfhuk;: ,sk;G+uzk;.
jhs;. 2.2 ,yf;fzk; - 3
$W:- 1
FwpQ;rpg; ghl;L
$W:-2
Ky;iyf; fyp
$W:- 3
[q;FE}W: kUjk;
$W:- 4
mfehD}W: nea;jy;
$W:-5
FWe;njhif: ghiyg; ghly;fs;
$W:-6
29

ew;wpiz: Kjy; ehw;gJ ghly;fs; - gupghly;fs;: itiag; ghly;fs;.

$W:-7
GwehD}W: 151 Kjy; 200 ghly;fs; tiu gjpw;Wg;gj;J: [e;jhk; gj;J
$W:-8
rpWghzhw;Wg;gil.
jhs; 2.3 fhg;gpaq;fs;
$W:-1
Rpyg;gjpfhuk;: Gfhu;f; fhz;lk;
$W:-2
kzpNkfiy: Kjy; 15 fhijfs;
$W:- 3
rPtf rpe;jhkzp: Nfhtpe;ijahu; ,yk;gfk;.
$W:- 4
fk;guhkhazk;: ke;jiu R+o;r;rpg; glyk;> ifNfap R+o;tpidg; glyk;.
$W:-5
nghpaGuhzk; : fz;zg;g ehadhu; Guhzk; - tpy;ypghujk; : fd;d gUtk;
$W:-6
Njk;ghtdp : Kjw; fhz;lk; - ghy khl;rpg; glyk; - rPwhg;Guhzk; : EGtj;Jf;
fhz;lk; - ckW fj;jhG <khd; nfhz;l glyk;.
$W:- 7
esntz;gh: Rak;tu fhz;lk; (1 - 45 ghly;fs;)
$W:-8
tisahgjp
jhs; 2.4 rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fs;
$W:-1
fypq;fj;Jg;guzp Kjy; ehd;F gFjp
$W:-2
FNyhq;Jq;f Nrhod; cyh.
$W:3.
ee;jpf; fyk;gfk; (Kjy; 45 ghly;fs;)
$W:- 4
jkpo;tpL J}J.
30

$W:- 5
Fw;whyf; FwtQ;rp tre;jty;yp Fwj;jpaplk; kiytsk; Nfl;ly; Kjy; FwpNfl;ly;
tiu ( 66 - 111).
$W:- 6
kPdhl;rpak;ikg; gps;isj; jkpo; - mk;Gypg; gUtk;
RW:- 7
Kj;njhs;shapuk; (Nrhod;)
$W:- 8
jQ;ir thzd; Nfhit ghq;fp- kjpAld;ghL kl;Lk;
jhs; 2.5 ,yf;fpj; jpwdha;tpay;
$W:- 1
,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpd; ,ay;Gk; Nehf;fKk; - jpwdha;thsupd; jFjpfs; jpwdha;tpd; gad; - ,yf;fpaf; fy;tp> ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T> njhlu;Gfs; njhy;fhg;gpaKk;> jkpo;j; jpwdha;tpd; mbg;gilfSk; - jkpo;j; jpwdha;tpd;
tsu;r;rpAk; tuyhWk;
$W:-2.
jpwdha;T tiffs; - tpjpKiwk; jpwdha;T kjpg;gPl;LKiwk; jpwdha;T
xg;gPl;LKiwj; jpwdha;T ghuhl;LKiwk; jpwdha;T> ,tw;iw vLj;Jf;fhl;Lld;
mwpjy;.
$W:- 3.
fw;gid vd;w nrhy;ypd; tpsf;fKk; Ml;rpAk; - fw;gid gw;wp mbrd;>
tpy;ypak; nja;yu;> Ntu;l;]; xu;j;> Nfhypupl;[;> upr;ru;l;]; MfpNahupd;
tpsf;fq;fs;.
$W:- 4
fw;fidapd; tiffs; - tho;f;ifAk; fw;gidAk; - ,y;yd gilj;jy; - cyfpaw; fw;gid
my; ,aw;iff; fw;gid.
$W:- 5
,yf;fpaKk; czu;r;rpAk; - ,yf;fpaj;jpw;Fg; nghUj;jkhd ey;y czu;r;rpfs; ,yf;fpak; nebJ thOjw;Fj; jf;f czu;r;rpfs; - njhy;fhg;gpa nka;g;ghLfs;
$W:-6
fiyAk; tbtKk; - ,yf;fpaKk; fUj;Jk; - xypeaj;jpd; rpwg;G xypeaKk;
czu;r;rpAk; - czu;r;rpf;Nfw;wgb tbt khw;wk;.
$W:-7
31

jpwdha;T: [tifg; ghu;itfs; - mwtpay; - r%ftpay; - cstpay; - njhy;gbktpay;

- khdplypay;.
$W:- 8
,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fs; - elg;gpay; - Gidtpay; - nrt;tpay; - Mfpatw;iwg
gw;wp mwpjy; - jkpo; Ma;tpy; gad;gLj;Jjy; - FwpaPl;bay; cUj;Njhw;wtpay;.
ghu;it E}y;fs;
1. jh. V. Qhd%u;j;jp ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpay;> [e;jpizg;
gjpg;ggk;>nrd;id.
2. K.tujuhrdhu;
,yf;fpaj;jpwd;> ghup epiyak;> nrd;id.
3. R.ghyr;re;jpud;
,yf;fpak; jpwdha;T> mzpafk;>
nrd;id.
4. m.r. Qhdrk;ge;jd; ,yf;fpaf; fiy> irtrpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf;
fofk;> nrd;id
5. f.ifyhrgjp
,yf;fpaf;fiy> irtrpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf;
fofk;>nrd;id.
6. e. rQ;rPtp
,yf;fpa ,ay;> m. $l;LwT vOj;jhsu;
rq;fk;> nrd;id.
7. jkpoz;zy;
Nehf;F> kPdhl;rp Gj;jf epiyak;> kJiu.
8. f. gQ;rhq;fk;
jkpo; ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T tuyhW> nry;td;
gjpg;gfk;> GJit.
9. FNshhpah (nkh. M)
,yf;fpaf; nfhs;if> ghup epiyak;>
nrd;id.
10. F.gftjp (g.M.)
jpwdha;T mZFKiwfs;> cyfj;
jkpohuha;r;rp epWtdk;> nrd;id.
11. e. gpr;ir Kj;J
jpwdha;Tk; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk;>
Ntq;fluq;fd; gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id.
12. jp. R. eluh[d;.
jpwdha;Tf; fiy.
13. ,.kiwkiy
,yf;fpaKk;> r%ftpaYk;.
14. -\,yf;fpaKk;> khu;f;rpaKk;.
15. -\- GJf;ftpijAk;> r%ftpaYk;> kzpthrfu;
E}yfk;.
16. ghyh.
rhu;yprk;> md;dk;> rptfq;if.
17. Nfh. Nfrtd;
,yf;fpaKk; ,af;fg; Nghf;FfSk;.
32

33

Course

M.A. (English)

Mode
Duration

:
:

Distance Education
Two years

Eligibility

Any degree from a recognised University with English

as a subject

Medium :

English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject
Code

Title

Total Marks

I YEAR
1.1

Poetry

100

1.2

Prose

100

1.3

Drama

100

1.4

Literary Criticism

100

1.5

New Media and advertising

100

2.1

Shakespeare

100

2.2

Fiction

100

2.3

Comparative Literature and Translation

100

2.4

Indian Literature in English Translation

100

2.5

English for Communication

100

II YEAR

Total

34

1000

Paper 1.1 : POETRY

UNIT I
Edmand Spenser: Prothalaamion John Donne: The Canonization The
Goodmorrow John Milton: Paradise host, Book II John Dryden:Mac Flecthroe
William Blake: A poison Tree The Lamp The Tiper William Wordswith: Tintem
Abbey John Keats: The Eve of St. Agnes.
UNIT II
Alfred Tennyson: The Lotos Eaters Robert Brouning: The Last Ride Together
Matthew Arnold: The scholar Gipsy W.B Yeats: Byzantium Sailing to Byzantium
T.S. Eliot: The Wasteland Philip Larlin: Hamage to Government Seamns Heancy:
The Harvest.
UNIT III
R.W. Emerson: Brahma Jerminus Emily Dickinson: My life closed Twice
before its close I Taste a liquor never Breueed Because I could not stop for Death I felt
a Fureval in My Brain Robert Frost: West running Brook Wallace Stevens : Sunday
Morning Langston Hughes: The Weary Blues Dream variations Denise lever tov:
A marigold from Nontle victnam advert 1966 Sylvia Plath: Lady Lazarus.
UNIT IV
Nissm Ezethiel: Background, Casually Enterprise Night of the scorpion
A.K. Ramanujan: Small scale Reflection on a Great House Kamala Das: The old
play-House The Freaths Jayant Mahapatna: The Twenty-Fifth Anniversary of a
Republic, 1975 Waiting Fulfillment Kethi Daruwalla: Dreams District Law Courts
Meena Alexander:Tiruvella, My Hometown.
UNIT V
A.J.M Smith: A Hyacinth for Edith The lonely Land Marpaaret Ondaatje:
The Time Around Scars A.D Hope: Australia Moschus Moschiferus: A song for St.
Cecilias Day Dereth Walcott: Ruens of a Great House A sea-schantey Vincent os
Sullivan: Elesy for a schoolmate The children Wole Soyenka:Telephonic
conversation Dedication Jean Arasan ayagam: In the month of July.

35

Paper 1.2 : PROSE

UNIT I
Francis Bacon: Of Truth Of Ambition Of Revenge Of Superstition
Johnson: Life of Milton.
UNIT II
Addison & Steele: Coverley Papers (from the Spectator) Charles Lamb: New
Years Eve In Praise of Chimney Sweepers South-Sea House Dream Children: A
Reverie Carlyle:Dante and Shakespeare.
UNIT III
George Orwell: Why I Write Reflections on Gandhi The writing of History
Propaganda and Demotic Speech Will Durant :The conditions of civilization
What is beauty? Ariel.
UNIT IV
Emerson: Self-Reliance Thoreau: Civil Disobedience.
UNIT V
Ngugi Wa Thiongo: Decolonising the Mind Russell: Open Letter to
Eisenhower and Khruschev Stephen Leacock: The Financial Expert Robert Lynd:
Forgetting A.G. Gardiner: On Umbrella Morals.
Paper 1.3 : DRAMA
UNIT I
Sophocles: Oedipus Rex Ibsen: The Dolls House.
UNIT II
Marlowe: Dr. Faustus Goldsmith: She stoops to conquer.
UNIT III
Pinter: The Birthday Party T. S. Lliot: The Cocktail Party.
UNIT IV
Arthur Miller:

All my sons George Ryga: The Ecstasy of Rita Joe

UNIT V
Girish Karnad:

Tughlag Tendulkar: Silence: The Court is in Session

36

Paper 1.4 : LITERARY CRITICISM

UNIT I
Aristotle: Poetries (English Translation by S.H Butcher, Aristotles Theory of
poetry and Fine Art, Macmillan, 1932) Sir Philip Sidney: An Apology for Poetry
William Wordsworth: Preface to Lyrical Ballads.
UNIT II
Matthew Arnold: The study of poetry T.S. Eliot: Tradition and individual
Talent Edgar Allen Poe: The philosophy of composition Sri Aurobindo: The word
and the sprit.
UNIT III
C.G. Jung: Psychology and Literature Lionell Trilling: Frend and Literature
Northrop Frye: The Archetypes of Literature.
UNIT IV
Harold Bloom: The Breathing of form Roland Baithes: Criticism as Language
Jacques Derrida: Structure, sign and play in the Discourse of the Human sciences.
UNIT V
Mark Sehporer: Technique as Discovery Elaine Showalter: Towards a feminist
politics Linda Hutcheon: Eruptions of postmodernity : The postcolonial and the
Ecological.

REFERENCES:
Most of the prescribed tests are available in the following anthologics of critical essays:
1. Hodge, David. El. Literary Criticism. England : Hongman, 1972.
2. Sethuraman, V.S. El. Contemporary Criticism : Anthology. Chennai : Macmillan,
1989.

37

Paper 1.5 :

NEW MEDIA AND ADVERTISING

UNIT I
Introduction to Computers - Role of Information Technology in
Communication Why computers Characteristics of computers i/o systems
Operating system DOS, Windows.

UNIT II
Introduction to Word Processing Software MS Word Excel Access
Powerpoint Adobe Photoshop Growth of computer networks and World
Wide Web Administration Commerce and publishing through new media
Media convergence.

UNIT III
Introduction to Websites and Web pages Features of a typical website
Tools for new media Hardware and Software Glossary of terms associated
with websites.
E-mail and Internet Network protocols Mailing lists Search
engines, browses, plug-ins and forts, news groups Internet relay chart,
teleconferencing, video conferencing Accessing references on the
Internet.

UNIT IV
Conventions of writing for new media, styles, presentation, newsfeeds,
hyperlinks, VRLs, linkage to original sources of news and background
information, e-zines.

UNIT V
Public relations and advertisement through new media Working with
graphics, images, streaming audio and video, ethical issues, regulation
mechanisms, influences on social behaviour, future trends.

38

Paper 2.1 :

SHAKESPEARE

UNIT I

Twelfth Night Much of do about Noting

UNIT II

Henry IV, Part I

UNIT III

Antony and Cleopatra

UNIT IV

Hamlet
Othello

UNIT V

Tempest

Paper 2.2 : FICTION

UNIT I

Charles Dickens: A Tale of Two Cities Charlotte Bronte: Jane Eyre.

UNIT II

D.H. Lawrence: Sons and Lovers James Joyce: Ulysses.

UNIT III

Hawthrone: The Scarlet Letter Ernest Hemingway: A Farewell to Arms.

UNIT IV

Dostoesvsky: Crime and Punishment - Gunter Grass: The Tin Drum.

UNIT V

Margaret Atwood: Surfacing Patrick White: Voss.

39

Paper 2.3 : COMPARATIVE LITERATURE AND TRANSLATION

UNIT I
What is comparative literature? Different definitions National
literature Comparative literature General literature World literature French and American Schools of comparative study.

The scope and relevance of the subject in the Indian context The
methodology of study of comparative literature.
UNIT II

The study of genres; a theory of genres in world-literature identified and

compared; how genres originate and spread.
UNIT III
Influence and imitation Periodisation, age, epoch, school and
movement.

UNIT IV
The study of reception of one literature/ movement/ author/ work in
another literature, a theory of reception, epoch, period, generation,
movement, thematology.

UNIT V

The study of translation A theory of literary translation; Adaptation;

abridgement; Literal Vs. Literary rendering; Literature and other arts; Music;
Architecture; Theatre; Dance; Other disciplines like psychology, biography,
philosophy, sociology.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Ulrich Weisstein, Comparative Literature and Literary Theory.

Alridge, Comparative Literature: Matter and Method.
Stallenckht & Frenz, Comparative Literature: Method and Perspectives.
Rene Welleck, Theory of Literature.
Concept of Literature Series, Theory of Literature.

40

Paper 2.4 : INDIAN LITERATURE IN ENGLISH TRANSLATION

UNIT I

Novel: Neela Padmanabhan, Generations, tr. Ka. Naa. Subramanyam

(Mac.1997) Ashapurana Debi, Subarnalata, tr. Gopa Majumdar (Mac.1997)
UNIT II

Novel: Bhalchandra Nemade, Cocoon, tr. Sudhakar Marathe (Mac.1998)

Rajee Seth, Unarmed, tr. Raj Narasimhan (Mac.1998)
UNIT III

Drama: Bhavabhuti, Malati and Madhava (Penguin Classics)

Chandrasekhar Kamkar, Sambasiva A Farce (Seagul, Calcutta, 1992).
UNIT IV & V

Poetry: K. Sachidanandam, The Rights of the Earth from Vibhava ed.

U.R. Ananthamurthy and others (1992) Nikileswarar, The Black Flag in the
hands of Ambedkar from Down to the Earth Ed. Seelavi Kundurti Satya
Murthy (1994) Srikant Varma, The Pleasure Dome from Oxford Anthology
of Modern Indian Poetry ed. Vinay Dharwarkar and A.K. Ramanujan (OUP,
1999)

41

Paper 2.5 : ENGLISH FOR COMMUNICATION

UNIT I
Linguistic Communication Importance of communication Patterns of
communication Management of communication Barriers to communication.

UNIT II
Non-Verbal Communication Personal appearance Posture Gestures
Facial expression Eye contact Spare distancing Face to face conversation
Telephonic conversation Interviews Instruction Dictation.

UNIT III
Purpose and procedure of meetings Chairmanship Participation
Physical arrangements Seminars and Conferences Group discussion Use of
audio and video aids.

UNIT IV
Report Writing Preparation of technical proposals Business
correspondence.

UNIT V
Preparation of notices, agenda and minutes Handbooks and manuals
Research papers and articles Use of graphic aids.

42

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium :

:
M.A. (History)
:
Distance Education
:
Two years
:
Any degree from a recognised University
English & Tamil

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Total
Marks

I YEAR
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

History of India upto 1206 A.D

History of India from 1206 A.D. to 1761 A.D
History of India from 1761 A.D.to 1964 A.D
Constitutional History of India from 1773 to
1950 A.D
History of Tamil Nadu upto 1801 A.D.

100
100
100
100

History of China and Japan from 1840 A.D. to

1966 A.D.
History of U.S.A. from 1865 A.D. to 1992
A.D.
History of Europe from 1789 A.D. to 1970
A.D.
Historiograpghy and Historical Methods
History of Tamil Nadu from 1800 A.D. to
1969 A.D.

100

100

II YEAR
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

100
100
100
100
1000

Total

43

Paper 1.1 History of India upto 1206 A.D.

UNIT I

Sources for the study of ancient Indian History-Literary and

archeological sources Foreign accounts.

UNIT II

Harappan culture.

UNIT IIII

The Aryans Early-Later Vedic period

UNIT IV

The age of new religions-Buddhism, Jainsim-Principles- Causes

for their spread-Decline

UNIT V

Contact with the Persians and the Greeks-Alexanders conquest

and its result.

UNIT VI

The Age of the Mauryas-Decline-the Sungas.

UNIT VII

The Age of the Kushanas.

UNIT VIII -

The Gupta Age-Decline

UNIT IX

The Vardhanas

UNIT X

The Rajputs

UNIT XI

The Arab conquest of Sind

UNIT XII

The Gaznavides-Ghorides

Reference Books:
1. Majundar R.C.Rai Chaudary and Datta, An advanced History of India.
2. The Cambridge History of India, Vol.I
3. Bharatiya Vidya Bhawan Serieds, Vol.I to III.
4. Sastri K.A.N, Advanced History of India
5. Sathianathier R, A Political and Cultural History of India, vol-I.
6. Kosanbi D.D, An intoruduction to Indian History.
7.`Dke;jd; fp.u.& kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f. ,e;jpa tuyhW 1526 tiu
8. jq;fNtY Nfh> ,e;jpa tuyhW
9. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.,e;jpa Ml;rp mikg;G tsu;r;rp tuyhW.
10. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.`u;rupd; fhyj;jpy; tl ,e;jpah.
11. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.,e;jpar; rKjha tuyhW
12. `Dke;jd; fp.u.nkshpau; tuyhW.

44

Paper 1.2 History of India From 1206 A.D. to 1761 A.D.

UNIT I
- Sources for the study of medieval Indian History
UNIT II
- The Mameuluks Qutbuddin Aibek-Iltitimish Raziya SultanBalban
UNIT IIII
- Khaljis-Khalji revolution-Alauddin Khalji-Economic measures
Therory of kingship Imperialism
UNIT IV
- Thuglaks-Ghiyasdudin Thuglak-Mohammed bin Thuglak- Feroz
Shah Thuglak
UNIT V
- Sayyids and Lodis
UNIT VI
- Administration, Social life and culture under the Delhi Sultanate
UNIT VII
- Condition of India on the eve of Babars invasion
UNIT VIII - Babar
UNIT IX
- The Afgan interlude-Sher Shah- Administration
UNIT X
- Humayun
UNIT XI
- Akbar, the great
UNIT XII
- Jahangir
UNIT XIII - Shah Jahan
UNIT XIV - Aurangazeb-Disintegration of Mughal Empire
UNIT XV
- Administration under the Mughals-Mansabdari system-Land
revenue system-Social and cultural life.
UNIT XVI - The Marathas-The rise of Marathas-Shivaji-AdministrationPeshwas-Balaji Viswanath, Baji Rao and Baji Rao II
UNIT XVII - The Third battle of Panipat
Reference Books:
1. Eswari Prasad, A short History of Muslim rule in India
2. Srivastava A.L, History of Mughals.
3.Sharma R.S.The Mughal Rule
4. Pandey, Rise of Marathas.
5.Pande A.B, Later Medeival India
6.Luniya B.N, History of Indian Culture

7. jq;fNtY Nfh.,e;jpa tuyhW

8. c];khd; n\upg;> ,e;jpahtpd; rpwg;G tuyhW> njhFjp II
9. `Dke;jd; fp.u. & kq;fs KuNfrd; e.f.,e;jpa tuyhW 1206-1707 fp.gp.

45

Paper 1.3 History of India From 1761 A.D. to 1964 A.D

UNIT I
- The Coming of the Europeans-Anglo French rivalry
UNIT II
- The rise of English power in Bengal
UNIT IIII
- Warren Hastings
UNIT IV
- Lord Cornwallis
UNIT V
- Growth and Consolidation of the British Power-Anglo Mysore
wars-Anglo Maratha wars-Relationship with Hyderabad Nizam
UNIT VI
- Lord Wellesley
UNIT VII
- Lord Hastings
UNIT VIII - Lord Dalhousie
UNIT IX
- Indian revolt of 1857
UNIT X
- The Policy of Mastery inactivity
UNIT XI
- Growth of Modrern Education
UNIT XII
- Social and relogous reforms
UNIT XIII - National awakening-Political movementws upto 1947
UNIT XIV - Nehru Era
Note: Constitutional changes need not be stressed.
Reference Books:
1. Majumdar R.C. Ray Chaudary and Datta, Advanced History of India
2. Roberts P.E, History of British India
3. Sathianathier R, A. Political and Cultural History of India
4. Cambridge History of India, Vol-II and VI
5. Majumdar R.C, History and Culture of the Indian people.
6. Mahajan V.D, History of India, Oxford
7. Smit V.A.History of India, Oxford.
8. Vishnu Baghavan, Constitutional History of India, Vol-II
9. Seetharamayya P, History of Indian National Congress
10. Tarachand, History of Freedom Movement
11jq;fNtY Nfh. ,e;jpa tuyhW II
1. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.,e;jpa tuyhW 1757 Kjy; ,d;Wtiu
2. ehuhazd; e.F.,e;jpa tuyhW 1905 Kjy; ,d;Wtiu> jkpo;ehl;Lg;
ghlE}y; epWtdk;

46

Paper 1.4 Constitutional History of India (1773 to 950 A.D)

UNIT I
- Regulating Act-Circumstances leading to the passing of the ActMerits and demeris
UNIT II
- Foxs India Bill-Pitts India Act of 1784
UNIT IIII
- Charter Acts of 1813 and Parliamentary Legislation between
1813 and 1833
UNIT IV
- The Charter Act of 1833 Law making and Law CommissionThe Charter Act of 1853
UNIT V
- The Queens Proclamation and the Government of India Act of
1858
UNIT VI
- The Act of 1861 and 1892-Nature of the Law making bodies
UNIT VII
- The Act of 1909
UNIT VIII - Political condition of India between 1909-1919
UNIT IX
- The World War I and its impact of Constitutional
developmentws -1917 August Declaration
UNIT X
- The Act of 1919-Provincial Government and Dyarchy-Working
of Dyarchy at Chennai
UNIT XI
- Simon Commission-The Nehru Committee Report-Reaction of
the Congress
UNIT XII
- Round Table Conference
UNIT XIII - The Act of 1935 Central and Provincial Governments working
of Provincial autonomy
UNIT XIV - Impact opf World War II on Indian Politics
UNIT XV
- Cripps Mission-Cabinet Mission-Mountbatten Plan-Simla
Conference and Independence
UNIT XVI - Independence Act of 1947 Discussion
UNIT XVII - Constituent Assembly-Constitution of Free India
Reference Books:
1. Aggarwal R.C, Constitutional History of India and National Movement
2. Gupta D C, Indian National Movement and Constitutional Developments
3. Keith A B, Constitutional History of India
4. Vishnoo Bhagwan, Constitutional History of India Vol.II

47

Paper 1.5 Histoty of Tamil Nadu Upto 1801 A.D.

UNIT I
UNIT II
UNIT IIII
UNIT IV
UNIT V
UNIT VI
UNIT VII
UNIT VIII
UNIT IX
UNIT X
UNIT XI
UNIT XII
UNIT XIII
UNIT XIV
UNIT XV
UNIT XVI
UNIT XVII
UNIT XVIII
UNIT XIX
UNIT XX

- Sources for the History of Tamil Nadu

- Sangam age-Socio-political History-Administration-Trade and
commerce-culture
- Kalabhras
- Pallavas-Mahendra Varman-Narasimha Varman and other Pallava rulers.
- Art and Architecture under Pallavas
- Pallava Administration
- Bhakthi Movement
- First Pandian Empire
- Later Cholas-Decline
- Chola administration-Local Self-Government
- Cultural contribution of Cholas
- Second Pandian Empire
- Muslim invasion in Tamil country
- Tamil Nadu under Vijaya Nagar Rule
- Tanjore Nayaks
- Nayaks of Madurai-Administration and Social life-Poligar system
- Sethupathis of Ramnad and Thondamans of Pudukkottai
- Maratha Rule in Tmil Nadu
- Nawabs of Arcot-Carnatic Wars
- South Indian rebellion-Pulithevan-Kattabomman-Maruthu BrothersOomaidurai

Reference Books:
1. Subraminain N, Sangam Polity.
2. Mangala Murugesan N K, Sangam Age.
3. Kanakasabai, Tamils 1800 years ago
4. Pillai K K, Social History of Tamils
5. Sastri K A N, Cholas.
6. Rajayyan K, History of Tamil Nadu
7. Rajayyan K, South Indian rebellion
8. ,uhkrhkp m> jkpo;ehl;L tuyhW
9 ,uhkrhkp m> jkpo;g; NguuRfspd; rupTk; tPo;r;rpAk;
10. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f. jkpo;ehl;L tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;> njhFjp-I
11. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.jkpo;ehl;L tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;> njhFjp-II
12. jkpof muR- jkpo; tsu;r;rpj;Jiw> jkpo;ehl;L tuyhW
13. Rthkpehjd; M. jkpo;ehl;L tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;

48

Paper 2.1 History of China and Japan (From 1840 to 1966 A.D.)
UNIT I
- China at the beginning of the 19th Century
UNIT II
- The Opium War
UNIT IIII
- The Taiping Rebellion 1851-64
UNIT IV
- Partititon of China 1861-1894
UNIT V
- Reform Movements in China and the Boxer Rebellion
UNIT VI
- Japan-Tokugawa Shogunate
UNIT VII
- Opening of Japan to the West
UNIT VIII
- Meiji Era
UNIT IX
- First Sino-Japanese War 1894-95
UNIT X
- Rise of Imperialism in Japan
UNIT XI
- China-Reform and Revolution 1901-1911
UNIT XII
- Yuan-Shi-Kai and era of War-lords
UNIT XIII
- China-Japan and ther First World War
UNIT XIV
- Sun Yat Sen
UNIT XV
- Rise of Militarism in Japan 1905-1945
UNIT XVI
- Manchurian Crisis
UNIT XVII
- Allied Occupation of Japan 1945-1952
UNIT XVIII - Post-War Japan 1953-1966
UNIT XIX
- Chiang Kai Shek and Kuomintang Nationalism 1926-1946
UNIT XX
- Rise of Communism and Civil War in China
UNIT XXI
China under Mao
UNIT XXII
China in World Affairs
UNIT XXIII
Korea and Taiwan in the 20th Century
Reference Books:
1. Latourette-A History of Japan
2. Lattimore-Making of Modern China
3. Fitzgerald-Birth of Communist China
4. Hinton-Communist China in World Politics
5. Jones F C Japans New order in West Asia: Its rise and fall 1937 to 1945
6. Micheal Schaller-The United States and China in the 20th Centruy
7. jpahfuh[d; J- rPd [g;ghdpa tuyhW 1840 Kjy;
8. kq;fs KUNfrd; eh.f. fpof;fpe;jpa tuyhW.

49

Paper 2.2 History of U.S.A. (From 1865 to 1922 A.D.)

Unit I
A brief introduction of American History may be given upto 1865 with
special emphasis on American constitution, expansion, Union-State relations,
slavery and the conditions of the States on the eve of the reconstruction.
UNIT II
UNIT IIII
UNIT IV
UNIT V
UNIT VI
UNIT VII
UNIT VIII
UNIT IX
UNIT X
UNIT XI
UNIT XII

Reunion and Reconsturuction The problem defiend

The Age of Capitalism in USA
The later 19th Century American Life and its Transformation
The Progressivism in Action
The First World War-America, a spectator and the participant
Aftermath of First World War
The New Deal
American Society between two world wars
Second World War and U.S.A
Cold War: Quest for peace
The Turbulant Sixties

Reference Books:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Oscar Handhin
Foster Rhea Dulles
Harold Whitman
Bradley
Arthur S.Link
Blu J M
Kenneth Stamp
Faulkner H U
George M.Mowry
Hofstadter R
Parkes H B
George E Mowry
Harvey Webber(ed.)
Ronald Webber(ed.)
jpahfuh[d;
ek;gp MNus;
kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f.

America-A History
The United States since 1865
The United States from 1865
Woodrow Wilson and the Progressive Era
The Republican and Roosevelt
The Era of Reconstruction
Politics, Reform and Expansion
Era of Theodore Rooselvelt
The Progressive Movement
Recent America
The Urban Nation
The Negro since emancipation
America in Change:Reflection on the 60s & 70s.
mnkupf;f Kf;fpa ehLfspd; tuyhW
mnkupf;f Kf;fpa ehLfspd; tuyhW
mnkupf;f tuyhW

Paper 2.2 History of Europe. (From 1789 to 1970)

50

UNIT I
UNIT II
UNIT IIII
UNIT IV
UNIT V
UNIT VI
UNIT VII
UNIT VIII
UNIT IX
UNIT X
UNIT XI
UNIT XII
UNIT XIII
UNIT XIV
UNIT XV
UNIT XVI
UNIT XVII
UNIT XVIII
UNIT XIX
UNIT XX

- Condition of Europe at the time of French Revolution

- Causes for the French Revolution-Work of the National
Assembly-The Reign of Terror-The Directory-Coalitions
against France
- Napoleon Bonaparte
- The Congress of Vienna-Metternich-Holy Alliance and the
Concert of Europe
- Louis XVII and Charles X of Frnace
- 1830 Revolution and its effects-Louis Philippe-1848
Revolution and its effects
- Napoleon III, Domestic and Foreign policies
- Austria-Hungary 1848-1914
- Italian unification
- German unification- Otto Von Bismarck
- German Empire 1890-1914
- The Third Frech Republic(1871-1914)
- Foreign Policy of Italy 1870-1914
- Russia 1796-1914-Russian Revolution 1979
- Socialism-Sanit Simon-Robert Owen-Charles Fourier-Joseph
Prodhon-Louis Blanc-Michail Bakunin-Karl Marx, EngelsKropotkin
- The Eastern Question 1821-1836-The Eastern Question 18361908-The Eastern Question 1908-1914-The Triple AllianceThe Triple Entente
- The First World War-Causes-Courses and results
- Wurope between two world wars-League of Nations-Rice of
Dictatorships-Second World War and UNO
- Reconstruction of Europe-Cold War-NATO-Warsaw Pact
- Development of Science and Technology-Art and Literature

51

Reference Books:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Benns
Fisher G.A.
Fisher H.A.L.
Kettelberg
Hsyrd and Gole
Hayes, C.I.H.
Lipson, B
South Gate

South Gate

10
11
12
13
14
15

Haley, H
Mahajan, V D
Jaman TL
jpyftjp n[fjPrd;
,uh[Nfhghyd;
thRNjtuht;>
j.eh.

Europe Since 1780

History of Modern Europe
A History of Europe
A History of Modern Time
History of Europe since 1500
Modern Europe upto 1870
Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries
A Textbook of Modern European History from 17891979, Vol.II
A Textbook of Modern European History from 1870
to the present day
World Crisis, 1914-1919
History of Modern Europe
The European World 1790-1945
[Nuhg;gpa tuyhW
[Nuhg;gpa tuyhW
[Nuhg;gpa tuyhW

52

Paper 2.4-Historiography and Historical Methods

Unit-I Concepts of History
Meaning of History-Definitions-Scopes-Art or science-Varieties of
history-History and allied subjects-Uses of history-Lessons of history-Abuses of
history
Unit-II Causation and Change
Nature of Causation-Role of individuals-Does history repeats itsef?Concepts of Progress
Unit-III History of Historical Writing
Ancient Greece: Herodotus, Thucydides, Xenophon, Polybius Characters
of Greek Historiography.
Ancient Rome: Livy, Tacitus, Character of Roman Historiography
Christian Church: Eusebius, St. Augustine-Contribution made by the
church.
Unit IV: Modern Europe
Renaissance-Reformation-Cartesianism, AnticartesianinsmEnlightenment-Romantic idealism-Utilitatianism-Postivism and Scientific
Sopcialism.
Unit V
Objectivity in Historical Writing-Historical methods-Heuristics, criticism,
synthesis and exposition-Documentation.
Reference Books:
1
Carr, EH
What is History
2
Collingwood, RG
Idea of History
3
Groce, B
Theory and History of Historiography
4
Manickam, S
Theroy of History and Methods of Research
5
Rajayyan, K
History in Theroy and Methods, Historiography
6
Subramanian N
Historiography
Tuyhw;Wf; Nfhl;ghLk; KiwapaYk;
7
Rajayyan, K
8
Rouse, A L
The Use of History
9
Sheik Ali, H
History: Its Theroy and Method

53

Paper 2.5 History of Tamil Nadu (from 1800 A.D. to 1969 A.D)
UNIT I
- Vellore Mutiny
UNIT II
UNIT IIII
UNIT IV
UNIT V
UNIT VI
UNIT VII
UNIT VIII
UNIT IX
UNIT X
UNIT XI
UNIT XII
UNIT XIII
UNIT XIV
UNIT XV
UNIT XVI
UNIT XVII

UNIT XVIII
UNIT XIX
UNIT XX

- The Land Revenue administration famine policy and relief

measures Rules
- Governors of Madras Presidency upto 1920
- Education under the company
- Justice Party Ministry from 1920 to 1926
- Dr.P.Subbarayan Minsitry
- Justice Party Ministry upto 1937
- Rajaji as Premier-World War and Madras Presidency
- T.Prakasms Ministry
- Omandur P.Ramasamy Reddiars Ministry
- P.S.Kumarasamy Rajas Ministry
- Rajajis Second Ministry
- K.Kamarajs Ministry
- M.Bhakthavathchalams Minsitry
- C.N.Annadurais Ministry
- Growth of Language and Literature
- Social reform movements in the 19th and 20th centuriesRamalinga Swamingal-Vaikundasamy and Periyar
E.V.Ramasamy
- Freedom Movement in Tamil Nadu
- The role of Christian Missionaries in Tamil Nadu
- Language problem in Tamil Nadu

UNIT XXI

The economic development of Tamil Nadu in the 20th Century

UNIT XXII

Cultutal development in Tamil Nadu in the 19th and 20th Century

Folk Arts

UNIT XXIII

Five year plans and Tamil Nadu

54

UNIT XXIV

Frontier Agitations in Tamil Nadu

UNIT XXV

Women Development in Tamil Nadu

Reference Books:
1. Rajaram, P, Justice Party in Tamil Nadu
2. Managala Murugesan N K, Self Respect Movement in Tamil Nadu
3. ,uhkrhkp m.,uj;jj;jpy; [k;gJ ehl;fs;
4. rhkp rpjk;gudhu;> jkpou; jiytu;
5. Baliga B S, Studies in Madras Adminsitration (2 Vols.), Madras 1949.
6. rptQhdk; k.ngh.tpLjiyg; Nghupy; jkpofk;
7. nghd;D Mu;> ma;ah top
8. Jeyaraj K V, Histiory of Salt Monopoly in Madras Presidency 1805-1878
9. Swaminathan, A, Social and Cultural History of Tamil Nadu
10. ,uhkrhkp m> jkpo;ehl;L tuyhW
11. ,uhkrhkp m> jkpou;fspd; vOr;rpAjl tPo;r;rpAk;.
12. uh[a;ad; Nf> jkpof tuyhW
13. kq;fs KUNfrd; e.f. jkpo;ehl;L tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;
14. gps;is Nf.Nf. jkpof tuyhW kf;fSk; gz;ghLk;
15. nry;yk; tp.b.jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;.

55

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION
(Accredited with A Grade by NAAC)

KARAIKUDI
APPENDIX-1
M.A. (EDUCATION) - REGULATIONS
1. NAME OF THE PROGRAMME

: M.A. Education

2. DURATION

:The duration of the M.A. Education

programme is Two academic years under
Annual Pattern through Distance Education.

3 ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION

: A Bachelors Degree in any discipline

4. MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

: English

5. PATTERN OF THE COURSE

: Non-Semester

6. STRUCTURE OF THE COURSE:

Code No.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

TITLE OF THE COURSE

FIRST YEAR
Philosophical & Sociological bases of
Education
Essentials of Educational Psychology
Curriculum Design Process
Methods of Educational Inquiry
Perspectives of Educational Technology
SECOND YEAR
Contemporary Issues in Education
Principles of Educational Management
Guidance and Counselling
Quality Issues in Education
Project Work
Total Marks

56

Marks
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1000

7.

8.
9.

10.

Project Work :
After the Completion of First Year, students are eligible to commence the
Project work under the supervision of the qualified guide. The Candidates are
permitted to submit the Project work on completing 18 months of the course but
not later than five years after the commence of the course
The Guide / Supervisor of the Project work shall be an approved guide of
Alagappa University, Karaikudi or a person with an M.Phil Degree working
with three years teaching experience in any Government or Government Aided
College of Education or Department of Education or DIET
or a person
working in Government or Government Aided College of Education or
Department of Education or DIET with Ph.D (Education) qualification.
The students shall submit the consent letter from the guide in the prescribed
format before the commencement of the project work.
The Project Report shall not exceed 150 Pages and be not less than 50 Pages
The Project Report should be certified by the Approved Guide with Self
Declaration of the Candidate for assuring the Quality and Originality of the
work.
There is an internal Viva-Voce examination for the Project Report submitted.
The Split up of marks for the project will be :
1. Innovativeness
25 Marks
2. Methodology and Analysis
25 Marks
3. Reporting and Presentation
25 Marks
4. Viva Voce examination
25 Marks
TOTAL :
100 Marks
PERSONAL CONTACT PROGRAM
:
There will be contact classes for a minimum of 50 hours in each year
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:
Each paper including project work carries 100 marks.
The performance of the students in the course shall be assessed for a maximum
of 1000 marks.
PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER:
Part I
: Five out of Eight Questions
5 X 8 = 40 marks
Part II
: Four out of Seven Questions 4 X 15 = 60 marks
Total
: 100 Marks

57

11.
PASSING MINIMUM
A candidate appearing for the whole examination shall be declared to have passed the
examination if he/she obtains not less than 50% of the total marks in each paper
including project work. All other candidates shall be deemed to have failed in the
examination.
12. CLASSIFICATION OF CANDIDATES
1. Candidates securing 60% and more marks in the aggregate in the whole
examination shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class.
2. All other successful candidates shall be declared to have passed in second class.
13. COMPLETION OF THE COURSE
Those who are not able to complete the course within two years are permitted a period
of additional five years to complete the course, failing which their registration will
stand automatically cancelled and they have to register afresh, if they want to continue
the course, subject to the availability of the programme during that period.
14. OTHER REGULATIONS
Besides the above, the common regulations of the DDE of Alagappa University shall
also be applicable to this programme.

*****

58

1.1 PHILOSOPHICAL AND SOCIOLOGICAL BASES OF

EDUCATION
UNIT I :

Education Meaning, scope and objectives-philosophy-meaning and

scope-philosophy of education-meaning and scope-relationship between education and

philosophy-major systems of philosophy of education-idealism, naturalism,
pragmatism, and democracy and their views on education.
UNIT II :

Major schools of Indian philosophy-Hinduism, Buddhism and Jainism-

Educational doctrines of great thinkers of India-Swami Vivekananda, Rabindranath

Tagore, Mahathma Gandhi and Sri Aurobindo-relevance of Indian Values to modern
education and administration of education.
UNIT III :

Great thinkers of the West-Plato, Rousseau, Frobel, Montessori, John

Dewey-Relevance of western values to modern education and administration of

education
UNIT IV :

Sociology of Education-Meaning and scope-relationship between

education and sociology-social institutions such as family, community, educational

institution, state and property-education and culture-moral and religious educationsocialization of the learner-meaning of socialization-learning social expectations and
social manners-factors promoting socialization.
UNIT V : Education for new social order and socialistic pattern of society-education as
an instrument of social change-education as related to social equity and equality of
educational opportunities-constraints on social change in India such as caste, class,
language, religion and regionalism-education for downtrodden such as schedule caste,
tribal and rural mass-education of women-problems and programmes promoting
womens empowerment.
Education and social mobility of the individual and the community-social
stratification and mobility-reservation policies of the government to minimize social

59

inequality education for national integration and international understandingeducation in tackling terrorism and maintaining global peace
Reference:
1. Sharma, D.L, Education in the Emerging Indian Society, Surjeet Publications,
Delhi, 2004.
2. Dash B.N. Teacher and Education in the Emerging Indian Society, Neelkamal
Publications, Hyderabad, 2000.
3. Lakshmi, S. Challenges in Education, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1990.
4. J.C.Aggarwal, Basic Ideas in Education, Shipra Publications, Delhi, 2005.

60

1.2 Essentials of Educational Psychology

Unit - I Educational Psychology- Meaning and Scope
Psychology: Modern definitions - classifications.
Educational Psychology: Meaning - Nature - Aims - Scope - Relation between
Psychology and Education- Latest trends in educational psychology
Unit- II Human Development
Growth and Development:
Concept - stages - various aspects principles Role of Heredity and Environment in development-Individual
differences - educational Implications.
Unit- III Motivation
Motivation: Definition - functions of motivation - classification of motives concept of motivation - Maslow theory of need hierarchy - characteristics - Mc
Clellands Achievement motivation Strategy for enhancing achievement motivation
Unit- IV Intelligence and Personality
Intelligence: Theories and Measurement:
Meaning- Theories : Spearmans theory - structure of intelligence - Multifactor
theory - structure of intellect by Guilford Measuring social intelligence and
emotional intelligence-Distributions of intelligence- - Types of intelligence Tests use and limitations of intelligence Test
Personality and Assessments : Meaning-Theories - Type theory - Trait theory factors affecting personality - Assessment of personality

61

Unit: V The Cognitive Process

Perception: Role of Sense organs- Sensation-Attention- Information ProcessingFormation of concepts- Piaget Theory-Remembering and forgetting-MemoryStrategies to enhance memory
Unit- VI Metacognitive Perspectives
Meaning - determinants of metacognition - Metacognition in learning - The
automation of cognitive and metacognitive processes - principles of metacognitive
Instructions and Regulation - Metacognition and attention
Unit- VI Learning
Meaning, Types- Theories of Learning- Thorndike, Pavlov- Skinner-Kohler-GagneTransfer of Learning
References:
Agarwal, J.C. (2005). Essentials of Educational Psychology. Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Dandapani, S.(2005). Advanced Educational Psychology. Anmol publications Pvt.,
Ltd., New Delhi.
Kundu, CL and Tutoo, DN (1985). Educational Psychology, Discovery
Publishers Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi.
Mohan (1993). Educational Psychology, wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
Mangal, S.K.(2004). Advanced Educational Psychology. Prentice Hall of
India Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi.
Nagarajan, K., Selvakumar, S.D., Devaraj and Srinivasan (2003). Educational
Psychology, Ram Pablishers, Chennai.
Ponda, B.N. (2005). Advanced Educational Psychology. Discovery
Publishing House, New Delhi.
Spirnthall, C., Richard and Sprinthall A. Norman (1990). Educational
Psychology, A Developmental Approach Mc Grow Hill Publishing Company, New
York.
Saravanakumar (2008). Metacognitive perspectives New Century Book. House Pvt.,
Ltd., Chennai.
Saravanakumar (2008). Attention: An overview, Arivu Pathippagam, Chennai.
Sivakumar P. and Krishnaraj R (2004) Information Processing models of Teaching
Theory and Research. Neelkamal Publication, Hyderabad.
62

1.3 CURRICULUM DESIGN PROCESS

UNIT 1 :
Curriculum meaning - philosophical, sociological, and psychological bases of
curriculum - principles of curriculum designing - curriculum as an instrument of
national development
UNIT 2 :
Factors influencing curriculum construction such as national political,
economic, cultural, social and intellectual aspects systems approach to curriculum
construction curriculum as an output in the system
UNIT 3 :
Curriculum planning development of programmes, syllabi and textbooks,
characteristics of a good curriculum and a good textbook overcoming present
drawbacks in curriculum construction
UNIT 4 :
Curriculum implementation curriculum as an input in the system curriculum
transaction strategies at higher education level traditional and non-traditional
strategies group and individual methods of instruction lecture, demonstrations,
seminars, symposia, workshops, brainstorming, case analysis and team teaching
components effective curriculum transaction.

63

UNIT 5 :
Resources for curriculum transaction instructional materials, library and
electronic devices, audio-visual devices, the chalkboard, overhead projector, liquid
crystal display projector, laboratory and field experience using internet and computers
for effective curriculum transaction.
UNIT 6 :
Curriculum evaluation meaning of evaluation objectives and methods of
evaluation-measurement and evaluation in education-formative and summative
evaluation tools of evaluation such as achievement test-psychological scales such as
attitude scales, interest inventories, personality test-curriculum revision-need and
principles to be adopted curriculum designing and redesigning as continuous process.
References:
1. Jenkins David and Shipman D. Martin, Curriculum-Introduction, Open Books
Publication Ltd. 1976.
2. Joyce S. Choate, Lamoine J. Miller et al., Assessing and Programming Basic
Curriculum Skills, Allyn and Bacon Inc. 1986.
3. Kaba, R.M. and Rishi Ram Singh, Curriculum Construction and youth
Development, sterling publishers, New Delhi, 1987.
4. Mc Neil, J.D. Curriculum: A comprehensive Evaluation, Little Brown and Co.
1985.
5. NCTE, National Curriculum for Primary and Secondary Education. A
framework, New Delhi, 1986.
6. Srivtsava, A.P. Teaching and Learning in 21st century, Indian Books Centre
New Delhi, 1987.

64

1.4: METHODS OF EDUCATIONAL INQUIRY

UNIT 1: Concept of Research: Definition Scientific basis of research Research
paradigms Positivist Interpretivisst Critical need for research Characteristics
Types of research Thrust areas Emerging trends Problems encountered in research
Research founding agencies Research Ethics.
UNIT 2: Problem Selection and Problem Statement : Choosing a problem Sources
Criteria for selection Significance Justifying problem selection Problem and
delimitation Need for literature review Hypothesis: Meaning Importance _
Sources Types: Hypothesis formulation type-I and type-II Errors Sampling:
Meaning Importance Characteristics Techniques Choosing a sample size.
UNIT 3: Methods of Investigation: Positivist Empirical Rational (Quantitative)
Enquiry Naturalistic qualitative enquiry Historical survey Experimental Case
study Content analysis Triangulation: Need for integrated methodological approach.
UNIT 4: Tools of Research: Questionnaires Observation Interviews Construction
of tools: Objectivity Reliability Validity Norms Standardization process.
UNIT 5:
Part-I: Analysis of Research Data: Importance of statistics Properties of normal
probability curve Statistical assumptions F and t tests Introduction to analysis
of covariance Multivariate analysis Multiple regression Canonical correlation
Path analysis Factor analysis discriminate function analysis Profile analysis.
Part-II: Non-parametric Techniques: Need

for non-parametric techniques

Binomial test Chisquare Goodness of fit-test of independence Mcnemor change

test Fisher exact test Kolmogrov-Smirnov sample test Change point test Sign
test Kruskal Wallis test Wilcoxon signed rank test Median test Mann Whitney
U test Robust rank order test Siegel Turkey test for scale differences.

65

UNIT 6: Writing of Research Report:

Format of Research Report: Effective

synthesis of conceptual, methodological, analytical and communicative perspectives

Operationalisation of research findings and their contribution to knowledge Writing a
research report: Style, correct usage, typography Bibliography and footnote form
Headings Paginations Tables, Figures and graphs Evaluating a research report.
UNIT 7: Computer Application to Research:

Computer application in different

stages of research: Problem selection Literature review Multivariate statistical

analysis through SPSS Package Research report preparation Role of internet in
educational research.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas R Black, Understanding Social Scientific Research, Sage, New Delhi,
2001.
2. Stephanie Taylor, Ethnographic Research, Sage, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Nigel Gilbert, Researching Social Life, Sae, ;New Delhi, 2001.
4. Edward F Fern, Advanced Focus, Group Research, Sage, New Delhi, 2001.
5. Jaber F Gubriusm & James A Holstein, Handbook of Interview Research, Sage,
New Delhi, 2001.
6. Venkataiah S, Education in Information Age, Daya, New Delhi, 2001.
7. Venkataiah S, Education Via Internet, Daya, new Delhi, 2001.
8. Agarwal, Rashmi, Educational Technology and conceptual Understanding,
Daya, New Delhi, 2000.

66

1.5: PERSPECTIVES OF EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY

UNIT I:
Educational Technology: Meaning and scope, Technology in Education
Technology in Education Phases Foundations of Educational Technology:
Psychology, Sociology, Human Engineering, communications and management
system approach as applied to Educational Technology.
UNIT II:
Communication: Definition, meaning and components of communication
Types of Communication: Interpersonal, Intrapersonal, Small Group, Large Group and
Mass Communication Barriers to Communication Overcoming Barriers Methods
and media of Communication principles of effective class room communication
verbal and Non-verbal communication.
UNIT III:
Hardware and Software in Educational Technology, High and low technology
CCTV-video tape recorders-radio, projectors- epidiascope motion pictures films
T.V. Micro computers types characteristics, advantages and disadvantages elearning Internet web based learning.
UNIT IV:
Distance Education: concept Objectives of Distance Education strategies
and counseling methods different contemporary system viz correspondence, open and
distance education: student support services. Distance learning: Resources for
Distance Learning: print, Self Instructional Modules (SIM), Radio, Televison
Educaitonal satellite SITE.
UNIT V:
Information and Communication Technology Meaning Definition Stages
of Development ICT Paradigms and practices Utilization of Various E-Resoruces in
Education- E-content- E-Book-E Journal-Advantages and Limitations MultimediaApplications of Multimedia-Interactive Multimedia Advantages of learning through
Interactive Multimedia.
REFERENCES:
1. Elecusing, K.H. (1975) : Towards a critical appraisal of Educational Technology:
Theory and practice, Strasbourg, steering group of Educational Technology.
2. Traavers, R.M. (1973) Educational Technology and related Research viewed as a
political foree, Chicago: Rand Mcnally.
3. Freed, P and Hency, E., (1984): A hand book of Educational Technology London
Kogan page.
4. Encyclopaedia of Educational Technology.
5. Mukhopadhyay, Mm. (ed) (1988): Year Book of Educational Technology, New
Delhi, Sterlling.

67

6. Mukhopadhyay, M (ed) (1990): Educational Technology challenging issues, new

Delhi, Sterling.
7. Mukhopadhyay, M (ed) (1990) : Educational Technology challenging issues, New
Delhi, Sterling.
8. Monhanty, J (1984) Educational Broadcasting: Radio and T.V. in Education, Delhi,
Sterling.
9. Abnove, R.F. (1976): Educational Television: A policy critique and guide for
developing countries, New York, Praeger.
10. Academy for Educational Development (1971): Hand book of Educational
Technology, Washington Dc.
11. OECD, Educational Technology: The Design and implementation of learning
systems, paris, OECDICERI.
12. Rowntree, D, (19820: Educational Technology in Curriculum Development
London, Harper & Row.
13. Kulkarni S.S. (1986): Introduction to Educatioinal Technology, New Delhi: Oxford
& IBH
14. Sivakumar P and Arulsamy(2009) Application of ICT in Education, Neelkamal
Publication, Hyderabad.

68

2.1 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN EDUCATION

UNIT 1
Multiplicity of Courses:

Tradition and off-shoot specialization courses

Distance and e-learning courses, full-time, part-time and own-time courses,

Interdisciplinary, hybrid and interface courses: Issues and significance.
UNIT 2
Growth Dimensions: Growth in institutions at all levels Growth in student
strength Heterogeneity of student population Quantity vs Quality issues.
UNIT 3
Autonomy and Accountability: Issues relating to autonomy, accountability and
accreditation of individual, departmental and institutional levels Impact on stakeholders and the societal system Autonomy as an instrument of transformational
leadership Leadership in education management - Change Management: Issues
Innovators Adopters Legends.
UNIT 4
Resources and Facilities:

Govt. Funding: Size, trend and need for higher

support Private capital in educational investment Community resources: Financial,

intellectual, infrastructural and motivational resources: Harnessing and commitment
thereof.
UNIT 5
Quality Management: Need for excellence in standard of education Matching
global standards: Challenges and strategies Top-down and bottom-up approaches
SWOT analysis of every constituent ISO standards.

69

UNIT 6
Relations Management: Internal and external relations Campus tranquility
management Stakeholders participation in management Extracurricular activities
for institution and social bonding extension services and outreach programmes for
societal development initiatives.
Systems Orientation: Education as an integral part of every individual, family
and society Open Vs closed systems approach Concepts of management, digital
management, virtual management System issues:

Bench marking, MOUs,

Franchising, Downsizing, Emotional intelligence and Tecno-ethics.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hanna DE and Associates, Higher Education in the era of Digital Competition
Choices and challenges, Modison, WI, Atwood Publishing, 2000.
2. Catherine M and David M, Educational Issues in the Learning Age, London.
3. Ann FL and Associates, Leading Academic Change:

Essential Roles for

Departmental Chairs, San Fransisco, Jossey-Bass Publishers, 2000.

70

2.2 PRINCIPLES OF EDUCATION MANAGEMENT

UNIT-I
Education Management Meaning Need Importance Characteristics
Scope Objectives Art or Science or Profession Functions Management
Operative Education administration Vs Education management Theory of education
management Principles of education administration.
UNIT -II
Education Planning Meaning Rationale Types of education plans
Approaches to education planning Education planning process Steps in education
planning process MBO in education Decision-making Types Process.
UNIT- III
Organisation Meaning Structures Organisation Chart Organisation for
education administration: Central and State Government bodies Delegation Vs
Decentralisation Organisational competence Strategic alliances.
UNIT- IV
Direction Meaning and significance Principles of effective direction
Supervision Education Leadership Meaning Scope Importance Styles
Qualities of successful educational leader.
Motivation Meaning Types Motivational theories Their impact on
educational management Motivating the employees of educational institutions.
UNIT-V
Education Communications Types Barriers Methods to overcome barriers
Principles of effective communication Coordination Importance of coordination
in education institutions Techniques of coordination.
UNIT -VI
Control Meaning Need Control process Techniques Evaluation
Quality assurance Total Quality Management (TQM) ISO Certification for
education institutions Academic audit.
Reference Books:
1. Koontz and ODonnel, Essentials of Management
2. Griffin, Management
3. John I Nwankwo, Educational Administration-Theory and Practice

71

2.3 GUIDANCE AND COUNSELLING

UNIT 1
Guidance: Concept Scope Importance Principles of Guidance - Types
Fields: Education Career Vocational Professional- Profile of a Competant guide.
UNIT 2
Counselling: Definition Purpose Elements Characteristics Forms
Counselling as applied to education.
UNIT 3
Foundations of Guidance and Counselling: Philosophical: Dignity of the human
being Sociological: Influence of social system Psychological: Concept of self
directed behaviour Learning principles.
UNIT 4
The Counsellor Personal growth and effectiveness Concerns of self, attitude,
values, beliefs, relationships, self-esteem and openness to other Accepting personal
responsibility Realistic levels of aspiration Self-actualisation Portrait of a helper
and a trainee.
UNIT 5
Approaches to counselling Personal models of counselling for teaching Types of counselling: Client centred Behavioural Cognitive Solution oriented.
UNIT 6
The Egan Model of Counselling: Stages: Problem exploration and clarification
Integrative understanding dynamic self understanding Facilitating action,
developing a new perspective.
Reference Books:
1. Dr. Paul Hauck, Depression.
2. Eugene Kennedy, On Becoming A Counsellor, 1977.
3. Eugene Kennedy, Crisis Counselling, 1981.
4. Gerard Egan, The Skilled Helper, 1982.
5. Stephen Murugatroyal, Counselling and Helping.

72

2.4 QUALITY ISSUES IN EDUCATION

UNIT 1
Quality in Higher Education: Quality related terminologies: Quality Quality
control Quality assessment Quality assurance Need for quality in higher education
Factors influencing quality Accountability: Impact of accountability and
accreditation on stake-holders and society.
UNIT 2
Performance Indicators and Benchmarking in Higher Education: Performance
Indicators: Concept Types Uses Performance Indicators of NAAC
Benchmarking: Meaning Types Benefits Methodologies and procedures.

UNIT 3
Quality Assessment and Accreditation:

Meaning Types Accreditation

procedure Accreditation by NAAC: Existing practices New methodologies and

initiatives of NAAC accreditation Re-accreditation process National Board of
Accreditation (NBA): Preamble Need Advantages Process of Accreditation
Criteria and weightages.

UNIT 4
Total Quality Management in Education: Definition Elements Management
plans Approaches to TQM TQM Process Academic Audit: Objectives
Advantages Limitations Accreditation and Academic Audit.
UNIT 5
Quality in Global Perspective: Global standards Strategies for matching
global standards International practices of accreditation ISO 9000 Certification for
73

Educational Institutions: Methodology for Implementation of ISO 9000 Benefits

Limitations Accreditation Vs ISO 9000 Certification.
UNIT 6
New Quality Perspectives in Higher Education: Capacity Building Model
Modification of Accreditation System Industry Academia Partnership for quality
education and research.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Armond V. Feigerbaum, Total Quality Control, McGraw Hill.
2. Ron Collard, Total Quality, Jaico, Delhi.
3. John Bark, Essence of TQM, Prentice Hall, Delhi.
4. Willborn & Cheng, Global Management of Quality Assurance Systems, McGraw
Hill.
5. Townsend & Gebhardt, Commit to Quality, John Wiley & Sons.

74

1.

NAME OF THE PROGRAMME :

M.A. Sociology

2.

DURATION

The duration of the M.A Sociology

programme is two academic years
under Annual Pattern through
Distance Education.

3.

ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION :

A Bachelors Degree in any

discipline

4.

MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

English

5.

PATTERN OF THE PROGRAMME

6.

STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME :

Code
No.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

TITLE OF THE COURSES

FIRST YEAR
Principles of Sociology
Indian Social Institutions
Sociological Theories and Perspectives
Research Methods
Rural Urban Sociology
SECOND YEAR
Sociology of Health
Human Resource Management
Sociology of Mass Communication
Social Welfare Administration and Legislation
Sociology of Modernization and Development
Total Marks

75

Non-Semester

Marks
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1000

PAPER 1.1
UNIT 1

PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY

BASIC CONCEPTS
Sociology, Sociology as Science, Forms of Social Life: Society,
Community, Institution and Association, Culture and Civilization.

UNIT II

INDIVIDUAL AND SOCIETY

Personality, Heredity and Environment: Physical, Biological and Social;
Socialization: Stages, Agencies, Types and Importance of Socialization.
C.H. Cooleys Looking Glass Self Theory.

UNIT III

SOCIAL PROCESSES
Associative Processes:

Co-

Operation,

Accommodation

and

Assimilation, Disassociative Processes: Competition and Conflict.

UNIT IV

SOCIAL CONTROL
Meaning - Kinds of Social Control. Means of Social Control: Formal
and Informal: Folkways, Mores, Norms and Laws.

UNIT V

SOCIAL CHANGE
Forms of Social Change, Factors of Social Change: Technological,
Cultural and Demographic, Theories of Social Change: Unilinear,
Cyclical and Diffusionism.

References:
1. Giddens, Antony: Sociology, U.K. Polity Press, London, 2007.
2. Chriss James, James J Chriss; Social control: An Introduction, Polity Press,
2007.
3. Jeanne H. Ballantine, Keith A.Roberts, Our Social World - Introduction to
Sociology, Sage Publication, New Delhi. 2009.
4. Kivisto Peter, Key Ideas in Sociology, Sage Publication, New Delhi.2010.
5. Kuper. A. Social Science Encyclopedia, Rutledge Publishers, London.1996.

76

PAPER 1.2
UNIT 1

INDIAN SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS

SOCIO CULTURAL ASPECTS OF INDIAN SOCIETY

Traditional Hindu Social Organization: Socio Cultural Life of Muslims,
Christians, Sikhs and Parsis.

UNIT II

CASTE SYSTEM
Characteristics, Theories of Caste System. Constitutional Safeguards
against Caste discrimination and Untouchability. Persistent and Change
of Caste in Modern India.

UNIT III

MARRIAGE
Marriage Definition, Hindu Marriage: Ideals, Types and Forms.
Muslim Marriage and Christian Marriage. Legislation and Changing
Trends.

UNIT IV

KINSHIP AND FAMILY

Kinship: Kinship System in India: Lineage and Descent; Regional
variations in Kinship system. Clan, Moiety, Kinship terms, Forms of
Kinship Relationship, Joking relationship, Cobuved.
Family: Definition, Types: Joint, Nuclear and Extended family,
Changing Trends.

UNIT V

CHANGING TRENDS IN THE INDIAN SOCIETY

Sanskritization, Industrialization,
Urbanization, Westernization,
Modernization, Secularization and Globalization.

References:
1.
Hutton, J.H. Caste in India. Bombay: Oxford University Press, 1983
2.
Kapadia, K.M .Marriage and Family in India. Bombay: Oxford University
Press, 1966
3.
Mencher, John P. Agriculture and Social Structure in Tamilnadu: Past
Origins, Present Transformations and Future Prospects, New Delhi: Allied
publisher 1978.
4.
Yogendra Singh Modernization of Indian Tradition Delhi, Thompson Press,
1972

77

PAPER-1.3
UNIT I

SOCIOLOGICAL THEORIES AND PERSPECTIVES

FOUNDING FATHERS OF SOCIOLOGY
August Comte Law of Three Stages Hierarchy of Sciences.
Herbert Spencer Evolutionary Doctrine Organismic Analogy.

UNIT II

FUNCTIONALISM
Emile Durkheim Division of labour - Religion.
Robert K. Merton Latent and Manifest Functions Reference Groups.

UNIT III

CONFLICT THEORIES
Karl Marx Dialectical Materialism Class Conflict Alienation.
Lewis Coser Functions of Conflict

UNIT IV ETHNOMETHDOLOGY
Harold Garfinkel Social Order Theory of Information and
Communication. Dramaturgy - Stages, Discrepant notes.
UNIT V

SOCIAL DYNAMICS
P.A. Sorokin Socio Cultural Dynamics.
Vilferedo Pareto Circulation of Elites Leisure Class.

References :
1. Abraham and Morgan., Sociological Thought From Comte to Sorokin.,
McMillan India Ltd., New Delhi., 1997.
2. Abraham, Francis., Modern Sociological Theory., Oxford University Press.,
Calcutta., 2000.
3. Lewis A. Coser., Masters of Sociological Thought., 2nd Edition., Rawat
Publications., Jaipur., 1996.
4. Jonathan H. Turner., the Structure of Sociological Theory. 4th Edition., Rawat
Publications., Jaipur. 1995.
5. Ritzer, George. Sociological Theory., 5th Edition., Mc-Graw Hill., New Delhi.,
2000.

78

PAPER-1.4

RESEARCH METHODS

UNIT 1

Meaning, Types and Process of Research: Meaning Purpose Types of

research Pure, applied, historical, analytical, descriptive and
experimental Significance of research in social sciences Process of
research Meaning Scientific method Induction and deduction.
UNIT 2

Planning Research: Research problem Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem Review of literature in the field of
corporate management Hypothesis Meaning Sources of hypothesis
Types of Hypothesis Formulation and testing Research design
Factors affecting research design Evaluation of research design.
UNIT 3

Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation

Advantages and disadvantages of sampling Principle of sampling
Essentials of a good sampling Methods of sampling Probability and
non-probability sampling methods Selection of a sample Factors
affecting the size of the sample Biased sample Sampling and nonsampling errors.
UNIT 4

Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data Primary and secondary

data Modes of data collection Analytical method Case study
Observation Survey method Interview Its purpose and importance
79

Types of interview Preparation for an interview Effective interview

techniques Limitations of interview Schedule Its meaning and kinds
Essentials of a good schedule Procedure for the formulation of a
schedule Questionnaire Meaning and types Format of a good
questionnaire Factors affecting the response to a questionnaire
Advantages and limitations of schedules and questionnaires Pre-testing
and its importance.
UNIT 5

Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning Importance Process of

data analysis Editing Coding Tabulation Diagrams The process
of interpretation Guidelines for making valid interpretation Scaling
techniques Meaning Importance Methods of their construction.
UNIT 6

Report Writing: Role and types of reports Contents of research report

Steps involved in drafting reports Principles of good report writing
Referencing Criteria for evaluating research reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES :
1. John W Best, Research in Education.
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing.
3. Goode and Hatt, Methods of Social Research.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research.
5. ICSSR, Training in Research Methodology in Social Sciences in India.
80

PAPER 1.5 RURAL AND URBAN SOCIOLOGY

UNIT 1

RURAL URBAN SOCIOLOGY

Rural Sociology: Definition, Nature and Scope. Urban Sociology:
Definition, Nature and Scope. Rural Urban Differences.

UNIT II

RURAL PROBLEMS IN INDIA

Rural Problems in India: Rural

Poverty

and

Indebtedness,

Unemployment, Health and Sanitation, Illiteracy and Agrarian tensions.

UNIT III

PLANNING FOR RURAL DEVELOPMENT

Planning for Rural Development: Panchayat Raj, Rural Development
Programmes: SGSY, MGNREGS, PMGSY, IAY. Role of NGOs in Rural
Development.

UNIT IV

URBAN PROBLEMS IN INDIA

Urban Problems in India: Housing, Slums, Crime, Health and Sanitation,
Environmental Pollution, Alcoholism and Drug Addiction.

UNIT V

URBAN PLANNING
Urban Planning: Growth of Cities, Urban Reconstruction and New
Settlements.

Agencies for Urban Development: Corporations and

Municipalities, SGSRY, TNUDP III, CMDA, Tamil Nadu Slum

Clearance Board, Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board.
References:
1. Madan, G.R. Indian Social Transformation, Madras: Allied Publisher
Private Limited, 1978.
2. Sinha, D. Indian Villages in Transition. New Delhi: Associated Publishing
House, 1969.
3. Srinivas, M.N. The Remembered Village. Delhi: Oxford University Press,
1976.
4. Burgess, Ernest W and Bogue, Donald, J. Urban Sociology, Chigago: The
University of Chicago Press, 1964.
5. Prakash Rao, V.L.S. Urbanization in India, New Delhi: Concept Publishing
Company, 1983.

81

PAPER- 2.1 SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH

UNIT 1

SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH
The Sociology of Health Nature and scope; The Concept of Health: Four
Dimensions, relationship between medicine and sociology; System of Medicine
in India; Social epidemiology measures: age, sex, race and social class.

UNIT 1I SOCIAL COMPONENTS OF HEALTH

Social Components of Health; The interaction of mind, body and society
Stress Psycho-physiological medicine, social factors and stress, Socio
demographic variables in the process of seeking medical care. Attitudes and
Beliefs towards ill health and treatment.
UNIT 1I I ILLNESS AND DEVIANCE
Illness as deviance, the sick role, Patient role, labeling theory. Models of
seeking medical care.
UNIT 1V PHYSICIAN IN A CHANGING SOCIETY
Physician in a changing society Nursing Past and Present and Future trends,
other health practitioners, hospital as a social institution, health care, a right or
privilege.
UNIT V

MEDICAL SOCIAL SERVICE IN HOSPITAL

Medical Social Service in Hospitals Role of Sociologists and Social Workers
in Medical Service in Pediatrics, Skin and STD, Psychiatry, Tuberculosis.
Reproductive and Child Health. Primary Health Care Health Indicators.
Health Policy of Government of India. Health for All by 2000 AD.
82

References:
1. Coe, Rodney, Sociology of Medicine. New McGraw Hill, 1970.
2.

Freeman, H. handbook of Medical Sociology, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall,

1963.

3. Venkataratnam, R. Medical Sociology in an Indian Setting, Madras: MacMillan

Co., 1979.
4. John Bond, Senga Bond, Sociology of Health Care, New Delhi: Churchill
Living Store, 1994.
5. Ommen, T.K. Doctors and Nurses, New Delhi: MacMillan & Co., 1978.

83

PAPER-2.2

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

II YEAR

UNIT 1

Human Resource Management Definition Objectives and functions

Role and structure of personnel function in organizations Personnel principles
and policies.
UNIT 2

Human Resource Planning Characteristics Need for planning HRP

Process Job analysis Job design Job description Job specification.
UNIT 3

The Selection Process Placement and induction Training and

development Promotion Demotions Transfers Separation.
UNIT 4

Wage and Salary Administration Factors Principles Compensation

plan Individual Group Incentives Bonus Fringe benefits Job
evaluation systems Wage and salary administration in relation to personal
taxation.
UNIT 5

Employee Maintenance and Integration Welfare and safety Accident

prevention Administration of discipline Employee motivation Need and
measures.
UNIT 6

Personnel Records/ Reports Personnel research and personnel audit

Objectives Scope and importance.

References:
1. Venkataraman C.S & Srivastava B.K, Personnel Management and Human
Resources, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
2. Arun Monappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. Dale Yodder & Paul D Standohar, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations,
Sterling Publishers, 1990.

84

PAPER-2.3
UNIT I

SOCIOLOGY OF MASS COMMUNICATION

NATURE AND SCOPE

Meaning, Nature and Scope of communication.

Elements - Types of

communication Models of Communication: - Barriers - Hypodermic and

One Step Flow and Theories of communication: Social Responsibility
and Authority.
UNIT II

CHARACTERISTICS AND DIFFERENCES

Characteristics and Differences in Communication mode, Interpersonal
and Mass Communication.

UNIT III

ORIGIN AND GROWTH OF MASS MEDIA IN INDIA

Origin of mass media: Press Film Television Internet - Cellular
Phone - SMS 3G Video Conferencing.

UNIT IV

COMMUNICATION AND PROCESS OF DIFFUSION

Communication and the process of diffusion. Two step flow and the role
of opinion leaders in the process of diffusion.

UNIT V

COMMUNICATION AND SOCIAL CHANGE

Technology and communication. Communication Technology and Social
Change. Formation of Public Opinion, Propaganda. Role of
Communication in Development of Digital Divide.

References:
1. Agee,Warren K.Philip. Ault and Edwin Emery, Introduction to Mass
Communucation, (6th Edition) Oxford and IH Publishing Co., New Delhi : 1979.
2. Cassata, Mary. B. and Molefik. Asante, Mass Communucation : Principles and
Practices. Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc. New York : 1979.
3. Kewal Kumar J., Mass Communucation in India, Jaico Publishing House,
Bombay, 1984.
4. MC Quail, Dennis and Sven Windhal, Communication Models, Longman
London, 1984.
5. MC Quail, Dennis, Mass Communication Theory : An Introduction ( 2nd
Edition) Sage Publications, London, 1988.
6. Trilochan Pande, Understanding Languages as Communications: Inter Cultural
context, Himalaya Publishing House, 1999.

85

Paper 2.4 Social Welfare Administration and Legislation

UNIT I
Social Welfare Administration: Concepts and scope - nature of Social Welfare
administration in Government and Non-government Organisation. The Social
welfare boards and its functions. Concept of Social policy needs and choice,
rights and obligations, justice and merit citizenship and status.
UNIT II
Social Legislation: meaning and scope: Indian Constitution and social
legislation, fundamental rights and directive principles of state policy. Social
legislation: As an instrument for social control and social change and social
justice and social defense.
UNIT III
Personal laws: Hindu laws related to marriage, divorce, dowry, widow
remarriage, child marriage and inheritance. Laws related to children, adoption,
guardianship and maintenance. Laws safeguard Scheduled Castes (Dalits)Untouchability, Juvenile delinquency, mentally sick. Legal Aid : Meaning and
organization, Lok Adalats. Application of Public Interest Litigation.
UNIT IV
Registration - Societies Registration Act 1860, Procedure under Tamil Nadu
Societies registration Act 1975 Foreign Contribution (Regulation)
Amendment Act, 1985, Indian Trust Act 1881 The Duties and Responsibilities
of office bearer and the executives, The role of general body and governing
board.
UNIT V
Evolution of Social Policy in India sources and instrument of social policy
policies regarding other backward classes, Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes
and other de-notified communities Provisions of safe guarding the welfare of
weaker sections social welfare services for women and children and minority
communities.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Adoms Robert, 2002 : Social Policy for Social Work, Palgrove

Badlock John.2000 : Social Policy, Oxford University Press
Yeetes Nicole. 2001: Globalisation of Social Policy, Sage Publication.
Shanmugavelayudham, K 2000: Social Legislation and Social Change, Valgha Valamudan
Publishers, Chennai.
David Bills and Margaret Harris 2000: Voluntary Agencies: Challenges of Organisation and
Management (ed) Macmillan, New York.
Gills Stewart 2000: Social Policy for Social Workers, Practical Social Work Series, Macmillan,
New York.
Tiwari S, 2000 : Encyclopedia of Indian Government : Programme and Policies, Anmol, New
Delhi.

86

PAPER-2.5

SOCIOLOGY OF MODERNISATION AND DEVELOPMENT

UNIT I

CONCEPT OF DEVELOPMENT:
Meaning Characteristics - Types of Development: Gender and Human
Development, Social Development, Economic Development,
Sustainable Development.

UNIT II

DEVELOPMENT MODELS:
Capitalistic, Socialistic, Nehruvian: Mixed Economy, Gandhian, Mixed
Economy, Third-world models of Development, Modernization.
Millennium Development Goal (MDG).

UNIT III

DEVELOPMENT ISSUES:
Poverty and Social Inequality, Agrarian Crisis, Energy Crisis, Climate
Change, Environmental Crisis and Global Warming, Impact on Health
Issues.

UNIT IV

MODERNIZATION:
Meaning- Characteristics - Theories: Dependency perspective - Classical
dependency theory- New dependency theory.

UNIT V

IMPACT OF MODERNIZATION IN INDIA:

Modernization in India - Modernization and Development and its impact
on; Socio-Economic and Cultural

References:
1. Desai, A.R., (Ed.) Essays on Modernization of Underdeveloped Societies,
Thacker and Company, Mumbai, 1971.
2. Srinivas, M.N., Social Change in Modern India, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
Bombay. 1966.
3. Erenstadt, S.N., Modernization, Protest and Change.
4. Dube, S.C.., Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative
Paradigm, Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 1988.
5. Lavy, M.J., Modernization and Structures of Society.
6. Harrison, D.H., The Sociology of Modernization and Development, Routledge,
London, 1958.
7. Milton Singer and Cohen, B.S., Structure and Change in Indian Society.

87

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium :

:
M.A. (Personnel Management and Industrial Relations)
:
Distance Education
:
Two years
:
Any degree from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Total
Marks

I YEAR
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

Management Concepts
Principles of Personnel Management
Labour Legislations-I
Labour Legislations-II
Industrial Relations

100
100
100
100
100

Organisational Development
Human Resource Development
Labour Economics
Organisational Behaviour
Computer Applications in Personnel
Management

100
100
100
100
100

II YEAR
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

1000

Total

88

Paper 1.1. MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS

UNIT I

Management: Definition Nature Scope and functions Evaluation of

management thought Relevance of management to different types of
organization like Hospitals, Universities, Hostels, Social Service organizations,
etc.
UNIT II

Planning: Nature, importance and strategic considerations in planning

Planning premises Components of planning as objectives, policies, strategies,
procedures, methods, rules, projects and budgets Making plans effective
Planning and decision making.
UNIT III

Organising: Nature, purpose and kinds of organization Structure

Principles and theories of organization Departmentation Span of control
line and staff functions Authority and responsibility Centralization and
decentralization Delegation of authority Committees Informal
organization.
UNIT IV

Staffing and directing: General principles, importance and techniques.

UNIT V

Controlling: Objectives and process of control Devices of control

integrated control Special control techniques Co-ordination Need and
techniques.
UNIT VI

Recent trends and new perspectives in management: Strategic alliances

Core competence Business process reengineering TQM Bench marking.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Stoner and Wanker, Management, Prentice Hall.

Koontz and ODonnel, Management, A Systems Approach, Tata McGraw Hill.
Weihrich and Koontz, Management A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill.
John Argenti, Management Techniques A Practical Guide.
Gene Burton & Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, TMH.

89

Paper 1.2. PRINCIPLES OF PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I

Personnel Management Definition Objectives and functions Role

and structure of personnel function in organizations Personnel principles and
policies.
UNIT II

Human Resource Planning Characteristics Need for planning HRP

process Job analysis Job design Job description Job specification.
UNIT III

The Selection Process Placement and induction Training and

development Promotion Demotions Transfer Separation.
UNIT IV

Wage and salary administration Factors Principles Compensation

plan Individual Group Incentives Bonus Fringe benefits Job
evaluation systems Wage and salary administration in relation to personal
taxation.
UNIT V

Employee maintenance and integration Welfare and safety Accident

prevention Administration of discipline Employee motivation Need and
measures.
UNIT VI

Personnel Records/Reports Personnel research and personnel audit

Objectives, scope and importance.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Venkataratnam C S and Srivastava B K, Personnel Management and Human
Resources, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
2. Arun Monappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Jill, 1987.
3. Dale Yodder, Paul and Standohar D, Personnel Management and Industrial
Relations, Sterling Publishers, 1990.
4. David A Decenzo and Stephen, Robbins P, Personnel/Human Resource
Management, Prentice Hall, 1955.

90

Paper 1.3: LABOUR LEGISLATIONS - 1

UNIT I
Factories Act, 1948: Provisions relating to health, safety, welfare, working hours, leave etc., of
workers approval Licensing and registration of factories, manager and occupier Their obligations
under the Act, powers of the authorities under the Act, Penalty provisions.
UNIT II
Workmens Compensation Act, 1923: Employers liability for compensation, amount of
compensation method of calculating wages Review distribution of compensation Remedies of
employer against stranger Returns as to compensation Commission for workmens compensation.
UNIT III
Industrial Dispute Act, 1947: Industrial dispute Authorities for settlement of industrial
disputes Reference of industrial disputes Procedures Power and duties of authorities, settlement
and strikes Lock-out Lay-off Retrenchment Transfer and closure Unfair labour practices
Miscellaneous provision offences by companies, conditions of service to remain unchanged under certain
circumstances, etc.
UNIT IV
Shops and Establishments Act, 1947: Definitions Sailent provisions Powers of the
authorities.
UNIT V
Employees State Insurance Act, 1948: Registration of Factories and Establishments, the
employees State Insurance Corporation, Standing Committee and Medical Benefit Council, provisions
relating to contributions Inspectors Their functions and disputes and claims Offences and penalties
Miscellaneous provisions.
UNIT VI
Employees Provident Fund and Msicellaneous Provisions Act, 1952: Employees provident fund
and other schemes Determination and recovery of money due from employer, appointment of
inspectors and their duties Provisions relating to transfer of accounts and liability in case of transfer of
establishment exemption under the Act Counts power under the act.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bare Acts
2. Kapoor N D, Industrial Law
3. Shukla M C, Industrial Law

91

Paper 1.4: LABOUR LEGISLATIONS - II

UNIT I
Computation of available surplus calculation of direct tax payable surplus
calculation of direct tax payable by the employer, eligibility for bonus and payment of
bonus deduction from bonus payable adjustment of customary of interim bonus
payable, adjustment of customary or interim bonus linked with production or
productivity set on and set off allocable surplus, presumption about accuracy of
balance sheet and profit and loss account.
UNIT II
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Payment of Gratuity exemption nomination
determination and recovery of the amount of gratuity.
UNIT III
Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Objects, provisions relating to responsibility for
payment of wages fixation of wage periods, time of payment, deduction and fines
maintenance of records and registers, inspectors appointment of authorities and
adjudication of claims.
UNIT IV
Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Objects, fixing of minimum rate or wages
procedure for fixing and receiving minimum wages appointment of advisory board
payment of minimum wages, maintenance of registers and records contracting out
powers of appropriate government offences and penalties.
UNIT V
Industrial Employment(Standing Orders) Act, 1946: Provisions regarding
certification and operating of standing orders duration and modification of standing
orders power of certifying officer interpretation of standing orders.
UNIT VI
Trade Union Act, 1926: Registration of Trade Unions, rights, and liabilities
trade unions procedure penalties
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bare Acts
2. Kapoor N D, Industrial Laws
3. Shukla M C, Industrial Laws

92

Paper 1.5: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

UNIT I
Constitution of India Salient features Fundamental rights and directive
principles of State policy Labour movement Concept of labour movement and
Union Organization Trade union movement and various phases of the movement
Trade unions and economic development.
UNIT II
Development of Trade Unionism in India Historical retrospect Central
organization of workers in India Role of internal trade union Inter and intra union
rivalries Union recognition International Labour Movement: ICFTU WFTU
ILO History, objective and functions Convention and recommendations.
UNIT III
Concept of Industrial Relations Social obligations of industry Role of
government employers and the unions in industrial relations Industrial relations
machinery Joint consultation Works committee Negotiation: Types of
Negotiations Conciliations Adjudication, voluntary arbitration Workers
participation in industry Grievance procedure.
UNIT IV
Process of collective bargaining Problems and prospects Bipartism in
agreements Code of conduct and code of discipline Wage boards Reports of wage
boards Management of strikes and lockouts.
UNIT V
Employee safety programme Types of safety organization Safety committee
Ergonomics Damage control and system, safety.
UNIT VI
Employee communication House journals Notice boards suggestion
schemes upward communication, personnel counselling and mental health
educational and social development modern trends employee education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bhagoliwal T N, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Agra Publishers,
Agra.
2. Arun Monappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Michael V P,HRM and Human Relations,Himalaya Book House, Mumbai.

93

Paper 2.1. ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOPMENT

UNIT I

Introduction to Organization Development Concept Nature and scope

of organizational development History of organizational development
Underlying assumptions and values.
UNIT II

Theory and practice of organizational development Operational

components Diagnostic, action and process Maintenance component.
UNIT III

Action Research as a process An approach History Use and varieties

of action research When and how to use action research in organizational
development.
UNIT IV

Organizational development interventions Team interventions Intergroup interventions Personal, interpersonal and group process interventions
Comprehensive interventions Structural interventions.
UNIT V

Implementation and assessment of organizational development

Conditions for success and failure Ethical standards in organizational
development Organizational development and organizational performance
Implications.
UNIT VI

Key consideration and issues in organizational development Future of

organizational development Indian experiences in organizational development.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. French and Bell, Organizational development, Prentice Hall, 1995.

2. French, Bell, Zawach (Edn) Organization Development: Theory, Practice and
Research. UBP.
3. Rosabeth Moss Kanter, The Change Masters, Simon & Schaster.

94

Paper 2.2: HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT

UNIT I
Introduction Evolution of Human Resource Development as a Management
Philosophy Scope and importance Personnel management Vs human resource development
Human resources system designing.
UNIT II
Role Analysis and Human Resource Development Role analysis methods Key
performance areas Critical attributes and role effectiveness Performance appraisal and its
objectives Considerations in performance appraisal Development oriented appraisal system.
UNIT III
Performance counseling and interpersonal feedback Developing dynamic relationship
through effective counselling Potential appraisal and development Career planning and
individual development.
UNIT IV
Conceptual framework Learning principles Identification of training needs
Training objective Designing training programmes Training methods Evaluation of
training and retraining.
UNIT V
Organizational effectiveness Organizational culture Human resource development
Organizational development interface Human resource development and TQM & ISO 9000
Human resource development in service sector.
UNIT VI
Human Resource Development Current status and future directions Human
resource development experiences in India Human resource development strategies for higher
organizational performance.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pareek Udai and Rao T V, Designing and Managing Human Resource Systems, Oxford &
IBH.
2. Rao T V, Performance Appraisal, Theory and Practice, AIMA Vikas.
3. Rao T V, et-al (ed) Alternative Approached and Strategies of Human Resources
Development, Rawat Publications.
4. Silvera D M, Human Resource Development The Indian Experience, New India
Publications.
5. Kohli UNIT and Sinha D (Ed) Human Resource Development, Global and Strategies in
2000 AD, Alied Publishers.

95

Paper 2.3: LABOUR ECONOMICS

UNIT I

Nature and scope of labour economics: Evaluation of the labour problem

- Labour problems of developing economy Concept of labour force, structure,
composition and extent of Indian Labour Force participation Basics of labour
market supply and demand.
UNIT II

Employment: Economics of employment, theories of employment, full

employment technology and employment- flexibilities and rigidities in the
Indian Labour Market.
UNIT III

Wages: Economics of wages, wage theories, methods, methods of wage

payment, development of rational wage system, principles of wage policy for a
developing economy.
UNIT IV

Dearness Allowance: Various schemes Concept of cost of living and

price indices for computing Dearness Allowance Extent of neutralization
Case for full and partial neutralization Productivity Definition, measures and
gins sharing.
UNIT V

Employee migrations Push and pull factors Theories Trend and

impact.
UNIT VI

Labour absenteeism Labour turnover Rationalization and automation

Technology and labour Gender and labour Exit of industries and labour.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pramod Verma, Labour Economics and Industrial Relations.

2. Mcconnell & Campbell R, Contemproary Labour Economics.

96

Paper 2.4: ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

UNIT I
Organizational Behavior Importance to managers Organizational
behavior as global phenomenon.
UNIT II

Individual behavior Psychological processes and behavioral issues

Ability Personality Learning Perception Managerial implications.
UNIT III

Motivation: Maslow, Herzberg, Vroom, Porter, X, Y and Z theories

Values and attitudes Job satisfaction Morale.
UNIT IV

Group behaviors Formation of groups Group norms Group cohesion

Group conflict Cultural diversity and group effectiveness Inter personal
communication Barriers to effective communication.
UNIT V

Leadership Style and functions Leadership theories Implications for

managers Power and politics.
UNIT VI

Organizational Dynamics Organizational design Organizational

climate Organizational culture Management of change Organizational
effectiveness.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviors, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1995.

Stephen, Robbins P, Organizational Behavior, Prentice Hall, 1997.
Keith Davis, Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1991.
Gregory Moorehead and Griffin R S, Organizational Behavior Managing People
and Organisations, Jaico, 1994.
5. Judith, Gordon R, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behavior, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.

97

Paper 2.5: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Introduction to Computers: Functional Elements Processor Memory,
Input/Output Disk Storage, Program parts of PC business data processing
main areas of applications in personnel management.
UNIT II

Hardware: Input devices and media key to tape key to disk magnetic
devices and media output devices and media VDU, Dot matrix printers, line
and laser printers storage devices and media magnetic tape and magnetic
disk arithmetic and logic unit control unit.
UNIT III

Applications software: Machine language, assembly language and high

level languages major high level language compilers, interpreters and
assemblers.
UNIT IV

Word Processing: Processing a document functions of a word-processor

menus entering and editing texts marking and moving blocks finding and
replacing texts formatting text on screen special print features mail merge
form letters.
UNIT V

Relational Database Manager: Introduction to dBaseIII creating a

database adding data viewing data editing and modifying databases
duplicating databases and structures printing formatted reports working with
multiple databases command files setting up screen displays.
UNIT VI

Personnel Management Applications case studies recruitment

selection payroll training separation.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Computers and Business
2. Business Information Systems
3. Computers and Business Systems
4. Introduction to Wordstar, Arthur Naiman, BPB Publ.(SYBEX)
5. Understanding dBase III, BPB Publ.(SYBEX)

98

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:

M.A. (Master of Journalism and Mass Communication)

Distance Education
Two years
Any degree from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Marks

Title

I YEAR

1.1

Introduction to Mass Communication

100

1.2

Reporting

100

1.3

Editing

100

1.4

Media History and Laws in India

100

1.5

Women and Media

100

2.1

Advertising

100

2.2

Public Relations

100

2.3

Development communication

100

2.4

Mass Comunication Research

100

2.5

Writing and Reporting for New Media

100

II YEAR

Total

99

1000

Paper 1.1: INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION

UNIT I
Communication: Definitions Communication and Society Types of
Communication The human communication process: A review of some basic
models and the ingredients.
UNIT II
The influence of technology on the means of communication The
concept of Mass Media A discussion of the characteristics of individual mass
medium Mass Media in India and their present status.
UNIT III
The concept of Journalism The functions of press Press freedom and
responsibility and the theories of Press Current trends in Journalism Press codes
and ethics of Journalism A code of ethics for the Indian Press.

UNIT IV
Mass Media institutions in India Government Media Units as
Akashvani, Doordarshan, PIB, DAVP etc. Press Registrar of India, press
council of India Indian News agencies Professional organizations as INS,
AINEC, IFWJ, PRST, AAAI, ILNA etc Media educational institutions.
UNIT V
Press Commissions and Committees: The First and Second Press Commission
reports Reports of Chanda committee, Varghese Committee, Joshi committee,
Karanth working group etc. Prasar Baharati Bill, FM and Community Radio
DTH, Cable Revolution.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Emery, Agee, Ault Introduction to Mass Communication.

Spencer Crump, Fundamentals of Journalism.
Hohenberg, Professional Journalist.
Sean Macbride Many Voices, One World.
Keval J. Kumar, Mass Communication in India

100

Paper 1.2: REPORTING

UNIT I
Definition of News Values of News Kinds of News Structure of a
news story Lead and kinds of leads, body, backgrounding and conclusion.
UNIT II
Functions, responsibilities and qualities of a Reporter Functional
differences of Reporter Special Correspondents, foreign Correspondents,
Columnists, Freelancers, Roving Reporters.
UNIT III
News gathering methods Sources Interviews Research Beat reporting
Reporting speeches, press conferences, accidents, deaths, disasters, crime, court
proceedings Legislature proceedings, Elections and sports, business, finance, science
and technology- Syndicates.

UNIT IV
Interpretative reporting Indepth reporting Investigative reporting New
journalism Development reporting Precision journalism Public service
journalism News letters and Trend reporting.

UNIT V
Language and style of creative news writing Craft of non-fiction writing
Types of features and features writing Writing reviews.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Critichfield R Indian Reporters Guide.

Crump S Fundamentals of Journalism.
Hohenberg J, Professional Journalist.
Sethi P, Professional Journalism.
Johnson S and Harris J, The Complete Reporter.
Lewis J, Active Reporter.
McDouglas CD, Interpretative Reporting.
Campbell and Wolseley, How to Report & Write the News.
Kamath, M.V. Professional Journalism

101

Paper 1.3: EDITING

UNIT I
A brief review of Newpaper, organization and management Newspaper
production process Technology advances News management and the functioning of
a news room The functions of Editor, Assistant Editor, News Editor, Sub-Editor,
Sources of news and news copy flow.

UNIT II
Fundamentals of copy editing Copy reading and proof reading symbols
Rewriting techniques Copy fitting Space saving techniques Style sheet
Readability Glossary.

UNIT III
Writing news headlines in news paper and magazines Modern trends of
headline writing Electronic news editing Picture editing Outline writing
Editorial writing Types of editorials and analysis of editorials.

UNIT IV
Principles if Page Make-up and Design Mechanics of dummying Front and
inside page make-ups Trends in page make-up.

UNIT V
Introduction of Typography Type faces and sizes Classification and
measurements Setting styles Kinds of type setting: Traditions and modern Modern
reproduction process.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Westly Bruce, News Editing.
2. International Press Institute, The Active Newsroom.
3. Evans Harold, News Headlines, Newspaper Design, Editing and Design.
4. Bastian George C, Editing and the Days News.
5. Sellers and Leslie, Doing it in Style.

102

Paper 1.4: MEDIA HISTORY AND LAWS IN INDIA

UNIT I
History of Press in India Historical perspective of Mass Media Laws.

UNIT II
Development of Radio Broadcasting in India Development of Television in
India A short history of Indian Cinema.

UNIT III
Provision of the Constitution applicable to Mass Media Laws applicable to
Mass Media: The Indian Penal Code The Press and Registration of Books Act, 1867
The newspaper (Price and Page) Act, 1956 The Copyright Act, 1957 The Press
Council Act, 1978.

UNIT IV
The contempts of Courts Act, 1971 The Official Secrets Act, 1923 The Civil
Law of Defamation The Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable
Advertisement)Act, 1954 The Indecent Representation of Women (Prohibition) Act,
1933 The MRTP Act, 1969 The Working Journalists Act, 1955, 1958.

UNIT V
Broadcast Code governing commercial advertisements in Radio, Television.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Natarajan S, A History of the Press in India.
2. Nadig Krishnamoorthi, Indian Journalism.
3. Rangaswami Parthasarathy, Journalism in India.
4. Chalapathi Rau M, The Press.
5. Venkateswaran K S, Mass Media Laws and Regulations in India.
6. Basu, Press Law.
7. Kagzi Jain MC, Constitution of India.
8. Umrigar K L, Press Laws in India.

103

Paper 1.5: WOMEN AND MEDIA

UNIT I
Mainstream Modes of Communication in India: Electronic, Visual and Audio
Role of women.
UNIT II

Media Portrayal of Women: Reductionism, objectification, Dial image

and commodization of women consumerism Stereo-type images
Trivializing womens question Cultural meaning.

UNIT III
Women in Media: Jobs for women in different media Opportunities, Barriers,
breaking down barriers Women in new media.

UNIT IV
Media and Social changes: Interaction between media and movement Countering
strategies in media portrayal Media policy, decision-making and advocacy
Alternative media.

UNIT V
Appropriate media Training media Planning and designing Training
material.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Balasubramaniyan, Vimal, Mirror Image, Centre for Edn. & Doc. Mumbai, 1988.
Baehr, Helen and Gillian Dyer, Boxer in: Women and Television, Pandora, London,
1987.
Bhasin, Kamal (ed.,) Towards Empowerment, FAO-FFHO/AD South Asia Training for
Women Development Workers, 1983.
Bhasin Kamal and Bina Agarwal, Women and Media: Analysis, Alternatives and
Action, Kail for women, New Delhi, 1984.
Gallagher, Margaret, Unequal Opportunities: The case of women and media,
UNESCO, 1981.
Kapoor, Sushma & Anuradha, Women and Media in Development, United India Press,
New Delhi, 1986.
Krishnan, Prabha and Anita Dighe, Construction of Feminity of Indian Television,
council for Social Development, New Delhi, 1987.

104

Paper 2.1: ADVERTISING

UNIT I
Advertising in the Marketing Process Development of Advertising in India
The Advertising industry Structure of an advertising agency Staff and functions.

UNIT II
Functions of advertising Psychology of advertising Types of advertising
Advertising media.

UNIT III
Structure of an Advertisement Advertisement Design: Visualization,
Headlines, Body copy, Visuals copy appeal etc. Copy writing techniques
Fundamentals of Arts in the layout and design.
UNIT IV
Advertising Campaigns: Planning process Media mix and media scheduling
Measuring advertising effectiveness.

UNIT V
Professional organizations in advertising The code for commercial advertising
on AIR The code of commercial advertising on Doordarshan The code of
advertising pratice of the Advertising Standard Council of India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1 Otto Klepner, Advertising Procedure.
2 Borden, Advertising.
3 Watson and Dunn, Advertising.
4 Fryburger, Sanger Vernon CH, Advertiseing Theory and Practice.
5 John J Wheatley, Measuring Advertising Effectiveness.
6 Rajeev Batra, et-al, Advertising Management.
7 Chunawalla & Shetia, Foundations of the Theory and Practice of Advertising.
8 Dyer Gillian, Advertisings as Communication.

105

Paper 2.2: PUBLIC RELATIONS

UNIT I
Public Relations: Definitions Public Relations and publicity PR and Public
Opinion History and Development of PR in India Role and functions of PR in
management PR Policy.

UNIT II
Structure and functions of a PR Department in Government, Public and Private
Sectors Qualities of a good PRO Organization and its publics Functions of a
PRO Media relations Employee relations.

UNIT III
PR Counselling PR and Mass Media House Journals Press Conferences
Newsletters, Annual Reports Exhibitions and Trade Fairs.

UNIT IV
PR Programmes and Campaigns: Planning, promoting and evaluating.
UNIT V
PR Professional Organizations New trends in PR Ethics of Public relations.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Cutlip & Centre, Effective Public Relations.
2. Reddy, Narasimha, How to be a Good PRO.
3. Lesley Philip, Public Relations Handbook, Lesleys Public Relations
Handbook.
4. Black, Sam, :Practical Public Relations.
5. Robert L Dilenschneider,The Dartnell Public Relations Handbook.
6. Robert D Ross, The Management of Public Relations.
7. Philip J Kitchen, Public Relations Principles & Practice.
8. Sam Black, Practical Public Relations.

106

Paper 2.3: DEVELOPMENT COMMUNICATION

UNIT I
Development: Concept Dynamics of development Development
issues Development indicators Dysfunctions of development
Communication perspective on development Role of Communication in
Development: Development motivation, Development participation
Approaches to Development Communication.
UNIT II
Dominant paradigm of Development: Evolutionary model Psychological
variable model Cultural factors model Economic growth model Industrialization
approach The critique of the above models.

UNIT III
Communication approaches of Dominant paradigm: Powerful effects model of
mass media Diffusion of innovations Mass media in modernization The critique
of above models.

UNIT IV
Alternative paradigms of Development and development communication: Basic
needs programme Integrated Development Intermediate technology Self
Development Self reliance Popular participation New communication
technologies Traditional media use Development support communication.

UNIT V
Historical analysis of Indias Development: Gandhi Metha model, Elawath
experiment, Nilokheri experiment, Five Year Plans, Models of Experimental Project:
Rural Television SITE, Kheda, Communications Project, Radio Rural Forum.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
5. Wilhur Schram, Mass Media and National Development.
6. S.C. Dube, Indias Changing Vilalges: Human Factors in Community
Development.
7. Y.V. Lakshman Rao, Communication and Development.
8. Uma Narula, Development communication: Theory and Practice.
9. Everett Rogers, Diffusion of Innovations.

107

Paper 2.4: MASS COMMUNICATION RESEARCH

UNIT I
What is Mass Communication Research? Need for research Phases of
development of Mass Media research Status of Mass Media Research in India.
UNIT II
Research methods/designs: Exploratory Research Descriptive research
Focus group and case studies Survey research Content analysis Experimental
Research: Laboratory and Field Historical research Legal research.
UNIT III
Research Procedure: Systematic steps in doing a research study Statements of
Research topic Defining objectives Formulation of Hypotheses Operational
definition of terms Decision on research design and sampling procedure
Construction of data collection tools Planning for data analysis and reporting.
UNIT IV
Mass media Research: Print media research Radio research Television
research Advertising research Public Relations research Media effects research.
UNIT V
Data Collection Techniques: Questionnaire design Interview techniques
Observation Content analysis procedure Projective techniques Sampling design
Physiological techniques.
UNIT VI
Data Analysis and Report Writing Quantification of data collection
Tabulation Selection of appropriate statistical tools Analysis and interpretation of
data Report writing.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. Roger D Wimmer & Joseph R Dominick, Mass Media Research An
Introduction.
3. Shearon Lowery and Melvin L DeFleur, Milestones in Mass Communication
Research.
4. Ralph Nafziger and David M White, Introduction to Mass Communication
Research.

108

Paper 2.5: WRITING AND REPORTING FOR NEW MEDIA

UNIT I
Introduction to Computers Role of Information Technology ub
Communication Why computers Characteristics of computers i/o systems
Operating system DOS, Windows.
UNIT II
Introduction to Word Processing Software MS Word Excel Access
Powerpoint Adobe Photoshop Growth of computer networks and World Wide Web
Administration Commerce and publishing through new media Media
convergence.
UNIT III
Introduction to Websites and Web pages Features of a typical website Tools
for new media Hardware and Software Glossary of terms associated with websites.
UNIT IV
E-Mail and Internet Network protocols Mailing lists Search engines,
browses, plug-ins and forts, news groups Internet relay chart, teleconferencing, video
conferencing Accessing references on the Internet.
UNIT V
Conventions of writing for new media, styles, presentation, newsfeeds,
hyperlinks, VRLs, linkage to original sources of news and background information, ezines.
UNIT VI
Public relations and advertisement through new media Working with graphics,
images, streaming audio and video, ethical issues, regulation mechanisms, influences
on social behavior, future trends.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James L Peterson & Abraham Silberschatz, Operating System Concepts, Addision
Wesley (1985).
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Operating Systems Design and Implementation, Prentice
Hall (1987).
3. Stuart E Madnick & John J Donovan, Operating Systems, McGraw-Hill, ISE
(1968).
4. Per Brinch Hansen, Operating System Principles, Prentice-Hall of India (1973).
5. Bob Breedlove et-al, Web Programming Unleased, Sams Net Publ., 1996.
6. Young, Internet, Millennium edition, Complete reference, TMH, 1998.

109

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:

M.A. (Child Care and Education)

Distance Education
Two years
Any degree from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject
Code

Title

Total
Ma
rks

I YEAR
1.1

Principles of Child Development

100

1.2

Child Health and Nutrition

100

1.3

Education of the Young Child

100

1.4

Child in the Emerging Indian Society

100

1.5

Pre-School Educational Activities

100

2.1

Rights of the Child and Child Care in India

100

2.2

Education of the Children with Special Needs

100

2.3

Planning and Organisation of Institutions of Young

Children

100

2.4

Research in Child Studies

100

2.5

Pre-School Home Community Linkages

100

II YEAR

Total

110

1000

Paper 1.1: PRINCIPLES OF CHILD DEVELOPMENT

UNIT I
Meaning of growth Stages of development Areas of development Importance of
the study of development General principle of development Genetic factors in development
Importance of environmental factors in development Maturation and learning.
UNIT II
Physical growth during infancy, toddlerhood and early childhood Development of
different parts of the body height, weight, hearing speech and sight Development of gross
motor skills and fine motor skills Promoting motor skills.
UNIT III
Cognitive development Meaning of cognition Piagets theory with special reference
to development upto the period of early childhood Acquisition of concept A few cognitive
abilities of the pre-school child.
UNIT IV
Language development Learning to speak Factors influencing language
development The first sentences Individual difference in acquisition of language
Development of vocabulary of language rules Promoting language skills Speech problems
in childhood.
UNIT V
Socio-emotional development Interacting with the infant and children Development
of attachment Learning to relate Trust Emotional expressions of children Love, fear,
rivalry, anger, frustrandrums, enuresis, withdrawn behaviour, aggression and stealing ways of
handling.
REFERENCES
1. Erikson H Erick, Childhood and Society, Penguin, 1969.
2. George G Thompson, Child Psychology, The Times of India, 1965.
3. Issacc Susan, The Nursery Years, Routledge, London, 1956.
4. Craig Grace J, and Marguerite Kermis, Children Today, Allyn and Bacon, New Jersey,
1995.
5. Gordon Ira J, Human Development, D.B.Taraporevala, Mumbai, 1970.
6. Todd V E and Helers Heffernon, The Years Before School, Macmillan, London, 1970.
7. Sharma Adarsh, Social and Personal Development of the Young Child, ECEIM
Services, 1996.
8. Paul Henry Mussen, et-al, Child Development and Personality, Harper & Row, New
York, 1977.
9. Smart and Smart, Readings in Child Development and Relationships, High and Hize
Publ, New Delhi, 1972.

111

Paper 1.2: CHILD HEALTH AND NUTRITION

UNIT I
The concept of nutrition Interrelation between nutrition and health Indications of
health Health situation in India National Health Policy Health care services Health care
delivery system.
UNIT II
Nutritional requirements of children of different age groups Infancy and early
childhood and middle childhood Planning balanced diets for children of different age groups
Balanced diet for pregnant and lactating women.
UNIT III
Major deficiency diseases of children and their symptoms Protein, energy,
malnutrition and exophthalmia Nature, clinical features, causes, treatment and prevention
Other nutritional problems B complex deficiency Vitamin D deficiency Vitamin C
deficiency Common childhood ailments Common childhood accidents and first aid.
UNIT IV
Major nutrition programmes Nutrient deficiency control programmes such as national
prophylaxis programmes for prevention of blindness due to vitamin A deficiency National
nutrition anemia control programme and National iodine deficiency disorders control
programme Food supplementation programme such as Integrated Child Development
Services (ICDS), Mid Day Meal programme (MDM), Special Nutrition Programme (SNP) and
Balwadi Nutrition Programme (BNP).
UNIT V
Major health programmes Health programmes such as National Immunisation
programmes National Family Welfare programme National programme for Control of
Blindness National Mental Health Programme Child Survival and Safe Motherhood
programme Assessment of nutrition status Methods such as anthropometric measurements,
diet survey, growth monitoring Personal hygiene as an essential factor for health of the
children.
REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Ali Mohamad: Food and Nutrition in India, K.B. Publications, New Delhi.
National Seminar on Nutrition Education, NCERT, 1975.
Rirchie A S Jean, Learning Better Nutrition, Raner, Italy, 1967.
Holmes C Alan, Visual Aids in Nutrition Education, FAO, Rome, 1969.
Fee, A Handbook for Nutrition Trainers of Anganwadi Worker, NIPCCD, 1994.
Brakhane Jeanmette, Robert E Rockwelt, Food, Nutrition and the Young Child, Missowri, St.
Louis, 1985.
Cameron Margaret & Hotwander Yugne, Manual on Feeding Infants and Young Children,
UNICEF, New York.

112

Paper 1.3: EDUCATION OF THE YOUNG CHILD

UNIT I
Early childhood care and education Its scope Rationale Theoretical orientations in
early childhood education contributions of Rousseau, Froebel, Montessori, Tagore, Tarabai
Modak and Anutai Wagh Head Start Programme The system of pre-basic education of
Gandhi.
UNIT II
Challenges of Indian education at preprimary and primary education Equalisation of
educational opportunities The problem of wastage and stagnation Education of the girl child
Pre-school education in strengthening the primary education. Recommendations of the
National Policy on Education (1986) on Early childhood care and Education at Elementary
education.
UNIT III
Financing of education of young children grant-in-aid for creches National Creche
Fund Sources of finance Policies and programmes of the Centre and State for the five year
plans Rules of recognition and grant-in-aid Chittibabu Committee Report on Code of
Regulations for Nursery and Primary Schools and on the study of Tamil Schools Minimum
specification for pre-schools.
UNIT IV
Educating the young child Learning through play Activities for promoting cognitive
and language skills Activities for sensory exploration Play activities for pre-reading and
pre-writing skills Music and movement.
UNIT V
Basic features of Minimum Level of hearing (MLL) MLL in language MLL in
mathematics MLL in environmental studies Non-cognitive areas of learning Evaluation as
an essential input to primary education Curricula for pre-primary and primary education.
REFERENCES
1. Amberg Lemore, Raising Children Bilingually, Multilingual Malters Ltd. 1987.
2. Annie I Butler, Early Childhood Education, D.Van Hogland, New York, 1974.
3. Bernard Spodek, Early Childhood Education, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1976.
4. Wagh Anutai, Parent and Community, ECEIM, 1979.
5. Sharma Adarsh, Social and Personal Development of the Young Children, ECEIM,
1987.
6. Taneja V R, Education: Thought and Practice, Delhi University Publishers.
7. Rusk Robert, The Doctrine of Great Educators, McGraw Hill, 1964.
8. Sylvia Krown, Threes and Fours go to School, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1974.
9. Report of the National Education Commission (1964-66), MHRD, New Delhi.

113

Paper 1.4: CHILD IN THE EMERGING INDIAN SOCIETY

UNIT I
The Child and the structural aspect of the Indian family Type of family Significant
others in the family Family size Dynamics of social interaction Role of family in
socialisation of the child Their stages in child socialisation Internalization Role
expectations of a child Sex stereotyping of role Changing concept of childhood Western
values and ideas.
UNIT II
Social agencies of child development Stages of parenting Patterns of parenting
Democratic, autocratic, authoritarian Parent-child interaction Oedipus complex and electra
complex in children The neglected child After care homes.
UNIT III
Religious institutions Roles of church, mosque, temple The process of social
weaning Schools, textbooks The pre-school, play group, mass media Television
Childrens styles of life Community and caste.
UNIT IV
Social practices, customs, rituals and child care Concept of childhood Sex
determination Practice of female infanticide and foeticide Causes and consequences
Schemes of the Government of Tamil Nadu for the girl child Cradle baby scheme Sex ratio
The fertility rates by sex Late marriages IMR by sex.
UNIT V
Indian Society Characteristics Village community, caste system, joint family
Plurality of culture Unity in diversity Urban way of living Housing Crime-migration
and children Employment pressure Western values and ideas Religious, linguistic, ethnic,
racial groups Their importance in the context of child development.
REFERENCES
1. Bosard James H S and Eleanor Stoker Boll, The Sociology of Child Development, 4 th
ed, Harper & Row, London, 1966.
2. Berk Laura E, Infants, Children and Adolescents, 2 nd ed, Allyn and Bacon, Singapore,
1966.
3. Medinnus, Gene R and Ronald C Johnson, Child and Adolescent Psychology, John
Wiley, New York, 1976.
4. Bijou Sidney W, The Basic Stage of Early Childhood, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1976.
5. Rajammal P Devadas and N Jaya, A Textbook on Child Development, Macmillan,
Chennai, 1984.
6. Craig Grace J and Marguerite Kermis, Children Today, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
1995.

114

Paper 1.5: PRE-SCHOOL EDUCATIONAL ACTIVITIES

UNIT I
Objectives of Pre-School Education Educational Activities (E.A) - Meaning
Importance The Pre-primary school as a centre for play, stimulation and developmental
activities Classification of Educational Activities based on age level of the child, domains of
development, grouping of children, based on level of teacher supervision and place of activity.
UNIT II
Educational activities for gross muscle co-ordination among toddlers and preschoolers
E.A. to promote sensory motor and fine-muscle coordination Indoor and outdoor
equipments to promote gross muscle and five muscle coordination.
UNIT III
Pre-reading and Pre-writing activities to promote language development - Stories,
Rhymes, Music, and Creative Drama for the young child suitability of themes for young
children Activities for creative self-expression.
UNIT IV
Educational activities to promote cognitive abilities for toddlers and preschoolers
Activities for observation, grouping seriation / sequencing enhancing memory simple
problem solving Introducing Pre-number concepts Providing simple science experience
activities.
Educational activities for Socio emotional development Role Play Imaginative
Play Activities Drama Activities for Channalisation of emotions.
UNIT 5
Planning and Organising Educational Activities Effective Use of Indoor and Outdoor
space Improvisation using rural and urban waste materials Organising Simple Traditional
Games for young Children Monitoring childrens progress in E.A.
REFERENCES
1. Activity-Based Curriculum for Pre-School Education, Indian Association for Pre-School
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Education, 2000.
Stimulation Activities for Young Children, Rajalakshmi Muralidharan and Shobika Asthana, New
Delhi : NCERT, 1999.
Strategies for Effective Pre-School Education, Indian Association for Pre-School Education, 1999.
A Textbook on Child Development, Rajammal P. Devadas and N. Jaya, Coimbatore : Macmillan
India Ltd., 1991.
gs;sp Kd; gUtf; fy;tp, Dr. G. Pankajam, Gandhigram : Lakshmi Seva Sangam, 1988.
Publications of IAPE on Play, Music, Drama and other activities for the Pre-Schoolers.

115

Paper 2.1: RIGHTS OF THE CHILD AND CHILD CARE IN INDIA

UNIT I
Profile of children of the world Convention of the rights of the child Four sets of
basic rights Major goals for child survival, development and protection Measures to
promote childrens rights goals for the year 2000 fixed by the Government of India.
UNIT II
Protecting the basic rights of the children Providing safe drinking water, nutritious
food and health services Protecting children from exploitation and abuse Child labour as
exploitation of children Legal protection for child labour Provision of childrens homes and
adoption facilities for street children and orphans.
UNIT III
Concept of child care Need for child care Types of child care A few innovative
approaches to child care as a support service for working women Social and economic
justification for early childhood care and education.
UNIT IV
Family and community participation in child care Family day Care center in
Mumbai Mobile crches in Delhi and Mumbai for construction workers children
Community pre-schools for the rural poor, the Tamilnadu Experiments Palmyrah Workers
Development Society, Martandom Child care in other countries Parent run daycare centers
of France The Beta Israel Project.
UNIT V
Child Welfare Services State level services Balwadi Anganwadi Role of
organisations providing child welfare services in India NCERT, ICCW, CSWB, NIPCCD.

REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Chhabra Rami Petterson Willy, The Situation of Children in India, 1979.

Erikson H Erick, Childhood and Society, Pergium Dorks Ltd, 1969.
Slackotane Fesser, Education and Daycare for Young Children in Need, The American
International, Geneva, 1985.
DeSouza Alfred, Children in India: Critical Issues in Human Development, 1979.
Jameson Kenneth, Pre-school and Infant Studies, Vista, London, 1972.
Why Children Matter, Bernard Van Leer Foundation (BVLF), 1994.
Salach Simcha, In First Person Plural, BVLF, 1993.
Ruthpaz, Paths to Empowerment, BVLF, 1990.

116

Paper 2.2: EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH SPECIFIC NEEDS

UNIT I
Special Children Meaning Categories Handicapped and the gifted
Physically handicapped Vision, speech and hearing impaired Mentally retarded
Gifted and talented Culturally disadvantaged Socially disadvantaged Their needs
and education.
UNIT II
Visually handicapped Categories and characteristics Identification,
correction and medical treatment Education of the visually handicapped
Instructional materials.
UNIT III
Speech and hearing impaired Nature Types Causes Identification of
problems Educational provisions for the physically handicapped in India The role
of All India Institute of Speech and Hearing Handicapped (AIISH).
UNIT IV
Mentally retarded Degrees of mental retardation Identifying the mentally
retarded Causes Working with a mentally disabled child.
UNIT V
Gifted children Concept Characteristics Needs Identification of gifted
children Creativity Meaning Identification Promoting education of the gifted
and creative children.

REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Daniel P Hallahan and James M Kauffman, Exceptional Children: Introduction

to Special Education, Prentice Hall, London, 1991.
Blake K A, The Mentally Retarded: An Education Psychology, Prentice Hall,
New Delhi, 1976.
Indira Swaminathan, Developing Creativity in Young Children.
Jangira, N.K. et-al, Source Book for Teaching Visually Disabled Children,
NCERT, New Delhi, 1988.
Uday Shanker, Exceptional Children, Sterling Publ. New Delhi, 1984.
Mani MNG, Techniques of Teaching Blind Children, Sterling, New Delhi.
Garret J F, Psychological Aspects of Physical Disability, Washington, 1952.

117

Paper 2.3: PLANNING AND ORGANISATION OF INSTITUTIONS

OF YOUNG CHILDREN
UNIT I
Physical set up of the day center, pre-school and primary school Building Site
Location Ventilation Light arrangement Floor and space School garden Playground
Provision of safe drinking water and sanitary conditions.
UNIT II
Guiding principles for programme planning Setting up and running a child care
centre Planning of activities and programmes of the preschool and primary school Shortterm and Long-term Daily schedule Weekly planning Planning for the term and yearly
planning Time-table and Calender.
UNIT III
Furniture, equipment and appliances Criteria for selection and purchase Their
functional utility and maintenance Indoor and outdoor equipments Equipments suitable for
different age groups.
UNIT IV
Records to be maintained in a crche, pre-school Importance, types and maintenance
Admission register, fee register, library register, stock book, school cash book, cumulative
records.
UNIT V
Parent education programme Programme for the parents and community Purpose
Organisation Motivation of the community Methods of educating the parents in the
community Securing cooperation through strategies such as home visits, interviews, group
discussion, parent-teacher meetings, exhibitions, lectures by specialists, pamphlets, booklets,
posters, newsletter, picnics Parental involvement of the school and the community in
programmes for the children Annaiar Kazhagam (Mothers Association).
REFERENCES
1. Wagh Anutai, Parent and Community, ECEIM, 1979.
2. Allen of Hurtwood, Planning for Play, Thames & Hudson, London, 1971.
3. Herron R E, Childrens Play, Johnwiley, London, 1971.
4. Betty L Broma, Early Years in Childhood Education, Rand McNally, Chicago, 1978.
5. Annie L Butler, Early Childhood Education, D.Van Hogland, New York, 1974.
6. Brophy J E et-al, Teaching in the Pre-school, Harper and Row, New York, 1975
7. Golby Greenward and West, Curriculum Design, ELBS, London, 1979.
8. Rajalakshmi Muralidharan and Uma Banaerjee, A Guide for Nursery School Teacher,
NCERT Publication.

118

Paper 2.4: RESEARCH IN CHILD STUDIES

UNIT I
Concept of Research Meaning Importance Characteristics Need for
research on children Problems for research on children Types of research
(fundamental, applied and action) Areas of research on child studies.
UNIT II
Steps in developing a research project Selection of a research problem
Sources Criteria for selection of the problem Justifying the significance of the
problem The value of review of related literature Hypothesis Meaning
Formulating types Sampling Meaning Need Techniques.
UNIT III
Common methods used to study children Systematic observation (naturalistic
observation and structural observation) Self reports (clinical interview, structural
interview, questionnaires and psychological test) Clinical method (case study)
Ethnography Construction and standardization of research tools.
UNIT IV
General research designs Co-relational designs Experimental designs
Designs for development The longitudinal design The cross sectional design
Problems in conducting longitudinal and cross sectional research Ethics in research
on children Guidelines for ethical research practice.
UNIT V
Analysis of research data and report writing Qualitative data analysis
Descriptive and inferential statistics Preparation and evaluation of research report
Writing of qualitative research report.

REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Bhatia H R, Understand your Children.

Driscoll G, How to Study the Behaviour of Children.
Straney Ruth, Introduction to Child Study.
Slee Philip T, Child Observation Skills.
Thomson George G, Child Psychology, Surjeet Publ. Delhi, 1979.
Jor Bagh, Study of the Young Child, UNICEF, New Delhi.
Best John W, Research in Education, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1985.
Buch M B, The Fifth Survey of Research in Education, NCERT, New Delhi,
1996.
119

Paper 2.5: PRE-SCHOOL HOME COMMUNITY LINKAGES

UNIT I
Community Meaning and scope Types of communities Pre-school as a
part of the community Home as a sub-system in the society Child as a link between
the home and the community Linking objectives of pre-school education with the
expectations of the parents, and the community.
UNIT II
The importance of partnership between the pre-school and the parents; and the
link between the pre-school and the community Communication as an essential
component in establishing linkage Hurdles in establishing the linkage Ways to
overcome barriers communication.
UNIT III
Strategies for enhancing pre-school-parent partnership Ensuring involvement
of rural and urban parents in the pre-school programme Formal and informal
strategies: Parent-teacher meetings, observing parents day, newsletters, circulars,
bulletin boards; home visits and informal discussion, games with parents, simple
celebration of birthdays, wedding anniversaries of the parents.
UNIT IV
Improving pre-school Community linkages Involving the community in
planning, executing, monitoring and assessing the pre-school programme
Establishing linkages with nearby pre-schools Peer supervision Ways of obtaining
services and financial assistance from the community.
UNIT V
The role of traditional and non-traditional media to reach the community Folk
media Villupattu, street plays, oyilaattam, harikatha, puppet shows Modern media
Mass media, radio, television, cinema, newspapers and magazines and posters Their
relative effectiveness in establishing the link.
UNIT VI
Planning and organising meetings of the pre-school staff with the parents and
the community Identifying the community leaders Involving the village panchayat
and local administration bodies in the development of the pre-school Issues and
agenda for discussion in these meetings Organising festivals and celebration of
important national days and religious festivals with the help of the community The
role of service organisations like Rotary Clubs, Lions Clubs and Jaycees, strengthening
120

the pre-school Involving the rural and urban disadvantaged groups and educating
them about the philosophy of the pre-school.
REFERENCES :
1. Wagh Anutai, Parent and Community, ECEIM, 1979.
2. G. Pankajam, Pre-school Education: Philosophy and Practice, Gandhigram Rural
University Press, 1991.
3. IAPE Conference reports on Parents and Community Links with Pre-Schools.
4. Rajalakshmi Muralidharan and Uma Banerjee, A Guide for Nursery School
Teachers, NCERT Publication.
5. Erickson H. Erick, Childhood and Society, Perguim Dorks Ltd., 1969.
6. Salach, Simcha, In First Person Plural, Bernard Van Leer Foundation, 1993.
7. Sarah Hamond Leeper et-al, Good Schools for Young Children, The Macmillan
Company, London, 1968.
8. Sylvia Krown, Threes and Fours Go to School, Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
9. Venna Hildebrand, Introduction to Early Childhood Education, Macmillan
Publishing Co. Inc., New York.

121

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:

M.Sc. Mathematics
Distance Education
Two Years
B.Sc. in Mathematics/Statistics/Applied Mathematics
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Total
Marks

I YEAR
1.1

Algebra

100

1.2

Real Analysis

100

1.3

Differential Equations and Numerical Methods

100

1.4

Operations Research

100

1.5

Mathematical Statistics

100

2.1

Complex Analysis

100

2.2

Topology and Functional Analysis

100

2.3

Graph Theory

100

2.4

Programming in C / C ++

100

2.5

Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics

100

Total

1000

II YEAR

122

Paper 1.1: ALGEBRA

UNIT I
Groups Subgroups Normal subgroups Isormorphism theorems
Permutation groups Abelian groups Automorphisms Conjugate classes
Sylows theorems Direct products.
UNIT II
Rings Ideals Maximal, prime ideals Integral domains Euclidean
domains Unique factorisation domains.
UNIT III
Vector spaces, linear transformations Canonical form, triangular form
Nilpotent transformation Jordan form Hermitian, unitary and normal
transformations.
UNIT IV
Fields, extension fields, roots of polynomials Splitting fields Galois
theory, finite fields.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Herstein I N, Topics in Algebra, ed2, Vikas Publications.
2. John B Fraliegh, A First Course in Abstract Algebra, Addision Wesley.

123

Paper 1.2: REAL ANALYSIS

UNIT I
Open balls, Closed balls in Rn Closed sets and adherent points The
Bolzano-Weierstrass theorem The Cantor intersection theorem The HeineBorel covering theorem Compactness in Rn, limits and continuity Continuous
functions, functions continuous on compact sets, Union continuity Fixed point
theorem for contractions.
UNIT II
Derivatives The chain rule, functions with nonzero derivative, Zero
derivatives and local extrema, Rolles theorem, the Mean-value theorem for
derivatives, intermediate value theorem for derivatives, Taylors formula with
remainder, Partial derivatives, Directional derivative, the Total derivative, the
Inverse function theorem, the Implicit function theorem.
UNIT III
The Riemann-Stieltjes Integral Definition and existence of the integral,
properties of the integral, differentiation under integral sign, interchanging the
order of integration Sequence of functions, uniform convergence and
Riemann-Stieltjes integration, uniform convergence and differentiation.
UNIT IV
Lebesque measure, Outer measure, Measurable sets and Lebesgue
measure, Measurable functions, Egoroffs theorem, Lusins theorem, the
Lebesgue integral, Bounded convergence theorem, Fatous lemma, Monotone
convergence theorem, Lebesgue convergence theorem, Convergence in measure.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Tom M Appostol, Mathematical Analysis, Addision Wesley, Narosa.
2. Walter Rudin, Principles of Mathematical Analysis, Mc-Graw Hill.
3. Royden, Analysis.

124

Paper 1.3: DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND NUMERICAL

METHODS
UNIT I
Ordinary Differential Equations Initial value problems for second order
equations, a formula for the Wronskian, The use of a known solution to find
another, Linear equations with variable coefficients, The method of
undetermined coefficiens, The method of variation parameters, Power series
solution The Legendre equation, Bessel equation.
UNIT II
Partial Differential Equations Linear equations of first order, Cauchys
method of characteristics, Charpits method, Solutions satisfying given
conditions, Jacobis method, Second order equations, Equation with variable
coefficients, Separation of variable, Laplaces equation, Boundary value
problems, Wave equation, Elementary solution of one-dimensional wave
equation.
UNIT III
Numerical Analysis System of equations and unconstraint optimization
Steepest descent Newtons method Fixed point iteration and relaxation
method Uniform approximation by polynomials Data fitting - Orthogonal
polynomials Least square approximation by polynomials.
UNIT IV
Numerical differentiation, integration, the solution of differential
equations.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1.
2.
3.
4.

Ian Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations, McGraw-Hill.

Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, PHI.
Simmons F, Differential Equation with Applications, TMH.
Elementary Numerical Analysis: An Algorithmic Approach, McGraw-Hill.

125

Paper 1.4: OPERATIONS RESEARCH

UNIT I
Linear programming Simplex method Dual simplex method Revised
simplex method Sensitivity or postophmal analysis Parametric linear
programming Integer programming.
UNIT II
Dynamic programming Decisions under risk Decisions under
uncertainty Game theory.
UNIT III
Project Scheduling by PERT-CPM, Inventory models Types of
inventory models Deterministic models Probabilistic models.
UNIT IV
Queueing theory Queueing models (M/M/I): (GD//), (M/M/I):
(GD/N/), (M/M/C): (GD//).

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Hamdyn A Taha,Operations Research, Macmillan.

126

Paper 1.5: MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

UNIT I
Two dimensional and n-dimensional random variable, Marginal
distribution, Distribution functions, Independent random variables, Conditional
expectation, Principle of least squares, Discrete distributions, Continuous
distributions, Beta and Gamma distributions, Generating functions, Convergence
and Limit theorems.
UNIT II
Exact sampling distributions, t-distribution, Weak law of large numbers
and Central limit theorem, Exact distribution of sample characteristics, Theory
of estimation, Maximum likelihood estimation, Confidence intervals, Large
sample confidence intervals.
UNIT III
Test of hypothesis, Composite hypothesis, Comparison of normal
population, Large sample tests, Test of multinomial distribution.
UNIT IV
Statistical quality control and analysis of variance.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Baisnal AP and Jas M, Elements of Probability and Statistics, Tata McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, 1993.
2. Gupta SC and Kapur VK, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, Sultan Chand &
Sons.

127

Paper 2.1: COMPLEX ANALYSIS

UNIT I
The geometric representation of a complex number The spherical representation and
stereographic projection Analytic function CR equations Harmonic conjugate To find an
analytic function f(z)=u+iv if a harmonic function us is gien.
Power series Radius of convergence Power series represents an analytic function
inside the circle of convergence Abels limit theorem.
Conformal mappings Bilinear transformations Fixed point of bilinear
transformations Cross ratio Most general bilinear transformations which transforms unit
disk onto the unit disk; half plane Im(z) 0 onto the unit disk.
Transformations w=zn, w=z, w=ez, w=1/z, w=sin z, w=tan z, w=(1/2) [z+(1/z)].
UNIT II
Complex integration Cauchys theorem for a rectangle For a disk The index of a
point with respect to a closed curve Cauchys integral formula Higher derivatives Taylors
theorem Zeros The local mapping theorem The maximum principle Schwarzs lemma
Moreras theorem Cauchys estimate Liouvilles theorem Fundamental theorem of
algebra.
UNIT III
The Laurent series Singularities The residue theorem The argument principle
Rouches theorem Evaluation of definite integrals.
Mittag Leffler theorem Entire functions Canonical products Genus The
gamma function Legendres duplication formula Jensens formula Hadamards theorem.
UNIT IV
Doubly periodic functions Weierstrass -function First order differential equation
for w=(z).
TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :
1. Aholfors V, Complex Analysis.
2. Karunakaran V, Complex Analysis.
3. Sridharan N, Introduction to Complex Analysis.
4. Arumugam S, Complex Analysis.

128

Paper 2.2: TOPOLOGY AND FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS

UNIT I
Topological spaces Definition Elementary concepts Bases, subbases, product spaces Compactness Tchonoffs theorem Compactness for
metric spaces Locally compact spaces.
UNIT II
Separation axioms Uryshons lemma Tietze extension theorem
Urshons imbedding theorem Connected spaces Components of a space
Totally disconnected spaces Locally connected spaces Locally compact
Hausdorffs spaces One point compactification.
UNIT III
Banach spaces Bounded linear transformations The Hahn-Banach
theorem The open mapping theorem The closed graph theorem The
uniform boundedness theorem.
UNIT IV
Hilbert spaces Schwartz inequality The parallelogram law
Orthogonal complements Orthonormal sets Bessels inequality Equivalent
conditions for complete orthonormal set Conjugate space H * - The adjoint of
an operator Self-adjoint operators Normal unitary operators Projections
Finite dimensional operator theory.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Simmons G F, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis.

129

Paper 2.3: GRAPH THEORY

UNIT I
Graphs Walk, path, cycle Bipartite graphs Trees Cutest
Fundamental circuits Spanning trees Cayleys formula Kruskals algorithm.
UNIT II
Connectivity Blocks Euler tours Hamiltonian cycles Closure of a
graph Chavatal theorem for Non-Hamiltonian simple graphs.
UNIT III
Independent sets Cliques Ramseys numbers Vertex colouring
Brooks theorem Hajos conjecture Chromatic polynomials.
UNIT IV
Planar graphs Dual graphs Eulers formula The five colour theorem
Non-Hamiltonian planar graphs Directed graphs Networks of flows Maxflow Min-cut theorem.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Bondy and Murty, Graph Theory and Its Applications.
2. Balakrishnan R, Graph Theory.
3. Arumugam S, Invitation to Graph Theory.

130

Paper 2.4: PROGRAMMING IN C/C++

UNIT I
Introduction: A computer program Programming languages Compilers and
interpreters Why C/C++ - Function libraries Object oriented programming Steps
in program development Syntax of language and logic programming.
C/C++ Basics: Structure of a C program Return () function Comments in C
and C++ - # include command Characters, integers, decimal numbers Keywords
Constants and variables and their declaration Data types and functions Literals.

UNIT II
Output and Input in C/C++: Puts() and putchar() functions Control codes
Printf() function Formatted output Output in C++ - gets() and getchar() functions
Scanf() function Input in C++ - Useful input functions.
Arithmetic Operations and Functions: Arithmetic operators Integer division
Operators and data types Extensions Order of precedence Counters, increment
and assignment operators Using functions Local and global variables.

UNIT III
Control Structures: if and if . else statements Nested if statements
Relational operators Logic operators Switch command for, do . while, while
loops Nested do loops Combining loop types Using flags and break statement.
Arrays and Strings: Arrays Definition, declaration, entering variables in
manipulating arrays Examining and passing an array Strings Comparing two
strings Determining string length Assigning and combining strings String arrays.

UNIT IV
Structures and Pointers: Structures Definition Assigning structure variable
Assigning initial values Using a structure Structure ways Structure and functions
Understanding pointers Pointers and functions.
File operations: Understanding files Declaring a file Opening a file
Closing a file Input and output functions Formatted input and output Working
with structures Adding data to a file Reading and printing a disk file.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Allan R. Neibauer, Your First C/C++ Program.
2. Paul M. Chirian, Programming in C++.

131

Paper 2.5: DISCRETE AND COMBINATORIAL MATHEMATICS

UNIT I
Generating functions for combinations Enumerators for permutations
Distributions of distinct objects into non-distinct cells Partitions of integers
The Ferrers graph Recurrence relations Linear recurrence relations with
constant coefficients Non-linear difference equations Recurrence relations
with two indices.
UNIT II
The principle of inclusion and exclusion Derangements Permutations
with restrictions on relative positions Permutation with forfidden positions.
UNIT III
Polyas theory of counting Equivalence classes under a permutation
group Polyas fundamental theorem Generalization of Polyas theorem.
UNIT IV
Lattices and Boolean algebra Lattices Properties of lattices Modular
and distribution lattices Boolean algebra Boolean polynomials Canonical
forms Karnaugh map Simplification of logical functions using Karnaugh
map Switching circuits.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCES :

1. Liu C L, Introduction to Combinatorial Mathematics, McGraw-Hill.
2. Venketraman M K, Sridharan N and Chandrasekaran N, Discrete Mathematics.

132

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:

M.Sc. (Information Technology)

Distance Education
Two years
Any bachelor degree from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Subject Code

Title

Total Marks

I YEAR
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7

Principles of Information Technology

Operating System
Object Oriented Programming and C++
Data Structures and Algorithms
Object Oriented DBMS
Lab I : C++
Lab II : Data Structures

100
100
100
100
100
100
100

Internet Programming and Web Design

Computer Networks
Software Engineering
Visual Programming
Multimedia Applications
Lab III : Internet Programming
Lab IV: Visual Programming

100
100
100
100
100
100
100

II YEAR
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Total

133

1400

Paper 1.1: PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

UNIT I
An overview of the Revolution in Computers and Communications: From the analog to the
digital age: The New Story of computers and communications The six elements of a computer and
communications system Computer and communications technology combined: Connectivity and
interactivity Application Software: The four types of applications software The user interface and
other basic features Word processing Spreadsheets Database software Presentation graphics
software Communications software Desktop accessories and personal information managers
Integrated software and suites Groupware Internet web browsers Specialised software.
UNIT II
Communications:
Starting along the information highway:
The practical uses of
communications and connectivity Telephone related communications services Video/voice
communication: Video conferencing and picture phones Online information services The Internet
Shared resources: Workgroup computing, Electronic data interchange and Intranets.
UNIT III
Telecomputing and virtual offices Using a microcomputer to communicate: Analog and
Digital signals Modems and Datacomm software, ISDN lines and Cable modems Communication
Channels: Communications networks Local networks Factors affecting data transmission
Cyberethics: Netiquette, Controversial material and censorship, and privacy issues.
UNIT IV
Introduction to C: Fundamentals of C Programming C characters Names or identifiers
Keywords Sample C program Arithmetic operations: Operators, Assignment, Hierarchy, Library
functions Characters and strings Input/output streams, Program Control: Logical operators IF and
IF..ELSE constructions Looping Nested loops Switch case construction Bitwise operations
Structured programming.
UNIT V
Arrays: Vectors One dimensional arrays Vectors and pointers Using vectors with
functions Multidimensional arrays Multidimensional arrays and pointers Strings Structures,
Pointers and Functions.
UNIT VI
Functions: Functions Argument Passing: Pass-by-value, Pass-by-reference Variables
Scope Libraries Recursion Default Arguments Overloaded functions Pointers to functions
Macros and Inline functions Modularization.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stacey C Sawyer, Brain K Williams, Sarah E Hutchinson, Using Information Technology: A
Practical Introduction to Computer and Communications, Ed2, McGraw-Hill, Unit-I,II.
2. Byron Gottrifried, Programming with C, McGraw-Hill (1990).
3. J Hames OBrien, Introduction to Information System.

134

Paper 1.2: OPERATING SYSTEMS

UNIT I
Introduction: What is an operating system History of operating systems Operating
system concepts System calls Operating system structure.
UNIT II
Process Management: Introduction to processes Interprocess communication: Race
conditions Critical sections Mutual exclusion Semaphores Event counters Monitors
Message passing Process scheduling Round robin scheduling Priority scheduling
Multiple queues Shortest job first Policy driven scheduling Two level scheduling.
UNIT III
Input/Output Management: I/O Devices Device controllers Goals of I/O software
Interrupt handlers Device drivers Device-independent I/O software User-space I/O
software Deadlocks: Resources Deadlock modeling Detection and recovery Deadlock
prevention Avoidance.
UNIT IV
Memory Management:
Memory management without swapping or paging:
Multiprogramming without swapping or paging Multiprogramming and memory usage
Multiprogramming with fixed partitions.
UNIT V
Swapping: Multiprogramming with variable partitions Memory management with
Bit-maps, Linked-lists and Buddy system Analysis of swapping systems Virtual memory:
Paging Segmentation Page replacement algorithms.
UNIT VI
File Management: File basics Directories Disk space management File storage
Directory structure Shared files File system reliability File system performance File
servers Security Protection mechanisms.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James L Peterson & Abraham Silberschatz, Operating System Concepts, Addision Wesley
(1985).
2. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Operating Systems Design and Implementation, Prentice Hall
(1987).
3. Philippe A Janson, Operating Systems Structures and Mechanisms, Academic Press (1985).
4. Harvey M Deitel, An Introduction to Operating Systems, Addison Wesley (1984).
5. Stuart E Madnick & John J Donovan, Operating Systems, McGraw-Hill, ISE (1968).
6. Per Brinch Hansen, Operating System Principles, Prentice-Hall of India (1973).

135

Paper 1.3: OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING AND C++

UNIT I
Basics and Conventions Evolution of Object Oriented Languages Object
Oriented Paradigm Object Oriented Languages Objects and Classes
Encapsulation and Abstraction Inheritance and Polymorphism.

UNIT II
Moving to C++ - A better C Using predefined objects Streams Controlling
execution in C and C++ - Standard I/O Programming using stream and standard I/O.

UNIT III
Creating classes with C++ - C++ operators and their uses Creating functions
Unique features of C++ functions The Class: Defining boundaries Defining class
member functions Derived classes Constructors and Destructors.

UNIT IV
Pointers Using pointers and addresses Variable pointers Array pointers
The size of a pointer Function Addresses Examples of pointer use Reference
feature Advantages and problems with reference.

UNIT V
Operator Functions Overloading functions and operators Syntax of operator
overloading Examples Creating type conversion operators Function overloading.

UNIT VI
Reusing Code in C++ : Reusing code with member objects Reusing code
with inheritance Storing objects on disk A list that can save and retrieve itself.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bruce Eckel, Using C++, Osborne McGraw-Hill (1989).

2. Kaare Christian, The Microsoft Guide to C++ Programming, Microsoft Press
(1992).
3. Stroustrup, The C++ Programming Language, Galgotia Publications (1999).

136

Paper 1.4: DATA STRUCTURE AND ALGORITHMS

UNIT I
Introduction Primitive data types Algorithms Complexity time and space.

UNIT II
Arrays Storage structures Arrays or structures Stacks Queues Priority
queues Applications. Pointers linked allocations Linear lists Singly linked
Doubly linked Circularly linked applications.

UNIT III
String manipulations Representation Pattern matching algorithms.

UNIT IV
Trees: Binary trees Binary tree representations Search trees Trees and their
applications Binary operations Graphs Representations, traversals Algorithms.

UNIT V
Sorting: Selection, Bubble, Merge, Heap, Quick, Radix, Tree sorting.

UNIT VI
Searching: Basic search techniques Tree searching General search trees
Hashing.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jean Paul Tremblay & Paul G Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with
Applications, McGraw-Hill, 1984.
2. Tannenbaum A M, Langsam Y & Augestein M J, Data Structures Using C, Prentice
Hall, 1990.
3. Sara Base, Computer Algorithms: Introduction to Design and Analysis, Addison
Wesley, 1989.
4. Ellis Horowitz & S Sahani, Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms, Galgotia Publ.

137

Paper 1.5: OBJECT ORIENTED DBMS

UNIT I
Introduction to Database Systems: File systems versus DBMS
Advantages of DBMS Describing and storing data in DBMS The relational
model Levels of abstraction in DMBS Data independence Queries in
DBMS Transaction management Structure of DBMS.

UNIT II
The Entity-Relationship Model: Overview of database design Entitles,
Attributes and Entity Sets Relationships and relationship sets Additional
features of the ER Model Key constraints Participation constraints Week
entities Class hierarchies Aggregation Conceptual database design with the
ER model.

UNIT III
SQL: The form of a basic SQL query Union, Intersect and Except
Nested queries Aggregate operators Null values Embedded SQL Cursors
Dynamic SQL ODBC and JDBC Complex integrity constraints in SQL-92
Triggers and active databases Designing active database query by example
(QBE): Basic QBE queries Queries over multiple relations Negation in the
relation Name column Aggregates The conditions box Unnamed columns
Updates Division and relational completeness.

UNIT IV
Database Design: Introduction to schema refinement Functional
dependencies Normal forms Boyce-Codd normal form Third normal form
Decompositions Lossless-Join Decomposition Dependency-Preserving
Decomposition Decomposition into BCNF Decomposition into 3NF Other
kinds of dependencies Multivalued dependencies Fourth normal form Join
dependencies Fifth normal form Inclusion dependencies. Physical Database
Design and Tuning: Introduction to physical database design Guidelines for
index selection Basic examples of index selection Clustering and indexing
Co-clustering two relations Indexes on Multiple-Attribute search keys
Overview of database tuning Choices in tuning the conceptual schema.

138

UNIT V
Security:
Introduction to database security Access control
Discretionary access control Mandatory access control Additional issues
related to security. Parallel and distributed databases: Architectures for parallel
databases Parallel query evaluation Parallelizing individual operations
Parallel query optimization Introduction to distributed databases Distributed
DBMS architectures Storing data in a distributed DBMS Distributed query
processing.

UNIT VI
Internet Databases: The World Wide Web Introduction to XML XML
DTDs Domain Specific DTDs XML-QL: Querying SML Data. ObjectDatabase Systems: Database design for an ORDBMS Structured types and
ADTs Object identity Extending the ER model Using nested collections
The ODMG data model and ODL OQL RDBMS versus ORDBMS
OODBMS versus ORDBMS: Similarities OODBMS versus ORDBMS:
Differences.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Raghu Ramakrishnan & Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 2nd

edition, McGraw-Hill.
2. Silberschatz A, Korth H F & Sudarshan S, Database systems Concepts, 3rd edition,
McGraw-Hill, 1997.
3. Eimasri R, Navathe S & Benjamin Cummings, Fundamentals of Database Systems.
4. Rob Coronel, Database Systems Design: Implementation and Management, 4th edn.
5.
David M Kroenke, Database Processing Fundamentals: Design and
Implementation, 7th edition.

139

Paper 2.1: INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND WEB DESIGN

UNIT I
Foundations for Internet Programming: An overview of internet
programming WWW design issues Security and Encryption Developing
Intranet applications.

UNIT II
Internet Programming Languages: Java Java in Windows CGI Perl
Microsoft Internet implementation.

UNIT III
Internet Scripting Languages: Java Script VB Script Other Scripting
languages.

UNIT IV
Internet Markup Languages: HTML SGML Netscape extensions
Microsoft internet explorer Only HTML tags Shockwave and Lingo.

UNIT V
ActiveX Controls: Creating an ActiveX control to activate a Web Page VDO
Live Technology Creating Netscape Navigator Plug-ins Pulling web information
Creating a custom integrated application with multiple protocols.

UNIT VI
Web Graphics: A graphic view of web Essay web graphics Images
and Hyperlinks Adding graphics to web pages Site and page design
Framing your graphics Dynamic graphics Animation.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1.
2.
3.
4.

Bob Breedlove et-al, Web Programming Unleased, Sams Net Publ., 1996.
Ron Wodaski, Web Graphics Bible, Comdex Computer Publ., 1997.
Young, Internet, Millennium edition, Complete reference, TMH, 1998.
Powerll, HTML: The Complete Reference, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.

140

Paper 2.2: COMPUTER NETWORKS

UNIT I
Introduction: Uses of computer networks Network hardware and network software
Reference models Example networks Network standardisation.
UNIT II
Physical Layer: Transmission media Telephone system ISDN Broadband and
Narrowband ISDN ISDN and ATM Communication Satellites.
UNIT III
Data Link Layer: Design issues Error detection and correcting codes Elementary
data link protocols Sliding window protocols Protocol Specification and Verification:
Finite State models Petri Net models Example Dlink Protocols: HDLC SLIP PPP
Media Access Sublayer: Multiple access protocols ALOHA Carrier sense multiple access
protocols Collision free protocols.
UNIT IV
Network Layer: Design issues Routing algorithms Congestion control algorithms
Internet working: Tunneling Fragmentation Firewalls Network layer in the internet IP
Subnets Internet Control Protocols: Address resolution protocol ICMP RARP Internet
multicasting Network Layer in ATM Networks: Cell format Connection setup Routing
and switching Services categories ATM LANs.
UNIT V
Transport Layer: Transport service Elements of Transport Protocols: Addressing
Flow control and buffering Multiplexing Crash recovery Performance issues Measuring
network performance Internet transport protocols TCP UDP Protocols for Gigabit
networks.
UNIT VI
Application Layer: Network security Cryptography Secret and public key
algorithms DNS SNMP Electronic Mail Electronic Mail privacy World Wide Web:
Client side Server side Multimedia Audio Video Data Compression JPEG, MPEG
Standards.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:
Andrew S Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of India.
Uless Black, Computer Networks, Prentice Hall of India.

141

Paper 2.3: SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

UNIT I
The Evolving role of Software Process methods and tools Software process models
Linear sequential model Prototyping model Real model Evolutionary software process
model Formal methods model Fourth generation techniques Project management concepts
Software process and project metric.
UNIT II
Software Project Planning Observation on estimating software Scope, Resources,
Project estimation, Decomposition techniques, Empirical estimation models The Make Busy
divisions Risk management Software risk identification Risk projection, Risk mitigation
Monitoring and management.
UNIT III
Project Scheduling and Tracking Basic concepts Defining a task set for the software
project Scheduling plan Software quality assurance Quality concepts and assurance
Software reliability ISO 9000 Quality standards Software configuration management
Software reviews Formal technical reviews Statistical quality assurance.
UNIT IV
System Engineering: System engineering hierarchy Analysis concepts and principles
Requirements analysis Communication techniques Analysis, principles Software
prototyping Specification modeling and information flow Behavioural modeling
Mechanics of structured analysis Design concepts and principles Design process
Principles Concepts Effective modular design.
UNIT V
Design Methods: Architectural design Data design Architectural design and
process Transform mapping design Post processing and optimization interface design
Human computer interface design.
UNIT VI
Software testing methods Fundamentals Test case design White box testing
Basis path testing Control structure testing Black box testing Testing for specialized
environment Testing strategies Unit testing Integration Validation System testing Art
of debugging.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Roger S Prssman, Software Engineering: A Practitioners Approach, McGraw Hill (2000).
2. Pankaj Jaiote, An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Narose Publishing House
(1991).
3. Richard Fairlay, Software Engineering Concepts, McGraw-Hill (1985).

142

Paper 2.4: VISUAL PROGRAMMING

UNIT I
Windows Programming:
Conceptual comparison of traditional
programming paradigms Overview of windows programming Data types
Resources.
UNIT II

Windows messages Device contexts Document interfaces Dynamic

linking libraries Software Development Kit (SDK) tools Context help.

UNIT III
Visual Basic Programming: Introduction Forms Variables, Types
Properties Decision-making Looping Modules Procedures Functions.

UNIT IV
Tool Box Controls Menus Grid controls Dialog boxes Database
manager Data control Recordset objects.

UNIT V
Visual C++ Programming: Objects Classes VC++ components
Resources Event handling Menus Dialog boxes Importing VBX controls
Files MFC file handling Document view architecture Serialization
Multiple Document Interface (MDI) Splitter windows.

UNIT VI
Exception Handling Debugging Object Linking and Embedding
(OLE) Database Application DLL ODBC.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS :

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Charles Petzold, Windows Programming, Microsoft Press, 1992.

Garry Cornell, Visual Basic 6 From the Ground up, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.
Steven Holzner, Visual C++ Programming, 2nd edition, PHI Publishers, 1997.
David Kruglinski J, Inside Visual C++, Microsoft Press, 1993.
Mueller, VC++ 5 From the Group up, TMH, 1997.
Viktor Toth, Visual C++ 5 Unleashed, 2nd edition, Tech Media, 1997.

143

Paper 2.5: MULTIMEDIA AND APPLICATIONS

UNIT I
Multimedia in Use and Technology: Introducing multimedia Multimedia
definition Need, benefits and problems System components Multimedia platforms
Development tools; Types Cross platform compatibility Commercial tools
Standards.

UNIT II
Media Types: Non-temporal Text, image, graphics Temporal Analog,
digital audio/video, music, animation, other media types Extended images, digital
ink, speech audio.

UNIT III
Digital Video and Image Compression: Evaluating a compression system
Redundancy and visibility Video compression techniques Image compression
standards JPEG, MPEG, DV1.

UNIT IV
Object Oriented Multimedia: Objects, Classes and related items Multimedia
Frameworks: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes, Component
classes.

UNIT V
Multimedia Environments: The CD family, CD-i Overview Media types
Media organization Architecture and operations, Applications: Media in real world
Multimedia on networks Training and education.
TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Juidth Jeffcoate, Multimedia in Practice: Technoloy and Application, Chapters 1, 2,

3, 12, 13, Prentice-Hall, 1995.
2. Simon J Gibbs and Dionysion C Tsichrikzis, Multimedia Programming, Chapters 2,
3, 4, 5, Addison Wesly, 1994.
3. John F Koegel Buford, Multimedia Systems, Addison Wesley, 1994.
4. Walter Worth John A, Multimedia Technology and Applications, Ellis Horowood
Ltd, 1991.
5. Arch C Luther, Designing Interactive Multimedia, Bantam Books, 1992.

144

M.Sc. (IT) I Year

Practical: Lab-I: C++
SYLLABUS : C++ Programming using Standard I/O statements, Control statements,
strings, arrays, structures, pointers and files.
Object Oriented Programming using
Class and objects, constructors and destructors
Online, friend and virtual functions
Overloading - functions and operators
Inheritance and Templates
TOTAL MARKS : 100 (1 or 2 PROBLEMS are TO BE SOLVED IN UNIVERSITY
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION)
BREAK-UP OF MARK:
RECORD NOTE BOOK
ALGORITHM AND FLOWCHART
PROGRAM
DEBUGGING
EXECUTION
RESULT

: 10
: 10
: 50
: 10
: 10
: 10

MODEL PROBLEMS
1.

Write a C++ program to reverse the sentence and find the given sentence is
palindrome or not.

2.

Write a temperature conversion program that gives the user the option of
converting fahrenheit to celcius or celcius to fahrenheit. Then carry out the
conversion. Use floating point numbers.

3.

Create a class called TIME that has integer data elements for hours, minutes,
seconds. The constructors should initialize these data elements to specified
value, if given, and otherwise to 0. A member function should display it, in
11:50:45 format. The final member function should add two
objects of type
Time passed as arguments.
145

4.

Using operator overloading, write a C++ program to find the different and total
length of given two various tubes specified in meters and centimeters.

5.

Assumes you want to generate a table of multiples of any given number. Write a
program that allows the user to enter the number, and then generates the table,
formatting it into ten columns and 20 lines.

6.

Write a program to process students marks with the help of classes. The class
has private variables, for name, mark1, mark2, mark3. It has two member
functions - getdata()- to get input. - result() - to print the results. All subjects
mark must be >= 50 for Pass otherwise Fail

7.

Using dynamic constructors write a C++ program to concatenate two given

strings.

8.

Create a class Employee that contains a Employee number, Employee name and
address. Write a Menu driven C++ program to get the 'n' number of employee
details and display all details in employee namewise sorted order.

9.

Using Pointers create a class and write a program to get the n names and display
them in sorted order.

10. Create a class DONOR that contains donor number, donor name,

age, address,

sex, blood group.

Write a Menu driven C++ program to display the number, name and address of
the donors for the following categories:
(i) blood donors having the blood group O+
(ii) blood donors in the age group between 16 to 25
(iii) female donors having blood group A in the age between 19 and 24.
11. Write a menu driven C++ program to add and subtract given two matrices of

order m x n defined in class, using operator overloading.

12. 12. Create

a class called Employee that contains Employee number,

employee name, designation, basic pay, deductions(LIC,PF). Include a member
function to getdata from user for 'n' employees. Write a C++ program to prepare
the payslips for 'n' number of employees using the following details:
D.A = 40% of basicpay
H.R.A = 25% of Basicpay
Gpay = Basicpay+D.A+H.R.A
146

Npay = Gpay-deductions
The Result of Problem is in given format:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Emp.no Emp.name Basic D.A HRA LIC PF Gpay Npay
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13. Imagine a publishing company that markets both books and audio-cassette

versions of its works. Create a class publication that stores the title (a string)
and price (type float) of a publication. From this class derive two classes:
BOOK, which adds a page count (type int ).and TAPE, which adds a length
count (type int). Each of these three classes should have a getdata() function to
get its data from the user at the keyboard, and a putdata() function to display its
data.
Write a main() program to test the book and tape classes by creating
instances of them, asking the user to fill in their data with getdata() and then
displaying the data with putdata().
14. Raising a number n to power p is the same as multiplying by itself t times.

Write a function called power() that takes a double value for n and an int value
for p, and returns the result as double value. Use default argument of 2 for p, so
that if this argument is omitted, the number will be squared. Write a main()
function that gets values from the user to test this function.
15. Create a equivalent of a four-function calculator. The program should request

the user to enter a number, an operator, and another number. It should then
carry out the specified arithmetical operations: adding, multiplying,
subtracting, dividing the two numbers. Finally it should display the result.
When it finishes the calculation, the program should ask if the user wants to do
another calculation.
16. 16. Create a class that imitates part of the functionality of the basic data type

int. Call the class Int. The only data in this class is an integer variable. Include
member functions to initialize an Int to zero, to initialize it to an integer value, to
display it, and to add two Int values. Write a program that exercise this class
by creating to initialized and one uninitialized Int values, adding these two
initialized values and placing the sum in the uninitialized value, and then
displaying the result.

147

17. Create a class called employee that contains a name and an employee number.

Include a member function called getdata() to get data from the user, another
function called putdata() to display the data.
Write a main() program to
exercise this class. It should create an array of type employee and then invite the
user to input data for n employees.
18. Write a program using Polymorphism to calculate the square of any two numbers

of type int, float, double and long.

19. Write a function called reversit() that reverse a string(an array of char). Use a for

loop that swaps the first and last characters, then the second and next-to-last
characters and so on. The string should be passed to reversit() as an argument.
Write a program to exercise reversit(). The program should get a
string from
the user, call reversit(), and print out the result. Use an input method that allows
embedded blanks. Test the program with Napolean's famous phrase "Able was I
ere I saw Elba".
20. Create a class Int to Overload all five integer arithmetic operators (+,-,*,/,and

%) so that they operate on objects of type Int. If the result of any such arithmetic
operation exceeds the normal range of int's - from -32,768 ro 32,767- have the
operator print a warning and terminate the program. Write a program to test this
class.
21. Write a program that reads a group of numbers from the user and places them in

array of type float. Once the numbers are sorted in the array, the program should
average them and print the result. Use Pointer notation whenever possible.
22. Write a program using friend function frifunc() which can act on the classes alpha

and beta.Using constructors fix the values for alpha and beta.
23. 23. Write a program that emulates the DOS COPY command. That is, it should

copy the contents of a character file(such as any cpp file) to another file.
Invoke the program with two command line
arguments - the source file and
the destination file. C> copy srsfile.ext destfile.ext In the program, check that the
user has typed the correct number of command line arguments, and that the files
specified can be opened. Improve on the DOS TYPE command by having the
program signal an error if the destination file already exits.
24. Write a C++ program which will accept a string of 10 characters in length

from the key board and count the occurrences of each of the five vowels in the
string. The o/p should be in a (tapped) format similar to this example.
148

A E I O U
0 1 0 0 1
25. 25. Create a C++ class for a stock item abstract data type. It should have the

attributes of stock levels(an integer) and unit price (a float ). Define the methods
to t return the values of these two attributes and to set them using parameters.
Add two more methods to allow stock receipts and issues updating the
stocklevel as appropriate. Write a menu driven c++ program to solve the
problem.

M.Sc. (IT) I Year

Practical: Lab-II: DATA STRUCTURES
SYLLABUS : C++ programming for implementing the data structures like array,
linked list, stack, queue and performing their operations.
TOTAL MARKS : 100 (1 or 2 PROBLEMS TO BE SOLVED IN UNIVERSITY
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION)
BREAK-UP OF MARK:
RECORD NOTE BOOK
ALGORITHM AND FLOWCHART
PROGRAM
DEBUGGING
EXECUTION
RESULT

: 10
: 10
: 50
: 10
: 10
: 10

Write C++ program to perform the following :

1. Matrix manipulation (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Inverse and
Transpose)
2. Sorting elements using selection sort
3. Sorting elements using insertion sort
4. Sorting elements using Bubble sort.
149

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Searching elements using linear search method

Searching elements using Binary search method
Creation of linked list and performing its operations using array.
Creation of linked list and performing its operations using pointers
Implementing stack operations using array.
Implementing stack operations using linked list.
Implementing queue structure and its operations using array.
Linked list implementation of queue.
Sorting elements using Quick Sort.
Sorting elements using Heap Sort.
Copy contents of one file to another file.

*
*
*
M.Sc. (IT) II Year
Practical: Lab-III: INTERNET PROGRAMMING
SYLLABUS : Prorgramming in Java, Javascript, Vbscript, JFC/Swing Java Applet
Programming using various controls like Text Box, Button, Frame, Panel, Fonts and
Colours
TOTAL MARKS : 100 (1 or 2 PROBLEMS TO BE SOLVED IN UNIVERSITY
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION)
BREAK-UP OF MARK:
RECORD NOTE BOOK
ALGORITHM
PROGRAM
DEBUGGING
EXECUTION
RESULT

: 10
: 10
: 50
: 10
: 10
: 10

MODEL PROBLEMS
JAVA SCRIPT
1. Write a Java Script to create a window by using the confirm message?

150

2.
3.

Write a JavaScript to create an Order Form to select the home appliances (home
need products)?
Write a JavaScript to create a color Pallet and display the background in the
color chosen from the Pallet.

VB SCRIPT
4. Write a VBScript to do the following
(a) Check the given Password
(b) Change the existing Password
5. Write a VBScript to do the following
a) Display the current date
b) Find the difference between the two dates
c) Find the age of a person by providing date of birth.
6. Write a VBScript to create a calendar for a given month and year?
JDBC
7. Using database connectivity display the records in a table.
8. Using database connectivity insert and delete records from a table.

Applets / HTML
9. Write a Java program using Applet to display any 3 images when 3 buttons in
the Border layout are clicked. The image should be displayed at the center.
10. Write a Java program using Applet to display the dialogue and menu in applet.
11. Write a Java program using Applet to create the frames and its controls.
12. Write a JAVA program to create an applet to display the message "HAVE A
NICE DAY" with different colors and fonts for each click.
13. Write an applet program to draw a filled rectangle and circle. Use graphic
controls.
14. Design a web page using HTML code to display the details of your institution
where you are doing course.
151

15. Design a web page with a form in it. The form has the following details :
Employee Number, Employee Name, Designation, Basic Pay, Dearness
Allowance (DA), House Rent Allowance (HRA), Provident Fund(PF) and Net
Pay.
Input : Employee Number, Employee Name, Designation and Basic pay.
Determine other details using the following:
DA = 43 % of basic pay
HRA = 5% of basic pay
PF = 10% of basic pay
Net Pay = Basic pay + DA + HRA - PF
16. Design a web page with a form in it. The form has the following details :
Student Name
Number
Age
Sex
Address
Religion
Nationality

Text Box
Text Box
Range (10 - 20 years)
Radio Button
Text Box
List Box
Text Box

17. Write a JAVA program to read students particulars like name, number, date of
birth, course of study, and address using frame and text controls. Then display the
given details on the screen.
18. Design a web page using HTML code shows your biodata.
JFC / Swing
19. Write a Swing program to create Buttons with
a) Tool tip text b) Image c) Border d) Short cut Key
20. Write a Swing program to create the Tabbed Panels.

*
*
*
M.Sc. (IT) II Year
Practical: Lab-IV: VISUAL PROGRAMMING
152

SYLLABUS : VISUAL BASIC PROGRAMMING - Event procedures, Creating and

using various controls - Forms,Text, Message Box, Labels, List Box, Graphics - DDE
Events - Database Access - Data Control - Field Control - Data Grid - Manipulation of
data.
VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING - MFCs - Using various object properties Resources : Menus, Accelerators, Dialogs, Icons, Bitmaps - Using DAO and ODBC Using Synchronization Classes.
TOTAL MARKS : 100 (2 PROBLEMS (One in VB and another in VC++) are
TO BE SOLVED IN UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION)
BREAK-UP OF MARK:
RECORD NOTE BOOK
ALGORITHM
PROGRAM
DEBUGGING
EXECUTION
RESULT

: 10
: 10
: 50
: 10
: 10
: 10

MODEL PROBLEMS VISUAL BASIC

1. Write event procedure for the following.
(a) Display date and time in the label box at run time.
(b) Find the power of a number (Accept two inputs as number and power.
(c) Temperature conversion (From Fahrenheit centigrade).
[Use Label, TextBox and Command Button in the form]
2. Write event procedure to perform the following.
(a) Reverse a string.
(b) Determine whether the given string is palindrome or not.
(c) Change the case of a string to upper of lower.[use Label, Textbox, Command
Button].
3. Create a form with Textbox, Combo box and Command Button and do the following
operation.
(a) Add the University name in the Combo box at the run time.
(b) Search and delete the particular University in the combo box.
(c) Display the message box with number of University available in the Combo
box.
153

(d) Sort the University names in the alphabetical order.

4. Using a control array, create a simple calculator which will do the following
operation.
1. Addition
2. Subtraction.
3. Multiplication
4. Division.
5. Square
6. Square root.
7. Modulus
8. Power.
9. Percentage.
[Using Textbox, Command Button, Frames].
5. Using MSFlex grid control, display the multiplication and addition table of 20
rows and columns.[Use MSFlex Grid, Button].
6. Using built in Ax control, develop the windows NOTEPAD with File and Edit
menu operation and also display the floating menu whenever necessary.[Use
RichTextBox, menu editor].
7. Create an employee with Empno, Empname, Basicpay,HRA,DA,PF,LIC,GP and NP
with the following calculation.
HRA = 10% OF BP
DA = 5% OF BP
PF = 3% OF BP
LIC = 5% OF BP
GP = BP + DA + HRA
NP = GP - (PF + LIC)
USING REMOTE DATA ACCESS OBJECT, Implement THE
FOLLOWING OPERATIONS.
(a) Insert a record.
(b) Search and delete a record.
(c) Modify the record.
(d) Display all the employee records whose names are starting with the letter "S".
8. Create a table Hospital with the following fields Patient number, Patient Name,
address, Blood Group, Disease. Using Ax data access object, develop a hospital
management sys. with the following operation.
a) Insert a record into the table
b) Search and Delete a record
c) Modify the record
d) Display all the patients details with the corresponding blood group from the
154

combo box.
9. Using Ax DLLor EXE add a class module that would perform the following
function.
a) Text whether the given number is perfect or not
b) Whether the given number is Armstrong number or not
c) Find the factorial of the given number
d) sum of digits
10. Develop a data report using Employee table with the following
a. Display all the Employee details
b. Display all the employee details in each department and display total salary in
each department.
c. Display all the employee details which starts with the employee name
specified in Textbox.
11. Write a VB program to perform the following operation in a record of random
Access File.
1. Insert 2. Delete 3. Search.
12. Create a VB application with a DriveListbox, Dir listbox.
(a) Select exe file & execute it.
(b) Select the picture and load it to the form.
(c) Filter the file in the file list box according to the extension chosen in the
combo box.
13. Using Activex X control create a Textbox that accepts only numeric value with
the following properties.
(a) Background of the textbox.
(b) Foreground of the textbox.
(c) Text property of the textbox.
(d) Resize the textbox at the standard application without using properties.
14. Expand the 7th problem. Using DHTML application.
15. Create a worksheet with the following fields student_name, internal mark,
external mark and result.
Using data access Object, create a student application to do the following
operations.
1. Insert the records.
2. Delete the records.
3. Update the records.
155

LIST OF PROBLEMS - VISUAL C++

1. Write a Visual C++ program to create a window of desired size using MFC?
2. Write a Visual C++ program to handle Windows messages in MFC program.
3. Write Visual C++ program to fill background of the client area with a bitmap?
4. Write a Visual C++ program to get the status of the shift and toggle keys using
MFC
5. Write a Visual C++ program to generate a status bar and show the status of Caps
Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock in it?
6. Write a Visual C++ program to create a List box in a window?
7. Write a VC++ program to find out whether a mouse is Attached or not; and if
attached how many buttons are present or not.

156

Course
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:

M.Sc.(Computer Science) [2007-08 onwards]

2 years
Any degree with Mathematics at +2 level
English

Course of Study and Scheme of Examinations

Code
No.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Name of the Course

Max. Mark

I Year
Mathematical Foundation of Computer Science
Computer Architecture
Data Structures using C++
Visual Programming
Database Management Systems
Computer Lab I (C++ and Data Structures Lab )
Computer Lab II (Visual Programming Lab)
II Year
Computer Networks
Software Engineering
Internet Programming and Web Design
Image Processing and Analysis
Operating Systems
Computer Lab III (Internet Programming)
Project

157

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

Paper 1.1: MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATION OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

UNIT I
Mathematical Logic: Statements and Notation - connectives -normal forms
- The theory of inference for the statement calculus - The predicate calculus Inference theory and predicate calculus.
UNIT II
Set theory: Sets - Basic concepts - notation - inclusion and equality of sets
- the power set - relations and ordering - properties - relation matrix and graph of a
relation - partition - equivalence and compatibility relations - composition partial
ordering - partially ordered set.
UNIT III
Functions - definition - composition - inverse - binary and n-ary operations characteristic function - hashing function.
UNIT IV
Algebraic Structures: Algebraic Systems: Examples and General Properties Semigroups and Monoids: Definitions and Examples
- Homomorphism
of
Semigroups and Monoids - Subsemigroups and Submonoids - Groups: Definitions
and Examples - Cosets and Lagrange's Theorem - Normal Subgroups - Algebraic
Systems with two Binary Operations.
UNIT V
Graph theory: Basic concepts - definition - paths - reach - ability and
connectedness - matrix representation of graphs - trees.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. J.P. Tremblay and R. Manohar Discrete mathematical structures with applications to
Computer Science Mc.Graw Hill Book Company, New York, 1975.
2. Venkatraman M K, Sridharan N and Chandrasekaran N, Discrete Mathematics, The
National Publishing Company, 2000.
3. Narsingh Deo, Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer Science
PHI, 1987.

158

Paper 1.2: COMPUTER ARCHTECTURE

UNIT I
Fundamentals Of Computer Design: Measuring and Reporting performance Quantitative principles of computer
Design - Classifying instruction set Architecture Memory addressing - Addressing modes - Type and size of operands - Operations in the
instruction set - Operands and operations for media and signal processing - Instructions for
control flow - Encoding an instruction set - Example Architecture - MIPS and TM32.
UNIT II
Instruction Level Parallelism: Pipelining and Hazards - Concepts of ILP - Dynamic
scheduling - Dynamic Hardware prediction - Multiple issues - Hardware based speculation Limitations of ILP - Case studies: lP6 Microarchitecture
UNIT III
Instruction Level Parallelism With Software Approaches: Compiler techniques for
exposing ILP - Static branch prediction - Static multiple issue : VLIW - Advanced compiler
support - Hardware support for exposing parallelism - Hardware Vs software speculation.
Mechanism - IA 64 and Itanium Processor.
UNIT IV
Memory And I/O: Cache performance - Reducing cache miss penalty and miss rate Reducing hit time - Main memory and performance - Memory technology. Types of storage
devices - Buses - RAID - Reliability, availability and dependability - I/O performance measures
- Designing I/O system.
UNIT V
Multiprocessors And Thread Level Parallelism: Symmetric and distributed shared
memory architectures - Performance issues - Synchronization - Models of memory consistency
- Multithreading.

REFERNCE BOOKS

John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson," Computer Architecture: A Quantitative

Approach", Third Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.
D. Sima, T. Fountain and P. Kacsuk, " Advanced Computer Architectures: A Design Space
Approach", Addison Wesley, 2000.
Kai Hwang " Advanced computer architecture Parallelism Scalability Programmability"
Tata Mcgraw Hill Edition 2001.
Vincent P.Heuring, Harry F.Jordan, Computer System Design and Architecture , Addison
Wesley , 2nd Edition 2004.

159

Paper 1.3: DATA STRUCTURES USING C++

Unit I
The arrays as an ADT: Using One-Dimensional arrays - Using two-dimensional arrays
- Using multi-dimensional arrays - Claases in C++ - Class Rational - Using the Class Rational Implementing the methods Overloading Inheritance Constructors - Primitive operations.
Unit II
Stack: Stack as an ADT Queue and its sequential representation Queue as an ADT
Definitions and Examples Infix, Postfix, and Prefix Program to evaluate a postfix
expression Limitations of the program.
Unit III
Linear Data Structures and their representation: Definition, concept, operation on
Linked lists, Circular linked lists, Doubly linked lists Operations like insertion, deletion,
insertion in order, searching, updating, Application of linked lists: Polynomial manipulation.
UNIT IV
Trees and Graphs: Definition Operation on binary trees, linked storage representation
for binary search trees Basic operations on binary search tree such as creating a binary search
tree, searching , modifying an element, inserting and deleting the element, destroy a binary
search tree, tree traversals, inorder, preorder and postorder, tree application for expression
evaluation.
UNIT V
Sorting and Searching: Different sorting techniques, classification on the basis of big-O
notation, technique such as straight selection sort, bubble sort, merge sort, quick sort
Sequential Searching Binary searching.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J.Augenstein,Aaron M.Tenenbaum, Data Structures Using C
and C++, 2nd Edition, 1995, Prentice Hall...
2. Malik D S, Data Structures Using C++ , 2003, Thomson

160

Paper 1.4: VISUAL PROGRAMMING

UNIT I
Windows Programming:
Conceptual comparison of traditional programming
paradigms Overview of windows programming Data types Resources. Windows
messages Device contexts Document interfaces Dynamic linking libraries Software
Development Kit (SDK) tools Context help.

UNIT II
Visual Basic Programming: Introduction Forms Variables, Types Properties
Decision-making Looping Modules Procedures Functions.

UNIT III
Tool Box Controls Menus Grid controls Dialog boxes Database manager Data
control Recordset objects.

UNIT IV
Visual C++ Programming: Objects Classes VC++ components Resources
Event handling Menus Dialog boxes Importing VBX controls Files MFC file handling
Document view architecture Serialization Multiple Document Interface (MDI) Splitter
windows.

UNIT V
Exception Handling Debugging Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) Database
Application DLL ODBC.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Charles Petzold, Windows Programming, Microsoft Press, 1992.

Garry Cornell, Visual Basic 6 From the Ground up, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.
Steven Holzner, Visual C++ Programming, 2nd edition, PHI Publishers, 1997.
David Kruglinski J, Inside Visual C++, Microsoft Press, 1993.
Mueller, VC++ 5 From the Group up, TMH, 1997.
Viktor Toth, Visual C++ 5 Unleashed, 2nd edition, Tech Media, 1997.

161

Paper 1.5: DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

UNIT I
DBMS: Database - Database Management System - Features - Advantages Data Base Scheme - Schema and Subschema - Manipulative capabilities - Guidelines Different User Interfaces.
UNIT II
Relational Model : Concepts of Relational Model - Comments on the Relational
Model: Semantic issues, Navigation, Efficiency - DBMS based on the Relational Model: The
mapping operation - Data Manipulation facilities - Data Definition facilities - Data
Control facilities.
UNIT III
Introduction to Oracle: Types of Databases, Relational Database properties, Benefits
of Oracle, Client/Server Systems - Oracle Database Architecture: Overview of Oracle
Architecture, Processes, Physical files, CPU, Network System Tables, Oracle Users, Logical
Structures.
UNIT IV
Oracle Fundamentals: Elements of SQL Language: Database Objects, Data Access
SQL commands, DML commands - Oracle Queries - Basic Query, Using Expressions,
Working with NULL values, Joining Multiple Tables in a Query, Selecting Distinct values,
Using Subqueries, Unions and Multiple part Queries.
UNIT V
Table Creation: Create Table statement, Privileges required, Describing Table
Definitions, Modifying Tables, Renaming a Table, Copying another table, Dropping a Table Other Database Objects, Reason for Database Objects, Indexes - Embedded SQL: Languages
supported by Oracle Precompiler, Embedded SQL statements.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Naveen Prakash, Introduction to Data Base Management, 1994, Tata McGraw-Hill
Pub. Co.Ltd.
2.David Mcclanahan, Oracle Developers's Guide, 1996, Oracle Press.
3.Abraham Silberschatz, Henry. F. Korth, S.Sudharsan, Database System Concepts, 4 th
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
4.Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 3 rd Edition,
Addison Wesley, 2004.
5.Jim Buyens, Step by Step Web Database Development, PHI, 2001.
6.Stefano Ceri & Giuesppe Pelagatti, Distributed Databases - Principles and Systems, McGraw
Hill Book Company, 1987.
7.C.J.Date, An Introduction to Database system, Pearson Education, 7 th Edition, 2003

162

Paper 1.6: Computer Lab I (C++ and Data Structures Lab)

26. Write a C++ program to convert a given number into words for numbers 1 to 5. (Eg.1 as
one).
27. Write a C++ program to find the roots of a quadratic equation (ax2+bx+c=0).
28. Write a C++ program to find the roots of a quadratic equation using function.
29. Write a C++ program for matrix operations (Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication)
using function.
30. Write a C++ program to find the factorial of a given number using recursion.
31. Write a C program to read 10 values to an array variable. Use pointers to locate and
display each value.
32. Using operator overloading, write a C++ program to find the different and total length
of given two various tubes specified in meters and centimeters.
33. Using dynamic constructors write a C++ program to concatenate two given strings.
34. Write a menu driven C++ program to add and subtract given two matrices of order m x n
defined in class, using operator overloading.
35. Create a class called employee that contains a name and an employee number.
Include a member function called getdata() to get data from the user, another function
called putdata() to display the data. Write a main() program to exercise this class. It
should create an array of type employee and then invite the user to input data for n
employees.
36. Write a program using Polymorphism to calculate the square of any two numbers of type
int, float, double and long.
12. Write a C++ program to implement push and pop operations on stack.
13. Write a C++ program to evaluate the given mathematical expression using stack.
14. Write a C++ program to implement insert and delete operations on Linked List structure.
15. Write a C++ program to implement insert and delete operations on Queue using array
concept.
16. Write a C++ program for linked list implementation of Queue operations.

163

17. Write a C++ program to sort 10 Nos. in Ascending order with naming of variable and the
value before and after sorting.
18. Write a C++ programs to sort a set of elements using selection sort, Insertion sort, and
Quick sort..

164

Paper 1.7: Computer Lab II (Visual Programming)

Visual Basic
1. Write event procedure for the following.
(a) Display date and time in the label box at run time.
(b) Find the power of a number (Accept two inputs as number and power.
(c) Temperature conversion (From Fahrenheit centigrade).
[Use Label, TextBox and Command Button in the form]
2. Write event procedure to perform the following.
(a) Reverse a string.
(b) Determine whether the given string is palindrome or not.
(d) Change the case of a string to upper of lower.[use Label, Textbox, Command
Button].
3. Create a form with Textbox, Combo box and Command Button and do the following
operation.
(a) Add the University name in the Combo box at the run time.
(b) Search and delete the particular University in the combo box.
(c) Display the message box with number of University available in the Combo
box.
(d) Sort the University names in the alphabetical order.
4. Using a control array, create a simple calculator which will do the following operation.
1. Addition
2. Subtraction.
3. Multiplication
4. Division.
5. Square
6. Square root.
7. Modulus
8. Power.
9. Percentage.
[Using Textbox, Command Button, Frames].
5. Using MSFlex grid control, display the multiplication and addition table of 20 rows and
columns.[Use MSFlex Grid, Button].
6. Using built in Ax control, develop the windows NOTEPAD with File and Edit menu
operation and also display the floating menu whenever necessary.[Use RichTextBox,
menu editor].
7. Create an employee with Empno, Empname, Basicpay,HRA,DA,PF,LIC,GP and NP with the
following calculation.
HRA = 10% OF BP
DA = 5% OF BP
PF = 3% OF BP
LIC = 5% OF BP
GP = BP + DA + HRA
NP = GP - (PF + LIC)

165

USING REMOTE DATA ACCESS OBJECT, Implement THE FOLLOWING

OPERATIONS.
(a) Insert a record.
(b) Search and delete a record.
(c) Modify the record.
(d) Display all the employee records whose names are starting with the letter "S".
8. Create a table Hospital with the following fields Patient number, Patient Name, address,
Blood Group, Disease. Using Ax data access object, develop a hospital management sys.
with the following operation.
a) Insert a record into the table
b) Search and Delete a record
c) Modify the
record
d) Display all the patients details with the corresponding blood group from the
combo box.
9. Using Ax DLLor EXE add a class module that would perform the following function.
a) Text whether the given number is perfect or not
b) Whether the given number is Armstrong number or not
c) Find the factorial of the given number
d) sum of digits
10. Develop a data report using Employee table with the following
a. Display all the Employee details
b. Display all the employee details in each department and display total salary in
each department.
c. Display all the employee details which starts with the employee name
specified in Textbox.
11. Write a VB program to perform the following operation in a record of random Access File.
1. Insert 2. Delete 3. Search.
12. Create a VB application with a DriveListbox, Dir listbox.
(a) Select exe file & execute it.
(b) Select the picture and load it to the form.
(c) Filter the file in the file list box according to the extension chosen in the
combo box.
13. Using Activex X control create a Textbox that accepts only numeric value with the
following properties.
(a) Background of the textbox.
(b) Foreground of the textbox.
(c) Text property of the textbox.
(d) Resize the textbox at the standard application without using properties.
VISUAL C++

166

1. Write a Visual C++ program to create a window of desired size using MFC?
2. Write a Visual C++ program to handle Windows messages in MFC program.
3. Write Visual C++ program to fill background of the client area with a bitmap?
4. Write a Visual C++ program to get the status of the shift and toggle keys using MFC
5.

Write a Visual C++ program to generate a status bar and show the status of Caps Lock,
Num Lock and Scroll Lock in it?

6. Write a Visual C++ program to create a List box in a window?

1. Write a VC++ program to find out whether a mouse is Attached or not; and if attached
how many buttons are present or not.

167

Paper 2.1: COMPUTER NETWORKS

UNIT I
Introduction: Uses of computer networks Network hardware and network software
Reference models Example networks Network standardisation. Physical Layer:
Transmission media Telephone system ISDN Broadband and Narrowband ISDN ISDN
and ATM Communication Satellites.

UNIT II
Data Link Layer: Design issues Error detection and correcting codes Elementary
data link protocols Sliding window protocols Protocol Specification and Verification:
Finite State models Petri Net models Example Dlink Protocols: HDLC SLIP PPP
Media Access Sublayer: Multiple access protocols ALOHA Carrier sense multiple access
protocols Collision free protocols.

UNIT III
Network Layer: Design issues Routing algorithms Congestion control algorithms
Internet working: Tunneling Fragmentation Firewalls Network layer in the internet IP
Subnets Internet Control Protocols: Address resolution protocol ICMP RARP Internet
multicasting Network Layer in ATM Networks: Cell format Connection setup Routing
and switching Services categories ATM LANs.

UNIT IV
Transport Layer: Transport service Elements of Transport Protocols: Addressing
Flow control and buffering Multiplexing Crash recovery Performance issues Measuring
network performance Internet transport protocols TCP UDP Protocols for Gigabit
networks.

UNIT V
Application Layer: Network security Cryptography Secret and public key
algorithms DNS SNMP Electronic Mail Electronic Mail privacy World Wide Web:
Client side Server side Multimedia Audio Video Data Compression JPEG, MPEG
Standards.

TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of India.
2. Uless Black, Computer Networks, 1993, Prentice Hall of India.
3. Ajit Kumar Singh, Computer Networks, 2006, Firewall Media.

168

Paper 2.2: SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

UNIT I
The Evolving role of Software Process methods and tools Software process models
Linear sequential model Prototyping model Real model Evolutionary software process
model Formal methods model Fourth generation techniques Project management concepts
Software process and project metric.

UNIT II
Software Project Planning Observation on estimating software Scope, Resources,
Project estimation, Decomposition techniques, Empirical estimation models The Make Busy
divisions Risk management Software risk identification Risk projection, Risk mitigation
Monitoring and management.

UNIT III
Project Scheduling and Tracking Basic concepts Defining a task set for the software
project Scheduling plan Software quality assurance Quality concepts and assurance
Software reliability ISO 9000 Quality standards Software configuration management
Software reviews Formal technical reviews Statistical quality assurance.

UNIT IV
System Engineering: System engineering hierarchy Analysis concepts and principles
Requirements analysis Communication techniques Analysis, principles Software
prototyping Specification modeling and information flow Behavioural modeling
Mechanics of structured analysis Design concepts and principles Design process
Principles Concepts Effective modular design.
Design Methods: Architectural design Data design Architectural design and
process Transform mapping design Post processing and optimization interface design
Human computer interface design.

UNIT V
Software testing methods Fundamentals Test case design White box testing
Basis path testing Control structure testing Black box testing Testing for specialized
environment Testing strategies Unit testing Integration Validation System testing Art
of debugging.

TEXT AND REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Roger S Prssman, Software Engineering: A Practitioners Approach, McGraw Hill (2000).
2. Pankaj Jaiote, An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Narose Publishing House
(1991).
3. Richard Fairlay, Software Engineering Concepts, McGraw-Hill (1985).

Paper 2.3: INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND WEB DESIGN

169

UNIT I
Foundations for Internet Programming: An overview of Internet Programming WWW Design Issues - Security and Encryption - Developing Intranet Applications. Internet
Programming Languages: Java - Java in Windows - CGI - Perl - Microsoft Internet
Implementation.
UNIT II
Internet Scripting Languages: JavaScript - VBScript- Other Scripting Languages.
UNIT III
Internet Markup Languages: HTML - SGML - Netscape Extensions - Microsoft
Internet Explorer - Only-HTML tags - Shokwave and Lingo.
UNIT IV
ActiveX controls: Creating an ActiveX control to Activate a Web Page - VDOlive
Technology - Creating Netscape Navigator Plug-Ins - Pulling Web Information - Creating a
Custom Integrated Application with Multiple Protocols.
UNIT V
Web Graphics: A Graphic View of Web - Easy Web Graphics - Images and Hyperlinks
- Adding Graphics to Web Pages - Site and Page Design - Framing your Graphics - Dynamic
Graphics - Animation.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bob Breedlove et.al, Web Programming Unleased, 1996, Sams.net Publishing.
2. Ron Wodaski ,Web Graphics Bible, 1997, Comdex Computer Publishing.
3. Young, Internet: Millenium Edition: Complete Reference, 1998, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Powell, HTML The Complete Reference, 1998, Tata McGraw Hill.

Paper 2.4: IMAGE PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS

170

UNIT I
Digital Image: Introduction : Motivation and Perspective - Scenes and Images Applications - Components of Image Processing System - Visual Preliminaries : Brightness
Adaptation and Contrast - Acuity and Contour - Texture and Pattern Discrimination - Shape
Detection and Recognition - Perception of Colour - Image Formation : Geometric
Model - Basic Transformations - Perspective Projection - Camera Calibration - Photometric
Model - Digitization : Sampling - Quantization - Visual Detail in the Digital Image - Digital
Image - Elements of Digital Geometry.
UNIT II
Image Processing: Image Enhancement : Contrast Intensification - Smoothing Image Averaging - Mean Filter - Ordered Statistic Filter - Edge-preserving Smoothing - Lowpass Filtering - Image Sharpening - High-pass Filtering - Homomorphic Filtering Restoration : Minimum Mean-square Error Restoration - Least-square Error Restoration Constrained Least-square
Error Restoration - Restoration by Singular Value
Decomposition
Restoration by Maximum a Posterior Estimation - Restoration by
Homomorphic Filtering.
UNIT III
Image Compression: Error criterion - Lossy Compression methods - Loss-less
Compression - Huffman Coding - Run-length Coding - Block Coding - Quad Tree Coding Contour Coding - Registration : Geometric Transformation - Plane-to-plane Transformations
Mapping - Problems in Discrete Domain - Stereo Imaging Algorithms - Multi-valued Image
Processing : Processing of Colour Images - Processing of Satellite Images - Medical Image
Processing.
UNIT IV
Image Analysis Segmentation : Region Extraction - Pixel-based Approach - Feature
Thresholding - Optimum Threshold - Threshold Selection Methods - Multi-level Thresholding
- Local Thresholding - Region-based Approach - Edge and Line Detection : Edge
Detection - Derivative Operators - Pattern Fitting Approach - Morphologic Edge Detection Edge Linking and Edge Following - Edge Elements Extraction by Thresholding - Edge
Detector Performance - Line Detection - Corner Detection.
UNIT V
Feature Extraction : Representation - Topological Attributes - Geometrical Attributes
- Some Other Properties - Description : Boundary-based Description - Region-based
Description - Relationship - Recognition : Deterministic Methods - Clustering - Statistical
Classification - Fuzzy Mathematical Recognition - Syntactic Recognition - Grammar Recognition Strategy - Tree Search - Graph Matching.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chanda B and Dutta Majumder Digital Image Processing and Analysis Prentice Hall of
India Pvt Ltd (2001)
2. Adrian Low, Compuer vision and Image Processing, 1991, McGraw Hill.
3. Kenneth R. Castleman, Digital Image Processing, 1995, PHI

Paper 2.5: OPERATING SYSTEM

171

Unit I
Introduction: Main frame Systems, Desktop Systems Multiprocessor Systems
Distributed Systems Clustered Systems Real Time systems Hand held Systems, Operating
Systems Structures: System Components Operating System Services - System calls - System
Programs System Design and Implementation - CPU scheduling: Basic Concepts
Scheduling Algorithms.
Unit II
Process Management: Process Concepts - Process Scheduling - Operation on Process Co-Operating process - Inter Process Communication - Threads: Multithreading Models Process Synchronization: The Critical Section Problem Synchronization Hardware Semaphores classical problem of Synchronization Monitors - Deadlock: Deadlock
Characterization - Methods for handling Deadlocks - Deadlock Prevention Deadlock
Avoidance - Deadlock Detection Recovery from Deadlock.
Unit III
Memory Management: Background Swapping - Contiguous Memory Allocation Paging - Segmentation Segmentation with paging - Virtual Memory: Demand paging - Page
Replacement - Thrashing.
Unit IV
File Systems: File Concepts - Access methods - Directory Structure - File Protection File System Implementation: File System
Structure and Implementation Directory
Implementation Allocation methods Free Space Management Recovery - Disk Structure
Disk Scheduling.
Unit V
Distributed Operating System: Design issues in distributed operating systemDistributed file systems - Naming and Transparency-Remote File Access-Stateful versus
Stateless service Distributed Coordination- Event Ordering-Mutual Exclusion- AtomicityConcurrency Control- Deadlock Handling-Election Algorithms-Case Study-Linux.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Silberschatz, Galvin, Gagne, Operating System Concepts, Sixth Edition, 2003, John Wiley
2. Pradeep K.Sinha, Distributed OS concepts and Design , IEEE computer Society Press,
PHI 1998.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum , Modern Operating Systems, 2nd Edition 2001, Prentice Hall.
4. Achut S. Godbole and Kahate Atul , Operating Systems & Systems Programming, 2003,
Tata Mcgraw Hill.
5. Charles Crowley, Operating systems: A Design Oriented Approach, 1999, Tata McGraw
Hill.

Paper 2.6: Computer Lab III (Internet Programming Lab)

172

JAVA SCRIPT
1. Write a java Script to create a window by using the confirm message.
2. Write a JavaScript to create a Order Form to select the house articles.
3. Write a JavaScript to create a color Palet and display the text in the color chosen from the
Palet with proper background color.
VB SCRIPT
4. Write a VBScript to do the following
a) Check the given Password
b) Change the existing Password
5. Write a VBScript to do the following
a) Display the current date
b) Find the difference between the two dates
c) Find the age of a person by providing date of birth for all use the date in dd/mm/yy
format.
6. Write a VBScript to create a calandor for given month and year.
JDBC
7. Write a menu drive Java program to do database functions using database conectivity
facility. The functions include display,edit, insert and delete a records from a table.
APPLETS
8. Write a Java program using Applet to display any 3 images when 3 buttons in the Border
layout are clicked. The image should be displayed at the center.
9. Write a Java program using Applet to display the dialogue menu in applet.
10. Write a Java program using Applet to create the frames and its controls.
11. Write a Java program using Applet to display the different colors and fonts.
JFC / Swing
12. Write a Swing program to create Buttons with
a) Tool tip text
b) Image
c) Border
d) Short cut Key
13. Write a Swing program to create the Tabbed Panels.
14. Write a Java program to create a color as the background.
HTML
15. Using atleast 20 HTML Tags, Create a screen with a string "WEB Design"
16. Create a web page in the format of front page of a news paper using Text links. Align
the text with colors.
17. Develop a picture gallary having atleast 5 pages. Each of them is having several pictures
with suitable information.
18. Develop a single page advertisement for a shop to be opened shortly.
19. Develop a web page for job recruitment agency in an IT industry.
20. Design and publish a web page for a college.

173

Course

Master of Library and Information Science (MLIS)

Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:

Distance Education
One year
B.L.I.S. or B.Lib.Sc. from a recognised University
English

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Title

Subjec

Total
Marks

Information Processing and Retrieval

100

Library and Information System Management

100

Information Technology and Information Systems

100

Research Methodology

100

Academic Library System

100

Technical Writing

100

Information Processing and Retrieval (Practice

100

Information Technology (Practice)

100
800

Total

174

Paper 1: INFORMATION PROCESSING & RETRIEVAL

UNIT I
Role of basic concepts in Information transfer- Universe of subjects Structure &
development Impact on the schemes for classification.
UNIT II
Classification Schemes: CC, DDC, UDC, &LC Indexing Languages-Vocabulary
Control-Thesaurus, design of indexing languages, general theory of subject
indexing languages.
UNIT III
Indexing Systems & Techniques-Precoordinate indexing PRECIS, POPSI,
Chain indexing Relational indexing, post coordinate indexing systems, uniterm
indexing, citation indexing, KWIC and KWOC, evaluative studies.
UNIT IV
Bibliographic description Standardization Print & Non Print Media ISBD,
ASER-II, MARC formats, CCF, ISO-2709.
UNIT V
Objectives Structure and functions of information retrieval systems Search
strategy Criteria for evaluation Recall, precision Relevance and failure analysis.
UNIT VI
Impact of Computer Application Physical forms of catalogues Bibliographic
descriptions Concept of main entry Evaluation of catalogues and cataloguing
Major findings.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lancaster F W, Information Retrieval Systems, Ed-2, 1976, Vocabulary Control for
Information Retrieval, Information Retrieval Systems Characteristics, Testing and
Evaluation.
2. Maltby A, (Ed) Classification in the 70s: A second look, Ed-7.
3. Medow CT, Analysis of information system, 1973.
4. Neelamegan A, Ordering systems for Global Information Network, 1979.
5. Renganathan SR, Classified catalogues code.Ed 5, 1964, Prolegomena to Library
classification, Ed3.
6. Soergal D, Indexing Languages and Thesauri.
7. Library of Congress: Information of MARC System.

175

Paper 2: LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Concept of management and organization Definition Library and
information system as Non Profit Organizations Various schools of management
thought: Classical, Human relations, behavioral schools of thought Management
theories: Taylor, Payol, Gantts, McGregor, Maslow.
UNIT II
Scientific principles of management as applied to library and information
system Areas of application Methodology Advantages and limitations.
UNIT III
Systems approach Systems analysis in library and information systems
Contingency approach Decision making approach, MBO, POSDCORB.
UNIT IV
Personnel management Human resources planning Recruitment Selection
Training and Development Performance appraisal promotion Motivation.
UNIT V
Fiscal management Budgeting Types of Budget Process of budgeting
PPBS ZBB.
UNIT VI
Management Information System(MIS) Designing Work Analysis Flow
process chart Decision flow charts Block diagram, Gantt chart, network analysis,
PERT and CPM.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Koonttz, Harold and Weihrich, Heinz, Essentials of Management, Ed 5, New York:
McGraw Hill, 1990.
2. Mittal RL, Library Administration: Theory and Pratice, Ed 4, 1978.
3. Murdick, Information systems for modern management, 1979.
4. Ranganathan SR, Library Administration, 1959.
5. Stoner, James AP, Management Ed 2. 1978.
6. Tripathi, Personnel Management.
7. Reece Brandt, Effective HR in Organizations.
8. Richardson, Dougherty, Scientific Management of Library operation, 1986.
9. Iyer VK, Management of Library Information Services, New Delhi, Rajat Publications,
1998.

176

Paper 3: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY & INFORMATION

SYSTEMS
UNIT I
Computer basics Computer generations and classification Role of Computer in
information transfer technology.
UNIT II
Operating Systems: Ms-Dos, Windows, and Unix.
UNIT III
Information System analysis and Design Overview, System development,
Lifecycle method.
UNIT IV
Database system Definition, scope, need and purpose Overall system structure
Selection of Hardware and Software Use of Dbase.
UNIT V
File organization: Serial, sequential, indexed sequential and inverted files
Database models Hierarchical, network, relational.
UNIT VI
Networking: Technological development in communication: Transmission
media Digital Networks LAN, WAN, PSTN, ISDN, Optical Communication
systems, FAX, Modem, Teletext, Videotext, email, Internet, and Intranet.
UNIT VII
Origin, Development, Structure and functions of National & International
Information systems INIS, AGRIS, BIOSYS, NISSAT.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Rajaraman V, Fundamentals of Computers, New Delhi: PHI, 1996.

Lancaster FW, Information Retrieval Systems, Ed-2, 1976.
Ravichandra Rao IK, Library Automation, New Delhi: Wiley Eastern, 1992.
Medow CT, Analysis of Information System, 1973.
Kimber RT, Automation in Libraries.

177

Paper 4: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

UNIT I
Research Definition Importance & meaning of research
Characteristics of research Types of research Scientific method Nature of
research in library & information science Relevance of research methods to
LIS.
UNIT II
Research Problem: Sources of research problem Locating the problem
Formulation of the research problem Criteria in selecting a problem Defining
and delimiting problems Literature search Importance of surveying related
literature Library sources, research reviews, catalogue, indices, abstracts,
bibliographies, microforms, computerized information retrieval systems.
UNIT III
Hypothesis Meaning, importance, types, sources, characteristics
Different forms of hypothesis Difficulties in formulation Testing the
hypothesis.
UNIT IV
Research methods Definitions Sources Advantages Limitations
Steps involved etc for historical method, case study method, survey method,
experimental method and other methods(Field investigation Research,
Evaluation research, Action research, Ex post Facto research etc)
UNIT V
Research Design Characteristics of a good research design,
components, types: Descriptive, Diagnostic, Exploratory and Experimental.
UNIT VI
Data collection, primary and secondary data, methods of data collection,
schedule, interview, questionnaire, observation-questionnaire construction &
design, types of questionnaire secondary data sources and precautions in the
use of secondary data Data analysis, interpretation and presentation Research
reporting.

178

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kothari CR, Wishwa Prakashan, Research Methodology: Methods &
Techniques, New Delhi: 1996.
2. Ravichandran Rao IK, Quantitative methods for Library & Information
Science, New Delhi, 1985.
3. Panda BD, Research Methodology for Library Science, New Delhi, Anmol
Publications 1997.
4. Santhosh Gupta, Research Methodology and Statistical Techniques, New
Delhi: Deep & Deep, 2000.

179

Paper 5: ACADEMIC LIBRARY SYSTEM

UNIT I
Types of Libraries Role of University/College libraries and functions of
higher education Growth of University and College libraries in India and the
role of UGC in promoting University/College Libraries.
UNIT II
Authorities in University/college libraries Budgeting Collection Buildingproblems and methods Centralizations & Decentralization of University
Libraries Merits and Demerits Resource Sharing among university
libraries in India Networking Role of INFLIBNET.
UNIT III
Academic Libraries Types of users & their information needs user
education and services User behavior and user studies.
UNIT IV
Human Resources and staff formula Standards for University/College
Libraries Automation in academic libraries in India Impact of information
technology on academic library services Electronic library, Digital library,
virtual library.
UNIT V
Library Building Furniture and equipment.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Gelfand MA, University Libraries for Developing Countries, 1968.

Krishnan Kumar, Research Libraries in Developing Countries.
Metcalf, Keyes, Planning Academic and Research Library buildings, 1965.
Buckland MK, et all, System Analysis of a University Library, 1970.
Wilson and Tauber, University Library, 1956.

180

Paper 6. TECHNICAL WRITING

UNIT I
Communication Process Characteristics features of technical writing,
reader-writer relationship.
UNIT II
Language as a medium for communication of thought, Readability and text
Aberrations in technical writing.
UNIT III
Organization and Presentation of data in abstracts, textual manner,
references Preparation of popular articles, technical reports, monographs,
house journals.
UNIT IV
Repackaging of information: Preparation of Review, Trend report, Progress
report.
UNIT V
Editorial Process: Editorial tools, use of style manuals proof reading.
UNIT VI
Publication Ethics Pre-publication and post-publication process.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Krishnan Kumar, Research Libraries in Developing Countries.
2. Santhosh Gupta, Research Methodology and Statistical Techniques, New
Delhi: Deep & Deep, 2000.
3. Lancaster FW, Information Retrieval Systems, Ed-2, 1976.

181

Paper 7:
INFORMATION PROCESSING & RETRIEVAL - PRACTICE
Practice
1. Classification of Documents according to abridged English Edition of
UDC and CC-6th edition.
2. Cataloguing of books, Serials and Non Nook material according to
AACR-II and Sears list of Subject Headings.

Paper 8.
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY - PRACTICE
Practice
1. Creating a database using DBASE/FoxBASE, CDS/ISIS, SOUL.
2. Thorough Knowledge of MS-Word, MS-EXCEL & MS ACCESS and
Power Point.
3. Installing and searching CD-ROM Database
4. Browsing and online searching.

182

Course

M.Sc. (Physics) [2008-09 onwards]

Pattern

Annual pattern

Mode

Distance Education

Duration

Two years

Eligibility

B.Sc. Physics / Electronics / Any B.Sc., degree with

specialization Applied Mathematics, Applied Physics,
Electronics, Nuclear Physics or Nanobiotechnology

Medium

English only

PROGRAMME OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Code
No.

Name of the Course

Max. Mark

I Year
1.1

Classical and Statistical Mechanics

100

1.2

Mathematical Physics

100

1.3

Integrated and Digital Electronics

100

1.4

Electromagnetic Theory

100

1.5

Numerical Methods and Programming

100

1.6

Advanced Electronics and Physics Lab - I

100

II Year
2.1

Spectroscopy

100

2.2

Quantum Mechanics

100

2.3

Solid State Physics

100

2.4

Nuclear and Particle Physics

100

2.5

Materials Science

100

2.6

Advanced Electronics and Physics Lab - II

100

183

Paper 1.1 : CLASSICAL AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS

UNIT I: LAGRANGIAN FORMULATION :
Generalized co-ordinates - D Alemberts principle Lagranges equation of
motion Hamiltons variational principle and Lagranges equation Conservative and
non-conservative systems.
UNIT II: HAMILTONIAN THEORY:
Hamiltons equations of motion Cyclic co-ordinates and Rouths procedure
Hamiltons equations of motion from variational principle Principle of least action
Canonical transformations Poission brackets Hamiltons equations in poission
bracket notations Elements of Hamilton- Jacobi theory Action angle variables and
Keplers problem.
UNIT III: CANONICAL TRANSFORMATION AND HAMILTON JACOBI
THEORY
Canonical transformation and its examples, poissons brackets, equations of
motion, Angular momentum, poissons bracket relations, infinitesimal canonical
transformation, conservation theorems. Hamilton-jacobi equations for principal and
characteristic functions action angle variables for systems with one degree of
freedom.
UNIT IV: SMALL OSCILLATIONS AND REGID BODY MOTION
Theory of small oscillations Normal co-ordinates and normal modes of
vibrations Linear triatomic molecule. Mechanics of rigid bodies: Generalized coordinates for rigid body motion Euler angles Angular momentum of rigid body
Eulers equations The motion of symmetric top under the action of gravity.
UNIT V: ENSEMBLE THEORY
Phase space and Liowilles theorem, the microcanonical ensemble theory and its
application to ideal gas of monoatomic particles. The canonical ensemble and its
thermodynamics, partition function, classical ideal gas in canonical ensemble theory,
energy fluctuations, equipartition and vital theorems, A system of quantum harmonic
oscillators as canonical ensemble, statistics of paramagnetism. The grand canonical
ensemble and significance of statistical quantities. Classical ideal gas in grand
184

canonical ensemble theory. Density and energy fluctuations. Maxwell Boltzmann

statistics Maxwell distribution of velocities Mean, Root mean square and most
probable velocities.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. Classical mechanics S.N.Gupta, V.Kumar and H.V.Sharma, Pragati prakasan,1985,
New Delhi.
2. Classical mechanics H.Goldstein, Addison Wesley, 1950, U.S.A.
3. Elementary statistical mechanics S.L.Gupta, V.Kumar Pragati Prakashn
Publication 1979
4. Fundamentals of statistical and Thermal Physics, F.Reif (1985, McGrawHill,
International Edition)
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
Classical mechanics S.L.Gupta, Meenakshi prakashan, 1970, New Delhi.
Introduction to classical mechanics R.G.Takwall and P.S.Puranik, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1980, New Delhi.
3. Classical mechanics N.C.Rana and P.S.Joag, Tata-McGraw Hill, 1991, New
Delhi.
4. Classical Mechanics of particles and Rigid bodies: K.C.Gupta (Wiley Eastern, New
Delhi.)
5. Classical Mechanics: N.C.Rana and P.G.Joag (Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi)
6. Statistical Mechanics: K.Huang (Wiley Eastern, New Delhi)
7. Statistical Mechanics: B.K.Agarwal and M.Eisner (wiley Eastern, New Delhi)

185

Paper 1.2 : MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS

UNIT I: MATRICES:
Vector space, Linear transformation - Inverse transformation, Orthogonal and
unitary transformation - Schwarz inequality Gram-Schmidts orthogonalization
process - Determination of eigen values and eigen vectors Cayley Hamilton theorem
Diagonalization of Hermitian matrices.
UNIT II: SPECIAL FUNCTION
Beta and Gamma functions, Legenders,- Associate Legenders - Generating
function, Rodirgues formula, Orthogonal properties and recurrence relations. Hermite
and Laguerre polynomials and Bessel functions- Generating function, Rodirgues
formula, Orthogonal properties and recurrence relations.
UNIT III : TRANSFORMS AND COMPLEX VARIABLE
Fourier transform Cosine and Sine Transforms of derivatives Convolution
theorem Parsevals theorem Laplace transform Properties Laplace transforms of
special functions. Analytic functions Cauchy-Riemann integral theorem Cauchys
integral formula Taylors series Lorentzs expansion Zeros, Singular points
Residues theorem Evaluation of definite integrals Conformal mapping (a = wz+b, a
= ez)

UNIT IV: APPLICATION OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS:

Diffusion equation of heat flow-one dimension-two dimensions (Temperatures
of both ends and one end at zero , and infinite length) - Laplaces equation: two
dimensions cartesian co-ordinates - Wave equation: one dimension Solution Application to a string (I) stretched at two ends and (ii) Plucked at the centre - two
dimensions Solution: applications vibration of rectangular membrane.
UNIT V: TENSOR ANALYSIS AND GROUP THEORY :
Contravariant and Covariant tensors Addition Subtraction Outer and inner
products Contraction Metric tensor Hookes law -stress strain- Piezoelectricity
and dielectric susceptibility Moment of inertia tensor. Theory of group representation
symmetry elements classification of groups conditions multiplication table for
C2v, C3v, D4 - Reducible and Irreducible representation Great Orthogonality theorem
Classification of molecules according to symmetry Character table (C2V, C3V).
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
186

1. Introduction to Mathematical Physics, C.Harper, Prentice Hall, 1978.

2. Matrices and Tensors in Physics, A.W.Joshi, Wiley Eaten, 1985.
3. Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists, Pipes and Harwill, Mc-Graw
Hill,1970.
4.Theory and problems of Matrices, Frank Ayres.Jr, Schaums outline series, Mc Graw
Hill Internationational Book Company, Singapore, 1982.
5. Complex variable and Applications. R.V.Churchill, Mc-Graw Hill, 1982.
6. Matrices and Tensors in Physics, A..W. Joshi, Wiley Eastern, 1985.
7. Mathematical Physics, B.D.Gupta, Vikas Publication, 1982.
8. Chemical Applications of Group Theory, F.A.Cotton, Addison Wiley, 1970.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. The Mathematical Physics and Chemistry Vol. I, Margenau Murphy, Van Nosterland,
1959.
2. Mathematical Statistics, Kanpur and Saxena, S.Chand & Co, 1973.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wulie and Barrett, Mc-Graw Hill, 1982.
4. Mathematical Physics, Butkov, Addition-Wesley, 1973.
5. Tensor Analysis, I.S.Soklnikoff, John Wiley and Sons, 1960.
6. Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists, Pipes and Harvill, Mc-Graw
Hill, 1970.
7. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wyile & Baratte, Mc-Graw Hill, 1982.

187

Paper 1.3 : INTEGRATED AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

UNIT I: CIRCUITS & TRANSISTOR AMPLIFIER:
Transistor- switching time Maximum power transfer theorem
Hybrid model analysis of a transistor amplifier using h parameter
Transistor biasing FET Biasing the FET - Common source and
source follower - Emitter follower Miller theorem High input
resistance transistor amplifier Class A large signal amplifier Class B
amplifier Push pull amplifier Transformer coupled audio power
amplifier.
UNIT II: OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
Operational amplifier block diagram schematic symbol
Equivalent circuit of an op-amp IC 741 electrical parameters input
offset voltage and current input bias current differential input
resistance input capacitance output offset voltage and nullification
CMRR scew rate opamp applications: differential amplifier
inverting and non-inverting amplifier integrator differentiator
comparator voltage follower current to voltage converter active
filters low pass high pass band pass (I order only) analog
computations (solutions for simultaneous equations).
UNIT III: DIGITAL CIRCUITS:
Logic gates TTL logic circuits ICs 7404, 7408, 7432, 7486 Truth
table & timing diagrams Boolean algebra AND, OR, NOR, NAND,
NOT, and XOR operations De morgans theorem Boolean laws
sum of products implement product of sums implementation
Karnaugh map truth table to Karnaugh map three & four variable
maps simplification. - Flip flops - R-S, clocked R-S, D, J-K, J-K
Master slave - Shift registers serial in-serial out serial in-parallel out
parallel in parallel out - parallel in-serial out - counters Asynchronous counters Synchronous counters Mod - n- counters.
UNIT IV: MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND INSTRUCTION
SET :
Block diagram ALU Instruction handling area Control section
Memory devices Explanation using 8085 Instructions cycle Fetch
operation Execute operations Instruction & Data flow- Timing
Diagrams Op-code fetch Memory read & Memory write, 8086
Microprocessor Architecture and operation only. - Instruction format
188

Addressing modes Types of Instructions Instructions for 8085

Subroutine Stack Operations.
UNIT V: DEVICES & CHARACTERIZATION:
Fabrication of monolithic ICs- Photovoltaic detector Solar cell
Types of Solar Cell- I-V characteristics Solar Cell Fabrication
technology Hall Effect Resistivity Measurements.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. Electronic devices and circuits J.Millman and C.Halkias, Mc-Graw
Hill publishers,1982.
2. Electronic principles A.P Malvino, TMH, 1984.
3. Electronic circuits Schilling and Belove, Mc-Graw Hill, 1981.
4. Digital computer electronics A.P.Malvino, Tata- Mc-Graw Hill,
1989, New Delhi.
5. Integrated electronics Millman & Halkias, Mc-Graw Hill, 1971,
USA.
6. Digital principles and applications A.P.Malvino and D.Leach , TataMc-Graw Hill, 1969, New Delhi.
7. Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits 3rd Ed. By Ramkant
A.Gayakwad, Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi-1997.
8. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications,
R.S.Gaonkar,
Wiley,New Delhi, 1986.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Electronic devices and circuits G.K.Mithal, Khanna Publishers, 1987,
New Delhi.

189

Paper 1.4 : ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY

UNIT I: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS & ELECTROMAGENTIC WAVES
Maxwells equations Differential and integral forms
Electromagnetic energy, Pointing theorem Pointing vector - Wave
equation Plane electromagnetic waves in (a) free space, (b) Nonconducting isotropic medium, (c) non-conducting anisotropic medium
and (d) conducting medium Polarization of electromagnetic waves.
UNIT II: APPLICATIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES:
I.REFLECTION AND REFRACTION
Boundary conditions at the surface of Discontinuity - Reflection and
refraction of electromagnetic waves at the interface of non-conducting
media Fresnels equations Reflection and Transmission Co-efficients
at the interface between two non-conducting media Brewsters law
and Degree of polarization-Total internal reflection.
UNIT III: APPLICATIONS OF E-M WAVES: II.DISPERSION AND
SCATTERING
Normal and Anomalous dispersion Dispersion in Gases Solids and
Liquids Clasusius Mossotti relation Lorentz Lorentz formula
scattering and scattering parameters - Theory of scattering of e-m waves
polarization of scattered Light coherence and incoherence of
scattered light.
UNIT IV: MICROWAVES
Generation of microwaves Klystron Magnetron Gunn diodes
Waveguides Rectangular and cylindrical waveguides Resonant
cavities-TEM modes.
UNIT V: PLASMA PHYSICS
Plasma Physics conditions for plasma existence occurrence of
plasma charged particle in Electric and Magnetic fields
Magnetohydrodynamics plasma waves.

190

BOOKS FOR STUDY:

1. Electromagnetic theory and Electrodynamics Satya Prakash,
Kedarnath Ramnath & Co, 1985, Chapter 8,9,10&14.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Electromagnetics Kraus & Carver, TMH, 1973.
2. Electromagnetic fields and waves Paul Lorain & Dale R.Corson, CBS
publishers, NewDelhi, 1986.
3. Foundations of Electromagnetic theory Reitz, Milford & Frederick,
Narosa publishing House, 1986.
4. Classical Electrodynamics, J.D.Jackson, Wiley Eastern Limited, New
Delhi, 1978.

191

Paper 1.5 : NUMERICAL METHODS AND PROGRAMMING

UNIT-I: FUNDAMENTALS OF C
History Features of C General Structure of a C Program
Sample C Program Editing and Executing a C Program Character
set Identifiers and key words Identifiers-Keywords-Data TypesBasic Data Types-Type Qualifiers-Constants-Numeric ConstantsCharacter
Constants-Variables-Arrays-Expressions-StatementsSymbolic Constants-Operators-Arithmetic Operators-Unary OperatorsRelational Operators-Logical Operators-Assignment OperatorsConditional Operators-Hierarchy Operators-Library Functions-Data
Input and Output Statements-Character Input and Output-String Input
and Output-Formatted Input and Output-Control Statement in CControl Statements-Branching Statements-Conditional branching
statements (i) the if-else statement-Conditional branching statements(ii)
the switch-case statement-Unconditional branching statement-the goto
statement-Looping Statement-The while statement-The do-while
statement-The for statement
UNIT-II: FUNCTION IN C
What is a C function?-Types of function in C-Advantages of C
Functions-Definition of a C Function-Function Prototype-Passing
parameters by value-Returning Multiple Values from a FunctionPassing Arrays as Arguments-Recursion-Pointers in C-What is a Pointer
in C?-Advantages of Pointers-Pointer Variables-Address operator(&)Indirection operator(*)-Declaration of pointers-Pointers and ArraysDynamic Memory Allocation using Pointers-Storage Classes-Function
used for Dynamic Memory Allocation-Structures and Unions in CDeclaration of a structure-Accessing a Structure-Array of StructuresPointers to Structures and Array of Structures-Unions in C-Data Files in
C-Using Files in C - Declaration of the FILE pointer-Opening a file
using the fopen ()function-Closing a file using the fclose()function-File
input and output-Character input and output-String Input and OutputFormatted input and output

192

UNIT III: COMPUTER PROGRAMMING:

Normalized floating points Errors and pitfalls - Iteration
methods for solving f(x) =0 - Bisection , False , Position , Newton
Raphson, Secant method and successive approximation methods.
UNIT IV: SOLUTIONS OF ALGEBRAIC SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS
AND INTERPOLATION:
Gauss elimination Gauss Jordan Gauss seidal methods Pivoting
-up to three unknowns Lagrange, Newton and Stirlings formula
Curve fitting Methods of least squares.
UNIT V: NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION AND INTEGRATION:
Simpsons rule and trpezoidals rule Numerical solution to ordinary
differential equations Euler, Modified Euler and second order Runge
Kutta methods.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. Essentials of Programming in C for Life Sciences S.Parthasarathy.
2. Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering M.K.Ventaraman,
National
Publishing Co, 1989.
BOOK FOR REFERENCE:
1. Numerical Methods in FORTRAN, Mc Cormick & Salvador,
Prentice Hall, 1987.
2. Numerical Methods for Science and Engineering R.G.Stanton,
Prentice Hall, 1977.

193

PAPER 1.6 : ADVANCED ELECTRONICS AND PHYSICS LAB

(Any Fifteen of the following)
1. Transistor as a switch and Schmitt trigger.
2. Monostable multivibrator (Transistor).
3. Characteristics of a FET.
4. Design of FET amplifier - CS Configuration.
5. Characteristics of UJT.
6. Characteristics of SCR.
7. Relaxation oscillator (UJT).
8. Transistorized Hartely and Colpitts audio oscillator.
9. Transistor Astable multivibrator.
10. Phase shift audio oscillator (Basic parameter).
11. Calibration of Spectrograph Iron or Copper spectrum.
12. Michelsons Interferometer.
13. q, n, - Elliptical and Hyperbolic fringes.
14. G.M Counter Statistical probability, Absorption measurements,
Half life
Measurements and inverse square law verification.
15. Resistivity measurements of a thin films.
16. Susceptibility by Guoys method and Quinckes method.
17. Thermal expansion using optical air wedge
18. e/m by Thompsons oil drop method
19. Determination of BH and M using magnetometers
20. Band gap of a semiconductor from the temperature variation of resistance of lightly
doped sample of Germanium.

194

Paper 2.1: SPECTROSCOPY

UNIT I: SYMMETRY ASPECTS OF MOLECULAR ORBITALS:
Valence bond theory Molecular orbital theory- Heitler London theory
for Hydrogen molecule - Hybridization SP SP2 & SP3 Hybrids.
UNIT II: ROTATIONAL SPECTRA:
Rotational energy of a diatomic molecule Rigid and non-rigid rotators
isotopic substitution Stark effect its importance in microwave
spectroscopy quadrupole hyperfine interaction - Rotational spectra of
polyatomic molecules pure rotational Raman spectra diatomic linear
molecule symmetric top molecules mutual exclusion principle Molecular structure using IR & Raman spectroscopy.
UNIT III: VIBRATIONAL PROPERTIES:
Vibrational spectra of diatomic and polyatomic molecules
Information on molecular constitution from I.R studies Vibrational
Raman spectra Vibrational course structure Rotational course
spectra Franck Condon principle intensity distribution portrait
parabolae disassociation - predisassociation.
UNIT IV: NON-LINEAR SPECTROSCOPIC PHENOMENA:
Non linear Raman phenomena Hyper Raman effect Classical
treatment Experimental techniques Stimulated Raman scattering
Inverse Raman effect Coherent anti-stokes Raman scattering Photo
acoustic Raman scattering Multiphoton spectroscopy two-photon
absorption Multiphoton absorption.
UNIT V: RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY:
Interaction between spin and magnetic field Nuclear resonance
Bloch equations - Chemical shift Dipole Dipole interaction and spin
lattice interaction Mossbauer ESR-NQR (principle only)
spectroscopy and its application Mossbaure spectroscopy applications Electronic structure molecular structure crystal
symmetry and molecular structures.

195

BOOKS FOR STUDY:

1. Atomic structure and chemical bonding Manas Chandra, T.M.H,
New Delhi, 1979.
2. Molecular Spectroscopy P.S.Sindu, T.M.H Pub. Co.
3. Molecular structure and spectroscopy, G.Aruldhas, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi
2001.
4.Molecular Spectroscopy Banwell, Tata MacroHill Publication, New
Delhi (1998)
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Basic principles of Spectroscopy, Chang. Mc-Graw Hill, Tokyo.
2. Quantum Chemistry and Spectroscopy, Madan .S, Pathania, Vishal
Publications, New Delhi, 1984.
3.Quantum chemistry Eyring, Walter & Kimabl, John Wiley & Sons.

196

Paper 2.2 : QUANTUM MECHANICS

UNIT I: FOUNDATIONS:
Wave particle duality -- Uncertainty principle applications Postulates of quantum mechanics Schrodinger equation both time
dependent and independent eigen function and eigenvectors
probability density - Applications to one dimensional problems (Linear
harmonic oscillator and tunnel effect).
UNIT II: DISCRETE EIGEN VALUE PROBLEM:
Three dimensional harmonic oscillator Rigid rotator
Application to diatomic molecules Hydrogen atom - Separation of
variables and solution of R, , equation Discussion of bound states
and parity.
UNIT III:OPERATOR METHOD IN QUANTUM MECHANICS AND
APPROXIMATION METHODS
Definition of an operator Operator algebra Eigen values and
Eigen functions Properties of Eigen functions Diracs bra and ket
notation Different types of operators Linear operators Hermitian
operators Parity operator Projection operator Unitary operator
Schwartz inequality. - Perturbation theory (first order) Time
independent Stark effect in hydrogen atom Variation method
Ground state of helium atom W.K.B approximation Application to
bound states.
UNIT IV: TIME EVOLUTION:
Time dependent perturbation theory The golden rule and
application Spontaneous emission Stimulated emission Einsteins
A & B coefficients - Semi classical and quantum theory of radiation
Eigenvalue and Eigenfunction - Rayleigh and Raman scattering
Selection rules. - Optical Theorem Born approximation Diffusion
Scattering Particle wave analysis Scattering Cross section.
UNIT V: THEORY OF ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND
SCATTERING THEORY:
Angular momentum of a system of particles Commutation
relations -- Matrix representation of angular momentum Pauli spin
matrices Addition of two angular momentum C.G. coefficients for j
= system only. - Optical Theorem Born approximation Diffusion
Scattering Particle wave analysis Scattering Cross section.
197

BOOKS FOR STUDY:

1. A text book of quantum mechanics P.M Mathews and
K.Venkatesan, Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi 1975.
2.Introductory Quantum Mechanics Zettili.
3. Quantum mechanics L.Schiff, Mc-Graw Hill, 1968.
4. Quantum mechanics B.N.Srivastava, Pragati prakashan, 1975.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Quantum mechanics L.Schiff, Mc Graw Hill, 1968.
2. Quantum mechanics J.P.Dicke and R.H.Wittke, Addison Wiley,
1978.
3. Quantum mechanics - A.K. Ghatak and Lokanathan, Mc Millan,
1977.
4. Principles of Quantum Mechanics R.Shankar, Springer (2007)
5.Quantum mechanics - V.K. Thangappan, Wiley Eastern, 1985.
6.Quantum electrodynamics - P. G. Puranik, S.Chand & co, 1980

198

Paper 2.3 : SOLID STATE PHYSICS

UNIT I: CRYSTAL STRUCTURE
Periodic arrays of atoms Fundamental types of lattices Index system
for crystal planes simple crystal structures Direct imaging of atomic
structure Nonideal crystal structures Crystal structure data.
RECIPROCAL LATTICE: Diffraction of waves by crystals
scattered wave amplitude Brillouin zones Fourier analysis of the
basis Quasicrystals.
Crystals of inert gases Ionic crystals Covalent crystals Metals
Hydrogen bonds Atomic radii Analysis of Elastic strains Elastic
compliance and stiffness constants Elastic waves in cubic crystals
UNIT II: PHONONS I CRYSTALS VIBRATIONS:
Vibrations of crystals with monoatomic basis Two atoms per
permitive basis Quantization of elastic waves phonon momentum
Inelastic scattering by phononsPHONONS-II- Thermal properties: Phonon heat capacity Anharmonic
crystal interactions Thermal conductivity
UNIT III : FREE ELECTRON FERMI GAS:
Energy levels in one dimension Effect of temperature on the Fermi
dirac distribution Free electron gas in three dimensions Heat
capacity of the electron gas Electrical conductivity and Ohms law
Motion in magnetic fields thermal conductivity of metals
Nanostructures. - Energy Bands: Nearly free electron model Bloch
functions Kronig Penney model Wave equation of electron in a
periodic potential Number of orbitals in a band.
UNIT IV: SEMICONDUCTOR CRYSTALS:
Band gap Equations of motion Intrinsic carrier concentration
Impurity conductivity thermoelectric effects semimetals
Superlattices
Fermi surfaces and metals: Construction of Fermi surfaces Electron
orbits, hole orbits and open orbits calculation of energy bands
Experimental methods in Fermi surface studies

199

UNIT V: DIELECTRICS, FERROELECTRICS,

FERROMAGNETISM AND
ANTIFERROMAGNETISM
Macroscopic electric field Local electric field at an atom Dielectric
constant and polarizability Structural phase transitions Ferroelectric
crystals Displacive transitions.
Diamagnetism and paramagnetism:- Langevin Diamagnetism equation
Quantums theory of diamagnetism of mononuclear system
paramagnetism Quantum theory of paramagnetism cooling by
isentropic demagnetization paramagnetic susceptibility of conduction
electrons.
Ferromagnetic order Magnons Neutron magnetic scattering
Ferrimagnetic order Antiferro magnetic order Ferromagnetic
domains Single domain particles Magnetic bubble domains.

200

Paper 2.4: NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS

UNIT I: NECLEAR DECAY:
Gamows Theory of Alpha decay - Fermis theory of Beta decay Kurie plots
Selection rules Electron capture Parity violation in Beta decay Neutrinos Measurement of neutrino helicity Gamma decay Internal
Conversion Nuclear Isomerism.
UNIT II: NUCLEAR MODELS:
Liquid Drop model Bohr Wheeler theory - Shell model Single particle
model Magic numbers Spin orbit coupling - Angular momentum of
nucleus ground states Magnetic Moments of the shell model Schmidt lines
Magnetic dipole moment Electric quadrupole moment Collective Model.
UNIT III: NUCLEAR FORCES:
Simple theory of deutron Tensor forces (qualitative) - Normalization of
deutron wave functions Method of partial wave analysis and phase shifts Effective range theory n-p scattering at low energies Yukawa s meson
theory of nuclear forces.
UNIT IV: REACTION CROSS SECTIONS AND NUCLEAR REACTORS:
Nuclear cross sections Compound nuclear formation and breakup
Resonance scattering cross section Interaction of neutron with matter
Thermal neutrons neutron cycle in a thermo nuclear reactor Critical size
Types of nuclear reactors - cylindrical and spherical- sub-nuclear particles
(elementary ideas only) Nuclear fusion energy release in fusion plasma
confinement source of stellar energy controlled thermo nuclear reactions.
UNIT V: NUCLEAR & ELEMENTARY PARTICLES:
Classification Paricle Directory Leptons, Baryons and quarks The
fundamental interactions Translations in space Rotations in space SU(2)
and SU(3) groups Charge conjugation Parity Time reversal CPT
Theorem.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:

1. Introduction to Nuclear Physics Herald Enge, Addision Wesley Pub. Co,

U.S.A.
2. Nuclear Physics Irving Kaplan, Oxford & I.B.H Pub & Co.
3. Nuclear Physics D.C.Tayal, Himalaya House, Bombay.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Atomic Nucleus R.D.Evans, Mc-Graw Hill, 1955.
2. Nuclear Physics R.R.Roy and B.P.Nigam, John Wiley 1967.

201

Paper 2.5: MATERIALS SCIENCE

UNIT I: MATERIAL BEHAVIOUR:
Elastic, Inelastic and Viscoelastic behaviour of materials Failures of
materials due to creep and fatigue - Polymers Addition and condenation
polymerization Corrosion and oxidation.
UNIT II: LASER AND LASER MATERIALS:
Basic principles Population rate equation Shallow Town s condition
Optical resonator Solid state lasers - Semiconductor lasers Compound
semiconductor laser - Gas lasers, Liquid, Dye and Chemical lasers and
Applications.
UNIT III: ELECTRO-OPTICAL MATERIALS AND DEVICES:
Electro-optical effect Materials Pockels effect, Kerr effect Acoustic optical effect Faraday effect Second harmonic generators.
UNIT IV: THIN FILMS:
Production and Measurement of high Vacuum - Rotary pump and
Diffusion pump - Pirani and Penning Gauge - Deposition processes Thermal
evaporation Reactive Sputtering - RF Sputtering - Thickness measurement
Weight gain method and Quartz crystal method LB films.
UNIT V: SOLID STATE IONICS:
Types of Ionic solids Silver ion conductors Copper ion conductors
Applications Fuel cells Solid state battery Electrochromic display
systems.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. A First course in Materials science and Engineering V.Raghavan.
2. Material science and Processes G.B.S.Narang, Khanna Publishers.
3. Handbook of Thin film technology L.L.Maissel and R.Alang, Mc-Graw
Hill, 1972.
4. Crystal growth Technique, Pamplin.
5. Super ionic solids principles and applications Suresh Chandra North
Holland Publishing company.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCES:
1. Material Science for Engineers - Van Vlack, Addison Wisley, 1975.
2. Thin Film Eckertrova.

202

Paper 2.6 : ADVANCED ELECTRONICS AND PHYSICS LAB

(Any Twelve of the following)
1. Half adders and Full adders.
2. Integrator and Differentiator circuits using IC 741.
3. D/A converters (a) Ladder network (b) Weighted resistor method.
4. A/D converter.
5. Square wave, Sine wave and Triangular wave generators using IC.
6. Schmitt trigger using op-amp.
7. Demultiplexer.
8. BCD to 7 segment display and BCD decoder.
9. Shift register and ring counter.
10.Operation of 7489 RAMS.
11)Hall effect Mobility and Hall constant determination.
12)Determination of Curie point Ferromagnetic material.
13) Refractive index of liquid by laser.
14) Determination of wavelength of a laser source by diffraction grating.
15) Electron spin resonance spectrometer
16) Magnetic Hystersis loop tracer
17) e/m by Millikans oil drop method
18) Hydrogen spectrum and Rydbergs constant
19) Determination of the value of the capacitance using Impedance vs 1/C
20) Maxwells bridge

203

Course

M.Sc. (Chemistry) [2008-09 onwards]

Pattern

Annual pattern

Mode

Distance Education

Duration

Two years

Eligibility

Bachelor Degree in Chemistry

Medium

English only

PROGRAMME OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

Code No
Name of the Course
Max.
Mark
I Year
1.1

Organic Chemistry - I

100

1.2

Inorganic Chemistry - I

100

1.3

Physical Chemistry - I

100

1.4

Instrumental Methods of
Analysis

100

1.5

Organic Chemistry Practical

100

1.6

AnalyticalChemistryPractical

100

2.1

Organic Chemistry - II

100

2.2

Inorganic Chemistry - II

100

2.3

Physical Chemistry - II

100

2.4

Applied Chemistry

100

2.5

Inorganic Chemistry Practical

100

2.6

Physical Chemistry Practical

100

II Year

1200
Total Marks

204

1.1 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I

Unit I
Electron Displacement: Inductive and field effects mesomeric effect
steric inhibition of resonance steric enhancement of resonance
hyperconjugation - time variable effects -hydrogen bonding effect of
structure on the dissociation constants of acids and bases.
Reaction Mechanisms: Classification of organic reactions - Principle
of microscopic reversibility - Hammond postulate - Kinetic and
thermodynamic control of chemical reactions - Kinetic and non-kinetic
methods for determining organic reaction mechanisms - formation and
stability of reactive intermediates - carbocations, carbanions, carbenes
and nitrenes.
Aromaticity: Concept of aromaticity - HMO theory concept of
homoaromaticity and antiaromaticity Non-benzenoid aromatic
compounds cyclopentadienyl anion, fulvene, ferrocene, azulene,
tropolones, annulens and tropylium cations - Alternate and nonalternate hydrocarbons.
UNIT II
Aliphatic nucleophilic substitutions: Nucleophiles and bases
ambident nucleophiles hard and soft acids, SN1 and SN2 mechanisms Phase Transfer catalysis - effect of structure, medium, nucleophile and
leaving group - stereochemical changes - SN1, SN2, SNi, mechanisms
-Esterification and ester hydrolysis mechanisms.
Aliphatic electrophilic substitutions: SE1,SE2 and SEi mechanisms.
Aromatic electrophilic substitutions: Mechanisms - orientation and
reactivity - ortho/para ratio - partial rate factors mechanisms of
nitration, nitrosation, diazonium coupling, sulphonation, halogenation,
Friedel craft alkylation and acylation - Gatermann Koch formylation Vilsmier Haak reaction.
Aromatic Nucleophilic substitutions: Unimolecular and bimolecular
mechanisms - benzyne mechanism - Orientation and reactivity -VonRichter reaction.

205

Unit III
Elimination reactions: E1, E2 and E1cB mechanisms - orientation of the
double bond - effect of substrate, base, leaving group and reaction
medium - Hofmann and Saytzeff rules - elimination versus substitution
- pyrolytic cis elimination - Bredts rule.
Addition to carbon-carbon double bonds: Electrophilic, Nucleophilic
and free radical additions - stereochemistry of additions - addition to
conjugated systems - regioselectivity and chemoselectivity in additions
- hydration of olefins hydroboration - Michael addition - Addition of
Grignard reagents and lithium dimethyl Cuprate - Diels-Alder reaction.
Addition to carbonyl groups: Mechanisms of Aldol condensation,
Perkin reaction, Knovenagal reaction, Mannich reaction, Claisen ester
condensation, Dickmann condensation, Darzen reaction. Wittig
reaction, Cannizzaro reaction, Benzoin condensation and Reformatsky
reaction.
Unit IV
Heterocyclic compounds: Structure and synthesis of Indole, Oxazole,
Thiazole, Flavone, Isoflavone, Anthocyanin Cyanidin chloride.
Alkaloids: Structure and synthesis of Morphine, Atropine and
Tylophorine. Biosynthesis of Alkaloids.
Terpenes: Structure and synthesis of -Pinene, Camphor and
Zingiberene. Biosynthesis of terpenes
Unit V
Proteins: Solid phase peptide synthesis - end group analysis-structure
of oxytocin - primary, secondary and tertiary structure of proteinsenzymes, coenzymes-DNA and RNA their biological importance.
Carbohydrates: Configuration and conformation of disaccharides Maltose and cellobiose Polysaccharides - starch and cellulose.

206

Text books
1. Advanced Organic Chemistry Reactions, Mechanisms and
Structure, Jerry March, IV Edn., John Wiley & Sons, 1992.
2. A Guide Book to Mechanisms in Organic Chemistry, P.Sykes, VI
Edn., Longmans Scientifics and Technical, Essex 1986.
3. Reaction Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, S.M. Mukherji and
S.P.Singh, III Edn. 1984, MacMillan.
4. Organic Chemistry, Vol. I & II, I.L. Finar, V Edn. First Indian reprint,
Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd. 2000.
Reference books
1. Advanced Organic Chemistry, Part A & B, F.A.Carey and Sundberg,
III Edn. Plenum Press, 1990.
2. Organic Chemistry, S.H.Pine, J.B. Hendrickson, D.J.Cram and
G.S.Hammond, IV Edn. McGraw-Hill Company 1980.
3. Mechanism and Theory in Organic Chemistry T.H. Lowry and
K.S. Richardson, Harper and Row, NY 1976.
4. Organic Reactions and Mechanisms, P.S.Kalsi, II Edn. New Age
International Publishers, 2000.
5. Fundamentals of Organic Reaction Mechanisms- J.M.Harris and
C.C. Wamser, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1976.
6. Organic Reaction Mechanisms-R.K. Bansel, Tata McGraw Hill,
1975.
7. Chemistry of Alkaloids, S.W. Pelletier, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1970.
8. Chemistry of Terpenes and Terpenoids, A.A.Newman (editor),
Academic Press, London, 1972.
9. Organic Chemistry, P.Mehta & M.Mehta, Prentice Hall India, New
Delhi, 2005.
10. Chemistry of Terpenoids, P.De Mayo, Interscience publishers, 1959.
11. Biochemistry, A.L.Lehninger, Nath publishers, 2000.

207

1.2 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY I

UNIT I
Basic concepts in Inorganic Chemistry: VB approach to covalent bonding Heitler-London, Pauling-Slater refinements - Hybridization and structure of
molecule. VSEPR theory - shapes of molecules. MO approach to covalent
bonding - symmetry and overlap of atomic orbitals -symmetry of molecular
orbitals - sigma-pi-and delta-bonding - energy levels in homo- and hetero
nuclear diatomic molecules. Bond length, bond order and bond energy ionic
character in a covalent bond. The concept of multi centre bonding. Structure
and bonding in fluorine and oxygen compounds of xenon and krypton.
Bonding in simple triatomic molecules/ions.
Lattice energy and its calculations by Born-lande and Born-Meyer
equations - Determination by Born-Haber cycle - Kapustinski equation.
Energetics of dissolution of ionic compounds in polar solvents. Properties of
ionic compounds-hardness and electrical conductivity. HSAB principle
Pearsons concept- hardness and softness-symbiosis-theoretical basis of
Hardness and softness - Electronegativity and hardness and softness.
UNIT II
Solid Sate Chemistry: Crystal structure - classification of ionic structures AX,AX2,AX3 types AX type (ZnS, NaCl, CsCl) structures only - AX 2
type(fluorite, rutile, beta-cristobolite) structure only - layer structure CdI 2Nickel arsenite structure. Schottky and Frenkel defects -explanation and
calculation of number defects per cm3 metal excess defect - F-centers and
interstitial ions - metal deficiency defect - positive ions absent - extra interstial
negative ions semiconductors and transistors rectifiers - photovoltaic cell.
UNIT III
Nuclear chemistry: Radioactive decay - theories of decay processes Laws
of radioactivity - detection and measurements of radiations - nuclear structure
- composition of nuclei properties of nuclei - nuclear radii, nuclear spin etc
nuclear forces-its characteristics - meson field theory -nuclear stability nuclear models - liquid drop shell and collective models. Artificial
radioactivity - nuclear reactions - transmutation, stripping and pick up, fission,
fusion, spallation and fragmentation reactions - scattering reactions - nuclear
cross-section. Nuclear reactors -charged particle accelerators, neutron sources
- ray and X ray sources - Application C14 dating agriculture - biology
neutron activation and isotopic dilution analysis.
UNIT IV
Lanthanides and actinides: Lanthanides - occurrence, extraction and
separation techniques (fractional crystallization, precipitation, ion exchange,
solvent extraction and thermal decomposition, selective reduction and
oxidation) - lanthanide contraction spectral and magnetic properties coordination compounds of lanthanides - uses of lanthanides and their

208

compounds - position in the periodic table. Actinides - synthesis of elements electronic configuration and oxidation states - spectral and magnetic properties
- comparative account of lanthanides and actinides - position in the periodic
table.
UNIT V

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Polyacids and silicates: Isopoly and heteropoly acids - solution equilibria and
pH dependence structure of polymolybdates and vanadates - Anderson
structure. Hetero-polyanions - 6,9,12 hetero-polyanions - Keggin structure.
Silicates: Paulings rule of electrovalence and structure of silicates isomorphous replacements some important silicate structures - ortho and
metasilicates. Pyroxenes and amphiboies - layer structures - clay minerals
mica silicate with frame work structures - feldspar, zeolites - molecular
sieves.
Text books
Modern aspects of Inorganic chemistry, H.J. Emelius and Sharpe, Universal
book Stall, New Delhi, 1989.
Inorganic Chemistry- Principles of structure and reactivity, J.E. Huheey,
E.A. Keiter and R.L. Keiter, 4th edition, Pearson-Education, 2002.
Advanced Inorganic Chemistry - F.A. Cotton and G. Wilkinson, Wiley
Eastern, 5th edition, 1998.
Source book of atomic Energy, S. Glasstone, Van Nonstrand Co., 1969.
Essentials of nuclear chemistry, H.J. Arniker, 2nd edition Wiley eastern
Co.,1987.
Reference books
Inorganic Chemistry, D. F. Shriver and P. W. Atkins, Oxford U.K., 1999
Physical Methods in Inorganic Chemistry, R. S. Drago, Van Nostrand
Reinhold. 2nd Edn., 1968.
The Magneto Chemistry of Complex Compounds in Modern Coordination
Chemistry, B. N. Figgeis and J. Lewis, Ed: Lewis & Wilkins, Interscience.
N.Y., 1967.
Non -Aqueous Solvents, T. C. Wadington, Nelson, 1969.
A Text book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, A. I. Vogel, ELBS, 3rd Edn,
1969.
Inorganic Chemistry, K.F. Purcell and J.C. Kotz, WB Saunders Co. USA
1977.
Inorganic Chemistry, G.S. Manku. TMH Co., 1984.
Elements of Nuclear Chemistry, A.K. Srivatsava and P.C. Jain, S. Chand
and Co., 1989.
Nuclear and radiochemistry, G. Friedlander, J.W. Kennedy and J.M. Miller,
Wiley, 1964.

209

1.3 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I

UNIT - I
Classical thermodynamics: Second law of thermodynamics Need,
Statements. Entropy - Definition, entropy changes in reversible and
irreversible processes, Carnots cycle clausius inequality, entropy changes in
ideal gases, entropy of mixing, entropy changes in phase changes Degradation of energy.
Gibb's and Helmholtz free energies - Criteria for spontaneity and
conditions of equilibrium Maxwell relations - Thermodynamic equations of
state Free energy changes in ideal gases. Gibbs Helmholtz equation,
applications - Nernst Heat theorem - Third law of thermodynamics, apparent
exceptions to third law - Partial molar quantities - chemical potential Gibb's
Duhem equation - Duhem Margules equation - determination of partial molar
quantities.
Fugacity and its determination - Activity and activity co efficient determination of mean activity co - efficient of electrolytes - Reaction
isotherm - equilibrium constant and its dependence on temperature and
pressure.
UNIT -II
Electrochemistry: Transport number and ionic mobilities (only definition and
not determination) - Debye Huckel theory of interionic attraction - Debye
Huckel Onsagar equation - Validity and extension of the theory - Activity of
ions in solution - Debye Huckel limiting law - Applications of conductivity
measurements - Electrode potential and Nernst equation - types of electrodes
and electrochemical cells - Applications of cell EMF - Electrode Kinetics over
voltage and its determination - Butler-Volmer equation and approximation of
the equation.

210

UNIT III
Quantum Chemistry-I: Inadequacy of classical mechanics, wave-particle
dualism - Heisenberg's uncertainty principle - Mathematical preparation for
quantum chemistry: functions, operators, matrices, vectors Eigen value and
eigen functions, postulates of quantum mechanics-schrodinger wave equation
- Application of quantum chemistry to one and three dimensional boxes degeneracy
UNIT-IV
Chemical Kinetics-I: Theories of reaction rates: Absolute reaction rate
theory(ARRT) - thermodynamic and statistical treatment - comparison to
simple collision theory - Application of ARRT to unimolecular (Lindemann,
Hinshelwood and KRRM and Slater) bimolecular and third order reactions Potential energy surfaces, Kinetic isotopic effect (qualitative approach only) Principles of microscopic reversibility - steady state approximation - Kinetics
of complex reactions: Parallel consecutive and opposing or reversible
reactions, Branched chain and explosive reactions - Fast reactions - Flow,
relaxation and NMR methods.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.

UNIT-V
Photochemistry and radiation chemistry: Absorption of light by atoms and
molecules - photophysical processes of the electronically excited states fluorescence and phosphorescence -energy transfer mechanisms photosensitization and Chemiluminescence - actinometers and quantum yield
determination - Flash photolysis. Study of photochemical reactions Hydrogen -Halogen reaction - decomposition of carbonyl compounds - Solar
energy conversion. Radiation chemistry of aqueous solutions - hydrated
electron - radiolysis of water.
Text Books
Quantum Chemistry, D.A. McQuarrie, University Science Books, Mill
Valley, California, 1983.
Thermodynamics for Students of Chemistry, J. Rajaram and J.C.
Kuriacose, Lal Nagin Chand, New Delhi, 1986.
Kinetics and Mechanism of Chemical Transformations, J. Rajaram and
J.C. Kuriacose, MacMillan India Ltd. 1993.
Physical Chemistry, P.W.Atkins, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1990.
Text Book of Physical Chemistry, D.A. McQuarrie, University Science
Books, Mill Valley, California, 1983.
Introduction to Electrochemistry, S.Glasstone, Affiliated East west Press,
New Delhi 1960.
Reference Books
Molecular Quantum Mechanics, P.W. Atkins, Oxford University Press,
Oxford, 1983
Quantum Mechanics in Chemistry, M.W.Hanna, W.A.Benjamin Inc.
London 1965

211

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Thermodynamics for Chemists, S. Glasstone, Affiliated East West Press,

New Delhi 1960.
Chemical Kinetics, K.J.Laidler, Harper and Row, New York,1987.
Kinetics and Mechanism, R.G. Frost and Pearson, Wiley New York, 1961
Kinetics and Mechanism, W.J. Moore and R.G. Pearson, 1981.
Quantum Chemistry, R.K.Prasad, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi,1992.
Physical Chemistry, R.A. Alberty and R.J.Silbey, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1992.
Principles and application of Electrochemistry, D.R. Crow, Chapman and
Hall, 1991.
Electrochemistry, J.O.M. Bockris and A.K.N. Reddy Vols. 1 and 2, Plenum,
New York, 1977.
Electrochemistry, P.H.Rieger, Chapman and Hall, New York, 1994.

212

1.4 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS

Unit - I
UV-Visible spectroscopy: Basic Principles electronic excitations-solvent
effects - factors affecting position and intensity of absorption bands instrumentation - applications Qualitative analysis - Quantitative analysis spectra of dienes - ,-unsaturated ketones and aromatic carbonyl compounds
Woodward Fieser rules - charge transfer complexes.
IR-Spectroscopy: Basic principles-stretching vibrations - Hooks law Bending vibrations Overtone and combination bands - Fermi resonance
Instrumentation - Applications to organic compounds - characteristic
frequencies - effects of substitution, conjugation, bond angle and hydrogen
bond - vibrational frequencies.
Unit II
NMR Spectroscopy: Theory of 1H NMR spectroscopy chemical shift
factors affecting chemical shift spin spin coupling Instrumentation - first
order and non-first order spectra - shift reagents, Double resonance - spin
tickling - Nuclear Overhauser Effect - Deuterium exchange reactions
Applications - 13C NMR - FT-NMR.
ESR Spectroscopy: Theory Instrumentation - Presentation of spectrum comparison between ESR and NMR - g values - applications to organic and
inorganic compounds.
Unit-III
Mass Spectroscopy: Principle - parent ion - Meta stable ion - isotopic ions Basic peak Nitrogen rule - Instrumentation general rule of fragmentation Mclafferty rearrangement. Structure elucidation.
ORD and CD: Principle Circular birefringence and circular dichromism
Cotton effect - ORD curves - Application on cotton effect curves - haloketone rule - octant rule - Applications for determination of conformation
and configuration.
Chromatographic methods: Definition - Classification - Basic and
elementary principle and practice of Paper chromatography. Thin Layer
Chromatography and Gas chromatographic techniques - High Pressure Liquid
Chromatography.
Unit IV
Thermal and Spectrometric methods of analysis: Thermogravimetry Differential thermal analysis - Differential scanning calorimetry Thermometric titrations, Principles and applications of calorimetry,
Fluorimetry, turbidimetry and Nephelometry - flame photometry.
Unit-V
Electroanalytical methods: Ion selective electrodes - Potentiometric methods
electrogravimetry - Coulometric analysis. Polarography - Instrumentation,
principles and applications. Cyclic voltammetry - chrono techniques amperometry and stripping analysis.

213

Error analysis: Types of errors - methods of elimination of errors - Statistical

analysis of data -Precision and accuracy - standard and normal error curves null hypothesis Student t- Test - Rejection criteria - Q-test and F-test Linear regression analysis.
Text Books

Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Willard, Merit Dean and Settle

CBS Publishers and Distributors, IV Edn., 1986.
1. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Schoog, Holler,
Nieman, Thomson, Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2004.
2. Spectrometric identification of organic compounds, R.M
Silverstein, C.G. Bassler and Morril, VI Edn., John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 2002.
3. Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, A.I Vogel,
ELBS III Edn, 1987.
4. Instrumental methods of chemical analysis, Chatwal and
Anand, Himalaya publishing House New Delhi, 2000.
Reference Books
1. Electronic Principles, Albert Paul Malvino PMH Publishers, III Edn,
1984.
2. Analytical Chemistry, J.G. Dick McGraw Hill Publishers, 1974.
3. Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis, G.W.Ewing
McGraw Hill Pub, 1975.
4. Electroanalytical Chemistry, B. H. Vassos and G.W. Ewing, John
Wiley and Sons, NY, 1983
5. Instrumental methods in Electrochemistry, R. Greef, R. Peat,
L.M. Peter, D. Pletcher and J. Robinson, Ellis Horwood, Chichester,
1985.
6. Electrochemical methods, Fundamentals and applications, A.J.
Bard and
L.R.Faulkner, J. Wiley and Sons, NY, 1980.
5. Spectroscopy of organic compounds, P.S. Kalsi, Wiley Eastern
Ltd., Madras, 1995.
6. Modern Electrochemistry, J.O.M. Bockris and AKN Reddy, Plenum,
1970.
7. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, D.A.Skoog and D.M.West
Holt Rinehart and Winston Publications, IV Edn, 2004.
7. NMR in Chemistry, W. Kemp, MacMillan Ltd,1986.
8. Spectroscopy in Inorganic Chemistry, C.N.R.Rao, J.R.Ferraro,
Methven Co., London, 1968.
9. Basic Principles of Spectroscopy, Raymond Chang, Mc Graw Hill
Ltd., New York, 1993.
10. Instrumental Analysis, G. D. Christian and J.E.O Reilly, Allyn and
Bacon Inc, II Edn., 1986.
11. Structural methods in Inorganic Chemistry, E.A.V. Ebsworth,
D.WH. Rankine and S. Craddock, Black well Scientific Publ., 1987.

214

1.5 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL

1.

Analysis of two-component mixtures: Separation and

characterization of components.
2. About a dozen single stage preparation of organic compounds:
Preparations illustrating O-acylation, N-acylation, bromination,
nitration, benzoylation, diazotization, rearrangements, hydrolysis,
oxidation etc.
Reference books
1. Vogels Practical Organic Chemistry, B.S.Furniss, A.J.Hannaford,,
P.W.G.Smith and A.R.Tatchell, 5th edn. ELBS, 1989.
2. Laboratory Manual of Organic Chemistry, Raj K. Bansal, III Edn.,
New Age International (P) Ltd.1996.
1.6 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL
1. Quantitative estimations: Quantitative estimation of aniline, phenol,
ethylmethylketone, and glucose (by both Betrand`s and Lane and Eynon
methods).
2. Semi-micro qualitative analysis: Analysis of mixtures containing two
less familiar cations like W, Tl, Mo, Se, Te, Ce, Zr, Th, Ti, V, U and Li
and two familiar cations like Pb, Cu, Bi, Cd, Mn, Ni, Co, Zn,Ca, Ba, Sr
and Mg.
Reference Books
1. Laboratory Manual of Organic Chemistry, Raj K. Bansal, III Edn., New
Age International (P) Ltd.1996.
2. Vogels qualitative Inorganic analysis, G. Svehla, VI Edition, Orient
Longman, 1987.
3. Inorganic Semimicro Qualitative analysis, V.V. Ramanujam, National
Publishing Co., 1971.

215

2.1 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II

Unit I
Molecular rearrangements: Mechanisms of Wagner Meerwein, Demzonev,
Wolff, Baeyer-Villiger, Stern and Favorskii rearrangements.
Oxidation: Oxidations using chromic acid, DMSO-DCC, Manganese dioxide,
Selenium dioxide, lead tetraacetate and periodic acid - Oppenaur oxidation.
Reduction: Catalytic reduction - Birch, Wolff-Kishner and Clemmmensen
reduction - MPV reduction.
Synthetic methods: Planning a synthesis - linear, convergent and relay
approaches to total synthesis - Retrosynthetic analysis of simple organic
compounds. Functional group interconversions. Use of activating and
blocking groups in synthesis. Stereoselective problems of geometrical and
optical isomerism. Umploung synthesis. Robinson annelation - schematic
analysis of the total synthesis of 2,4-dimethyl-2-hydroxypentanoic acid and
trans-9-methyl-1-decalone.
Unit II
Optical isomerism: Elements of symmetry - projection formulas - chirality,
CahnPrelog- Ingold nomenclature - Enantiotopic and diastereotopic atoms
atropisomerism - optical isomerism of compounds containing one and more
than one asymmetric carbon - optical activity of biphenyl, allenes and spiranes
optical isomerism of nitrogen and sulphur compounds -stereospecific and
stereoselective synthesis Resolution, racemisation and asymmetyric
synthesis Crams and Prelogs rules.
Geometrical isomerism: Carbon-Carbon double bonds, E,Z-nomenclature Determination of configurations of geometrical isomers - Monocyclic systems.
Unit III
Conformational analysis: Configuration and conformation - configuration in
open chain systems - conformation and reactivity in acyclic compounds
examples of E2 elimination, neighboring group participation, intramolecular
rearrangements and cis-elimination - oxidation and substitutions conformation of cyclohexane and its mono and disubstituted cyclohexanes
-conformation and reactivity of cyclohexane derivatives - conformations of
decalins.

216

Free radical reactions: Formation, detection, stability and reactions of free

radicals radicals chain reactions - polymerization, substitution, additions and
rearrangements Barton, Gomberg, Sandmeyer, Ullmann, Pschorr and
Hunsdiecker reactions.
Unit IV
Photochemistry: Principles - excited states - Energy transfers - Jablonski
diagram - sensitization, quenching and quantum efficiency - Norrish type I
and type II reactions Paterno-Buchi reaction photoreduction
photooxidation - photochemical reactions of olefins - cis-trans isomerisation di- methane rearrangement.
Pericyclic reactions: Woodward-Hoffmann rules - Frontier molecular orbital
theory -perturbation theory - electrocyclic reactions - cycloaddition reactions chemotropic reaction -sigmatropic rearrangements.
Unit V
Vitamins: Physiological importance of Vitamins - Structural elucidation and
synthesis of Vitamin A, B1 and B2 - Structural elucidation of Vitamin D
Steroids: Structural elucidation of cholesterol (synthesis not required) Structural elucidation and synthesis of Oestrone, Equilenin, Progesterone and
Androsterone - biosynthesis of Cholesterol. Conformations of steroids.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Text books
Stereochemistry of carbon compounds, Ernest L. Eliel, T.M.H. Edn.,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 1962.
Stereochemistry Conformation and Mechanism, P.S.Kalsi, New Age
International (P) Ltd. VI Edn., 2005.
Organic Photochemistry, J.M.Coxon and B. Halton, Cambridge
University Press 1974.
Advanced Organic Chemistry Reactions, Mechanisms and
Structure, Jerry March, IV Edn., John Wiley & Sons, 1992.
Molecular Rearrangements, Vol.I, Vol. II, Paul de Mayo, Interscience,
NY, 1963.
Organic Chemistry, Vol.II, I.L. Finar, V Edn., First Indian reprint,
Pearson Education Asia Pvt.Ltd., 2000.
Reference books

1.
2.

Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, D.Nasipuri, New

International Publishers, 1994.
Stereochemistry, V.M. Potapov, MIR Publishers, Moscow 1979.

217

Age

3.

Conformational Analysis, E.L.Eliel, N.C. Alliger, S.J.Angyal and

G.A.Morrison, Interscience, NY 1965.
4. Stereochemistry and Mechanism through solved problems, P.S. Kalsi,
Second Edition, New Age International Publishers, 1994.
5. Molecular reactions and Photochemistry, Charles A. Depuy and Orville L.
Chapman, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 1972.
6. Modern Molecular Photochemistry, N.J.Turro, Benjamin/ Cummings,
Menlo Park, California, 1978
7. Organic Chemistry, R.T. Morrison and R.N. Boyd, Allyn and Bacon Inc.,
1983.
8. Organic Chemistry, S.H.Pine, J.B. Hendrickson, D.J.Cram and
G.S.Hammond, IV Edn., McGraw-Hill Company 1980.
9. Organic Reactions and Mechanisms, P.S.Kalsi, II Edn. New Age
International Publishers, 2000.
10. Fundamentals of Organic Reaction Mechanisms- J.M.Harris and C.C.
Wamser, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1976.
11. Principles of Organic Synthesis, R.O.C. Norman, II Edn., Chapman and
Hall, 1993.

218

2.2 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY II

UNIT - I
Coordination Chemistry I: Nomenclature geometrical and optical
isomerisms in octahedral, square planar and tetrahedral complexes-CFT
Splitting in octahedral filed CFSE - Strong field and weak field
splitting-calculation of CFSE for dn systems - splitting in tetrahedral
complexes - only weak field splitting reason - tetragonal symmetry differences between tetrahedral and tetragonal symmetries - Jahn-Teller
distortion - theorem z-in and z-out distortions - square planar
symmetry - factors affecting 10Dq - Jorgensen relation - evidences for
CFSE magnetic property lattice energy-stability of particular
oxidation state - site preferences in spinnels.
MOT - Octahedral, tetrahedral, square planar complexes-pi
bonding and MOT ligands having empty, and filled pi orbitals effect
on 10Dq.
UNIT II
Coordination Chemistry II: Stability of coordination compounds stability constants, stepwise and overall formation constants - pH
metric, polarographic and Spectrophotometric methods of determining
stability constants - chelate effect.
Kinetics and mechanisms of reactions in solution - labile and
inert complexes - ligand displacement reactions - hydrolysis, anation,
aquation in octahedral complexes - substitution reactions in square
planar complexes trans effect electron transfer reactions complementary and non-complementary reactions - inner sphere and
outer sphere processes isomerisation and racemisation - template
effect and synthesis of macrocyclic ligands.
UNIT III
Inorganic Spectroscopy and Magnetic properties: IR spectroscopy effect of coordination on ligand vibrations - uses of group vibrations in
the structural elucidation of metal complexes of urea, cyanide, nitrate,
sulfate and dimethyl sulphoxide - effect of isotopic substitution on the
vibrational spectra of molecules.
Electronic spectroscopy - difference between electronic
configuration and terms states microstates - derivation of term
symbols - spectroscopic terms - effect of Interelectronic repulsion and
spin-orbit coupling Racah parameters B and C - selection rules and
219

their break -down-splitting of orbitals in octahedral field-hole

formalism - ground states of free ions for dn systems - energy level
diagrams for dn systems-mixing of orbitals - Orgel, and Tanabe-Sugano
diagrams - prediction and assignment of transitions for dn systems.
Magnetic properties - para, dia, ferro, ferri, antiferro magnetisms
- calculation of eff values for complexes.EPR - basic principles characteristics of g-gII and gI- gI>gII reason -selection rules splitting
in bis(salicylaldiminecopper (II)).
UNIT IV
Organometallics: Definition M- C bond - Low oxidation state of
metal explanation - metal alkyls and aryls - Olefin and acetylene
complexes - Dewar-Chatt approach to bonding in olefins - metallocenes
structure comparison of ferrocene with other metallocenes with
respect to their reactivity, magnetic property, stability etc, from MOT
preparation of ferrocene properties - fluxional molecules. Catalysis
involving organometallics - oxidative addition and reductive
elimination, hydrogenation, isomerisation and hydroformylation Ziegler-Natta polymerization.
UNIT V
Bio-Inorganic Chemistry: Metalloporphyrins - Chlorophyllhemoglobin and myoglobin structure and function of hemoglobin cytochromes, enzyme action-inhibition and restoration
metalloenzymes carboxy peptidase-A, Vitamin B12 and B12
coenzymes, non-heme iron proteins - rubridoxin ferrodoxins - fixation
of nitrogen - in vivo systems. Alkali and alkaline earth metal ions in
biology - sodium ion pump. Copper containing oxidases - different
types of copper proteins, catalytic properties of laccase - synthetic
oxygen carriers - metal complexes of Schiff bases, Vaska`s compound Metal poisons and chelating agents in medicine.

Text books
1. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, F.A. Cotton and G. Wilkinson, Wiley
Eastern (P) Ltd., 1988.
2. Structural methods in Inorganic Chemistry, E.A.V. Ebsworth,
D.WH. Rankine and S. Craddock, Black well Scientific Publ., 1987.
3. Physical Methods in Chemistry, R.S. Drago, Reinhold, New York,
1968.
4. Inorganic Solids, D. M. Adams, John Wiley Sons, 1974.
220

5. Principles of Bioinorganic Chemistry, S.J. Lippard and Berg. Univ.

Science Books 1994.

Reference books
1. Co-ordination Chemistry, D. Bannerjea, Tata-McGraw Hill, 1993.
2.Biocoordination Chemistry, D.E. Fenton, Oxford Science Publication 1995.
3.Inorganic Chemistry- Principles of structure and reactivity, J.E. Huheey,
E.A. Keiter and R.L. Keiter, 4th edition, Pearson-Education, 2002.
4.Co-ordination compounds, S.F.A. Kettle, ELBS, 1973.
Theoretical Inorganic Chemistry, M.C. Day and J. Selbin, Van Nostrand Co.,
NY. 1974.
5.Inorganic Chemistry, K.F. Purcell and J.C. Kotz, WB. Sanders Co., USA
1977.
Inorganic Chemistry. D. F. Shriver, P. W. Atkins and C.H. Longford, ELBS,
2nd edition, 1994.
6.Spectroscopy in Inorganic Chemistry, C.N.R. Rao and J.R. Ferraro,
Methven Co., London, 1968.
7.Physical Methods in Adv. Inorganic Chemistry, HAO. Hill and P. Day,
John Wiley, 1986.
8.Spectroscopy and molecular structure, G.W. King, Holt Rienehart and
Winston, 1964.
9.Solid state chemistry and its applications, A.R. West, Wiley, New York,
1984.
10.Inorganic biochemistry, J. A. Cowan, Wiley-VCH, New York, 1997.

221

2.3 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY II

UNIT - I
Statistical thermodynamics: Maxwell - Boltzmann distribution law of
molecular energies - Negative absolute temperature - Entropy and
probability, partition functions and thermodynamic functions,
translational, rotational and vibrational partition functions entropies and
energies - Equilibrium constant from partition function, Statistical
interpretation of third law - Bose-Einstein distribution law - Application
of the law to photon gas - Fermi-Dirac distribution law -Application of
the law to electron gas - Heat capacities of solids: Einstein and Debye's
models - Non equilibrium thermodynamics - Elementary treatment,
Onsager reciprocal relations.
UNIT - II
Quantum chemistry II: Application of wave mechanics to simple
systems - One dimensional harmonic oscillator, rigid rotor and
hydrogen atom and hydrogen like atoms - Pauli's exclusion principle
and Slater determinant - Approximation methods variation - time
independent perturbation and SCF methods - Application of variation
methods to hydrogen atom - Application of perturbation method to
helium - HMO method application to butadiene.
UNIT III
Group theory and its applications: Symmetry elements and symmetry
operations - Rules for forming a group, group multiplication table,
group classification - Point groups and systematic assignment of point
groups for molecules - Matrix representation theory - matrix
multiplication, inverse of a matrix, matrix diagonalization and matrix
representation for symmetry operations - Reducible and irreducible
representations.
The great orthogonality theorem and character table - Direct product
representation - Application of group theory to IR and Raman spectra H2O and NH3 molecules - Application of group theory to electronic
spectra (HCHO and C2H4 )
UNIT IV
Chemical kinetics II Reactions in solution factors which influence
the reaction rates in solution. Application of ARRT to solution kinetics
Bronsted Bjerrum equation, Primary salt effect, secondary salt
effect - influence of internal pressure - effect of pressure and volume of
activation. Effect of solvent: ion-ion and ion-dipole reactions- dielectric
constant - Effect of substituents on reaction rates Hammett and Taft
equations - Acid base catalysis-acidity functions Bronsted relations Zucker Hammett hypothesis - Enzyme catalysis Michaelis Menton
222

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

equation- Lineweaver- Burke equation Effect of pH and temperature

on enzyme catalyzed reactions.
UNIT -V
Surface phenomena: Adsorption of gases on solids - Physical and
Chemical adsorption Freundlich, Langmuir, Temkin and BET
isotherms-Surface area determination - Mechanisms of uni and
bimolecular surface reactions - Langmuir-Hinshelwood and LangmuirRiedal mechanisms - Surface excess - Gibbs adsorption isotherm spreading of a liquid on another - contact angle surfactants - micelles
and detergents.
Text Books
Kinetics and Mechanism of Chemical Transformations, J. Rajaram
and J.C. Kuriacose, MacMillan India Ltd. 1993.
Quantum Chemistry, D.A. McQuarrie, University Science Books,
Mill Valley, California, 1983.
Group theory in Chemistry, V. Ramakrishnan and M.S. Gopinathan,
Vishal Publications,1988.
Statistical Thermodynamics, M.C. Gupta, Wiley Eastern, New
Delhi,1990.
Physical Chemistry of surfaces, A.W.Adamson, 4th edn., Wiley Interscience, Newyork, 1982.
Reference Books
Quantum Chemistry, I.N. Levine, Allyn and Bacon, Boston, 1983.
Quantum Chemistry, R.K.Prasad, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi,1992.
Quantum Mechanics in Chemistry, M.W.Hanna, W.A.Benjamin Inc.
London, 1965.
Chemical Application of Group Theory, F.A. Cotton, John Wiley
and Sons Inc. New York,1971.
Group theory and its applications to Chemistry, K.V. Raman, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,1990.
Introduction to Statistical Thermodynamics, R.P.H.Gasser and
W.G.Richards, World Scientific, Singapore, 1995.
Irreversible Thermodynamics, J. Rajaram and J.C. Kuriacose, Lal
Nagin Chand, New Delhi, 1989.
Chemical Kinetics, K.J.Laidler, Harper and Row, New York,1987.
Kinetics and Mechanism, R.G. Frost and Pearson, Wiley New York, 1961
Kinetics and Mechanism, W.J. Moore and R.G. Pearson, 1981.
Physical Chemistry of Surfaces, A.W.Anderson, Wiley - Interscience, Newyork,
1990.

223

2.4 APPLIED CHEMISTRY

UNIT-I
Environmental Chemistry: Hazardous materials and their ill effects.
Acid rain, Ozone hole and green house effect. Types of pollution air,
water, land, pesticide, thermal and radioactive. Physicochemical and
biological investigations of water - water quality.
Wastewater treatment methods: Pretreatment, preliminary treatment,
secondary (or biological) methods of treatment and tertiary (or
advanced) methods of wastewater treatment.
UNIT-II
Corrosion: Basic aspects of corrosion: Importance of corrosion studies
EMF and Galvanic series classification of corrosion corrosion
kinetics Pourbaix diagram for Fe- H 2O system passivity High
temperature corrosion Forms of corrosion. Chemical and
Electrochemical methods of corrosion rate measurements methods.
Corrosion control methods: General classification of corrosion control
methods Designing aspects in corrosion control corrosion inhibitors
Electrochemical methods of protection such as anodic and cathodic
protection.
Electroplating: Principles of electroplating Metal deposition from
solutions of simple salts and complex salts measurement of current
density, throwing power and current efficiency of electroplating bath
surface preparation for electroplating. Electroplating of nickel and
copper, Electroforming principle and applications, Alloy plating of
Brass, Brush plating, Cladding and Vapour deposition, Electroless
plating principles, advantages and limitations of electroless plating
Composite coating - principle, mechanism and their applications.
Anodizing principle, types of anodizing bath colouring of anodizing
aluminium.
UNIT-III
Polymer chemistry: Definition, classification of polymers- addition
polymerization type of initiators initiator efficiency stepwise
polymerization Functionality of monomers and its significance
Degree of polymerization Mechanism of free radical, cationic and
anionic polymerization. Polymerization techniques: Various methods of
polymerization solution, bulk, emulsion and suspension
polymerization. Speciality polymers: Conducting polymers, polymer
224

electrolyte, fire retardant, thermally stable and bio- degradable

polymers.
UNIT-IV
Nanomaterials: Preparatory synthesis - Sol-gel thermolysis,
combustion method, solvothermal method and microemulsion method.
Physical methods vacuum evaporation, sputtering, pulsed laser
deposition. Chemical methods - CVD, chemical solution deposition,
electrochemical deposition, spray pyrolysis deposition.
Characterization Techniques: Physical characterization techniques:
XRD, XPS, FT-IR and Laser Raman spectroscopy. Microscopic
techniques: SEM, AFM and TEM. Thermal analysis: TG/DTA and
DSC.
UNIT V
Computer applications in Chemistry: Calculation of pH, solubility
product, calculation of bond energy using Born-Lande equation.
Standard deviation and correlation coefficient. Internet: Introduction Internet service providers, terms used in E-mail-search engines chemistry databases- table of contents - source for list of journals Chemical Abstracts Services by publishers - ACS, RSC, Elsevier, VCH
etc. Terms used in internet - www, http, html, url, TCP/IP, band-width,
dial-up service, ISDN.
Text books
1. Environmental Chemistry, Sharma & Kaur, Krishna Publishers,
New Delhi, 2000.
2. Text Book of Polymer Science, F.W.Billmeyer Jr. 3rd edn., John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 2003.
3. Principles and prevention of corrosion, D.Jones, Macmillan
Publications New York, 1992.
4. The Chemistry of nanomaterials; Synthesis, properties and
applications, C.N.R.Rao, Wiley-VCH Verlag Gmbh&Co, Weinheim,
2004.
5. Computers in Chemistry, K.V. Raman, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 1993.

225

Reference Books

1. Environmental Chemistry, S.E Manahan, Lewis Publishers,

London, 2001.
2. Environmental Chemistry, S.K. Banerji, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
3. Wastewater treatment, Ed. M.Henze, P.Harremoes, J.C.Jansen and
E.Arvin, Springer Verlag, New York, 1995.
4. Polymer Science, V.R.Gowariker, N.V.Viswanathan and J.
Sreedhar, New Age International, New Delhi, 2003.
5. Contemporary Polymer Chemistry, H.R.Alcock and
F.W.Lamber, Prentice Hall,1981.
6. Principles of polymer chemistry, P.J.Flory, Cornell
University press, Newe York, 1953.
7. Cathodic Protection Theory and practice, J.J.Meketta,
Marcel Dekker Publication, NY, 1993.
8. An introduction of corrosion and corrosion inhibition,
S.N.Banerjee, Oxonian Press Ltd., New Delhi.
9. Modern Electroplating, K.A Lowenheim, Second Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1963.
10. BASIC Programming for Chemists, P.C.Jurns, T.L.
Isenhour and C.C. Wilkins, JW.& Sons 1987.
11. Computers in Chemistry, K.V. Raman, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 1993.
12. Nanoscale materials in Chemsitry, Kenneth
J.Klabunde, John-Wiley & Sons, 2001.

226

2.5 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL

1. Quantitative analysis: Separation
and
estimation of
the
following
mixtures
containing two components the first by
volumetric method and the other by gravimetric method.
a) Cu2+ - Ni2+
b) Cu2+ - Ba2+
c) Cu2+ - Zn2+
d) Fe2+ - Ni2+
e) Fe2+ - Zn2+
f) Fe2+ - Cu2+
2. Complexometric estimation of binary mixture of cations:
Estimation of following mixtures using EDTA as a complexing agent by
adopting any one of the techniques, like precipitation, pH variation,
masking and demasking.
a) Bi3+ - Pb2+
2+
b) Pb - Ca2+
c) Ni2+ - Cu2+
d) Fe2+ - Ni2+
e) Zn2+ - Cu2+
f) Co2+ - Cu2+
g) Zn2+ - Ca2+
Reference Books
1.Vogels qualitative Inorganic analysis, G. Svehla, VI Edition, Orient
Longman, 1987.
2. Inorganic Semimicro Qualitative analysis, V.V. Ramanujam,
National Publishing Co., 1971.

227

2.6 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL

1. Partition coefficient: (i) Iodine: water/CCl4, (ii) Iodine: water/KI and
(iii) Unknown KI.
2. Conductometric titration: (i) Acid Vs base, (ii) Precipitation [Mixed
Halides, Simple Halides, Solublity Product, BaCl2 Vs MgSO4, CuSO4
Vs NaOH].
3. Potentiometric titration: (i) FAS Vs KMnO4, (ii) FAS Vs K2Cr2O7,
(iii) Acid Vs Base, (iv) Mixture of halides and (v) Simple Halides.
4. Chemical Kinetics: (i) Acid catalyzed hydrolysis of an ester (titration
method), (ii) base catalyzed hydrolysis of an ester (conductometric
method).
5. Spectrophotometric method: Determination of Fe3+, Mn2+ and Cu2+.
Reference books
1. Findlays Practical Physical Chemistry, Revised and edited by
B.P.Levitt, 9th edn., Longman, London,1985.
2. Advanced Experimental Chemistry, J.N.Gurtu and R.Kapoor, Vol.I,
S.Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (1980).

228

Course

: M.Sc. (Botany (Specialization: Plant Biotechnology)

[2008-09 onwards]

Pattern

Annual pattern

Mode

Distance Education

Duration

Two years

Eligibility

Bachelor Degree in Botany, Plant Science, Plant

Biotechnologyand triple major with Botany/Plant
Science.
Medium
:
English only
PROGRAMME OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
Code
Name of the Course
Max.
No
Mark
I Year
1.1
Plant Diversity
100
1.2
Plant Taxonomy
100
1.3
Anatomy & Embryology
100
1.4
Plant Tissue Culture
100
1.5
Plant Molecular Biology
100
1.6
Lab I (Plant Tissue
100
Culture)
II Year
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

Plant Physiology &

Biochemistry
Cell Biology, Genetics
& Plant Breeding
Biotechniques in Botany
Biodiversity
Conservation & IPR
Plant Genetic
Engineering
Lab II (Plant
Biotechnology)

100
100
100
100
100
100
1200

Total Marks

229

1.1 PLANT DIVERSITY

UNIT 1 : Algae : Definitions and concepts of plant diversity, Thallus
organization, Reproduction and life cycle patterns in algae,
Classification of algae (Smith), Reproduction and life cycles in
Cyanophyceae, Chlorophyceae, Phaeophyceae and Rhodophyceae
(Comparative study only), Culture of microalgae and mariculture.
UNIT 2 : Fungi : Classification of fungi (Alexopoulos and Mims,
1979) Thallus organization, Reproduction, Life cycle patterns in fungi
(Phycomycetes to Deuteromycetes), Spores and spore dispersal
mechanisms.
UNIT 3 : Lichens : General account, Structure and reproduction,
Classification of lichens (Miller, 1984).
Bryophytes : Classification of bryophytes (Watson, 1964), Structural
variations in the gametophytes and sporophytes of Marchantiales,
Sphaerocarpales, Jungermanniales, Calobryales, Anthocerotales,
Sphagnales, Andreales and Bryales (Comparative study only).
UNIT 4 : Pteridophytes : Classification of Pteridophytes (Reimers)
General characteristics and life cycle patterns in Psilopsida, Lycopsida,
Sphenopsida and Pteropsida , Study of fossils in Pteridophytes.
UNIT 5 : Gymnosperms : Classification (K.R.Sporne, 1967), General
characteristics of Cycadales, Ginkgoales, Coniferales and Gnetales
(Comparative study only). Study of fossil gymnosperms (Medullosa,
Cycadeoidea and Caytonia).
REFERENCES
1. The algae (1960) V.J.Chapman and D.J. Chapman, ELBS &Macmillan,
London.
2. Introduction to Phycology (1990) H.D.Kumar, Affliated East West Press,
New Delhi.
3. Introduction to Mycology, Alexopoulos and Mims, East Wiley Ltd, New
Delhi.
4. The Biology of Lichens (1983) M.E.Hale, Edward Arnold, Mayland.
5. Biology of Bryophytes (1988) R.N.Chopra and P.K.Kumar, Wiley Eastern
Ltd, New Delhi.
6. The morphology of Pterdophytes (1985) K.R. Sporne, Hutchinson &Co,
London.
7. Gymnosperms: Structure and Evolution (1986) C.J. Chamberlain, CBS
Publishers, Delhi.

230

1.2 PLANT TAXONOMY

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Unit I :
Scope and application, Species concept, Biotype, Ecad, Ecotype,
Binomial System of Nomenclature, Theories of Biological
Classification, Structural, biological and molecular systematics.
Unit II
Historical Background of Plant classification: Bentham and Hooker,
Engler and Prantl, Takhtajan and Hutchinson.
Unit III
Taxonomic structure: Biosystematics, Chemotaxonomy, Numerical
taxonomy, Plant Geography and floreistics. Modern inter-disciplinary
approaches to Taxonomy.
Unit IV
Botanical Nomenclature: Need for scientific names, Principles of
ICBN, Type method, author citation, Publication of names, rejection of
names, principle of priority, limitations, conservation of names of
species. Draft Biocode.
Unit V
Diagnostic features of following families: Ranunculaceae,
Rhamnaceae, Boraginaceae, Loranthaceae, Orchidaceae.
REFERENCES
The Classification of Flowering plants Vol I and II (1979) Alfred
Barton Rendle Vikas Publishing House P Ltd. Ghaziabad.
Numerical Taxonomy (1969) Cole, A.J. Academic Press, London.
Plant Systematics Theory and Practice (1999) Gurcharan Singh.
Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
Modern Methods in Plant Taxonomy (1968) Heywood V.H. Academic
Press, London.
Plant Systematics (1987) Jones and Luchsinger (2nd ed ) McGraw Hill
International Editions. New York.
An Advanced Text Book on Biodiversity Principles and Practice.
(2004) K.V.Krishnamurthy, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
New Delhi.
Taxonomy of vascular plants (1969) Lawrence, Oxford an IBH
Publishing Co, New Delhi.
A Text Book of Botany Angiosperms (1992) B.P.Pandey, S.Chand and
Company Ltd.

231

1.3 ANATOMY & EMBRYOLOGY

Unit 1
General account and theories of organization of meristems, Light and
Electron microscopic structure of cell walls, Structural diversity and
phylogenetic specialization of xylem and phloem, Distribution,
structure and significance of transfer cells, Vascular cambium storied,
nonstoried and the mode of activity.
Unit 2
Vascular differentiation in the primary body of stem, root and leaf, Root
stem transition, Molecular aspects of developing vegetative organs,
Cambial variants and floral vasculature.
Unit 3
Structure, identification, classification and uses of woods, Physical,
chemical and mechanical properties of wood, Natural defects, knots,
reaction wood, compression wood tension wood, Commercial woods of
South India, Molecular aspects on wood differentiation.
Unit 4
Anther development, Pollen morphology, Pollen stigma compatibility,
Megasporogenesis female gametopohyte, Nutrition of embryo sac,
Endosperm types, Apomixis, Vegetative reproduction.
Unit 5
Agamospermy and apospory, Exploitation of polyembryony and
apomixis in plant improvement progrmmes, Molecular aspects of
higher plant reproduction.
REFERENCES
1. Plant Anatomy (1953) K.Easu, John Wiley &Sons Inc, N.Y.
2. Plant Anatomy (1978) G.Gutter, Edward Arnold Publicatio, Ltd,
London.
3. Plant Anatomy (1989) A.Fahn, Maxwell, Macmillan, Singapore (P)
Ltd.
4. Anatomy of Seed Plants (1987) Singh. V, Pandey P.C. and D.K. Jain.
5. A Text Book of Wood Technology .Vol I &2 (1974) H.J.Vaux (edn).
6. Embryology of Angiosperms (1981) S.S.Bhojwani &S.P.Bhatnagar
7. An introduction to Embryology of Angiosperms (1963) P.Maheswari.

232

1.4 PLANT TISSUE CULTURE

UNIT-1
Introduction to plant cell and tissue culture, Totipotency, Sterilization
techniques, Nutrient media composition and preparation of solid and liquid
cultures, Establishment and maintenance of callus and suspension cultures
from representative monocot and dicot plants.
UNIT-2
Micropropagation Introduction, stages and types of explants for commercial
propagation, Virus elimination. Commercial importance and applications of
micropropagation.
UNIT-3
Plant regeneration-Organogenesis and Somatic embryogenesis. Role of
hormones in regeneration. Control of organogenesis and embryogenesis.
Artificial seeds-Principle and method involved in the production, Embryo
rescue and applications, Somoclonal variations-Significance, mechanism and
applications.
UNIT-4
Anther and pollen culture techniques. Significance of haploid culture.
Different types of organ culture (a) Root culture (b) Shoot tip culture (c)
Meristem culture (d) Flower bud culture and ovule culture.
UNIT-5
Protoplast isolation - Principles and protocols, protoplast culture and fusion,
Importance of protoplast fusion and applications. In vitro production of
secondary plant products.
REFERENCES
1. Plant Tissue Culture: A Practical Approach (1985), Dixon R.A, IRL Press,
Oxford, Washington DC.
2.
Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice (2004) S.S.Bhojwani and
M.K.Razdan, Elsevier.
3.
Plant Cell, Tissue and Organ Culture (1998), O.L.Gamborg and
G.C.Philips, Narosha Publishing House.
4. Introduction to Plant Biotechnology (2001), H.S.Chawla, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
5. Plant Biotechnology: The Genetic Manipulation of Plants (2003) Adrian
Slater, Nigel
W.Scott and Mark R.Fowler, Oxford University Press.

233

1. 5 PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOLOGY

UNIT-1
Plant genome organization Nucleus, Chloroplast and Mitochondria,
Structural features of a typical plant gene, Chromatin organization in
plants, Nucleus-encoded and chloroplast-encoded genes for chloroplast
proteins. Targeting of nuclear encoded cytoplasmic proteins to
chloroplast compartments.
UNIT-2
Mitochondrial genome and Cytoplasmic male sterility, Seed storage
proteins Classification and functions, Regulation of gene expression
in plant development. Plant hormones, Plant transposons.
UNIT-3
Agrobacterium tumefaciens and crown gall tumours, Mechanism of TDNA transfer to plants, Types of Ti-plasmid based vectors (Co integrate
and binary vectors) for plant transformation, Agro infection, Symbiotic
nitrogen fixation in legumes by Rhizobia.
UNIT-4
Molecular biology of plant stress response-drought, salinity,
dehydration, UV, and osmotic stress. Direct transformation of plants by
physical methods (Biolistic gene transfer, Silicon carbide
WHISKER , microlaser and ultrasonication).
UNIT-5
Molecular pharming Introduction, Transgenic plant derived products
for commercial applications, Bioremediation through plants. Tagging,
mapping and cloning of plant genes.
REFERENCES
1. Introduction to Plant Biotechnology (2001), H.S.Chawla, Oxford &
IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
2. Plant Biotechnology & Molecular Biology (1999), Second Edition,
Peter J.Lea, Richard C.Leegood, John Wiley &Sons.
3. Plant Biotechnology-New Products & Applications (2000). J.
Hammond, P.McGarvey &V.Yusibov (Eds), Springer-Verlog.
4. Plants, Genes and Agriculture (2000). Maarten J.Chrispeels and
David E.Sadava, Jones and Barlett Publishers.
5. Plant Biotechnology: The Genetic Manipulation of Plants (2003)
Adrian Slater,
Nigel W.Scott and Mark R.Fowler, Oxford University Press.

234

1.6 LAB - I - PLANT TISSUE CULTURE

1. General introduction and laboratory organization
2. Tissue culture media (composition and preparation).
3. Role of plant hormones in tissue culture.
4. Surface sterilization of explants for culture initiation
5. Initiation and maintenance of callus and suspension culture
6. Estimation of growth kinetics of cultured cells
7. Micropropagation of economically and commercially important
medicinal plants
8. Protoplast technology- isolation and culture
9. Transfer of in vitro regenerated plants to soil.
10. Artificial seed preparation from intact explants of medicinal plants
and plant
conversion.
REFERENCES
1. Plant Tissue Culture: A Practical Approach (1985), Dixon R.A, IRL Press,
Oxford, Washington DC.
2. Plant Cell, Tissue and Organ Culture (1998), O.L.Gamborg and
G.C.Philips, Narosha Publishing House.
3. Plant Biotechnology: The Genetic Manipulation of Plants (2003) Adrian
Slater, Nigel W.Scott and Mark R.Fowler, Oxford University Press.
4. Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice, Revised Edition (2004), S.S.
Bhojwani and M.K. Razdan, Elsevier Publications, Netherlands.

235

PLANT PHYSSIOLOGY & BIOCEMISTRY

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Unit 1
Plant water relations: Water transport process, diffusion, osmosis, water
potential, Chemical potential, absorption of water, water transport
through trachieds and xylem. Transpiration and its significance, factors
affecting transpiration, mechanissm of stomatal movement, Water stress
on crop production.
Unit 2
Photosynthesis: Ultra structure of photosynthetic apparatus,
photochemical reaction, electron transport pathway in chloroplast
membranes, photophosphorylation, C4 carbon cycle, Crassulacean acid
metabolism, Photorespiration.
Unit 3
Glycolysis, TCA Cycle, electron transport in mitochondria, oxidative
phosphorylation, pentose phosphate pathway, cyanide resistant
respiration, nutrient uptake and transport mechanism, Biological
nitrogen fixation, Nitrate and ammonia assimilation.
Unit 4
Carbohydrates: Classification, Structure of mono, di and
polysaccharides, stereoisomers, enatiomers and epimers. Amino acids
and Proteins: Structure, characteristics and classification, aminoacid
synthesis, peptide bond and polypeptide chain, primary, secondary,
tertiary and quaternary structure of proteins.
Unit 5
Enzymes: General aspects (Classification and structure), allosteric
mechanism, regulatory and active sites, isoenzymes, enzymatic
catalysis, Michaelis-Menton equation and its significance. Lipids:
Classification and structure, biosynthesis of fatty acids, Oxidation of
fatty acids, Nucleic acids: Composition of nucleic acids and nucleotide
synthesis.
REFERENCES:
Plant Physiology (1999) F.B.Salisbury and C.W.Ross, CPS Publishers
&Printers, New Delhi.
Plant Physiology (1969), Holt Rinehart &Wintston&Affliated East West
Press.
Plant Physiology (2000) K.M.Delvin, S.Chand &Co., New Delhi.
Understanding the chemistry of the cell (1969) G.Barker, Edward Arnold,
London.
Plant metabolism (1990) H.D.Kumar &H. N. Singh.

236

2.2 CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS &PLANT BREEDING

UNIT 1
Structure of Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell, Structure and function of
Nucleus, Endoplasmic Reticulum, Golgi complex, Mitochondria, Chloroplast
and Lysosomes. Organization of Nucleus and nuclear transport, Organization
and functions of Cytoskeletons (Microfilaments, Intermediate filaments and
Microtubules).
UNIT 2
Biological Membrane Structure (lipid bilayer, membrane proteins), Assembly
and basic functions, Transport of ions and molecules across the membranes,
Protein sorting in mitochondria, chloroplast, endoplasmic reticulum and
nucleus, Protein processing and trafficking from Endoplasmic reticulum to
Golgi, Cell division and Cell cycle.
UNIT 3
Basic account on Mendelian Genetics and Gene intraction, Linkage, crossing
over, Gene mapping, Sex linkage, Cytoplasmic inheritance, male sterility,
Origin, induction and applications of prions.
UNIT 4
Polyploidy Types, and their origin, Significance of polyploids, Basic account
on mutation (Causative agents, induction and types), Basic account of
population genetics (Hardey Weinbergs Law).
UNIT 5
Objectives of plant breeding, Genetic variability and its role in plant breeding,
Breeding methods in self pollinated, cross pollinated, vegetatively propagated
and apomictic plants, Inbreeding depression theories, Hybrid vigour in plant
breeding, Mutation breeding and breeding for disease resistance and stress
tolerance.
REFERENCES:
1. Molecular Biology of the Cell (2002), Fourth Edition, B. Alberts, A. Johnson, J.
2. Lewis, M. Raff, K. Roberts and P Walter, Garland Publishing (Taylor & Francis
Group), New York.
3. Genes V111 (2004), B. Lewin, Pearson Prentice Hall.
4. Principles of Genetics (1972) E.J.Gardner, John Weily &Sons, N.Y.
5. Genetics (Second Edition), M.W.Strickberger, Macmillan Publishing House, N.Y.
6. Plant Breeding (1989) V.L.Chopra, Oxford IBH, New Delhi.
7. Plant Breeding Methodology (1988) N.F.Jenson, Wiley Inheritance Publications,
N.Y.

237

a. BIOTECHNIQUES IN BOTANY
UNIT 1
PAGE, SDS PAGE and Agarose gel electrophoresis. Isoelectric
focusing. 2D Electrophoresis.
UNIT 2
Ultracentrifugation- SEM/TEM, Confocal Microscopy/ Phase Contrast
Microscopy- HPLC, HPTLC, FPLC, GC, MS, MALDI Tof.
UNIT 3
Tracer techniques : Principles and applications of radioactive isotopes,
Autoradiography and Liquid scintillation spectrometry.
UNIT 4
Blotting techniques -Principles and techniques of Southern, Northern
and Western blotting techniques and hybridization. Principles and
applications of PCR, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP and DNA fingerprinting.
Principle and applications of DNA sequencing.
UNIT 5
DNA Microarray in plants, Bioinformative tools for analysis of plant
genome, Relation between genome, transcriptome and proteomes of
plants, Tracking gene exspression in plant cells.
REFERENCES:
1. Molecular Cloning-A laboratory Manual, 3 rd Edition, Vol.1, 2 and 3
(2001). Sambrrok, J. and Russell, D.W Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory
Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York.
2. Experiments for Instrumental methods- A laboratory manual, Charles
N.Relly, Donald.T.Saweyerand Robert E. Krieger Huntington, New York.
3. Instrumental methods of Analysis, Hoburt.H.Willard; Lynme L.Meritt.J.R;
A. Dean, John East West Press Pvt Ltd. PCR Technology Current
Innovations (2004). Thomas Weissensteiner et al CRC Press, Florida.
4. Basic measurement technique for light microscopy (1991). Savile
Pradbury, Oxford University Press, Royal Microscopical Society, London.
5. Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry, J.Jayaraman, Wiley Eastrn Ltd., New
Delhi.

238

BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION & IPR

UNIT 1
Introduction to biodiversity, Types of biodiversity,
Biodiversity concepts, Centres of diversity, Agro biodiversity,
Values and uses of biodiversity, Loss of biodiversity, Biodiversity
act of India 2002 and 2004.
UNIT 2
Phytogeographic zones, Vegetation types of India and
Tamilnadu, Endemism, Wildlife Sanctuaries, National parks and
Biosphere Reserves, Hotspot biodiversity areas in India, Red
listed plants, Red Data Book, Threatened plants and animals of
India, Patenting life forms and their impact on biodiversity.
UNIT 3
General overview of plant conservation, Conservation of
biodiversity, Sustainable use of plant genetic resources,
Biotechnology assisted plant conservation( in situ and ex situ
conservation).
UNIT 4
General Agreement on Trade and Tariff (GATT) and World
Trade Organization, Establishment and functions of GATT and
WTO, Physical and Intellectual Property.
Different types of intellectual property rights (IPR) Patents, Trade mark, Trade secret and Copy right. Plant
biotechnological examples of patents, trademark, trade secret and
copyright. Plant breeder's rights.
UNIT 5
Patent application. Rules governing patents. Flavr Savr
tomato as a model case for GM food, Case studies on patents
(Basmati rice and Turmeric,), General guidelines for research in
transgenic plants, Good Laboratory Practices (GLP).
REFERENCES
1. Biodiversity and Conservation (2004). Joshi P.C. and Namita
Joshi, APH publishing company, New Delhi.
239

2. An
advanced
text
book
of
Biodiversity
(2004).
K.V.Krishnamoorthy, Oxford &IBH, New Delhi.
3. Plant Conservation Biotechnology (2003). Edited by Erica
E.Bensen, Taylor &Francis Ltd, London.
4. Recombinant DNA safety guidelines (January1990), Department
of
Biotechnology, Ministry of Science & Technology,
Government of India, New Delhi.
5.
Patents (2003), N.Subbaram, Pharma Book Syndicate,
Hyderabad.
6. Molecular Biotechnology (1998), Second Edition, Glick, B.R., and
Pasternack,
J.J., ASM Press, Washington, DC.

240

2.5 PLANT GENETIC ENGINEERING

UNIT- 1
Introduction to Plant Genetic Engineering, Historical perspectives, Tools of
genetic engineering General Methodology, Plant Genome Projects.
UNIT- 2
Selectable markers Types and their role in plant transformation, Antibiotic
sensitivity assay, Reporter genes Types and role in optimizing
transformation, Promoters used in plant vectors.
UNIT - 3
Plant transformation techniques Direct (chemical,
mechanical and electrical) and Indirect methods
(Agrobacterium mediated), Novel plant transformation
approaches.
UNIT 4

11.
22.
33.
44.
5.

Plant genetic engineering for herbicide resistance, Abiotic stress tolerance,

Insect pest resistance (Bt and proteinase inhibitor), Cytoplasmic male-sterility,
Virus resistance (Antisense RNA approach, Cross protection Satellite RNA,
Ribozymes and Coat protein mediated protection), delays of fruit ripening and
resistance to fungi and bacteria.
UNIT-5
Case studies - Golden rice, Flavr Savr , Chloroplast engineering and
Transplastomic plants, Molecular markers STS, Microsatellites, SCAR
(Sequence Characterized Amplified Region) and AFLP for genetic diversity.
REFERENCES
Introduction to Plant Biotechnology (2001), H.S.Chawla, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
Plant Biotechnology & Molecular Biology (1999), Second Edition, Peter
J.Lea, Richard C.Leegood, John Wiley &Sons.
Plant Biotechnology-New Products & Applications (2000). J. Hammond,
P.McGarvey &V.Yusibov (Eds), Springer-Verlog.
Plants, Genes and Agriculture (2000). Maarten J.Chrispeels and David
E.Sadava, Jones and Barlett Publishers.
Plant Biotechnology: The Genetic Manipulation of Plants (2003) Adrian
Slater, Nigel W.Scott and Mark R.Fowler, Oxford University Press.

241

1.

2.6 LAB II (Plant Biotechnology)

Genomic DNA isolation from representative monocot and dicot plants

2.

Quality and Quantity

Spectrophotometer

checking

of

genomic

DNA

by

3.

Quality and Quantity checking of genomic DNA by agarose gel

4.

Isolation of Agrobacterium Ti plasmid DNA.

5.

Agrobacterium mediated transformation of plants

6.

Biolistic transformation

7.

Analysis of transformants by histochemical GUS expression.

8.

Antibiotic sensitivity assay

9.

Southern hybridization (Demo)

UV

10. PCR
REFERENCES
1. Plant Molecular Biology Manual (1991), S.B.Gelvin,
R.A.Schilperoort and D.P.S.Verma (Eds.) Kluwer Academic
publishers, Dordrect.
2. Methods in Plant Molecular Biology. A Laboratory Course
Manual (1995) Pal Maliga Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory
Press
3. Fundamentals of Plant Biotechnology (2001), Amla Batra,
Capital Publishing Company.
4. Introduction to Plant Biotechnology (2001), H.S.Chawla,
Oxford & IBH
PublishingCo.Pvt.Ltd.
5. Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice, Revised Edition
(2004), S.S.Bhojwani and M.K. Razdan, Elsevier Publications,
Netherlands.
6. Plant biotechnology: The genetic manipulation of plants (2003),
A. Slater etal Oxford University Press, Oxford.

242

Course

M.Sc. Zoology - (2010-11 onwards)

Pattern

Annual pattern

Mode

Distance Education

Duration

Two years

Eligibility

Medium

Bachelor Degree in B.Sc Zoology/Animal

Science/Biotechnology degree Examination with
Chemistry/Biochemistry/Microbiology/Botany as
one of the ancillary subjects.
English only

COURSE OF STUDY & SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

Code No.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
2.7.1
2.7.2

TITLE OF THE COURSE

FIRST YEAR
Animal Diversity
Cell and Molecular Biology
Genetics and Evolution
Biochemistry and Animal Physiology
Biophysics and Biostatistics
PRACTICALS
Lab- I - 1.1 & 1.2
Lab II 1.3, 1.4, & 1.5
SECOND YEAR
Environmental Biology
Developmental Biology
Microbiology and Immunology
Animal Biotechnology
Elective (Any one)
Fisheries & Aquaculture
Parasitology
PRACTICALS
Lab III 2.1 to 2.4
Optional (Any one)
Lab IV 2.5.1
Lab IV 2.5.2
Total Marks

243

Marks
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
100
100
100
100
100

50
50

1200

1.1 ANIMAL DIVERSITY

UNIT I
Animal Architecture: Hierarchical organization of animal complexity, Complexity of
body and size, Extracellular components of the metazoan body, Types of tissues,
Animal body plans.
Classification and Phylogeny of Animal: Linnaeus and the development of
classification, Taxonomic characters and reconstruction of phylogeny, Theories of
taxonomy, Species, Major divisions of life, Major sub-divisions of the animal kingdom.
UNIT - II
Protozoa and Porifera: Form and function. Cholorohyta, Euglenozoa, Ciliophora,
Dinoflagellata and Amebas. Phylogeny and adaptive radiation.
Porifera: Ecological relationships, form and functions, brief survey of sponges,
phylogeny and adaptive radiation.
Cnidaria and Ctenophora: Phylogeny and adaptive radiation.
Acelomates: Platyhelminthes, Nemertea and Gnathostomulida. Phylogeny and
adaptive radiation.
Pseudocoelomate animals: Rotifera, Acanthocephala, Gastrotricha, Entroprocta,
Nematoda. Phylogeny and adaptive radiation.
UNIT - III
Molluscs: Form and functions. Gastropoda, Bivalvia and Cephalopoda. Phylogeny and
adaptive radiations.
Segmented Worms: Body plan. Polychaeta, Oligochaeta and Hirudinea. Phylogeny
and adaptive radiation
Arthropoda: Trilobita, Chelicerata, Crustacea and Insecta. Phylogeny and adaptive
radiation.
Lesser Protostomes: Pogonophora, Brachiopoda, Onychophora, Chaetognatha and
their phylogeny.
Echinodermata, Hemichordata and their form, function and phylogeny.
UNIV - IV
The chordates: Ancestry and evolution of chordates.
Urochordata, Cephalochordata: Organization, phylogenetic considerations
Fishes: Ancestry and relationship of major groups of fishes. Agnatha: Jawles fishes,
Cartilginous fishes. Class Chondrichthyes. Bony fishes: The Osteichthyes, origin,
evolution, and diversity. Structural and functional adaptations of fishes.

244

UNIT- IV
Amphibians and Reptiles: Early evolution of terrestrial vertebrates, modern
amphibians. Origin and adaptive radiations of reptilian groups, Characteristic features
of reptiles. Natural history of reptilian orders.
Birds: Origin and relationships, adaptation of bird structure and function for flight.
Migration and navigation, social behaviour and reproduction.
Mammals: origin and evolution. Structural, functional adaptations and human
evolution.
Reference Books:
1. David Eisenhour, Allan Larson, Susan Keen, Larry Robers, Cleveland
Hickman Jr. 2009. Animal Diversity. McGraw Hill International, Boston.
2. Barnes, R. D., 2008. Invertebrate Zoology, Cengage Learning ( Thompson ), USA
3. Jordan, E.L. and P.S.Verma, 2005. Invertebrate Zoology, S.Chand & co. India
4. Anderson, D.T., 2002. Invertebrate Zoology, Oxford University Press, USA.
5. Edward E. Ruppert, Robert D. Barnes, 1994. Invertebrate Zoology,
Publishers: Harcourt Brace College Publishers, 6th edition, New York, USA.
6. Ekambaranatha Iyar, E. K.and T.N.Ananthakrishnan, 1992. A Manual of
Zoology, Volume II Chordeta. Viswanathan & Co.
7. Russell- Hunter, W.D. (1979) Life of Invertebrates, Macmillan Publishing Company, New
York.

245

1.2 CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

UNIT- I
Cell Biology: Cell classification - Structural organization of prokaryotic and eukaryotic
cells- Ultrastructure of cell membrane, nucleus, chromosomes, mitochondria,
endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi apparatus, lysosomes, peroxisomes and their functions The cytoskeleton microtubules and microfilaments- Cell cycle- mitosis and meiosis.
UNIT- II
DNA Replication: Mechanism of replication, the replicon, origin, primosome &
replisomes. Properties of prokaryotic and eukaryotic DNA polymerases, synthesis of
leading and lagging strands, difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic replication.
UNIT- III
Mechanisms of Transcription: Prokaryotic transcription: promoters, properties of
bacterial RNA polymerase, steps: initiation, elongation and termination. Eukaryotic
transcription: Promoters, enhancers, factors, properties of RNA polymerase I, II and III.
Reverse transcription. Post transcriptional modifications in RNA.
UNIT- IV
Translation in Pro- and Eukaryotes: Ribosomes- structure, functional domain and
sub-unit assembly. Cell free protein synthesis, protein synthesis, formation of initiation
complex, chain elongation, translocation and termination. Comparison of protein
biosynthesis in prokaryotes with eukaryotes. Post-translational modifications.
UNIT- V
Regulations of gene expression in Pro- and Eukaryotes: Concept of operon: lac, ara
and trp operons, positive and negative control, repressor & inducer. Hormonal
regulation of gene expression, transcription factors, steroid receptors. DNA binding
motifs in pro- and eukaryotes.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Hunter, L. E. 2009. The Process of life- An Introduction to Molecular Biology, The MIT press,
USA.
Weaver, R.F., 2008. Molecular biology, McGraw Hill higher education, USA.
Beaker, W, L. Kleinsmith, J. Hardin, and G. Bertoni, 2008. The world of the cell, Pearson
Education, London.
Alberts, B., A. Johnson, J. Lewis, M. Raff, K. Roberts, and P.Walter, 2007. Molecular biology of
the cell, Garland publishing Inc, New York.
Lodish, H, A. Berk, C.A. Kaiser, M. Krieger, M. P. Scott, A. Brtscher, H. Ploegh, and P.
Matsudaria, 2007. Molecular cell biology, W. H. Freeman, USA.
Karp, G, 2007. Cell and molecular Biology- Concepts and Experiments, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc. New York.
Freifelder, D, 2004. Essentials of Molecular Biology, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.

246

1.3 GENETICS AND EVOLUTION

UNIT I
Basic concepts in genetics: Mendalian laws, gene interactions, multiple factor,
multiple allelic inheritance. Linkage, crossing over and chromosome mapping:
Drosophila as example. Numerical changes in chromosomes: Aneuploidy, euploidy,
haploidy and polyploidy, with practical applications.
Human chromosome: Sex chromosome, heterochromatization, Barr bodies and
chromosomal abnormalities.
UNIT II
Mutations: Types of mutations, induced mutation, detection of mutation and
significance. Inborn errors of metabolism.
Mutation at molecular level: Point mutations, frame-shift mutation, deletion,
suppressor mutation and their consequence.
UNIT III
Molecular genetics: Fine structure of gene cistron, muton, recon, cis-trans
complementation Genetic regulation of development and differentiation sequential
expression of genes with examples from Drosophila, Coenorhabditis and Zebrafish
UNIT IV
Genetic theory of evolution: Genetic theory of natural selection genetic and nongenetic variations - evidences for the role of natural selection - Polymorphism and
selection. Neo Lamarckism present concept of recapitulation.
Evolution at population level: Evolution of races to species, adaptation pattern,
behavioural adaptations and strategies, sexual competition and selection, isolating
mechanisms, species concept, modes of speciation, evolutionary rate.
UNIT V
Molecular evolution: Gene evolution, evolution of gene families, molecular drive,
assessment of molecular variation. Molecular phylogenies and evolution. Phylogenetic
tree at molecular level and clustal analysis\
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Benjamin Pierce (2007) Genetics a conceptual approach, W.H. Freeman &
Company, USA.
2. Futuyma, D. J. (2006) Evolutionary biology, Palgrave publishers, USA
3. Hartwell, L. (2004) Genetics from genes to genomes, McGraw-hill, USA.
4. Gahalain, S. S. (2004) Fundamentals of Genetics, Anmol Publications Pvt,
India.
5. Burton S. Guttman,Anthony Griffiths,David T. Suzuki (2002) Genetics : A
Beginners Guide, One world Publications Epz,

247

1.4 BIOCHEMISTRY AND ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY

UNIT - I
Biomolecules: Carbohydrates, lipids & proteins: Structure, classification, properties
and biological importance. Structure of nucleic acids. Vitamins: Structure and
biochemical properties. Enzymes & coenzymes. General classification of hormones,
chemistry and mechanisms of action.
UNIT - II
Metabolism: General scheme of metabolism: transamination, deamination, glycolysis,
Krebs cycle, HMP shunt, phosphoketolase pathway, Cori cycle, gluconeogenesis,
glycogenesis, glycogenolysis and their regulation. Beta oxidation pathway and
regulation. Intermediatory metabolism.
Metabolic disorders: Diabetes mellitus, glycogen storage diseases, ketone bodies,
obesity: Causes and consequencs
UNIT - III
Digestion, Respiration, Circulation & Excretion: Digestion: Digestion of
carbohydrates, proteins and lipids Absorption and assimilation of digested food
materials- Gastrointestinal hormones- Control of digestion. Respiration: Respiratory
pigments, transport and exchange of gases. Circulation: Heart beat and its regulation,
cardiac ailments. Excretion: Classification of animals on the basis of excretory
products- Ammonia toxicity detoxification pathways Ammonia metabolismMechanism of urine formation.
UNIT - IV
Muscular & Neurophysiology: Muscular Physiology : Types of muscles,
ultrastructure of skeletal muscle, muscle proteins, mechanism and energetics of muscle
contration. Neurophysiology: Ionic basis of excitability resting membrane potential
electrogenesis- propagation of action potential interneuron transmission electrical
synapses chemical synapses neurotransmitters. Receptors: Mechanoreceptors:
Strech receptors, Pressure receptors Gravity receptors PhonoreceptionPhotoreception: Retinal pigments Photochemistry of vision.
UNIT - V
Homeostatic Mechanisms: Thermoregulation in poikilotherms and homeothermsTolerance to high temperature, cold and freezing- Physiology of hibernation and
aestivation. Osmotic and ionic regulation: Response to hyperosmotic and hypoosmotic
media with reference to crustaceans and fish. Adaptation to pressure: High altitudebuoyancy.
Animal behaviour: Biological clock endogenous rhythm circadian rhythm
circannual and lunar periodicity Zeitgeber entrainment Involvement of melatonin
in circadian rhythm- Physiological basis of learning and memory.
248

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Alacock, J, 2009. Animal behaviour: an evolutionary approach. Sinauer
publications, USA.
2. Lehninger, A., Nelson, D. L., and M.M. Cox 2008. Lehninger Principles of
Biochemistry, W.H. Freeman, USA.
3. Berg, J.M., J.L. Tomoczko, and L. Stryer, 2008. Biochemistry, W. H.
Freeman publisher, USA.
4. Voet, D. J., J.G. Voet and C. W. Pratt, 2008. Fundamental of biochemistry:
Life at molecular level, Wiley publishers, USA.
5. Mc Kee, T., J.R. Mc Kee, and P. De Pra, 2008. Biochemistry: The molecular
basis of Life, Oxford University Presss.
6. Campbel, M.K., and S.O. Farrel, 2007. Biochemistry, Brooks Cole
Publishers, USA.
7. Zubay, G. 2005. Biochemistry, Publisher: Addison-Wesley.
8. Delvin, T.M., 2005. Text Book of Biochemistry with clinical correlations,
Willey-Liss Publishers, USA.
9. David Randall, 2009. Eckert Animal Physiology, W H Freeman & Co.
10. Nielsen, S, 2000. Animal Physiology, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge.

249

1.5 BIOPHYSICS AND BIOSTATISTICS

UNIT-I
Scope of Biophysics in Biology structure and properties of atoms and molecules
Formation of molecules from atoms Bonds types properties strength atomic
and molecular orbitals X-ray diffraction Polymerization of organic molecules.
Energy sources Principle and application of laws of thermodynamics Free energy
from electromagnetic waves.
UNIT II
Natural radiations Properties of natural light. Photoelectric effect Photodynamic
sensitization LASER Hydrodynamic method; Effect of
radiations on
macromolecules Delayed effects of radiation. Measurement of radio activity Gieger
Muller counter Isotopes as tracers - Autoradiography.
Unit- III
Spectroscopy: Concepts of spectroscopy, Visible and UV spectroscopy - NMR and
ESR spectroscopy.
Chromatography: Principles and applications of TLC, GLC and Column
Chromotography
Electrophoresis: Native PAGE, SDS- PAGE, DNA agarose gel electrophoresis,
Southern, Northern, Western transfers, Isoelectric focusing and 2D gel electrophoresis.
Unit-IV
Biostatistics: Primary and secondary data. Types of sampling: Random and stratified
random sampling. Presentation of data: histogram, polygon, pie diagram. Types of
variables: continuous and discontinuous variables, qualitative and quantitative
variables.
UNIT-V
Measure of dispersion and Central tendency: Mean, Mode, Median Dispersion:
Range, variance, SD, SE and CV.
Common statistical tools: Chi-square,t test, ANOVA, Correlation and Regression
analysis.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Daniel, W. W. (2007) Biostatistics, Wiley publishers, USA

Zar (2006) Biostatistical analysis, Dorling Kindersley Pvt Ltd , India.
Nolting, B (2006) Methods in modern biophysics, Springer, Berlin
Agarwal, S. K. (2005) Advanced biophysics, APH Publishing Corporations, India
Daniel, M. (2004) Basic biophysics, Agrobios publications, India
Bailey, N.T.J. (1997), Statistical Methods in Biology, III Ed., Cam. University Press, N.Y.
Goutham, N, Pattabi, S. 2001. Biophysics, Narossa Publishing company, New Delhi.

250

PRACTICALS
1.6 ANIMAL DIVERSITY, CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
Animal Diversity
1. Study of animals in their natural habitats in relation to morphological,
ecological and evolutionary diversity.
2. Assigning animals to their respective taxonomic position up to order, based on
morphological characters.
3. Mounting
Earthworm Body and pineal setae
Honey bee sting apparatus
Cockcroach Mouth parts
Prawn Appendages
Teleost fish Scales
4. Dissections
Understanding the anatomy of frog using an appropriate software
package (CarolinaTM BiolabR Frog)
Dissection of cockroach: Digestive, reproductive & nervous systems.
Dissection of available fish: General anatomy (Viscera)
CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
1. Cell organelles from slide preparation/images
2. Onion root tip Squash preparation and study of mitosis
3. Grasshopper testis - Squash preparation and study of meiosis
4. Chironomous larva - Squash preparation of giant chromosome
5. Buccal mucosal epithelium Smear preparation to detect Barr bodies
6. Isolation and detection of DNA from gel electrophoresis
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Lundblad, R. L. 2009. Practical Handbook of Biochemistry and Molecular
Biology, CRC publications.
2. Barnes, R. D., 2008. Invertebrate Zoology, Cengage Learning (Thompson), USA
3. Sambrook, J.and David W. Rusell, 2001. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual Cold spring harbour laboratory press, U.S.A.
4. Pratt, H. S., 2008. A course in Vertebrate Zoology, Bibliolife
5. Hickman Cleveland P. Jr. Larry S. Roberts, Susan L. Kee (2006), Animal
Diversity, MaCgraw-hill professional, USA

251

1.7 GENETICS, EVOLUTION, BIOCHEMISTRY, ANIMAL

PHYSIOLOGY, BIOPHYSICS AND BIOSTATISTICS
GENETICS
1. Drosophila culture Identifications of sex & mutants.
2. Pedigree analysis using charts and data.
3. Human karyotyping & chromosomal abnormalities.
4. Hardy Weinberg law & Calculation of gene frequencies for dominant, recessive
& co-dominant traits and multiple alleles.
EVOLUTION
Animals of evolutionary importance Analogous and homologous organs,
fossils, mimicry, coloration.
BIOCHEMISTRY AND PHYSIOLOGY
1. Preparation of solutions Molarity, Normality, Percentage-Buffer preparation
Determination of pH.
2. Estimation of salivary amylase activity.
3. Estimation of ammonia and urea.
4. Estimation of blood chloride.
5. Determination of glucose and glycogen
6. Determination of total proteins
7. Separation of proteins by electrophoresis Native, PAGE.
8. Spotters: Observation and recording of different tissue types from prepated
slides, smering of peripheral blood to identify cell types..
BIOPHYSICS AND BIOSTATISTICS
Spectrophotometer, pH meter, micrometer and electrophoretic unit as spotters.
Construction of graph and bar diagram. Calculation of mean, median, mode, variance,
standard deviation and standard error. Chi-Square test.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Joe Sambrook, and David W. Rusell, 2001. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual Cold spring harbour laboratory press, U.S.A.
2. Lundblad, R. L. 2009. Practical Handbook of Biochemistry and Molecular
Biology, CRC publications.
3. Keith Wilson and John Walker ,2000. Practical Biochemistry: Principles and
techniques, Cambridge University Press, UK.
4. Baylis, W. M. 2009. An introduction to physiology with practical exercises,
Cornell University press, USA.
5. Daniel, W. W. (2007) Biostatistics, Wiley publishers, USA
6. Zar (2006) Biostatistical analysis, Dorling Kindersley Pvt Ltd , India.

252

2.1 ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY

UNIT-I
Ecosystem: The concept of ecosystem- Energy flow - Trophic structures in ecosystem.
Ecological complexity and stability in food webs. Ecological pyramids - food chain and
their significance. Limiting factor: Concept of limiting factors- Shelfords law of
tolerance, Factor compensation and ecotypes.
UNIT-II
Bio-geochemical cycle: General account of complete and incomplete bio-geochemical
cycles, sedimentary cycles in tropics. Cycling of non-essential elements and organic
nutrients - Recycling pathway of elements.
UNIT-III
Population and community ecology: The population concept- Natality, mortality,
growth rate, population density & age distribution, carrying capacity, fluctuation and
regulation. Community structure - influence of competition - influence of predation and
disturbance. Community succession, climax - Monoclimax and polyclimax theories.
UNIT-III
Habitat ecology and Resource ecology: Physical and biotic features of terrestrial,
freshwater, estuarine, marine habitats. Unique features of Coral Reefs, Seaweeds,
Seagrasses and Mangroves. Natural resources and their conservation.
UNIT-V
Environmental Pollution and Management: Types of environmental pollution and
their biological effects (Air, Water, Soil, Noise). Effect of climate change, global
warming and its effect on living organisms - Role of microbes in bioremediation.
Environmental awareness. Organizations involved in environmental protection Principles of conservation: Application of ecological principles - germplasm
conservation. Environmental laws.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Henry, M., and H. Stevens, 2009. A Primer of Ecology with R (Use R),
Springer
2. Odum EP,(2008) Fundamentals of Ecology, Cengage Learning ( Thompson ),
USA.

3. Smith, T. M., and R. L. Smith, 2008. Elements of Ecology (7th Edition),

Benjamin Cummings.
4. Krebs, C. J. 2008. Ecology: The Experimental Analysis of Distribution and
Abundance (6th Edition), Benjamin Cummings.
5. Clark R.S. 2001. Marine Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford, New York.

253

2.2. DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY

Unit - I
Gametogenesis: Spermatogenesis and Oogenesis Sperm structure and physiology,
Classification of eggs -Polarity and symmetry Maturation of egg- egg envelops
Vitellogeneiss, Types of eggs.
Unit - II
Fertilization & Cleavage: Egg recognition, gamete fusion and prevention of
polyspermy, activation of egg metabolism- Types of cleavage - Factors affecting
cleavage- Chemodifferentiation - Blastulation Types of blastula Presumptive organ
forming areas in frog and chick Fate maps.
Unit-III
Gastrulation: Gastrulation in frog and chick, epiboly, emboly. Germ cell determination
and migration, morphogenetic movements, the cellular basis of morphogenesis, cell
motility and differential cell affinity.
Unit - IV
Organogenesis: Concept of organizer, Embryonic induction Development of eye and
brain. Endoderm determination, mesoderm induction & ectoderm. NeurogenesisFormation of muscle and neural crest - Foetal membranes in chick - Placentation: types
of placenta in mammals.
Unit - V
Genes and development: Nuclear transplantation; Differential gene activation,
Developmental genetic defects, Role of cell death in development, Factors involved in
teratogenesis, Concept of Assisted Reproductive Technologies (ART), Gene knock out
and knock in .
REFERENCE BOOK
1. Gilbert, S. F., and K. Knisely, 2009.
Developmental Biology, Sinauer
Associates Inc.
2. Minelli, A. 2009.
Forms of Becoming: The Evolutionary Biology of
Development, Princeton University Press.
3. Hodge, R., 2009. Developmental Biology (Genetics and Evolution). Facts on
File.
4. Slack, J. M. W. 2005. Essential Developmental Biology, Wiley-Blackwell.
5. Hake S, and F. Wilt, 2003. Principles of Developmental Biology, W.W. Norton
& Co.
6. Wolpert, L., R. Beddington, T. Jessell, P. Lawrence, E. Mayerowitz, and J.
Smith, 2002. Principles of development, Oxford University Press, UK

254

2.3 MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY

UNIT - I : History of Microbiology: Microbial diversity: Prokaryotes and
Eukaryotes, Microalgae, Fungi, Bacteria and Viruses. Bacterial size, shapes and pattern
of arrangement. Ultrastructure of bacteria-Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria.
Bacterial Growth and Nutrition: Growth curve of bacteria, Nutritional requirements.
Nutritional types of bacteria, Types of culture media, Enumeration, Isolation,
identification of microbes by biochemical and molecular tools. Storage of microbes.
Unit II : Industrial Microbiology: Microbes of milk and food - methods of detection,
Pasteurization and food poisoning; food preservation. Microbial growth kinetics - Batch
culture and continuous culture - Biomass production. Isolation, preservation and strain
improvement of industrially important microorganisms.

Medical Microbiology: Bacterial and viral infections with examples - Causative agents
Pathogenecity, Modes of transmission, Virulence & Pathogen establishment.
UNIT - III : Immune System: Cells, tissues and organs of immune system Primary
and secondary lymphoid organs Structure and function. Molecules of immune system
antibodies, complements, cytokines, interferons types, sources and functions.
Antigen: Classification, epitopes, antigen and antibody interaction.
UNIT IV : Immune response: Primary and secondary mechanism of humoral and
cell mediated immune responses- immunity to infections immunoprophylaxis,
vaccines and immunization schedule.
Immunological Disorders: Hypersensitivity - Types I, II, III and IV; autoimmune
disorder; immunodeficiency diseases. Tumor and transplantation Immunology - Major
Histocompatibility Complex (MHC); Immunity to tumors.
UNIT V : Immunological techniques: Agglutination test, Precipitation ring test,
Immunodiffusion, Immunoelectrophoresis, Widal test, VDRL test, Acquired Immuno
Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS) test, Hybridoma technology, Radioimmuno asaay,
Enzyme linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Roitt, I., Delves,P., Martin, S., Burton, D (2006) Roitts Essential Immunology, WileyBlackwell, UK
2.Brown, A., 2008. Benson's Microbiological Applications: Laboratory Manual in General
Microbiology, Short Version, McGraw-Hill Science.
3.Roberts, J.C.E, 2008. Microbiology: A human perspective, Mc Graw Hill Publishers, USA.
4.Bauman, R.W, 2008. Microbiology with diseases by body system, Benjamin Cummings, USA.
5.Levinson, W, 2008. Review of Medical Microbiology and Immunology, Tenth Edition
(LANGE Basic Science), McGraw-Hill Medical, USA
6.Delves P, Martin S, Burton D, and Roitt I, 2006. Roitt's Essential Immunology , WileyBlackwell, London.

255

2.4 ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY

UNIT - I
Genetic Engineering: Basic principles of genetic engineering - Genetic engineering in
animal systems- Vectors: Plasmid, Cosmid, Bacteriophage, Shuttle vectors, Yeast
vectors, Minichromosomes, Artificial chromosomes. Expression vectors and expression
systems. Enzyme systems: Gyrase, ligase, reverse transcriptases, polymerases. RFLP,
RAPD, VNTR. PCR, DNA finger-printing, DNA sequencing- Human genome project.
UNIT - II
Animal cell and tissue culture: Media requirements, preparation of media and
sterilization techniques. Natural and synthetic media. Culture methods: hanging drop,
suspension and monolayer culture. Primary and established cell lines, characteristics of
transformed cells. Methods of cell preservation- Applications of cell culture in product
development and tissue repair- Bioreactors and scaling-up technologies.
UNIT - III
Vermiculture technology:
Earthworms Taxonomic position and diversity; Types; Ecological roles and economic
importance of earthworms Need for earthworm culture. Vermiculture common
species for culture; environmental requirements; culture methods wormery breeding
techniques; indoor and out door cultures - monoculture and polyculture relative
merits and demerits; Windows method- Process advantages. Applications of
vermiculture.
Sericulture technology:
Sericulture: Scope of sericulture- Mulbery cultivation Environmental conditions for
cultivation Mulberry varieties in Tamil Nadu- Morphology of silkworm larva and
moth. Physiology of silk gland. Life cycle of Bombyx mori- Mounting of silkworm for
spinning cocoons Harvesting of cocoons- Quality of cocoons- Silk reeling industry
and commercialization- Quality of silk- Silkworm larva as a bioreactor.
UNIT - IV
Biotechnology in medicine: Recombinant vaccines, subunit vaccines and live
vaccines- Production of Insulin and Tissue Plasminogen Activator Molecular
diagnostics for detection of tumors Therapeutic approaches to cancer Bone marrow
transplantation. Gene therapy: Ex vivo and In vivo gene therapy, Stem cells: embryonic
and adult, hematopoietic, epithelial and mesenchymal- separation, culture and
maintenance, applications.

256

UNIT - V
Bioinformatics tools in animal technology: Introduction to internet and use of the
same for communication, searching of database, literature, references etc. Introduction
to Bioinformatics- Databank search- Data mining, Data management and interpretation,
BLAST, Multiple sequence alignment, Protein modeling, Protein structure analysis,
Docking, Primer designing, Phylogenetic analysis.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Cartwright, T, 2009. Animal Cells as Bioreactors (Cambridge Studies in
Biotechnology), Cambridge University Press, UK.
2. Castilho L. 2008. Animal Cell Technology: From Biopharmaceuticals to Gene

Therapy, Taylor & Francis.

3. Freshney, I, 2006. Culture of Animal Cells, Publisher: John Wiley & Sons Inc (sea) Pte Ltd.
4. Brown, T.A, 2005. Gene cloning- An introduction, 2nd &3rd ed, Chapman &Hall.

Publisher: Stanley Thornes Publishers Ltd.

5. Butler, M. 2004. Animal Cell Culture and Technology : The Basics, BIOS

Scientific Publ, UK.

8. Primrose, S. B, Richard M, Twyman, R and W. Old, 2001. Principles of gene
manipulation, (6th ed), Published by Wiley-Blackwell.
9. Tsai C.S, 2001. An introduction to Computational Biochemistry, Publishers:
John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
10. Sultan Ahmed Ismail, 2005. The Earthworm Book, Second Revised Edition.
Other IndiaPress, Goa, India.
11. FAO, 1994. Sericulture manual 2 . Oxford & IBH.

257

2.5.1 FISHERIES AND AQUACULTURE

UNIT I : General Classification: General classification of fishes, economically
important marine and freshwater fishes with regard to their fishery potential.
Indigenous and modern craft and gears used for capture fisheries.
UNIT -II : Morphometric and meristic characters: Morphometric and meristic
characters of fishes, food and feeding habits, age and growth, reproduction and
spawning - Migration in fishes-Fishery by products: Fish liver oil, fish ensilage,
isinglass, Chitin, Leather from shark skins and Masmin (Tunas) and value added
fishery by products.
UNIT III : Aquaculture: Definition Cultivable organisms Types of culture:
Extensive, Semi intensive and Intensive - Farm design, structure and construction.
Pond preparation and water quality management in aquaculture ponds. Hatchery
technologies.
Feed: Artificial feed for fish and shrimps. Food Conversion Ratio (FCR), Feed cost.
Live feed organisms: Artemia, rotifers, diatoms and their culture techniques.
UNIT IV : Composite fish culture: Paddy cum fish culture, integrated fish farming
and race ways culture. Seeds transportation, stocking, harvesting and marketing.
Common finfish and shell fishes disease and their control.
Mariculture: Shrimp culture, lobster culture, crab culture and pearl oyster culture.
Seaweeds: Economic importance, classification and culture methods.
Mass production of seeds: Hypophysation techniques in fishes and induced breeding
in shrimps.
UNIT V : Fish processing: Physical and biochemical methods to examine freshness
of fish - Processing methods: Freezing, canning, smoking, drying and irradiation
methods of preservation of fish. Quality control: National and International standards
(BIS & HACCP concepts).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Jean T. Nolan, 2009. Offshore Marine Aquaculture, Nova Science Pub Inc.
2.Michael King, 2007. Fisheries Biology, Assessment and Management, Wiley-Blackwell.
3.Pillay, T. V. R., and M. N. Kutty, 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices, WileyBlackwell.
4.FAO, 2003. The State of World Fisheries and Aquaculture: 2002 (Manuals from the Fao
Training), United Nations Publications.
5.K K. Balachandran, 2002. Post Harvest Technology of Fish and Fish Products, Daya
Publishing House.
6.Bremner, H.A, 2002. Safety and Quality issues in fish processing, Publisher: CRC,(1st
edition).
7.Simon Jennings, Michel Kaiser, and John D. Reynolds, 2001. Marine Fisheries Ecology,
Wiley-Blackwell.
8.Chandran, K.K., 2000. Post harvest Technology of Fish and Fishery Products, Daya
Publishing House, New Delhi.

258

2.5.2 PARASITOLOGY
UNIT - I:
Introduction to parasitology: Basic concepts, Classification of parasites: endo-, ectoparasites, facultative and obligatory parasites, Major taxa of parasites of
medical/veterinary importance; General patterns of parasite transmission, global burden
of infectious diseases.
UNIT - II
Parasitic Protozoa: General characters and classification, Life cycle, diseases,
diagnosis & treatment. Amoebic parasite: Entomoeba histolytica and human
amoebiasis, Parasitic flagellate: Giardia intestinalis and Trypanosoma, Parasitic ciliate:
Balantidium coli, Parasitic sporozoon: Plasmodium sp.
UNIT III
Trematode, cestode & nematode parasites: General characters and classification, Liver
fluke: Fasciola hepatica, Lung fluke: Paragonimus westermani, Blood fluke: Human
Schistosomes, Intestinal tape worms: Taenia saginata & Taenia solium, Intestinal
nematodes: Ascaris lumbricoide, Blood and tissue nematodes: Filariasis.
UNIT IV
Medical Entomology: General characters, diseases caused and life cycle of the important
insect vectors- Mosquito, Tsetse fly, Sand fly, Bed bug, Myiasis, Fleas, Lice; Arachnid
parasites: Ticks and mites; Crustacea: Cyclops and its medical importance.
UNIT V
Control of parasitic diseases: Chemotherapy of parasitic diseases- Antihelmintic
drugs, Vaccines - Vector control - modern approaches. Zoonotic disease and its control
- Molecular diagnostic methods in parasitology - RNAi technology in parasitology.
Emerging diseases and bioterrorism.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Larry Roberts, Jr., and John Janovy, 2008. Foundations of Parasitology,
McGraw-Hill.
2. Krasnov, B. R. 2008. Functional and Evolutionary Ecology of Fleas: A
Model for Ecological Parasitology, Cambridge University Press, UK.
3. Hendrix, C. M. and Ed Robinson, 2006. Diagnostic Parasitology for
Veterinary Technicians, Mosby publishers.
4. Lynne Shore Garcia, 2006. Diagnostic Medical Parasitology, ASM Press,
USA.
5. Bogitsh, B. J., C. E. Carter, and T. N. Oeltmann, 2005. Human
Parasitology, Academic Press, USA.
6. Heelan, J. S., F. W. Ingersoll, 2001. Essentials of Human Parasitology,
Delmar Cengage Learning.

259

PRACTICALS
2.6. ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY, DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY,
MICROBIOLOGY, IMMUNOLOGY AND ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY
1. Estimation of salinity
2. Estimation of dissolved oxygen
3. Mounting of plankton (fresh water / marine)
4. Animal associations
5. Intertidal fauna
6. Construction of a food web diagram
7. Measurement of light intensity in water bodies using Secchi disc.
DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
1. Examination of prepared microslides to study
a. Egg, cleavage, blastula and yolk plug stages in frog.
b. Egg, 24 hr, 36 hr, 48 hrs, 72 hr and 96 hr developmental stages in
chick.
MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY
1. Enumeration of bacteria, fungi and antibiotic susceptibility test. Hydrolysis of
starch, gelatin and protein, Motility of Bacteria Gram Staining and Negative
staining. Pure culture and Preservation of bacteria.
2. Identification of various immune cell types from peripheral human blood smear,
ABO blood grouping and Rh typing
3. Immuno-electrophoresis (from images)
4. Double Immuno-Deficiency test
ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
1. Cloning vectors from images
2. Demonstration of ELISA.
3. Spotter: Models of PCR, Southern blotting.
4. Common species of earthworms for vermicomposting
5. Adult and post-embryonic developmental stages of silk worm moth
6. Sex identification of adult moth
7. Cocoons, silk and its quality,
8. Tools and utensils in sericulture

260

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bauman R. W, and N. Dolby, 2008. Microbiology Lab Manual (3rd Edition),
Pearson Custom Publishing.
2. James G Cappucino, Natalie Sherman, 2007. Microbiology: A laboratory
manual, Benjamin Cummining publications, U.S.A.
3. Melissa Ann Gibbs, 2003. A Practical Guide to Developmental Biology,
Oxford University Press, USA.
4. Turgeon, M. L. 2008. Immunology & Serology in Laboratory Medicine
(Immunology & Serology in Laboratory Medicine ( Turgeon)), Mosby
publishers.
5. Talwar, G. P., 2006. A hand book of practical & clinical immunology, CBS
publishers, New Delhi
6. Hay, F. C., O. M. R. Westwood, and P. N. Nelson, 2002. Practical Immunology,
Wiley-blackwell, USA

261

2.7.1 FISHERIES AND AQUACULTURE

1. Identification of commercially important fin fishes, shell fishes, molluscs,
lobsters and seaweed.
2. Physical, Biochemical and microbiological methods to examine freshness of
fish.
3. Estimation of protein, lipid, carbohydrate and salt content in fishes.
4. Determination of stocking density and feed assessment.
5. Method of transportation of seeds
6. Modern crafts and gears
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Moyle, P. B. and J. J. Cech, Jr., (1996) Fishes an introduction to Ichthyology,
Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
2. Jean T. Nolan, 2009. Offshore Marine Aquaculture, Nova Science Pub Inc.
3. Michael King, 2007. Fisheries Biology, Assessment and Management, WileyBlackwell.
4. Laurence Hutchinson, 2006. Ecological Aquaculture: A Sustainable Solution
Permanent Publications.
5. David Scarfe, Cheng-Sheng Lee, and Patricia J. O'Bryen, 2006. Aquaculture
Biosecurity: Prevention, Control, and Eradication of Aquatic Animal Disease,
Wiley-Blackwell.
6. Pillay, T. V. R., and M. N. Kutty, 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices,
Wiley-Blackwell.

262

2.7.2 PARASITOLOGY
1. Identification and description of common protozoon, helminth and crustacean

parasites
2. Life cycle of vectors of diseases

Mosquito, House fly, Tick

3. Identification of infectious agents

Sputum analysis, Faeces analysis, Agglutination test (Widal test)

4. Enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA)
5. Application of DNA finger printing in parasitology
6. Isolation and identification of parasites from live situations

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Garcia, L. S. 2009. Practical Guide to Diagnostic Parasitology, ASM Press,
USA.
2. Hendrix, C. M. and Ed Robinson, 2006. Diagnostic Parasitology for Veterinary
Technicians, Mosby publishers.
3. Lynne Shore Garcia, 2006. Diagnostic Medical Parasitology, ASM Press, USA.
4. Bogitsh, B. J., C. E. Carter, and T. N. Oeltmann, 2005. Human Parasitology,
Academic Press, USA.
5. Baker, J.R. 2004. Advances in parasitology, Elsevier

263

Course
Mode
Duration
Eligibility
Medium

:
:
:
:
:
Code No.

M.A., Economics (AY-2016-17 onwards)

Distance Education
Two years
Any Degree from Recognised University / Institute
English and Tamil
Subjects

Marks

I Year
1.1

Micro Economics

100

1.2

Development Economics

100

1.3

Indian Economy

100

1.4

Industrial Economics

100

1.5

Environmental Economics

100

II Year
2.1

Macro Economics

100

2.2

Fiscal Economics

100

2.3

Research and Statistical Methods

100

2.4

Agricultural Economics

100

2.5

International Economics

100

Total

Paper 1.1: MICRO ECONOMICS

264

1000

Unit I
Scope of Micro Economics - Economics as a Positive Science - Criteria for
Choosing among Alternative Theories - Dynamic Economic Analysis and Cobweb
Theorem - Partial and General Equilibrium Analysis.
Unit - II
Demand Analysis: Ordinal Utility Theory - Revealed Preference Theory Consumers surplus - Theories of Search, Asymmetric Information, Lemons, Market
Signaling - The Efficient Market Hypothesis: Meaning, Types, Limitations.
Unit - III
Theory of Production: Introduction; The Law of Variable Proportions; The Law
of Returns of Scale; Economies of Scale - Production Function: Cobb Douglas and
CES - Technical Progress and Production Function - Classification of Technical
Progress, Embodied and Disembodied.
Unit - IV
Theory of Cost: The Traditional Theory of Costs - The Modern Theories of
Costs - Economies of Scale Elasticity of Costs.
Unit - V
Price and Output Determination:
Perfect Competition - Monopoly
Monopolistic Competition- Oligopoly.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Jhingam, M.L. (2011), Micro Economic Theory, Vikas Publishing House, New
Delhi.
2. Dewett,K.K.(1985), Modern Economic Theory, S.Chand and Company, New
Delhi.
3. Ahuja, H.L. (2004), Micro Economics, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
4. Koutsoyiannis, A. (2000), Modern Microeconomics, Macmillan press, London.
5. Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill,
London.
6. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Application, Oxford University
Press, New Delhi.
7. Stigler,G. (1996), Theory of Price, PHI, New Delhi.
8. Varian, H.R. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W.Norton, NewYork.
Paper 1.2: DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS
265

Unit I
Concepts of Economic Growth and Development - Characteristics of Less
Developed Countries - Obstacles to Development - Growth, Poverty and Income
Distribution - Human Development Index - Physical Quality of Life Index and Human
Poverty Index.
Unit II
Theories of Growth: Classical Approach - Adam Smith, Marx and Schumpeter
Neo - Classical Approach: Robinson, Solow, Kaldor and Harrod Domar.
Unit III
Theories of Economic Development: Rostow, Rosenstein-Roden, Nurske,
Hirschman - Sens Capability Approach to Economic Development.
Unit IV
Development Strategies: Neumanns Growth Model and Modifications - Choice
of Goods and Techniques, Mathurs Wage Goods, Light and Heavy Strategies.
Unit V
Planning Models: Feldman, Mahalanobis, Vahit Brahmananda, Raj, Sen,
Chakravarthy - Leontiefs Input-Output Model - Planning Techniques.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ray, Debraj (1998), Development Economics, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi.
2. Kuznets, Simon (1966), Economic Growth, Rate structure and Spread, Yale
University Press, New Delhi.
3. Tadaro, Michael. P. (1998), Economic Development, Longman,
4. Szirmai, Adam (2005), Dynamics of Socio Economic Development-An
Introduction, Cambridge University Press. New Delhi.
5. Meir, Gerald (2003), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.
6. Nehar, Phillips, A. (1971), Economic Growth and Development: A
Mathematical Introduction, John Wiley, New York.

Paper 1.3: INDIAN ECONOMY

Unit - I
266

Indian Economy at the time of Independence - Planning; Objectives; Rationale

and Performance; Adoption of Mixed Economy Model - Indian Economy at New
Economic Reform: Appraisal of Economic Reforms.
Unit - II
Growth and Structure of Indian Economy - Growth of National Income and
Per Capita Income, Personal Income in India - Demographic features - urbanization in
India - Inter-State Disparities in the Pattern of Development - Poverty and
Unemployment.
Unit - III
Agriculture: Pattern of Growth of Indian Agriculture - Regional Variations in
Agricultural Development - WTO and Indian agriculture - Industry: Trends in growth
and Structure of Indian Industry - Impact of New Economic Policy on Indian industry.
Unit - IV
Financial Sector: Nationalisation of Banks - Financial Sector Reforms; Interest
Rate Policy - Role of Financial Institutions - Money and Capital Markets; Working of
SEBI in India - Public Finance: Recent Trends in Public Debt and Fiscal Deficits Centre-State Financial Relations - Review of Monetary Policy of RBI;
Unit V
External Sector: Trade Policy during Pre and Post Reform Period - Exchange
Rate Policy and Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA) - External Debt - Foreign
Direct Investment and Multinational Corporations in India (MNCs).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Acharya, S. and M. Rakesh (2011), Indias Economy: Performance and
Challenges, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
2. Jayaraj, D and S. Subramanian (2010), Poverty, Inequality and Population,
Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
3. Mahendradev, S. (2010), Inclusive Growth in India, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.
4. Kurien, C.T. (1978), Poverty, Planning and Social Transformation in India,
Allied Publishers, New Delhi,
5. Rangarajan, C. (2000), Perspectives on Indian Economy -A Collection of
Essays, UBSPD publishers Distributors, New Delhi.
6. Misra S.K. and V.K. Puri, (2001), Indian Economy, Himalaya Publication
House, Mumbai.
Paper1.4: INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
Unit I
267

Meaning of Industrialization - Role of Industry in Economic Development Theories of Industry: Hoffman, Chenery and Gerschenkron.
Unit II
Concept and Organisation of a Firm - Market Structure - Sellers Concentration Product Differentiation - Entry Conditions - Economics of Scale - Profitability and
Innovation.
Unit III
Theories of Industrial Location: Weber, Sargant Florence - Factors Affecting
Location.
Unit IV
Growth of the Firm - Size and Growth - Growth and Profitability of the Firm Constraints on Growth - Productivity - Efficiency - Capacity Utilisation: Concept Measurement.
Unit V
Classification of Industries - Industrial Policy in India - Role of Public and
Private Sectors - India as a Global Hub - Transfer of Technology - LPG - MSME Recent Central Government Initiative to Encourage Industrial Sector.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Clarke, Roger (1985), Industrial Economics, Basil Blackwell, New York.
2. Barthwal, R.R. (1995), Industrial Economics, New Age International, New
Delhi.
3. Smith, D.M. (1971), Industrial Location: An Economic and Geographic
Analysis, John Wiley, New York.
4. Ahluwalia, I. J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.
Paper 1.5: ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS
Unit I
268

Economics and Environment - Definition - Scope and Significance - Ecology

and Ecosystem - Relationship between the Environment Economics and the
Environment Policy.
Unit II
Economics of Resources Forest Resources Water Resources Mineral
Resources Conservation and Management of Natural Resources Natural Resource
Policy in India.
Unit - III
Energy - Definition - Sources and Classification - Renewable and Nonrenewable sources of Energy - Conventional and Non-Conventional Energy Resources
- Direct and Indirect Energy - Atomic Energy - Energy Scenario in India.
Unit - IV
Pollution: Meaning, Types - Pollution Control Pricing Emissions - Regulation
- Fiscal Technique Effluent Charges and Subsidies Comparison.
Unit - V
International Environmental Policy - International Conference on Environment
- International Agreements - Stockholm Conference on Human Environment Recommendations Environment Laws in India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Rabindara, N. B. (1998), Environmental Economics - An Indian Perspective,
Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
2. Charles S. P. (2000), Economics and Global Environment. Cambridge
University Press, New Delhi.
3. Barry C. F. and Martha K. F. (2004), Environmental Economics. McGraw Hills,
Irwin.
4. Jhingan, M.L. (2011), Environmental Economics: Theory, Management and
Policy, Vrinda Publications, New Delhi.
5. Kolstad, C.D. (2012), Environmental Economics. Oxford University Press, New
Delhi.
6. Sankar, U. (2001), Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi.
Paper 2.1: MACRO ECONOMICS
269

Unit I
Introduction - Meaning Definitions - Nature and Scope - Importance - Micro
and Macro Economics - National Income Accounting: Meaning - Concepts Measurement -Importance of National Income Data - Difficulties in its Measurement.
Unit II
Classical Theory of Employment and Income - Says Law of MarketKeynesian Theory of Employment - Determinants of Equilibrium Level of
Employment - Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply function.
Unit III
Consumption Function: Meaning - Theories of Consumption Function - MEC Investment Function - Meaning - Types - Determinants of Investment - MEI.
Unit IV
Multiplier: Static and Dynamic Multipliers - Induced Investment and
Accelerator - The interaction principle - Basics of Income and Employment MultiplierKeynesian Revolution and its Application to Less Developed Countries.
Unit V
Post Keynesian Macro Analysis - General equilibrium of Monetary and real
sector - Contribution of Hicks, Hanson: ISLM, Diagram - Objectives and Importance of
Macro Economic Policy.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mithani, D.M. (2003), Modern Economic Analysis, Himalaya Publishing House,
Mumbai.
2. Ahuja H.L. (2000), Macro Economics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi.
3. Vaish,M.C. (2005): Macro Economic Theory, Vikas Publishing House, New
Delhi.
4. Shapiro, Edward (2008), Macro Economic Analysis, Galyotia Publications, New
Delhi.
5. Seth, M.L. (1999), Macro Economics, Lakshmi Narayan Agarwal Publishers,
New Delhi.

Paper 2.2: FISCAL ECONOMICS

Unit I
270

Public Finance - Its meaning and Scope - Uses - Role of Public Finance
in the Economy - Public Finance and Private Finance - The Principle of Maximum
Social Advantage in Public Finance.
Unit II
Principles of Public Expenditure - Classification - Causes and Effects of Public
Expenditure with Reference to India - Public Revenue Sources - Distinction between
Tax Revenue and Non- Tax Revenue - Taxation: Meaning, Sources of Taxation, Impact
of Taxation.
Unit III
Fiscal Policy - Fiscal Policy in a Developing Economy - Financial
Administration and Principles of Budgeting - Characteristics of a Good Budget Preparation of a Budget -Budgeting in India - Deficit Financing: Objectives, Need,
Effects, Limitations, Deficit Financing in India.
Unit IV
Fiscal Federalism - Theory of Fiscal Federalism - Center, State Financial
Relations - Problems of Center, State Financial Relations in India , Reports of Finance
Commissions in India.
Unit V
Indian Tax System: Revenue of the Union, States and Local Bodies - Major
Taxes in India Non - Tax Revenue of Center, State and Local Bodies - Reforms in
Direct and Indirect Taxes - Trends in Revenue, Expenditure and Public Debt in the Post
Reform Period.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Goode, R.(2000), Government Finance in Developing Countries, TMH, New
Delhi
2. Jha. R. (1999), Modern Public Economics, Routledge, London.
3. Musgrave, R.A. and P.B. Musgrave (1970), Public Finance in Theory and
Practice, McGraw Hill, Tokyo.
4. Atkinson, A.B. and J.E. Stiglitz (2000), Lectures on Public Economics, TMH,
New York.
5. Herber, B.P (2001), Modern Public Finance, Richard D. Irwin, Homewood.
Paper 2.3: RESEARCH AND STATISTICAL METHODS
Unit I

271

Meaning of Research - Objectives of Research - Approach to ResearchSignificance of Research - Types of Research- Research in Social Science - Research
Design - Features of a Good Research Design.
Unit II
Identifying a Research Problem Formulation of Research Problem Formulation of Hypothesis- Sample Survey Different Types Merits and Demerits Schedule and Questionnaire Measurement and Scaling Techniques- Processing and
Analysis of Data
Unit III
Descriptive Statistics: Measures of Central Tendency - Measures of Dispersion
- Skewness and Kurtosis - Pearsonian measures of Skewness - Bowleys measure of
Skewness Kurtosis.
Unit IV
Applications in Economics: Correlation and Regression - Least Squares,
Specification and Estimation of Simple Linear Regression Confidence Intervals and
Tests of Hypotheses, Prediction.
Unit V
Report Writing - Steps - Bibliography and References - Interpretation and
Presentation - Quality of a Good Research Report.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kothari, C.R. (1985), Research Methodology, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
2. Cochran, W. G. (1977), Sampling Technique, John Wiley, New York.
3. Goode, W.J. and P.K. Hatt (1952), Methods in Social Research, McGraw
Hill, New York.
4. Wilkinson, T.S. and P.L. Bhandarkar (1994), Methodology and Techniques
of Social Research, Himalaya Publishing, New Delhi.
5. Babies, Earl (2006), The Practice of Social Research, Wadsworth
Publishing, New Delhi.

Paper 2.4: AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS

Unit I
272

Nature and scope of Agricultural Economics - Role of Agriculture in Economic

Development - Interdependence between Agriculture and Industry- Cropping PatternAgricultural Development under Five Year Plans - Green Revolution.
Unit II
Economic Decisions in Agriculture Production: Cobb Douglas, CES Production Relationships: Factor - Product, Factor - Factor, Product - Product
Relationship.
Unit III
Capital Formation in Agriculture - Public and Private Investment - Cost
Relationships and Profit Maximisation - Farm Management - Agricultural Price
Determination - Crop Insurance - Subsidy - PDS - Food Security.
Unit IV
Agricultural Marketing - Marketed and Marketable Surplus - Distress SalesDefects of Markets - Regulated Markets - Co-operative Markets - Market Intelligence Futures Trading.
Unit V
Land Reforms - Agricultural Credit NABARD - Co-operative Credit - Rural
Indebtedness - Agricultural Labour and Wages - National Agricultural Policy 2000 National Commission on Farmers - WTO and Indian Agriculture - DOHA Agreement
on Agriculture.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sadhu and Singh, (2007), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Bilgrami, S.A.R. (2010), An Introduction to Agricultural Economics, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi.
3. Bhalla, G.S. and Singh, G. (2012), Economic Liberalisation and Indian
Agriculture, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
4. Bhalla, G. S. and G. Singh (2001), Indian Agriculture: Four Decades of
Development, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
5. Saini, G. R. (1979), Farm Size, Resource, Use Efficiency and Income
Distribution, Allied Publishers, New Delhi.
Paper 2.5: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS
Unit I
273

Foreign Trade: Need - Inter Regional and International Trade - Theories of

International Trade: Adam Smith - Ricardo, Haberler and Heckscher - Ohlin Theory.
Unit II
Terms of Trade: Concepts of Terms of Trade, Determinants of Terms of Trade Static and Dynamic Gains from Trade - Terms of Trade between Agriculture and
Industry.
Unit III
Free Trade: Meaning - Case for and against Free Trade - Protection: Meaning Arguments for and Against Protection - the Effect of Growth on Trade - Technical
Progress and Trade - Neutral, Capital Saving, Labour Saving.
Unit IV
Trade Policy: Tariff - Quota - Trade problems of Developing Countries:
UNCTAD - GATT and Tokyo Declaration - WTO - Import Substitution and Export
Promotion North South Dialogue and New International Economic Order.
Unit V
Balance of Payments: Meaning, Structure, Balance of Payment (BoP) - Balance
of Trade (BoT) - Disequilibrium in BoP & BoT - Causes for Disequilibrium in BoP Measures for Correcting Disequilibrium.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Carbaugh, R. J. (2008), International Economics, Thomson South Western,
New Delhi
2. Salvatore, D. (2007), International Economics, Wiley India, New Delhi.
3. Krugman P. R. and M. Obsfeild (2006), International Economics: Theory and
Policy, Addison Wesley, New Delhi.
4. Soderston, B. and G. Reed (1999), International Economics, McMillan Press
Ltd., London.

274

Course

M.Sc., Psychology (AY-2016-17 onwards)

Mode

Distance Education

Pattern

Non-Semester

Duration

Two years

Eligibility

Any Degree from Recognized University (10+2+3)

Medium
Passing Minimum

:
:

English
50% Marks

Course of Study & Scheme of Examinations

Code No.

Subjects

Total Marks

I Year
1.1

Social Psychology

100

1.2

Life Span Psychology

100

1.3

Cognitive Neuro Psychology

100

1.4

Research Methodology

100

1.5

Psychology Practical - I

100

II Year
2.1

Theories of Personality

100

2.2

Psychopathology

100

2.3

Counselling Theories and Techniques

100

2.4

Elective: 2.4.1- Educational Psychology /

2.4.2- Rehabilitation Psychology/
2.4.3- Organisational Behaviour

100

2.5

Psychology Practical - II

100
Total

275

1000

1.1 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives:
To enable the students to understand social influences on human
behaviour
To enable the students understand the dynamics of social influence on
positive and negative human behaviour
To enable students to understand how social psychological principles are
applied in day to day life situations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
Definition - Basic concepts of social psychology scope individual, society
and culture Social Psychology and related disciplines -- Social Psychology in
the new millennium - Research Methods in Social Psychology: Survey,
Correlation and Experimental Methods
UNIT II SOCIAL PERCEPTION
Self-Perception: Self-concept, Perceived Self-control, Self-serving Bias, Selfpresentation, Self-esteem, Self and Gender
Perceiving Others: Non-Verbal Communication, Attribution, Impression
Formation, Impression Management
UNIT III ATTITUDES AND BEHAVIOR
Attitude formation Development of Attitudes Attitude and its influence on
behaviour - Persuasion Change in Attitudes Resisting persuasion Cognitive
Dissonance Ways to manage dissonance.
UNIT IV PREJUDICE AND AGGRESSION
Prejudice -Discrimination in Action Sources of prejudice Social, Emotional
and Cognitive - Techniques to reduce Prejudice
Aggression - Theories of Aggression - Types of Aggression - Determinants
ofAggression - Environmental causes - prevention and control of Aggression.
UNIT V PROSOCIAL BEHAVIOR
Motives for Prosocialbehaviour - Factors that Affect Helping Behavior, External
and Internal influences on helping behaviour Long-term commitment to
Prosocial Acts
276

REFERENCES
1. Baron, R. A., & Byrne, D. (2003). Social Psychology, 10th ed. New Delhi:
Prentice Hall, India.
2. Baron, R. A., Branscombe, N.R., Byrne, D. &Bhardwaj, G. (2010). Social
Psychology, 12th ed. New Delhi:Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt Ltd.
3. Myers, D. G. (2002). Social Psychology, 7th ed. McGraw Hill: Int. Education.
4. Chaube, S. P., &Chaube, A. (2007). Ground Work for Social Psychology. New
Delhi.:Neelkamal.

277

1.2 LIFE SPAN PSYCHOLOGY

UNIT-1: An introduction to development in the lifespan- theoretical perspectives

in developmental psychology and human development. Freuds psychosexual
stages of development, Eriksons psychosocial stages of development, theories
of learning, Piagets cognitive stages of development, and socio-cultural
theories.
UNIT- 2: Infancy, newborn and infant- prenatal diagnostic tests, geneticenvironment interactions, timelines for prenatal development, teratology, and
stages of childbirth. Newborn reflexes, newborn needs- patterns in infant
physical development, infant temperament. Early Childhood- physical,
cognitive, and socio emotional development- development of gross and fine
motor skills- brain development. Middle childhood- physical and cognitivegrowth patterns, child obesity, ADHD, and concrete operational stage of
cognitive development. Social development- peer relations, divorce, and moral
development.
UNIT-3: Adolescence, history of marking adolescence, puberty, the secular
trend regarding menarche, and social implications for pubertal timing. Eating
disorders -identity statuses. Other adolescent problem behaviors such as juvenile
delinquency, depression, behavoiur disorders and suicide
UNIT-4: Early and Middle adulthood. emerging adulthood, timeframes for
physical peak and the physical declines, adult sexuality and relationships,
theories on post-formal thought, and theory of love. Middle adulthood section,
perimenopause and menopause, hormone therapy for menopausal symptoms,
midlife crises and transitions, and family relationships. Late adulthood and the
278

end of life, biological aging, dementia/neurocognitive disorders, stages of dying,

death, hospice and palliative care, and life satisfaction in late adulthood
UNIT-5: Life Span Problems- Mental Health Problems-Sexual ProblemsAIDS/HIV- Preventive Measures- Emotional imbalance-Fear and Phobic
Problems- Anxiety and Stress -Coping Style- Development of adaptive and
positive behavior-Human relational Problems- Mental Peace-Life satisfaction.

References
Newman, Barbara M.; Newman, P. R. (2011).Development Through Life:
A Psychosocial Approach. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Cengage Learning
Willem Doise (1998), Life-Span Developmental Psychology

John W Santrock (2012), A Topical Approach to Life-Span Development

279

1.3 COGNITIVE NEURO PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives
To explain the mediatory role of cognition in behavior
To explain the process and function of attention
To describe sensational, perceptual phenomena and its different scientific
explanations
To elucidate how the memory system functions
To explain the process and function of Neuropsychology
To describe Plasticity and Restoration of brain function
UNIT I Cognitive Psychology
Psychological processes. Emergence of different approaches to cognitive
psychology information processing, connectionism & ecological perspective;
Attention: Model of attention: Functions of executive preconscious and
conscious processing alerting mechanism. Selective attention: Bottom up and
top town processing automatically, division of attention. Theories of attention
Bottle neck & spotlight concepts Filter model, attenuation theory, multimode
theory, resources & capacity allocation model schema theory.
UNIT II Sensation & Perception
Theories of perception: top down and bottom up perspective, visuopatial sub
codes pattern recognition. Perceptual phenomena Pain perception, constancies
and illusions mental imagery. classical and modern psychophysics: Fechners
contributions, Webers law Stevens power law, signal detection theory, ROC
curve Top down processes- influence of motivation & learning on perception,
role of culture perceptual organization, subliminal perception and synesthesia.
UNIT III Memory
Encoding theories and models of memory two store model information
processing approach levels of processing levels of recall. Sensory memory,
short term memory, working memory models. Storage Long term memory
episodic and semantic memory, autobiographical memory, declarative and
procedural memory, Implicit and explicit memory, Retrieval: Recall
reconstruction in memory. For getting: Theories interference decay organic
280

causes encoding failure, failure of reconstruction. Metacognition: Meaning and

Concept and its implications.
UNIT IV Neuropsychology
Assumptions and methods functional modularity anatomical functional
architecture and substarctivity
Methods of investigation: electrophysiological Single cell recording, EEG and
ERP Scanning and Imaging CAT PET MRI and FMRI; Neuropsychological
Battery Luria Nebraska Neuropsychological Battery, Halstead Retain Test
Battery PGI Battery of Brian Behaviour Dysfunction AIIMS neuropsychological
battery; Neurodegenerative disorders Parkinsons Alzheimer, Huntington
UNIT V Neuropsychological Plasticity and Restoration of Brain
Historical antecedents and approaches. Types of brain injury Methods of
localization of cognitive functions in the Brain; Function Mind and Brian
relationship computer assisted neuropsychological rehabilitation and training

References
Anderson, J.R. (2010). Cognitive Psychology and Its Implications. New York,
NY: Worth Publishers.
Boller F & Grafman J (1988). Handbook of neuropsychology. New York:
Elsevier
Eysenck, M.W. (1990). Cognitive Psychology: An International Review. West
Sussex, England: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. (pp. 111)
Galotti K (1999).Cognitive psychology in and out of Laboratory. New Delhi:
Wiley
Gazzaniga M.S. (2002). Cognitive Neuroscience The biology of mind (2nd Ed)
New York: W.W. Norton & Company
Kolb .B & Ian Q.W (1990). Fundamental of neuropsychology. New York
Freeman
Lamberts K and Goldstone R L, (2005) (Eds), Handbook of Cognition.
London: Sage
Neisser, U. (1967). Cognitive Psychology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice
Hall. Neisser's definition on page 4.
281

 Parasurmana R (1998). Attentive brain. MIT Press: London

Ponsford J 9Ed) (2004) Cogntive and behavioural Rehabilitation New York
Guilford
Smity, E.E. & Kosslyn, S (2007). Cognitive Psychology: Mind and Brain.
New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
Valimaa-Blum, R. (2009). The phoneme in cognitive phonology: episodic
memories of both meaningful and meaningless units. CogniTextes, 2. DOI :
10.4000/cognitextes.211

282

1.4 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

UNIT 1

Meaning, Types and Process of Research: Meaning Purpose Types

of research Pure, applied, historical, analytical, descriptive and experimental
Significance of research in social sciences Process of research Meaning
Scientific method Induction and deduction.
UNIT 2

Planning Research: Research problem Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem Review of literature in the field of corporate
management Hypothesis Meaning Sources of hypothesis Types of
Hypothesis Formulation and testing Research design Factors affecting
research design Evaluation of research design.
UNIT 3

Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation

Advantages and disadvantages of sampling Principle of sampling
Essentials of a good sampling Methods of sampling Probability and nonprobability sampling methods Selection of a sample Factors affecting the
size of the sample Biased sample Sampling and non-sampling errors.
UNIT 4

Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data Primary and

secondary data Modes of data collection Analytical method Case study
Observation Survey method Interview Its purpose and importance Types
of interview Preparation for an interview Effective interview techniques
Limitations of interview Schedule Its meaning and kinds Essentials of a
good schedule Procedure for the formulation of a schedule Questionnaire
Meaning and types Format of a good questionnaire Factors affecting the
response to a questionnaire Advantages and limitations of schedules and
questionnaires Pre-testing and its importance.

283

UNIT 5

Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning Importance Process of

data analysis Editing Coding Tabulation Diagrams The process of
interpretation Guidelines for making valid interpretation Scaling techniques
Meaning Importance Methods of their construction.
REFERENCES:
1. John W Best, Research in Education.
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing.
3. Goode and Hatt, Methods of Social Research.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research.
5. ICSSR, Training in Research Methodology in Social Sciences in India.

284

1.5 PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL - I

Twenty tests from the following areas will be selected by the University and Conducted
during the
I year of the course (Any fifteen).
1. Attention
2. Learning
3. Memory
4. Perception
5. Intelligence
6. Problem Solving
7. Creativity
8. Adjustment
9. Attitude
10. Prejudice
11. Motivation
12. Achievement Motivation
13. Transfer of Training
14. Self esteem
15. Interpersonal Skills
16. Communication Skills
17. Leadership
18. Group Dynamics
19. Neuro Psychological Assessment
20. Decision Making
REFERENCES:
1. Cronbach, L.J. Essentials of Psychological Testing, 1972. New Delhi, Prentice Hall Inc.
2. Woodworth R.S. and Scholsberg, 1981, Experimental Psychology, New Delhi,
Taa McGraw Hill Co. Ltd.,
3. Udaipreek, T. Venkateswara Rao. Handbook of Psychological and Social
Instruments. Samashti, B-2, Chamelibagh, Baroda-2.

285

2.1 THEORIES OF PERSONALITY

Course Objectives:
The course will enable students to
a) Understand major theoretical approaches to personality
b) Understand assessment methods used in personality.
c) Understand the process of personality change and development
UNIT I: Introduction to personality and personality theory
Personality: Meaning and related concepts. Factors that contribute to personality
change and personality stability. The process of personality development. The nature of
theories and its functions. Nature of personality theory: Personality theory and other
psychological theories. Overview of assessments of personality.Current research focus
in personality psychology.
UNIT II: Major theoretical approaches- Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic
theories. Neo Freudians.
Sigmund Freud s Classic Psychoanalytic theory: The structure of personality: Id,ego&
super ego, The dynamics of personality: Instinct, The distribution and utilisation of
psychic energy & anxiety. The development of personality. Carl Jungs Analytic theory:
The structure of personality: The ego, The personal unconscious, The collective
unconscious. Interactions among the systems of personality.Alfred Adler - Inferiority
Feelings: The Source of Human Striving , Striving for Superiority, or Perfection, The
Style of Life and birth order, Erick Fromm - Freedom or Security: The Basic Human
Dilemma, Personality Development in Childhood , The Basic Psychological Needs ,
The Productive and Non -productive Character Types , Karen Horney - The Childhood
Need for Safety, Basic Anxiety: The Foundation of Neurosis . The Idealized SelfImage.
UNIT III: Major theoretical approaches:Humanistic theories
Abraham Maslow: Personality Development: The Hierarchy of Needs.The Study of
Self-Actualizers. Carl Rogers: The Self and the Tendency toward Actualization,
theexperiential world,The Development of the Self in Childhood and Characteristics of
Fully Functioning Persons.
UNIT IV: Major theoretical approaches: Trait theories
Gordon Allport: The Nature of Personality, Personality Traits , Motivation: The
Functional Autonomy of Motives , Personality Development in Childhood: The Unique
Self, The Healthy Adult Personality. Raymond Cattell- Cattells Approach to
Personality Traits ,Source Traits: The Basic Factors of Personality, Dynamic Traits: The
Motivating Forces, The Influences of Heredity and Environment. Stages of Personality
Development.Hans Eysenck :The Dimensions of Personality: Extraversion,
Neuroticism, and Psychoticism. Robert McCrae and Paul Costa: The Five-Factor
Model. Arnold Buss and Robert Plomin: The Temperament Theory.
286

UNIT V: Major theoretical approaches: Cognitive, Social learning theory and

Behaviour theories:
Cognitive approaches: Personal Construct Theory, Ways of Anticipating Life Events,
the nature of personality. Social learning theory: Albert Bandura: Modelling: The
Basis of Observational Learning , The Processes of Observational Learning, SelfReinforcement and Self-Efficacy ,Behaviour theories : B.F. Skinner : Reinforcement:
The Basis of Behaviour, Operant Conditioning and the Skinner Box, Schedules of
Reinforcement, Successive Approximation: The Shaping of Behaviour, Superstitious
Behaviour, The Self-Control of Behaviour. Applications of Operant Conditioning.

References:
1. Hall, S.C., Lindzey, G.,Campbell, B J. ( 2007). Theories of personality.(4th Ed).
India: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Haslam, N (2007). Introduction to personality and Intelligence. London. Sage
Publications Ltd
3. Schultz, P. D &Schultz, E. S (2005). Theories of personality.(8th Ed). UK:
Wadsworth Publushers

287

2.2 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

UNIT I: Abnormal psychology: An Overview

Meaning of abnormal behaviour, Need for classification, Historical views of
abnormal behaviour, Humanitarian approaches, Contemporary views of
abnormal behaviour, Causal factors : Biological, Psychosocial and Sociocultural
UNIT II: Anxiety disorders and Mood disorders
Anxiety disorders: Specific phobias, Social phobias, Panic disorder with and
without agoraphobia, Generalized anxiety disorder, Obsessive-compulsive
disorder, Causal factors of Anxiety disorders and treatment.
Mood disorders: Unipolar mood disorders Major depression, Dysthymia,
Causal factors, Treatment and outcome, Bipolar disorders Bipolar-I,Bipolar-II
and Cyclothymia, Causal factors of Bipolar disorders, Treatment and outcome.
UNIT III: Somatoform disorders and sexual Dysfunction
Somatoform disorders: Hypochondriasis, Somatization disorder, Pain disorder,
Conversion disorder and Body dysmorphic disorder, Dissociative disorders:
Depersonalization disorder, Dissociative Amnesia and Fugue, Dissociative
Identity Disorder, Causal factors, Treatment and Outcome of Dissociative
disorders.
Sexual Dysfunction: Sexual Desire disorders, Sexual Arousal disorders,
Orgasmic disorders and Sexual pain disorders.
UNIT IV: Schizophrenia and personality disorders
Schizophrenia: Clinical picture, Subtypes of Schizophrenia: Paranoid,
Disorganized, Catatonic, Undifferentiated, Residual type and other psychotic
disorders, Causal factors, Treatment and Outcome.
Personality disorders: Clinical Features, Categories of personality disorders:
Paranoid, Schizoid, Schizotypal, Histrionic, Narcissitic, Antisocial, Borderline,
Avoidant, Dependent and Obsessive compulsive, Causal factors of personality
disorders, Treatment and Outcome.
UNIT V: Therapy and Prevention
Psychological approaches: Behaviour therapy, Cognitive and CognitiveBehaviour therapy, Humanistic-Experiential therapy, Psychodynamic therapy,
Marital and Family therapy, Eclecticism and Integration.
288

Prevention: Universal Interventions,

Interventions and Deinstitutionalization.

Selective

Interventions,

Indicated

References:
1. Robert C. Carson & James N. Butcher.(2007) Abnormal psychology.
Pearson Education Inc. New Delhi
2. Barlow and Durand.(2006).Abnormal Psychology.NewYork. Pearson
India Ltd.
3. Sarason and Sarason. (2010). Abnormal Psychology: The Problem of
Maladaptive Behaviour (11th Edition). New Delhi. Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd.

289

2.3 COUNSELLING THEORIES AND TECHNIQUES

Objectives:
To enable the student s understand the nature of counselling process
To enable the students to understand various theoretical approaches to
counselling
To impart the students with knowledge about skills and techniques relating to
various approaches of counselling
UNIT I - INTRODUCTION
Counselling: Definition - Counselling as a process - Purpose and Goals of Counselling,
Overview stages of counseling Characteristics of an effective counselor - Ethics in
Counselling.
UNIT II PSYCHOANALYTIC THEORY AND TECHNIQUES
Key concepts view of human nature, structure of personality, consciousness and the
unconscious, Anxiety, Ego-defense mechanisms, Jungs perspectives on the
Development of personality, contemporary trends: Self Psychology and ObjectRelations Theory; Therapeutic process; Techniques Maintaining the analytic
framework, Free Association, Interpretation, Dream Analysis, Analysis and
Interpretation of Resistance, Analysis and Interpretation of Resistance; Evaluation
UNIT III HUMANISTIC THEORIES AND TECHNIQUES
PERSON-CENTERED THEORY Key concepts View of human nature, Basic
characteristics; Therapeutic process, Application, Evaluation
GESTALT THEORY - Key concepts Principles of Gestalt therapy theory, The Now,
Unfinished Business, Personality as Peeling an Onion, Contact and Resistances to
Contact, Energy and Blocks to Energy; Therapeutic process; Application/Techniques
The Internal Dialogue Exercise, Making the rounds, the reversal technique, the
rehearsal exercise, the exaggeration exercise, staying with the feeling, the gestalt
approach to dream work; Evaluation
REALITY THEORY - Key concepts A choice theory explanation of Behaviour,
Characteristics of Reality therapy -Therapeutic process, Application Procedures that
lead to change, the WDEP system, Evaluation
UNIT IV BEHAVIOURAL COUNSELLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE
THEORY Introduction Pavlovs Classical conditioning, Watsons Conditioned
Behaviourism, Skinners Operant Behaviourism, Wolpes Reciprocal Inhibition,
Eysencks Incubation Theory
290

PRACTICE Goals for counseling - Behavioural Assessment Relaxation

Procedures Systematic Desensitization Behaviour Rehearsal and Assertive Training
Reinforcement Methods
UNIT V COGNITIVE BEHAVIOUR THERAPY
Introduction Key concepts and Application Albert Elliss Rational Emotive
Behaviour Therapy, Aaron Becks Cognitive Therapy, Donald Meichenbaums
Cognitive Behaviour Modification
REFERENCES
1. Corey, G. (1996). Theory and Practice of Counselling and Psychotherapy. 5th
ed. Belmount, CA: Brook/Cole.
2. Nelson, J. (1982). The Theory and Practice of Counselling Psychology. New
York: Hollt Rinehart & Winston.
3. Patterson, L. W. &Welfel, E. R. (2000). The Counselling Process. 5th ed.
Belmount, CA: Brook/Cole.

291

2.4.1 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives:
At the end of the Course, student will be able to:
Analyze the different principles and theories explaining student
learning
Evaluate the effectiveness of the theories in expiaining individual
differences in learning
Apply the different principles and theories of learning in the
classroom
Analyze the impact of educational psychology on the processes of
teaching and learning
UNIT: I Psychology: An Overview
Introduction - Psychology Meaning - History of Psychology -Branches of
Psychology - Research Methods in Psychology- Psychology of Learning and
Education -Learning - Summary.
UNIT: II Behavioural Learning theories
Introduction - classical conditioning by Ivan Pavlov - Classical Conditioning in
Daily Life - Behaviourism - Watsans Experiments with Little albert - Classical
Conditioning in the Classroom - connectionism - Edward L.Thorndike Implications of Thorndikes Thories - Operant Conditioning by B.F.Skinner Schedules of Reinforcement - shaping Behaviour - Applying Operant
Conditioning in the Classroom - Summary.
UNIT: III Cognitive Learning Theories
Introduction: Cognitive - Gestalt Theories of Learning -Problem Solving by
Insight - Piagets Theory of Learning - Piagets Theory: Application in the
Classroom - Social Learning Theory: Albert Bandura -Modeling,Imitation and
Reinforcement - Application of Social Learning Theory- Theory of Meaningful
Learning: David Ausubel-Application of Ausubels Learning Theory-Summary.
UNIT :IV Critical and creative Thinking
Introduction -Some Perspectives about Teaching Thinking-Definitions of
Thinking-Attributes of Good Thinkers- A programme for Teaching ThinkingCritical Thinking-Components of Critical Thinking-Socratic Questioning to
Enhance Critical Thinking-Creative Thinking-Definition of Creative ThinkingThe Creative Process-The Creative Person-Helping Children to be More
Creative-Summary.
292

UNIT : V Motivation and Learning

Introduction-Some Thought on Emotion and Learning-Motivation-ExpectancyValue Theory-Valuing Task-Expecting Success-Motivating Students to LearnSummary.

References:
1. Snowman, J.&McCown, R.Biehler, R.F.(2012).Psychology applied to
teaching (13th ed.). Wadsworth Cengage Learning.
2. Bryan,
H.
(2010)
Education

Study
and
teaching
(Greduate).London:SAGE
3. Wade, C. & Tavaris, C.(2010) Psychology.(7 th ed.) Upper Saddle River,
NJ:Prentice Hall.
4. Slain, R.E. (2011).Educational Psychology:Theory and Practice.(10 th
Edition),Pearson.

293

2.4.2 REHABILITATION PSYCHOLOGY

No. of hours: 60

Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES
1. To understand the historical perspectives, methods and functions of

rehabilitation psychologist in the field of rehabilitation services.

2. To become aware of psychological approach to rehabilitation in rehabilitation
psychology.
3. To understand the personality development among children with disabilities
and their coping styles and rehabilitation process
4. To be aware on the rehabilitation process in various areas.
UNIT I: Rehabilitation Psychology: Definition, scope, methods and Functions of
Rehabilitation Psychology, historical perspectives in Rehabilitation Psychology
UNIT II: Competencies of Rehabilitation Psychologists - Professional
Competencies of rehabilitation psychologists, nature of work settings of
rehabilitation psychologists, Designing training programmes for rehabilitation
psychologists, Training need analysis and implementation of training programmes.
UNIT III: Psychological Rehabilitation and Intervention: Definition and basic
principles of Psychological Rehabilitation, Assessment, diagnosis, and
Intervention Psychoanalystic therapy, Client Centred Therapy, Cognitive
Behaviour therapy, Rational Emotive therapy, supportive therapy, Augmentative
therapy and Behaviour therapy.
UNIT IV: Rehabilitation of Persons with Disabilities: Lifespan development of
persons with disabilities, Personality traits Psychological problems and coping
styles Role of psychologist in disability rehabilitation.
UNIT V: Rehabilitation Process in various areas: Family and Marital
Rehabilitation, Socio Economic Rehabilitation for Persons with disabilities,
Addiction Rehabilitation, Vocational Rehabilitation, Community based
rehabilitation, Disaster Rehabilitation/Reconstruction.
294

References
1. Golden C.J., 1984. Current Topics in Rehabilitation Psychology: Grune &
Straton, London.
2. Nirbhay N.Singh, 1998. Comprehensive Clinical Psychology: Application in
Diverse Populations, Volume 9, Elsevier Science, Pergamon.
3. Zigler, E, Gates, D.B (1999). Personality development in individuals with
Mental Retardation, New York: Cambridge University Press.

295

2.4.3 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

UNIT 1
Organizational Behaviour: Meaning Elements Need Approaches
Models Global scenario; Individual Behaviour: Personality & AttitudesDevelopment of personality - Nature and dimensions of attitude - Organizational
Commitment Learning Attitudes Perception Motivation Ability Their
relevance to organizational behavior.

UNIT 2
Group Behaviour: Theories of Group Formation - Formal Organization and
Informal Groups and their interaction- Importance of teams - Formation of teams Team Work- Group dynamics Group norms Group cohesiveness Their relevance
to organizational behavior.

UNIT 3
Organizational Power and Politics: Organizational Power: Definition, Types
of powers, Sources and Characteristics Effective use of power- Organizational
Politics: Factors and Impact.

UNIT 4
Organizational Stress and Conflict Management: Stress Management:
Meaning Types Sources Consequences Management of stress- Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies for
encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive conflict.

UNIT 5
Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches Organizational
Culture Meaning, significance Organizational Climate Implications on
organizational behavior.
REFERENCES
1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.
2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work,

McGraw Hill, 2010

4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and
Organizations, 2006.
296

5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall,

2001.
6. K.Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing,
Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organisational Behaviour,
Allyn & Bacon, 1993.

297

2.5 PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL - II

Twenty tests from the following areas will be selected by the University and Conducted
during the
I year of the course.
1. Anxiety Measurement
2. Anger
3. Assertiveness
4. Stress Measurement
5. Stress Coping Skills
6. Personality Measurement
7. Aptitude
8. Interest
9. Study Skills
10. Job Satisfaction
11. Organisational Climate
12. Mental Health
13. Disability Assesment
14. Phobia
15. Depression
16. Obessive Compulsive Symptoms/Disorders
17. ADHD Assessment
18. Suicidal Tendency
19. Eating Disorder
20. Occupational Choices
REFERENCES:
1. Cronbach, L.J. Essentials of Psychological Testing, 1972. New Delhi, Prentice Hall Inc.
2. Woodworth R.S. and Scholsberg, 1981, Experimental Psychology, New Delhi,
Taa McGraw Hill Co. Ltd.,
3. Udaipreek, T. Venkateswara Rao. Handbook of Psychological and Social
Instruments. Samashti, B-2, Chamelibagh, Baroda-2.

298

Name of the Programme:

MCA (2010-11 onwards)

[Revised Pattern]

:
MCA (2010-11 onwards)
[Revised Pattern]
Mode

Distance Education

Duration

Three years

Pattern of Examination

Semester

Eligibility

Any degree with Mathematics at +2 level

Medium

English

COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

C.Code
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

Title of the Course

I Semester
Digital Computer Organization
C and Data Structures
Relational Database Management Systems
Operating Systems
Data Structure and using C Lab
Relational Database Management Systems Lab

Marks

Total

100
100
100
100
100
100
600

Total

100
100
100
100
100
100
600

II Semester
Object Oriented Programming and C++
Unix and Shell Programming
Communication Skills
Computer Graphics
C++ and Graphics Lab
Unix and Shell Programming Lab
III Semester

3.1
3.2
3.3

Discrete Mathematics
Computer Networks
Software Engineering

100
100
100
299

3.4
3.5
3.6
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6

Visual Programming
Network Lab
Visual Programming Lab
Total

100
100
100
600

Total

100
100
100
100
100
100
600

IV Semester
Accounting and Financial Management
Internet and Java Programming Distributed Computing
Object Oriented Analysis and Design
Compiler Design
Internet Programming Lab
Compiler Design Lab
V Semester

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6

Distributed Computing
Web Technology
Net Frameworks
Data Mining and Ware Housing
Net Lab
Web Technology Lab
Total

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6

Mobile Communications
Middleware Technology
Agent Based Intelligent system
Open Source Architecture
Open Source Programming Lab
Multimedia Tools Lab
Total

300

100
100
100
100
100
100
600
100
100
100
100
100
100
600

Paper 1.1: DIGITAL COMPUTER ORGANIZATION

UNIT I
Number Systems Machine Codes: Binary, Octal, Decimal and
Hexadecimal number systems - Conversion from one base to another base - Use of
complements - Binary arithmetic - Number codes and Character codes.
UNIT II
Boolean Algebra and Combinational Circuits: Fundamental concepts of
Boolean Algebra - De Morgan's theorems - Simplification of expressions - Sum of
products and products of sums - Karnaugh map simplification - Quine-McKluskey
method - Two
level implementation of Combinatorial Circuits - Encoder Decoder - Multiplexer - Demultiplexer.
UNIT III
The Arithmetic Logic Unit: Construction of ALU - Integer representation Half Adder - Full Adder - Parallel Binary Adder - Positive and negative numbers Addition and subtraction in a parallel arithmetic element.
UNIT IV
Sequential Circuits (Elementary qualitative treatment only) Flip-Flops Clocks - Gated Flip-Flops - Master Slave Flip-Flops - Shift Registers - Binary
Counters - BCD Counters. The Memory Element: RAM - Linear select memory
organization - decoders - Static and Dynamic RAM - ROM - Magnetic Disk
Memories - Magnetic Tape.
UNIT V
The Control Unit: Instruction word - Instruction cycle - Execution cycle control register - sequence of operation of control registers - controlling arithmetic
operations - Typical sequence of operations. Input-Output Organization: Peripheral
devices - I/O interface - Programmed I/O - Interrupts - Interrupt priorities - DMA - I/O
Processors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice-Hall of India, 3 rd
Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Thomas C. Bartee, Digital Computer Fundamentals, Ed6, McGraw Hill ISE (2005).
2. Albert Paul Malvino, Digital Computer Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill (2005).

301

Paper 1.2: C AND DATA STRUCTURES

UNIT I
Introduction to C - Character set - Identifiers and keywords - Data types Constants - Variables declarations - operators and Expressions - Input and Output Entering input data - Writing output data - The gets and puts functions - Branching
and Looping - Nested control structures - Switch - Break -Continue - goto.
UNIT II
Function - Accessing a Function - Passing arguments to a function Recursion - Library function - Macros -The C preprocessor - Defining and
processing an Array - Passing an array to functions - Multi dimensional array - arrays
and String.
UNIT III
Pointers - Passing pointers to function - Dynamic memory allocation Arrays of pointers - Passing functions to other functions - Defining structure Processing structure - opening and closing a data file - creating a data file processing a data file.
UNIT IV
Introduction to Data structures - Information and meaning - Stack structure Definition - operations - Queue structure - representation - operations.
UNIT V
Linked list - Definition - representation - operation - Singly linked list Doubly linked list - Trees - Binary trees - Binary tree representation - Representing list
as Binary Trees - Trees and their Applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J.Augenstein,Aaron M.Tenenbaum, Data Structures
Using C, Prentice-Hall, Second Edition. 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C, Fourth Edition Tata McGraw Hill. 2007.
2. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, McGraw Hill International Edition 2009.

302

Paper 1.3: RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

UNIT I
DBMS: Database - Database Management System - Features - Advantages
- Data Base Scheme - Schema and Subschema - Manipulative capabilities Guidelines - Different User Interfaces.
UNIT II
Relational Model : Concepts of Relational Model - Comments on the Relational
Model: Semantic issues, Navigation, Efficiency - DBMS based on the Relational
Model: The mapping operation - Data Manipulation facilities - Data Definition
facilities - Data Control facilities.
UNIT III
Introduction to Oracle: Types of Databases, Relational Database properties,
Benefits of Oracle, Client/Server Systems - Oracle Database
Architecture:
Overview of Oracle Architecture, Processes, Physical files, CPU, Network System
Tables, Oracle Users, Logical Structures.
UNIT IV
Oracle Fundamentals: Elements of SQL Language: Database Objects, Data
Access SQL commands, DML commands - Oracle Queries - Basic Query, Using
Expressions, Working with NULL values, Joining Multiple Tables in a Query,
Selecting Distinct values, Using Subqueries, Unions and Multiple part Queries.
UNIT V
Table Creation: Create Table statement, Privileges required, Describing
Table Definitions, Modifying Tables, Renaming a Table, Copying another table,
Dropping a Table - Other Database Objects, Reason for Database Objects, Indexes Embedded SQL: Languages supported by Oracle Precompiler, Embedded SQL
statements.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Naveen Prakash, Introduction to Data Base Management Tata McGraw-Hill
Publications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. David Mcclanahan, Oracle Developers's Guide, Oracle Press, 2005.

303

Paper 1.4: OPERATING SYSTEMS

UNIT I
Introduction: What is an operating system - History of Operating systems Operating system concepts - System calls - Operating system structure.
UNIT II
Process
Management:
Introduction to processes
Interprocess
Communication: Race conditions - Critical sections - Mutual exclusion Semaphores - Event counters - Monitors - Message Passing - Process Scheduling Round robin scheduling - Priority Scheduling - Multiple queues - Shortest job first Policy driven scheduling - Two level scheduling.
UNIT III
Input/Output Management: I/O Devices - Device Controllers - Goals of
I/O Software - Interrupt handlers - Device drivers - Device-independent I/O Software
- User-space I/O Software - Deadlocks: Resources - Deadlock modeling - Detection
and Recovery - Deadlock Prevention - Avoidance.
UNIT IV
Memory Management: Memory management without swapping or paging:
Multiprogramming without swapping or paging - Multiprogramming and Memory
usage - multiprogramming with fixed partitions - swapping: Multiprogramming
with variable partitions - Memory management with Bit-maps, Linked-lists and
Buddy System - Analysis of Swapping systems - Virtual Memory: Paging Segmentation - Page replacement algorithms.
UNIT V
File Management: File basics - Directories - Disk space management File storage - Directory structure - shared files - File system reliability - File system
Performance - File servers - Security - Protection mechanisms.
TEXT BOOK:
1. James L. Peterson and Abraham Silberschatz, Operating System Concepts, 6th
Edition,
Addison Wesley, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Operating Systems Design and Implementation, 3rd edition,
Prentice Hall, 2006.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, An Introduction to Operating Systems, 3 rd Edition, Addison
Wesley 2007.

304

Paper 2.1: OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING and C++

UNIT I
Principles of Object Oriented Programming (OOP) - OOP paradigm - Basic
concepts of OOP - Benefits of OOP - Object Oriented Languages - Applications of
OOP. Fundamentals of C++ programming - Tokens, Keywords, identifiers,
Variables, Operators, Manipulators - Sample C++ Program.
UNIT II
Program Control : Expressions - Control Structures - Conditional statements :
IF, IF...ELSE , Nested IF - Switch - Break - Continue - GOTO - Iterative
statements: FOR, WHILE, DO..WHILE
- Arrays :
One Dimensional Multidimensional Arrays - Structures - Pointers.
UNIT III
Functions - Argument Passing: Pass-by-Value, Pass-by-Reference - Variables Scope - Libraries - Recursion - Default Arguments - Overloaded Functions - Pointers
to Functions - Friend - Macros and Inline Functions - Virtual Functions Modularization.
UNIT IV
Classes and Objects - Declaration and Definition - Constructors - Types of
Constructors - Destructors - Type Conversion - Operator Overloading - Inheritance Definition - Types of Inheritance - Single - Multilevel - Multiple - Hierarchical Hybrid - Virtual functions and Polymorphism : Managing Console I/O operations.
UNIT V
Working with Files : Classes for file stream operations - opening and closing a
file - end of file - file direction - File pointers - Updating a File - Error Handling
during file operations - Command line arguments.
TEXT BOOK:
1. E.Balagurusamy, Object oriented programming in C++, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in Turbo C++,
Publications, 2003.

305

Galgotia

Paper 2.2: UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: File and common commands-Shell-More about filesDirectories-Unix system-Basics of file-Directories and filenames-Permissions-InodesDirectory hierarchy-Devices-the grep family-Other filters-the stream editor sed - awk
pattern scanning and processing language-files and good filters.
UNIT II
CONCEPTS OF SHELL: Command line structure- Meta characters-Creating
new commands-Command arguments and parameters-program output as argumentsShell variables-More on I/O redirection -loop in shell programs-Bundle-Setting shell
attributes, Shift command line parameters-Exiting a command or the shell ,evaluating
arguments-Executing command without invoking a new process-Trapping exit
codes-Conditional expressions.
UNIT III
SHELL PROGRAMMING: Customizing the cal command ,Functions of
command, While and Until loops-Traps-Catching interrupts-Replacing a
fileOverwrite-Zap-Pick command-News command-Get and Put tracking file changes.
UNIT IV
FEATURES IN UNIX: Standard input and output-Program arguments-file
access-A screen at a time printer-On bugs and Debugging- Zap pick - Interactive file
comparison program-Accessing the environment-Unix system calls-Low level I/O,
File system, Directories and inodes, Processes, Signal and Interrupts.
UNIT V
PROGRAM
DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENT PREPARATION:
Program development-Four function calculator-Variables and
error recoveryArbitrary variable names, Built in functions, Compilation into a machine, Control
flow and relational operators, Functions and procedures-Performance evaluation-Ms
macro package-Troff level-Tbl and eqn preprocessors-Manual page-Other document
preparation tools.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Richard F. Gilberg, Unix and shell Programming, Thomson
REFERENCES BOOKS
1.
Sumitabha Das, Your Unix the ultimate guide, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
2.
Graham Glass, King Ables, Unix for programmers and users, 3rd edition,
Pearson Education.
3.
Kernighan and Pike, Unix programming environment, Pearson Education.

306

Paper 2.3: COMMUNICATION SKILLS

UNIT I
Communication: Concepts and definition - Importance - Process
communication - Model - Types - Mode of communication - objectives - Inter,
Intra Personal communication - Barriers - Commandments of communication.
Developing Communication Skills: Reading: Preparation - Reading Styles - Linear
reading - Faster reading - Reading techniques. Writing: Effective writing - Report
writing - Speech writing - Minutes and communication aids - Agenda writing Letters - Articles writing - Improving English language writing - When to write and
when not to write.
UNIT II
Listening and Speaking: Listening: Listening - Importance - Art of Listening Advantages - Mode of expression - Listening tests. Speaking: Art of conversation Using telephone - Methods of asking questions - Brain Storming -Presenting reports Improving Speech delivery - Expressing Techniques. Interview Techniques: What and
Why? - Types of Interviews - Understanding the intricacies - Planning for
Interviews - Answering Skills - Effective Communication during Interviews - IPS Mock Interview.
UNIT III
Group Discussion: Purpose - Process of Group Discussion - Presentation Getting Started - Art of Guiding and Controlling Discussion - Personality test through
Group Discussion - Lateral thinking - Participation techniques - Mock Group
Discussion. Body Language: Origin and development of Body language - Tool for
Personality identification - Analysis of body language - Types - Desirable body
language - Attitude and body language - Body language as a powerful
communication.
UNIT IV
Negotiation Techniques: Meaning - Importance - Fundamentals - Preparation
- Techniques for negotiation - Managing process of negotiation - Interpersonal
behaviour - Mock Negotiation. Meetings: Meaning - Importance - Objectives Leading and participating in meetings - Communication skills for meetings - Mock
Meetings - Seminars.
UNIT V
Management
Communication
Relationships:
Communication
in
Management - Semantics - Employee communication - Communication within
Management - Downward and Upward communication - Communication by
307

Specialists - The Union's role in communication. Presentation: Meaning - Types of

Presentation - Understanding the audience - Planning - Designing - Written and Oral Making use of notes and outlines - Techniques for delivering presentation - Personal
style - A postscript - Model presentation.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Green Level (1984) Building English Skills USA: MC Dougal, Little.
S.R.Sharma (2006) Communication Skills in English Jaiput:Mark Publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Green Rajeevan and P.Kiranmani Dutt. (2006) Basic Communication Skills
New Delhi: Foundation Books
2.

Martin Hewings(2004) Pronunciation Practice Activities United kingdom: The

Cambridge University Press

308

Paper 2.4: COMPUTER GRAPHICS

UNIT I
Introduction : Overview - Brief History - Applications of Computer
Graphics - Video Display Generation - Input Devices - Hard copy Output Devices Graphics System Software. Output Primitives : Point Plotting - Line Draw Algorithms Using Equation of a Line - DDA - Bresenham's algorithm - Circle Generation
Algorithms - Drawing Ellipse - Other Geometric Shapes - Region Filling Techniques.
UNIT II
Two Dimensional Transformations : Transformation Principles - Basic
Transformations - Matrix Representation - Composite Transformations. Two
Dimensional Viewing and Clipping : Viewing Transformations - Windows and
viewports - Aspect Ratio - Clipping and Shielding : Point Clipping - Line segment
clipping - Convex Polygon clipping - Sutherland Hodgman Algorithm.
UNIT III
Three Dimensional Transformations: Concepts - Basic Transformations:
Translation, Scaling, Rotation and Mirror Reflection - Matrix Representation Composite Transformations.
UNIT IV
Three Dimensional Viewing and Clipping : Viewing Process - Three
Dimensional Viewing : Specifying Projection Plane and view volume - Clipping :
Clipping against a finite view volume - Cohen Sutherland Algorithm - Constructing
a three dimensional view - Hidden Surface Algorithm : Depth Comparison - ZBuffer Algorithm.
UNIT V
User Interface Design : Components of User Interface - The User's Model The Command Language - Styles of Command Language - Information Display Feedback
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Newman and F. Sproull, Interactive Computer Graphics, McGraw Hill 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Plastok and Gordon Kalley, Computer, McGraw Hill 2000.
2. D. HEARN, M.P. Baker, Computer Graphics, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.
309

Paper 3.1: DISCRETE MATHEMATICS

UNIT I
Mathematical Logic: Statements and Notation - connectives -normal forms
- The theory of inference for the statement calculus - The predicate calculus Inference theory and predicate calculus.
UNIT II
Set theory: Sets - Basic concepts - notation - inclusion and equality of sets
- the power set - relations and ordering - properties - relation matrix and graph of a
relation - partition - equivalence and compatibility relations - composition partial
ordering - partially ordered set.
UNIT III
Functions - definition - composition - inverse - binary and n-ary operations characteristic function - hashing function.
UNIT IV
Algebraic Structures: Algebraic Systems: Examples and General Properties Semigroups and Monoids: Definitions and Examples
- Homomorphism
of
Semigroups and Monoids - Subsemigroups and Submonoids - Groups: Definitions
and Examples - Cosets and Lagrange's Theorem - Normal Subgroups - Algebraic
Systems with two Binary Operations.
UNIT V
Graph theory: Basic concepts - definition - paths - reach - ability and
connectedness - matrix representation of graphs - trees.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.P. Tremblay and R. Manohar Discrete mathematical structures with applications
to
Computer Science TMH Publishing Company 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Venkatraman M K, Sridharan N and Chandrasekaran N, Discrete Mathematics, The
National Publishing Company, 2004.
2. Narsingh Deo, Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer
Science
PHI,2003.

310

Paper 3.2: COMPUTER NETWORKS

UNIT I
Introduction: Uses of Computer Networks - Network Hardware and Network
Software - Reference Models - Example Networks - Network Standardisation.
Physical Layer: Transmission Media - Telephone System - ISDN - Broadband and
Narrowband ISDN - ISDN and ATM - Communication Satellites.
UNIT II
Data Link Layer: Design Issues - Error Detection and Correcting Codes Elementary Datalink Protocols - Sliding Window Protocols - Protocol Specification
and Verification: Finite State Models - Petri Net Models - Example Dlink Protocols:
HDLC - SLIP - PPP - Media Access Sublayer: Multiple Access Protocols ALOHA - Carrier Sense Multiple Access Protocols - Collision Free Protocols.
UNIT III
Network Layer: Design Issues - Routing Algorithms - Congestion Control
Algorithms - Internetworking: Tunneling - Fragmentation - Firewalls - Network
Layer in the Internet - IP - Subnets - Internet Control Protocols: Address Resolution
Protocol - ICMP - RARP - Internet Multicasting - Network Layer in ATM Networks:
Cell Format - Connection Setup - Routing and Switching - Services Categories - ATM
LANs.
UNIT IV
Transport Layer: Transport Service - Elements of Transport Protocols:
Addressing - Flow Control and Buffering - Multiplexing - Crash Recovery Performance Issues - Measuring Network Performance - Internet Transport
Protocols - TCP - UDP - Protocols for Gigabit Networks.
UNIT V
Application Layer: Network Security - Cryptography - Secret and Public Key
Algorithms - DNS - SNMP - Electronic Mail - Electronic Mail Privacy - World Wide
Web: Client Side - Server Side - Multimedia - Audio - Video - Data Compression
- JPEG, MPEG Standards.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of
India,2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Ajit Kumar Singh, Computer Networks, Shree Publishers and Distributors 2006.

311

Paper 3.3: SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

UNIT I
Introduction - Software - Software Engineering - Size Factors - Quality and
Productive Factors - Development Process Models - Linear Sequential - Prototyping RAD - Iterative Enhancement - Spiral - Role of Management in Software
Development - Software Metrics - Process and project metrics.
UNIT II
Software Project Planning - Estimating software scope, Resources, Project
Estimation - Software Cost Estimation - Cost Factors - Estimation Techniques Estimating Software maintenance Cost - Planning an Organizational structure :
Project Structure - Programming Team Structure.
UNIT III
Project Scheduling and Tracking : Concept - Defining Task set - Scheduling
plan - Planning for Quality Assurance - Quality Standards - Software Configuration
Management - Risk Management: Software Risks - Identification - Projection Mitigation - Monitoring and Management - Software Reviews.
UNIT IV
Software Requirement Specification - Problem Analysis - Structuring
information - Information Flow - Prototyping - Structured Analysis - Requirement
Specification Analysis
- Characteristics
- Components - Structure
Specification Techniques.
UNIT V
Software Design - Concepts - Principles - Module level concepts - Design
methodology - Architectural Design - Transform mapping Design - Interface
Design - Interface Design guidelines - Procedural Design - Software Testing
Methods: Test Case Design - White Box - Basis Path Testing - Control Structure
Testing - Block Box Testing - Testing strategies : Unit - Integration - Validation System.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Roger S. Pressman Software Engineering - A practitioner's Approach McGraw-Hill
6th Edition (2008)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Richard Fairlay Software Engineering Concepts McGraw Hill Book Company
(2005)
2. Pankaj Jalote An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering Narosa Publishing
House 3rd Edition (2005)
312

Paper 3.4: VISUAL PROGRAMMING

UNIT I
VISUAL BASIC PROGRAMMING: Creating and using controls Menus and Dialogs
Managing projects Programming fundamentals Objects and instances
Programming user events.
UNIT II
Using custom controls and grid control inbuilt and user defined functions
Debugging Creating graphics for application Displaying and printing information
File system controls Accessing database with the data control VB and the internet.
UNIT III
VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING : Objects Classes VC++ Components
Resources Event handling Menus Dialog Boxes Importing VBX Controls
Files MFC File handling Document View Architecture
UNIT IV
Dialog based applications Mouse and keyboard events reading and writing
documents Serialilization - SDI and MDI environments- Splitter Windows
UNIT V
Advanced Features in VB and VC++: Creating user defined DLLs Dynamic data
transfer functions User interface classes Database management with ODBC
Object Linking and Embedding Communicating with other applications
TEXT BOOK:
1. Deitel and Deitel, T.R.Nicto, Visual Basic 6 How to Program, Prentice Hall
of India, 2007
2. C.H. Pappas, W.H.Murray, III Visual C++:The Complete Reference,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Compary, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gray J.Bronson, A first book of Visual C++,3 rd Edition, Vikas Publishing
House, 2005.
2. G. Cornell, Visual Basic 6, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. David Kruglinski J , Inside Visual C++
Microsoft Press, 2005.
4. Lars Klander, Core Visual C++ 6, Pearson Education, Asia, 2006.
313

4.1: ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT I
Meaning and Scope of Accounting Principles Concepts Conventions
Accounting Standards Final Accounts Trail Balance Trading Account Profit and
Loss Account Balance Sheet
UNIT II
Ratio Analysis- solvency, Liquidity- profitability and Activity Ratios- fund flow
Analysis- Schedule of changes in working capital Cash flow Analysis Funds from
operations Vs Cash from operations
UNIT III
Meaning Objectives Elements of Cost Cost Sheet Marginal Costing and Cost
Volume Profit Analysis Break Even Analysis Applications Limitations
Standard Costing and Variance Analysis- Computation of simple material variances.
UNIT IV
Budgets and Budgetary Control Meaning Types Sales Budget Production
Budget Cost of Production Budget Flexible Budgeting Cash Budget Master
Budget Zero Base Budgeting Computerized Accounting.
UNIT V
Objectives and Functions of Financial Management Risk Return Relationship
Time Value of Money Concepts Capital Budgeting Methods of Appraisal Concepts of Working Capital Working Capital Policies Factors affecting Working
Capital Estimation of Working Capital Requirements
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Maheswari S N, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons,
2003.
2. Pandey I M, Financial Management, 4th Edition, Vikas Publications, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ambrish Gupta, Financial Accounting for Management, Pearson Education, 2005
2. S.P. Iyengar, Cost and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. I. M. Pandey, Elements of Management Accounting, Vikas Publishing House.
314

Paper 4.2: INTERNET AND JAVA PROGRAMMING DISTRIBUTED

COMPUTING
UNIT I
Foundations
for
Internet Programming: An overview
of
Internet
Programming - WWW Design Issues - Security and Encryption - Developing
Intranet Applications. Internet Programming Languages: Java - Java in Windows CGI - Perl - Microsoft Internet Implementation.
UNIT II
Internet Scripting Languages: JavaScript - VBScriptLanguages.

Other Scripting

UNIT III
Internet Markup Languages: HTML - SGML - Netscape Extensions
Microsoft Internet Explorer - Only-HTML tags - Shokwave and Lingo.

UNIT IV
ActiveX controls: Creating an ActiveX control to Activate a Web Page VDOlive Technology - Creating Netscape Navigator Plug-Ins - Pulling Web
Information - Creating a Custom Integrated Application with Multiple Protocols.
UNIT V
Web Graphics: A Graphic View of Web - Easy Web Graphics - Images and
Hyperlinks - Adding Graphics to Web Pages - Site and Page Design - Framing your
Graphics - Dynamic Graphics - Animation.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Margaret Levine Young, Internet: The Complete Reference, Millenium Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Powell, HTML: The Complete Reference, Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
2. R. Krishnamoorthy and S. Prabhu, Internet and Java Programming, New Age
International Publishers, 2004.

315

Paper 4.3: OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

UNIT I
The Object Model : The Evolution of the Object Model - Elements of the
Object Model - Applying Object Model, Classes and Objects: The nature of an Object Relationships among objects.
UNIT II
Classes and Objects: The nature of the class - Relationship among classes The Interplay of classes and Objects - On building quality classes and objects.
Classification: The importance of proper classification - Identifying proper classes and
objects - Key abstraction mechanism.
UNIT III
UML - Meta model - Purpose of Analysis and Design - More
Development Process: Overview of the View Process - Inception - Elaboration Construction - Refactoring - Patterns - Transmission - Interactive Development Use Cases.
UNIT IV
Class Diagram: Essentials, Class Diagram: Advanced.
UNIT V
Interaction Diagram - Package Diagram - State Diagram - Activity Diagram Deployment Diagram - UML and Programming.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Grady Booch, Object Oriented Analysis and Design, Addison Wesley, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Martin Fowler, Kendall Scott , UML, Distilled Addison Wesley, 2004.
2. James Rumbough et al Object Oriented Modelling and Design Addison Wesley,
2006.
3. Ivar Jacobson Object Oriented Software Engineering: A Use Case Driven Approach
Addison Wesley, 2004.

316

Paper 4.4: COMPILER DESIGN

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS: Compilers and translators - The
structure of a compiler Lexical Analysis - Syntax analysis - Intermediate code
generation - Optimization - Code generation - Bookkeeping Error handling Compiler-Writing tools. LEXICAL ANALYSIS: The role of the Lexical Analyzer - A
simple approach to the
design of lexical analyzers - Regular expressions Implementation of a lexical analyser.
UNIT II
BASIC PARSING TECHNIQUES: Derivations and parse trees . Parsers Shift-reduce Parsing - Operator-precedence parsing - Top-down parsing - Predictive
parsers. AUTOMATIC CONSTRUCTION OF EFFICIENT PARSERS: LR parsers The canonical collection of LR(0) items Constructing SLR parsing tables Constructing Canonical LR parsing tables - Constructing LALR parsing tables Using ambiguous grammars - An automatic parser generator - Implementation of
LR Parsing tables - Constructing LALR sets of items.
UNIT III
SYNTAX-DIRECTED TRANSLATION: Syntax-directed translation schemes Implementation of Syntax-directed translators - Intermediate code - Postfix notation
- Three-address code, quadruples, and triples - Postfix translations.
UNIT IV
SYMBOL TABLES: The contents of a symbol table - Data structures for
symbol tables - Representing scope information. ERROR DETECTION AND
RECOVERY: Errors - Lexical-phase errors - Syntactic-phase errors Semantic
errors
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO CODE OPTIMIZATION: The principal sources of
optimization - Loop optimization - The DAG representation of basic blocks. CODE
GENERATION: Object programs - Problems in code generation - A simple Code
generator - Peephole optimization
TEXT BOOK:
1. Alfred V. Aho and Jeffrey D. Ullman, Principles of Compiler Design, Narosa
Publishing House, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alfred v. Aho, Ravi Sethi, Jeffery D.Ullman, Compilers, Narosa Publishing House, 2005.
2. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G.Sorenson, Compiler Writing, McGraw Hill, International
Editions, 2005.

317

Paper 5.1: DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING

UNIT I
Characterization of Distributed Systems Examples Resource Sharing and
the Web Challenges System Models Architectural and Fundamental Models
Networking and Internetworking Types of Networks Network Principles Internet
Protocols Case Studies:Etherent, WiFi, Bluetooth.
UNIT II
Interprocess Communication The API for the Internet Protocols External
Data Representation and Marshalling Client Server Communication Group
Communication Case Study Distributed Objects and Remote Invocation
Communication between Distributed Objects Remote Procedure Call Events
and Notifications Case Study: Java RMI
UNIT III
The OS Layer Protection Processes and Threads Communication and
Invocation OS Architecture Security Security Techniques Cryptographic
Algorithms Digital Signatures Cryptography Pragmatics Case Studies
Distributed File Systems File Service Architecture Sun Network File System.
UNIT IV
Name Services Domain Name System Discovery Services Case Study:
Global Name Service , X.500 Directory Service Clocks , Events and Process
States Synchronizing Physical Clocks Logical Time and Logical Clocks
Global States Distributed Debugging Distributed Mutual Exclusion Elections
Multicast Communication.
UNIT V
Transactions Nested Transactions Locks Optimistic Concurrency Control
Timestamp Ordering Comparison Flat and Nested Distributed Transactions
Atomic Commit Protocols Concurrency Control in Distributed Transactions
Distributed Deadlocks Transaction Recovery Replication and Distributed
Multimedia Systems.
Text Books
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, Distributed Systems
Concepts and Design, Pearson Education, 2009 Fourth Edition.

318

Reference Books
1. Albert Fleishman, Distributed Systems Software Design and Implementation,
Springer
Verlag, 2004.
2. M. L .Liu, Distributed Computing Principles and Applications, Pearson Education,
2004.
3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, Maartenvan Steen, Distributed Systems, Principles and
Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Mugesh Singhal, Niranjan G Shivaratri, Advanced Concepts in Operating
Systems,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2001.

319

Paper 5.2: WEB TECHNOLOGY

UNIT I
HTML Common tags: List, Tables, images, forms, Frames; Cascading Style
sheets. Introduction to Java Scripts, Objects in Java Script, Dynamic HTML with Java
Script. XML: Document type definition, XML Schemas, Document Object model,
Presenting XML, Using XML Processors: DOM and SAX
UNIT II
Java Beans: Introduction to Java Beans, Advantages of Java Beans, BDK,
Introspection, Using Bound properties, Bean Info Interface, Constrained properties,
Persistence, Customizes, Java Beans API, Introduction to EJBs
UNIT III
Web Servers and Servlets: Tomcat web server, Introduction to Servelets:
Lifecycle of a Serverlet, JSDK, The Servelet API, The javax.servelet Package, Reading
Servelet parameters, Reading Initialization parameters. The javax.servelet HTTP
package, Handling Http Request & Responses, Using Cookies-Session Tracking,
Security Issues.
UNIT IV
Introduction to JSP: The Problem with Servelet. The Anatomy of a JSP Page,
JSP Processing. JSP Application Design with MVC Setting Up and JSP Environment:
Installing the Java Software Development Kit, Tomcat Server & Testing Tomcat. JSP
Application Development: Generating Dynamic Content, Using Scripting Elements
Implicit JSP Objects, Conditional Processing Displaying Values Using an Expression
to Set an Attribute, Declaring Variables and Methods Error Handling and Debugging
Sharing Data Between JSP pages, Requests, and Users Passing Control and Date
between Pages Sharing Session and Application Data Memory Usage
Considerations
UNIT V
Database Access: Database Programming using JDBC, Studying Javax.sql.*
package, Accessing a Database from a JSP Page, Application Specific Database
Actions,Deploying JAVA Beans in a JSP Page, Introduction to struts framework..
TEXT BOOK:
1.
Chris Bates, Web Programming, Building Internet Applications, 2nd Edition,
Dreamtech (Unit 1).
2.
Patrick Naughton and Herbert Schildt, The complete Reference Java 2, 5 th
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill. (Unit 2)
3.
Jason Hunter Java Servlet Programming, OReilly (Unit 3)
4.
Hans Bergsten, Java Server Pages, OReilly (Unit: 4,5)
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.
Ramesh Bangia,Web Technology, Firewall media, 2006

320

Paper 5.3 .NET FRAMEWORKS

Unit I
.NET Framework:Introduction to . NET:Goals of.NET, Building blocks of .NET:.NET
Framework,.NET Enterprise Services, .NET Building Bolck Services, Overview
of.NET Applications Overview of. NET Framework: Highlights of the .NET
Framework, Design goals of the .NET Framework, The Architecuture of .NET
Framework, The Common Type System, Meta Data, The Common Language
Sopecification Common Language Runtime: Design goals of CLR, Overview of CLR,
The. NET Class Framework.
Unit II
Memory Management Under the CLR: Common Runtime System, data Storage,
Managed Heap Organization, Managed, Unmanaged and Unsafe , Garbage Collection,
Garbage Collection Algorithm, Finalize
Working with Runtime:What is MSIL? , CLR, What is an Assembly?, Different types
of Assembles, Common Tyupe System, Meta Data, CLS, Reflection API
System Classes: Application of the System Namespaces- WinCV Tool, String Handling
and Collection Classes.
UNIT III
The CLR and the . NET Framework Assemblies, Versioning, Attributes Reflection,
Viewing MetaData, Type Discovery, Reflecting on a Type, Marchaling, Remoting,
Understanding Server Object Types, Specifying a Server with an Interface, Building a
Server, Building the Client, Using Single Call, Threads.
UNIT IV
Application Development on. NET Building Windows Applications, Accessing Data
with ADO. NET.
UNIT V
Web based Application Development on .NET Programming Web Application with
Web Forms, Programming Web Services.
TEXT BOOK:
1.
Kevin Hoffman and Jeff Gabriel, PNF: Profefssional. NET Framework , 2003.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.
Theron Willis, BVBNET: Beginnilng VB.NET, 2003.
2.
Matthew MacDonald , CRASPNET: The Complete Reference ASP. NET, Tata
McGraw Publication
3.
Steven Holzner, VB. NET Programming, Black Book Dreamtech Publications.
4.
Evangelos petroutsos, Mastering VB. NET, BPB Publications.
5.
Andrew Troelsen, C# and the .Net Platform , A! Press, 2003.

321

Paper 5.4: DATA MINING AND WAREHOUSING

UNIT I
DATA MINING - INTRODUCTION :Data mining-Introduction-Information
and production factor-Data mining vs query tools-Data mining in marketing-Self
learning computer systems-Concept learning-Data mining and the data warehouse.
UNIT II
KNOWLEDGE DISCOVERY PROCESS: Knowledge discovery processData selection-Cleaning-Enrichment-Coding- Preliminary analysis of the data set
using traditional query tools - Visualization techniques-OLAP tools-Decision treesAssociation rules-Neural networks-Genetic algorithms-KDD(knowledge discover in
databases) environment.
UNIT III
DATAWARE HOUSE - ARCHITECTURE:Data warehouse architectureSystem process-Process architecture-Design- Database scheme-Partioning strategyAggregations-Data marting-Meta data- Systems and data warehouse process
managers.
UNIT IV
HARDWARE AND OPERATIONAL DESIGN:Hardware and operational
design of data warehouses - Hardware architecture - Physical layout - Security Backup and recovery - Service level agreement - Operating the data warehouse.
UNIT V
PLANNING,TUNING AND TESTING:Capacity planning - Tuning the data
warehouse - Testing the data warehouses - Data warehouse features.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sam Anahory, Dennis Murray, Data Warehousing in the real world, Addison
Wesley, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pieter Adriaans, DolfZantinge, Data Mining, Addison Wesley, 2007.
2. Sean Kelly, Data Warehousing in Action, John Wiley, 2003.

322

Paper 6.1: MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

UNIT I
Medium Access Control Motivation for Specialized MAC SDMA
FDMA TDMA CDMA Comparison of Access Mechanisms Tele
communications GSM DECT TETRA UMTS IMT 200 Satellite Systems
Basics Routing Localization Handover Broadcast Systems Overview Cyclic
Repetition of Data Digital Audio Broadcasting Digital Video Broadcasting.
UNIT II
Wireless LAN Infrared Vs Radio Transmission Infrastructure Networks Ad
hoc Networks IEEE 802.11 HIPERLAN Bluetooth Wireless ATM
Working Group Services Reference Model Functions Radio Access Layer
Handover Location Management Addressing Mobile Quality of Service Access
Point Control Protocol.
UNIT III
Mobile IP Goals Assumptions and Requirement Entities IP
Packet Delivery Agent Advertisement and Discovery Registration Tunneling
and Encapsulation Optimization Reverse Tunneling IPv6 DHCP Ad hoc
Networks.
UNIT IV
Traditional TCP Indirect TCP Snooping TCP Mobile TCP Fast
Retransmit/ Fast Recovery Transmission/ Timeout Freezing Selective
Retransmission Transaction Oriented TCP.
UNIT V
Architecture Datagram Protocol Transport Layer Security Transaction
Protocol Session Protocol Application Environment Wireless Telephony
Application.
TEXT BOOK:
1.
J.Schiller, Mobile Communication, Addison Wesley, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
William Stallings, Wireless Communication and Networks, Pearson Education,
2003.
2.
Singhal, WAP: Wireless Application Protocol, Pearson Education, 2006.
3.
Lother Merk, Martin S. Nicklaus and Thomas Stober, Principles of Mobile
Computing, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2008.
4.
William C. Y. Lee, Mobile Communication Design Fundamentals, John Wiley,
2006.

323

Paper 6.2: MIDDLEWARE TECHNOLOGY

Unit I
Client-Server architecture: 2-tier model 3-tier model n-tier model J2EE
architecture DOTNET architecture MVC architecture
Unit II
Prsentation services: Servlets JSP Interaction services: RMI CORBA XML
JAXP - JMS Data Management services: JDBC
Unit III
Component model: EJB : Session Beans : Stateless and Stateful Entity Beans CMP
and BMP - Message Driven Beans
Unit IV
ASP.NET : Introduction architecture ASP.NET Runtime Internet Information
Services Visual Web Developer Web Server ASP.NET Parser Assembly Page
class. Web Server Controls HTML Controls AdRotator and Calendar controls
Validation Controls Security Management.
Unit V
ASP.NET and ADO.NET: System.Data, SqlClient and Xml namespaces Provider
objects and Consumer objects Disconnected data access GridView FormView. Web
Services: Provider WSDL UDDI SOAP HTTP Developing simple web
services Connecting a Web Service to a data source Developing ASP.NET Clients
for Web Services.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Justin Couch and Daniel H Steinberg, J2EE bible, Willey India Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Paul Tremblett, Instant Enterprise Java Beans, TMH Publishing company, New
Delhi, 2001

324

Paper 6.3: AGENT BASED INTELLIGENT SYSTEM

UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS: Definitions Foundations History Intelligent
Agents Problem Solving Searching Heuristics Constraint Satisfaction Problems
Game playing.
UNIT II
KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING : Logical
Agents First Order Logic First Order Inference Unification Chaining
Resolution Strategies Knowledge Representation Objects Actions Events.
UNIT III
PLANNING AGENTS : Planning Problem State Space Search
Partial Order Planning Graphs Nondeterministic Domains Conditional Planning
Continuous Planning MultiAgent Planning.
UNIT IV
AGENTS AND UNCERTAINITY : Acting under uncertainty
Probability Notation Bayes Rule and Use Bayesian Networks Other Approaches
Time and Uncertainty Temporal Models Utility Theory Decision
Network Complex Decisions.
UNIT V
HIGHER LEVEL AGENTS : Knowledge in Learning Relevance
Information Statistical Learning Methods Reinforcement Learning
Communication Formal Grammar Augmented Grammars Future of AI.
TEXT BOOK:
1.

Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern

Approach, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.

REFERENCE BOOK:
1.
Michael Wooldridge, An Introduction to Multi Agent System, John Wiley,
2002.
2.
Patrick Henry Winston, Artificial Intelligence, 3nd Edition, AW, 1999.
3.
Nils.J.Nilsson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence, Narosa Publishing House,
1992.
325

Paper 6.4: OPEN SOURCE ARCHITECTURE

Unit -1
Overview of Free/Open Source Software: Definition - History - Advantages - FOSS
usage - trends and potential - global and Indian. GNU/Linux OS installation: detect
hardware, configure disk partitions & file systems and install a GNU/Linux
distribution. Basic shell commands User and group management - file ownerships
and permissions - PAM authentication - Introduction to common system configuration
files & log files - Configuring networking: basics of TCP/IP networking and routingconnecting to the Internet (through dialup, DSL, Ethernet, leased line)
Unit-II
Configuring additional hardware - Understanding the OS boot up process - Performing
every day tasks using gnu/Linux- X Window system configuration and utilitiesconfigure X windows, detect display devices, Installing software- from source code as
well as using binary packages. Setting up email servers- Setting up web servers
Setting up file services up file services Setting up proxy services- Setting up printer
services.
Unit III
Setting up a firewall- Using netfilter and ip tables; Using the GNU Compiler Collection
GNU compiler tools; the C preprocessor (ccp) the C compiler (gcc) and the C++
compiler (g++) assembler (gas); Understanding build systems- constructing make files
and using make, using autoconf and autogen to automatically generate make files
tailored for different, development environments; Using source code versioning and
management tools- using CVS to manage source code revisions, patch & diff.
Unit- IV
Understanding the GNU Libc libraries and linker- linking against object archives (.a
libraries) and dynamic shared object libraries (.so libraries), generating statically linked
binaries and libraries, generating dynamically lined libraries; Using the GNU
debugging tools,-gdb to debug programs,graphical debuggers like ddd, memory
debugging / profiling lilbraries mpatrol and valgrind; Review of common programming
practices and guidelines for GNU/Linux and FOSS; Introduction to Bash, sed & awk
scripting. Basics of the X windows server architecture.
Unit- V
Basics of the X Windows server architecture; Qt Programming; Gtk+ Programming;
Python Programming; Programming GUI applications with localization support.
TEXT BOOK:
1.
N.B Venkateshwarlu (Ed); Introduction to Linux; Installation and Programming;
B.S Publishers ; 2005.
326

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Matt Welsh, Matthias Kalle Dalheimer, Terry Dawson, , and Lar Kaufman,
Running Linux, Foruth/Edition, OReilly Publishers,2002.
2.

Carla Schroder, Linux Cookbook, First Edition, OReilly Cookbooks Series,

2004 On-linematerial

Open Sources: Voices from the Open Source Revolution, First Edition, January 1999
SBN :1-56592-582-3.http://www. Oreilly.com/catalog/opensources/ book/toc,html
The Linux Cookbook: Tips and Techniques for Everyday Use, First Edition,
MichaleStutz, 2001, URL:http://dsl. Org/cookbook-toc.html
The Linux System Administrators Guide, Lars Wirzenius, Joanna Oja, Stephen
Stafford, and Alex Weeks, December 2003. URL:http://wwe.tldp.org/guides.html
Using GCC, Richard Stallman et al. URL:http://www.gnu.org/guides.html
4. An Introduction to CGG, Brain Gough. URL: http:// www..netwroktheroy.
co.uk/docs/gccintro/
GNU Autoconf, Automake and Libtool, Gary V. Vaughan, Ben Elliston, Tom Tromey
and lan Lance Taylor. URL:http://sources. Redhat.com/autobook/
5. Open Soruces Development with CVS, Third Edition, Karl Fogel and Moshe Bar.
URL:http://cvsbook.red-bean.com/
6. Advanced Bash Scripting Guide,
http://www.tldp.org/guides.html

Mendel

Cooper,

June

2005.

URL:

GTK+ GNOME Application development, Havoc Pennington. URL: http://developer.

Gnome,org/doc/GGAD
Python Tutorial, Guido van Rossum, Fred L. Drake, Jr., Editor, URL: http://www.
Python.org/doc/current/tut/tut.html.

327

Name of the Programme:

Work)

MSW (Master of Social

1. Objectives of the Course :

a. To advance social work profession with a view to bring about social
transformation, and to train the learners to be aware of various social
work methods and also to attaining

professional knowledge in

identifying the social problems and means to solve it with effective

people participation
b. To prepare Post-Graduate learners with a view to provide professional
knowledge in Social Work Fields so as to implement wide-ranged social
services, social welfare activities and thus to prepare them to work in the
welfare

departments

of

the

Government,

Non-governmental

Organizations, Commercial and Industrial Establishments.

2. Duration:
The duration of the MSW programme is two academic years under Semester
pattern

(Four Semesters) through Distance Education

4. ELIGIBILITY:
A pass in any Under Graduate degree from a recognized Indian Universities or
Foreign Universities is eligible for admission into MSW programme.
5. MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION:

ENGLISH

6. COURSE STRUCTURE AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (MSW) PROGRAMME
Paper
Code
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Title of The Paper

1st Semester
Social Work Profession
Social Science for Social Workers
Psychology for Social Work
Social Case Work
328

Marks
100
100
100
100

1.5

Information Communication and Technology For Social Work

100
nd
2 Semester
2.1
Social Group Work
100
2.2
Community Organization and Social Action
100
2.3
Social Work Research and Statistics
100
2.4
Social Welfare Administration and Legislation
100
2.5
Field Work Report
100
3rd Semester
3.1
Human Resource Management
100
3.2
Disaster Management
100
3.3
Gender and Development
100
3.4
Counseling
100
3.5
Field Work Report
100
th
4 Semester
Specialization (Optional Papers )
Group A Community Development
4.1.1
Rural and Urban Community Development
100
4.1.2
Welfare of Weaker Sections
100
4.1.3
Management of Non-Government Organization
100
Group B Medical and Psychiatry
4.2.1
Medical and Psychiatric Social Work
100
4.2.2
Foundation of Psychiatry
100
4.2.3
Medical Social Work
100
Group C Personnel Management and Industrial Relations
4.3.1
Fundamentals of Personnel Management
100
4.3.2
Labour Welfare and Legislation
100
4.3.3
Industrial Relations
100
Group D Rehabilitation and Resettlement
4.4.1
Social Work for Rehabilitation and Resettlement
100
4.4.2
Emerging Trends in Rehabilitation and Resettlement
100
4.4.3
National & International Agencies for Rehabilitation and
100
Resettlement
4.4
Block Placement and Project Report
200
Total
2000
7. PERSONAL CONTACT PROGRAMMES (PCP) AND PRACTICALS:
Each year there will be one contact programme of 50 hours duration in total
comprising of theory. Learners can choose 30 days (each 10 days for paper no:
2.5, 3.5 and 4.4) in the first year as well as Second year for field work
(Practical). 75 % of the attendance of these programmes is compulsory
329

8. EXAMINATIONS:
For each year, two semester examinations will be conducted during the month
of December and May.
A candidate will be permitted to go to the second year if he/she has been
permitted to sit for the first year examinations irrespective of his/her
performance in the first year examinations
The examinations shall consist of theory and practical. Each candidate should
submit their field work experience as a Field Work Report (Paper code No: 2.5/
3.5) as well as Project report (Code: 4.4) along with the attendance of his/her
practical work done in prescribed format recommended by the University.
9. PASSING MINIMUM
A candidate appearing for the whole examination shall be declared to have
passed the examination if he/she secures not less than 50 % of the total marks in
all papers including Field Work. All other candidates shall be deemed to have
failed in the examination.
10. COMPLETION OF THE COURSE
The students have to complete their course within five years from the year of
completion of the course, failing which their registration will stand
automatically cancelled and they have to register afresh, if they want to
continue the course subject to the availability of the programme.
12. CLASSIFICATION OF CANDIDATES
1. Candidates who secured 60 % and more marks in aggregate in the whole
examination shall be declared to have passed the examination in the First
Class.
2. All other successful candidates shall be declared to have passed in second
class
13. OTHER REGULATIONS
Besides the above, the common regulations of the DDE, Alagappa University
shall also be applicable to this programme
14. PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER:
Part I

Part II

Total

Five out of Eight Questions

5 X 8 = 40 marks
Four out of Seven Questions
4 X 15 = 60 marks
100 Marks

******

330

Paper 1.1 - Social Work Profession

Learner objectives:
1. Understand the concept, definition, objectives and functions and methods of
social work.
2. Develop knowledge of history and development of social work in India and
abroad.
3. Understand the current trends of social work practice in India.
4. Develop understanding about the fields of social work.
5. Develop understanding about the influence of various social movements in
contributing to the perspectives of social work practice in India.
6. Understand domains in social work education in India.
****
UNIT I
Social Service tradition in Indian culture, Religious roots of charity and Philanthropy,
role of social institutions - joint family, caste groups and the panchayat in meeting
human needs.
UNIT II
Emergence of the rationalistic humanistic tradition Social reform movement, Indian
religious leaders and social reformers of the 19th and 20th centuries and their
contribution to social welfare. Social Philosophy of Gandhiji, Dr.Ambedkar, Periyar
E.V.Ramasamy and others.
UNIT III
Overview of the Historical development of Social Work Profession in U. S.A, England
and India with regard to the social context and the ideal of the welfare state. Role of
the State to protection, promotion and voluntary action in social welfare.
UNIT IV
Social Welfare - Social Service- Social development - Social change. Social Work as a
profession. Professional organizations. Values and Code of ethics of professional social
workers. The goals of social work: Development Promotional Remedial
Ameliorative. Radical concepts of Social Work.
UNIT V
Concept of Civil Rights, Human Rights and issues of Social Justice. Human rights and
Social Justice Concerns in Indian Society. United Nations Declaration of Human
Rights (UNDHR). Fundamental rights and Duties under the Indian Constitution.
Directive Principles of State Policy. Law and Social Justice - a critical assessment.
Role of Social Worker in relation to Human Rights : Public Interest Litigation, Legal
Aid, Lok Adalat, advocacy and social action.

331

References:
1. Judith Milner and Patrick OByrne (2009): Assessment in Social Work,
Palgrave Macmillan, New York.
2. Robert Adams, Lena, Dominelli and Malcolm Payne (2009) : Practicing Social
Work in a Complex World, Palgrave Macmillan, New York.
3. David Howe (2009): A brief introduction to social work theory, Palgrave
Macmillan, New York.
4. Zeno C.S. Leung (2009) Knowledge Management in Social Work: Types and
Processes of knowledge sharing in Social Service Organisation, BJSW
Advances Access Published, London.
5. Bushan, Vidhya (2008) : Introduction to Sociology, Concept Publication, New
Delhi.
6. Sarah Banks (2006) : Ethics and Values in Social Work, Palgrave Macmillan,
New York.

332

Paper 1.2 - Social Science for Social Workers

Learner objectives:
1. Understand the role of individuals in the society and importance of various
social institutions and their impact.
2. Get a scientific insight about the social structure, stratification and issues related
to caste, class and gender.
3. Understand the social-economic and political factors and their impact on
society.
4. Identify various social problems and their impact on social and economic
development.
5. Develop clarity about social issues and challenges in the social work field.
******
UNIT -1: SOCIETY
Meaning, Definition, Features - Individual and Society Group, Community,
complexity of Indian Society need for study of Indian society to Social Workers.
UNIT -II: SOCIALIZATION
Concept Importance Functions Agencies of Socialization. Culture: Concept,
Influence on individuals social control and deviance
UNIT -III: SOCIAL SYSTEM
a. Family Forms and functions of family, changing trends in Indian family
system.
b. Marriage Forms, functions, features trends and problems, status and role of
women in social life.
c. Social Control and the changing nature of social control. Social Inequality and
social stratification : Class and caste stratification- Characteristic features of
caste in India, its impact on social and economic development, caste conflicts,
recent trends- caste, religion, politics, social mobility, gender roles and gender
inequality
d. Meaning cultural, social and economic changes, process, direction and causes
of change
UNIT -IV: ECONOMIC SYSTEM
a) Features of Indian Economy
b) Agricultural sector problems of agriculture, farmers and landless labour
c) Industrial Sector problems of Indian Industries, employer employee
relations, trade unions its role, functions and problems of development.
UNIT -V: POLITICAL SYSTEM
a) Features of Indian Democracy
b) Political parties its role and functions in recent trends
333

c) Bureaucracy features, functions and impact on development, role in

democracy
References:
1. Bharwati Das and Vimal Khawar (Eds) (2009) : Gender Issues in Development:
Concerns for the 21st Century, Rawat Publication, New Delhi.
2. Swati Shir Wadkas (Ed) (2009) : Family Violence in India: human rights issues,
Actions and International Comparisons, Rawat Publications, New Delhi.
3. Bushan, Vidhya (2008): Introduction to Sociology, Concept Publication, New
Delhi.
4. Akbar M.J (2008) : Riot after Riot : Reports on Caste & Communal Violence,
Penguin Books Ltd, New Delhi.
5. Archer Morgels (2007): Culture and Agency: The Place of Culture in Social
Theory.

334

Paper 1.3 - Psychology for Social Work

Learner objectives:
1. Understand the fundamental components of human behavior.
2. Gain insight into factors contributing to development of personality.
3. Understand growth and development of individual at various stages in the life
span.
4. Understand the processes of adjustment and not-adjustment and their impact on
human behaviour.
****
UNIT I
Introduction definition, nature, scope and need of Psychology for social
workers.
UNIT II
Understanding Human Behavior: Determinants of Human Behavior heredity
and environment, Freudian understanding of human behavior and development.
UNIT III
Basic Human Needs: Physical, Psychological, Social and Intellectual needs,
Hierarchy of Needs Maslows theory of Needs.
UNIT IV
Adjustment in Life: Concept of Adjustment and Maladjustment, factors in
adjustment

Stress

coping

devices.

Mental

Health:

Concept

and

Characteristics.
UNIT V
Types of Abnormal Behavior in adults: Different types of mental illness (brief)
Understanding Human Behavior: Determinants of Human Behavior heredity
and environment, Freudian understanding of human behavior and development.
References:
1. Rudolph Alexander.Jr.(2009) : Human Behavior in the Social Environment : A
macro, national and International perspectives, Sage Publications, London.

335

2. John Sudbery (2007): Human Growth and Development: An Introduction for

Social Workers, Routledge, London.
3. Gilberth, L.M (2007) : The Psychology, Management, Intellectual Book,
Bureau.
4. Berry, John.W, Mishra R.C., Tripathi. R.C (2003). Psychology in Human and
Social Development, Sage Publication, London.
5. Mangal S.K. (2005): General Psychology, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
6. Purto, Jane (2004) : Understanding Creativity, Great Potential Press, Scottsdale.

336

Paper -1. 4 - Social Case Work

Learner objectives:
1. To understand the case work method and its application in practice.
2. To equip learners with theoretical knowledge for work with individuals and
families.
3. To develop competencies in learners to use the method in practice while
working with individual clients and families.
4. To equip learners with values and skills necessary for working with individuals
and families.
****
UNIT I
Individuals as a product of past present future configuration. Dynamic of
Individuals and families
UNIT II
Acceptance, Individualization, client participation, controlled emotional
involvement, problem solving capacity and self-determination, safeguarding
confidentiality, developing and utilization resources.
UNIT III
Relationship - Empathy, skills in building relationship and communicating
empathy, use of relationship in the helping process - Problems in professional
relationship transference and counter transference
UNIT IV
Models of case work practice: Psycho social, functional, life models, problem
solving, crisis interventions, family centered approaches and eco system
perspective in social case work. Comparisons of case work with counseling,
psychotherapy as helping process.
UNIT V
Case Work Practices in different settings: Work with Children, Adolescents and
adults, Working with women and couples with marital problems. Working with
the physically challenges and delinquents. Preventive - promotional aspects of
work with individuals and groups. Crisis Intervention, Disaster management,
Behavioral therapy, Transactional analysis, client centered therapy, Gestalt
approaches, Cultural factors and their bearing on the practice of social work.
References
1. Jeffrey A Kotter and Matt Englar Carlson (2009): Learning Group Leadership:
An Experimental Approach, Sage Publications, London.
2. Galinsky, (Ed.) (2004): Hand book of Social Work with Groups, The Gailford Press,
New York.

3. D. M. S. Berg (2004): The Mutual Aid approach working with groups: Helping
people help one another, Routledge Publishers, London.
4. Davies (2004): Defenses and Resistance, Open University Press, London.
337

5. Davies, (2004) : Models of Pschopathology, Open University Press, London.

6.

Stimson, Quentin (2003): Clinical Counseling in Voluntary and Community settings, Routledge,
London.

7. Srivastava, Anjuli (2002): Interpersonal relationship of small group, Subline

Publications. Jaipur.

8. Pauline Boss, (2002): Family Stress Management: A Contextual Approach, Sage

London.
9. Asch. M (2002): Principles of Guidance and Counseling, Sarup & Sons, New
Delhi.
10. Wasik B.H, Bryant, D.M., and Lyons C.L (2001): Home visiting: Procedure for
helping families, Sage, Newbury park.
11. Gerald Corey (2000): Theory and Practice of group counseling, Words worth.
London.

338

Paper 1.5 - Information and Communication Technology for Social Work

Learner Objectives:
1) Develop an understanding about the Information and Communication Technology
2) Develop an appreciation of the Communication Technology for Social Work
Profession
3) Develop attitudes and skills appropriate for using internet and computer technology
for social work research
4) Develop skills for use of Computers and documentation in research work
5) Acquire competencies for data analysis and develop skill for research report through
use of computers
*****
Unit I
Introduction to Information and Communication Technology (ICT) - Definition
- ICT Features and services - Classification of Digital Computer System
Computer Architecture Memory Units Auxiliary Storage Devices Input
and Output Devices - Introduction to Computer Software Operating System
Programming Languages.
Unit II
Fundamentals of Internet History of Internet Internet Access- Dialup
Connection- Direct Connection Internet Addressing IP address - Domain
name systems (DNS) - Internet protocols - services of internet - E-mail, FTP,
Telnet, World Wide Web (WWW) - web browsers- searching the web web
index search engines making your search - Finding Fund agencies
(international and national level )- designing web page.
Unit III
E-Governance - Definition and Importance of Electronic Governance Evolution of E-Governance - Information Society and Community
Empowerment -Opportunities and Challenges for E-Governance in India
Unit IV
Word Processing Introduction to MS-Word, Basic Commands - Formatting
text- Paragraphs and documents- Printing a document and Mail merge Proposal writing, Research Report preparation.
Spread sheet management Introduction to MS-Excel - Cell formatting, Auto
Fill - Formulation of cell formula - cell errors - worksheet formations - Creating
a Chart - Change chart data, chart type Formatting chart series.
Unit V
Presentation Package Introduction to Power Point- Creating Presentationformatting slides- show time effects and animation effects- Create graph chart organization chart Format and run a presentation - View Slide Show -Proposal
presentation.
References:
339

1. Fundamentals of information Technology, Alexis Leon, Mathews Leon,

VIKASH publishing House Pvt Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Stacey C Sawyer, Brain K Williams, Sarah E Hutchinson, Using Information
Technology - Brief Version A Practical, Introduction to Computer and
Communications, Ed2, TMH, Ed3.
3. J Hames O'Brien, Introduction to Information System.
4. Jennifer fulton, Sherri Kinkoph, and Joe Kraynak, The Big Basics Book of Microsoft
Office 97, PHI, 1998.

5. Laura Acklen et al, Microsoft Office 97 Professional Essentials, EEE Que

E&T, PHI (1998)

340

Paper 2.1 - Social Group Work

Learner objectives:
1. To understand the Group work method and its application in practice.
2. To equip learners with theoretical knowledge for work with various Group
settings.
3. To develop competencies in learners to use the method in practice while
working with Group settings.
4. To equip learners with values and skills necessary for working with Group
settings.

*****
Unit I
Social Group Work- Definition, characteristics, historical development, current
trends its relevance and scope. Basic assumption and philosophy behind Social
Group. Psychological Needs that are being met in Groups.
Unit II
Knowledge base for group work-psychoanalytic theory, learning theory, field
theory, social exchange theory, system theory. Group dynamics definition,
functions and basic assumptions.
Unit III
Social Group Work process: planning stage, beginning stage, middle stage,
ending stage. Principles of Social Group Work. Group process: bond,
acceptance, Isolation, Rejection, types of group, subgroups, conflict and control.
Leadership Development and Team Building.
Unit IV
Social Group Work recording use of social group work records. Principales
and problems of group work recording, superivision in group work. Group
therapy significance of group therapy. Programme planning in Social Group
Work Programme laboratory. Use of psychodrama and socio drama.
Unit V
Group work in various setting: correctional, hospital, educational, old age
homes and communities. Use of socio metry for group work. Skills of the
Social Group Worker. Scope and limitations of group work in different fields of
social work- Group work model.
References :
1. Bhatt R.M. (1960) Records of Group Work Practice in India, Baroda
University : Baroda
2. Delhi School of Social Work (1958) Field Work Records in Group Work and
Community organization, London : Tavistock Publication
3. Doel, Mark & Sawda, Catherine (2003) The Essentials of Group Worker,
London : Jessica Kingsley Pub.
341

4. Douglas, Tom (1976): Group Process in Social Work - a Theoretical Synthesis,

New York: John Wiley & Sons
5. Dougles Tom (1978) Basic Group Work, London : Tavistock Publication
6. Barhard (1975) The Use of Groups in Social Work Practice, USA : Routlede &
Kegan Paul Ltd
7. Klein Josphine (1967) The Study of Groups, London :Routledge and Kegan
Paul Ltd
8. Konopka Gisela (1954) Group Work in Institution, New York : Associate Press
9. Konopka Gisela (1983 3rd Ed.), Social Group Work a Helping Process, New
Jersey :Prentice Hall

342

Paper 2.2 - Community Organization and Social Action

Learner Objectives:
1. Develop understanding regarding community organization as a method of social
work
2. Understand the critical elements of community organization practice
3. Enhance the understanding of the roles of the agencies and community organizer
4. Enhance critical understanding of the models and strategies for community
organization
5. Develop perspective and skills for participatory processes in the community and civil
Society.
****
UNIT I
Community Organisation Definition, objectives, Historical Background of
Community Organisation. Community Organisation as method of social work,
Community Organisation in UK and USA.
Concept of community
development. Similarities and differences between Community Organisation
and Community development. Community Organisation scope, Philosophy,
goals and models of community organisation.
UNIT II
Methods of Community Organisation: Planning, education, communication,
community participation, collective decision making, leadership development.
Resource mobilization. Community Action, Promotion, Co-ordination. Phases
of Community Organisation: Study, Analysis, Assessment, Discussion,
organization of Action, Evaluation, Modification, and Continuation.
UNIT III
Skills in Community Organisation Organising Conferences committee
meetings, training, communication, consultation, negotiation, conflict
resolution, networking and use of relationship.
UNIT 1V
Application of Community Organisation in different fields health correctional,
educational, rural, urban, industrial etc., Community Welfare councils and
Community chest.
UNIT V
Social Action: Definition, Objectives, Principles, Methods and strategies. Social
action and social movement, social action for social development. Scope of
social action in India. Enforcement of social legislation through social action.
The concept of participatory social action and social work. Paulo Ferries and
Ivan Illiches Philosophy of social work: the Concept of Concentisation,
Padegogy of oppressed and de-schooling society could be the frame works of
Radical Social work
343

References:
1. Gangrade, K.D.(2008): Community Organisation in India, Popular Prakasam,
Bombay.
2. Biddle Williams W. (2006): Encouraging Community Development. Light and
Life Publishers, New Delhi
3. Rose Murray G.(2005) : Community Organisation; Theory, Principles,
Proactive. Harper Row Publishers, New York.
4. Specht H.Kramir P-M (2004): Readings in Community Organisation Practice,
Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall.

344

Paper 2.3 Social Work Research and Statistics

Learner Objectives:
1) Develop an understanding about the scientific approach to human inquiry
2) Develop an appreciation of the value and approach in social work research in
addressing
Problems in the field of professional practice
3) Develop attitudes and skills appropriate for social work research
4) Develop skills for use of library and documentation in research work
5) Acquire the skills for data analyses and research writing
UNIT I
Introduction Concept and Purpose of research. Social Work research
concept, definitions, objective, functions, Characteristics, Scope and limitations. Social
Work research and Social research. SWR in India. Scientific method in social work
research. Basic elements Concepts, variable, facts and theory.
UNIT II
Problem Identification and formulation of Hypothesis. Research designconcept, type, exploratory, formulative, descriptive, diagnostic, experimental,
evaluative, case study, Multi Design, Participatory research and Single Subject
research.
UNIT III
Sampling importance types of sampling tools of data Collection Source of
data: Primary and Secondary. Observation, Mailed questionnaire and Interview
Schedule- meaning and construction, advantages and limitations. Interview nature
and importance, type of interviews. Uses of scaling techniques.
UNIT IV
Method of Analysis: Quantity Analysis and Qualitative analysis, content
analysis, statistical analysis. Use of Computer for Social Work Research - SPSS.
Reporting - Format and references.
UNIT V
Statistical Application: Measures of central tendency Mean Median - Mode.
Measures of dispersion Standard deviation. Testing of Hypothesis Chi-Square test,
T- test, Coefficient, Association and correlation.
References:
1. Rager Gomm. 2009: Key Concepts in Social Research Methods, Palgrave Key
Concepts, Macmillan Publishers, New York.
2. Gopal. M.H. 2007. An Introduction to Research Procedure in Social Sciences,
Asia Publishing House, Bombay.
3. Carol, M and Robert 2004: Dissertation Journey, Sage, California.

345

4. Goode, William, J and Paul, K.Hault. 2004: Methods in Social Research.

McGraw Hill, New York.
5. Richard, G. et al 2003: Scaling Procedure Issues and Publications, Sage,
Thousands Oaks.
6.

Denzin, N.K. and Lincoln, Y.S. 2000: Hand Book of Qualitative Research, Sage Thousands,
Oaks.

7. Laldas, D.K 2000: Practice of Social Research, Rawat Publications, Jaipur.

8. Ramachandran, P. 2000: Issues in Social Science Research in India, TISS,
Mumbai.
9. Ramachandran, P.2000: Survey Research for Social Work, Institute fro
Community Organization Research. Bombay.

346

Paper 2.4 Social Welfare Administration and Legislation

Learner Objectives:
1. Develop understanding regarding Social welfare and Administration as a method of social
work

2. Understand the various social legislations

3. Enhance the understanding of the roles of the agencies for social welfare
administration.
*****
UNIT I
Social Welfare Administration: Concepts and scope - nature of Social Welfare
administration in Government and Non-government Organisation. The Social
welfare boards and its functions. Concept of Social policy needs and choice,
rights and obligations, justice and merit citizenship and status.
UNIT II
Social Legislation: meaning and scope: Indian Constitution and social
legislation, fundamental rights and directive principles of state policy. Social
legislation - an instrument for social control and social change and social justice
and social defense.
UNIT III
Personal laws: Hindu laws related to marriage, divorce, dowry, widow
remarriage, child marriage and inheritance. Laws related to children, adoption,
guardianship and maintenance. Laws to safeguard Scheduled Castes (Dalits) Untouchability, Juvenile delinquency, mentally sick. Legal Aid: Meaning and
organization, Lok Adalats. Application of Public Interest Litigation Right to
Information Act Right to Education.
UNIT IV
Registration - Societies Registration Act 1860, Procedure under Tamil Nadu
Societies registration Act 1975 Foreign Contribution (Regulation), 1976,
Indian Trust Act 1881 The Duties and Responsibilities of office bearer and
the executives, the role of general body and governing board.
UNIT V
Evolution of Social Policy in India sources and instrument of social policy
policies regarding other backward classes, Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes
and other de-notified communities Provisions of safeguarding the welfare of
weaker sections social welfare services for women and children and minority
communities.
References:
8. Adoms Robert, 2002 : Social Policy for Social Work, Palgrove
9. Badlock John.2000 : Social Policy, Oxford University Press
10. Yeetes Nicole. 2001: Globalisation of Social Policy, Sage Publication.
347

Shanmugavelayudham, K 2000: Social Legislation and Social Change, Valgha

Valamudan Publishers, Chennai.
12. David Bills and Margaret Harris 2000: Voluntary Agencies: Challenges of
Organisation and Management (ed) Macmillan, New York.
11.

13. Gills Stewart 2000: Social Policy for Social Workers, Practical Social Work Series, Macmillan,
New York.
14. Tiwari S, 2000 : Encyclopedia of Indian Government : Programme and

Policies, Anmol, New Delhi.

348

Paper 2.5 Field Work Report

Learner objectives:
1. To make the course relevant to the needs of the society in order to direct the
content of the course socially relevant.
2. To involve the students in field works so that the society may benefit out of
their social works.
3. To understand the various field of Social Work through voluntary agencies.
4. To analyze the need and importance of NGOs and Government Agencies for the
betterment of society.
5. To know the various social problems and Role of NGOs to address the Social
problems.
[Learners have to visit at least three agencies and select one agency for doing 10
days field work ( field work involves identify the nature and history of Agency
and office bearers, ,

list of activities, working area, source of funding

achievement of organization., Future activities etc).

The candidate should

submit 10 days attendance sheet along with the field work report as per the
format prescribed by the University]
******

349

Paper 3.1 - Human Resource Management

Leaner Objectives:
1. Develop and understanding of management theories and approaches, and gain
insight into global perspectives of management of human resources.
2. Understand the role, responsibilities and functions to be handled by the HR
Managers.
3. Develop the skills required to program the managerial functions.
****
UNIT 1
Human Resource Management Definition Objectives and functions Role
and structure of personnel function in organisations Personnel principles and
policies.
UNIT 2
Human Resource Planning Characteristics Need for planning HRP Process
Job analysis Job design Job description Job specification.
UNIT 3
The Selection Process Placement and induction Training and development
Promotion Demotions Transfers Separation.
UNIT 4
Wage and Salary Administration Factors Principles Compensation plan
Individual Group Incentives Bonus Fringe benefits Job evaluation
systems Wage and salary administration in relation to personal taxation.
UNIT 5
Employee Maintenance and Integration Welfare and safety Accident
prevention Administration of discipline Employee motivation Need and
measures.
UNIT 6
Personnel Records/ Reports Personnel research and personnel audit
Objectives Scope and importance.
References:
1. Venkataraman C.S & Srivastava B.K, Personnel Management and Human
Resources, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991.
2. Arun Monappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. Dale Yodder & Paul D Standohar, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations,
Sterling Publishers, 1990.
350

Paper 3.2 Disaster Management

Learner Objectives:
1. Develop an understanding of Disaster Management in Social Work
Perspectives
2. Understand the role, responsibilities and functions to social workers in the
fields of Disaster Management
3. Develop the skills required to involve in Disaster Management Programme
****
UNIT I

Disaster: Meaning Types Manmade Natural Need for disaster

management.
UNIT II
Management of Natural Disaster: Earthquake Drought Cyclone Tsunami
Flood Volcano Hurricane Fire Landslides Dam failure.
UNIT III

Management of Manmade Disaster: Household Chemical Emergency

Terrorism Nuclear Power Plant Emergency Hazardous Materials
Accidents: Road, Train, Fire Food poisoning.
UNIT IV

Disaster in Events Management: Festivals, Melas, Bull Fight, Sports,

Races Organisation of medical camps Transport management.
UNIT V

Disaster Management-I: Project Preparation for disaster related projects

Awareness Project preparation Implementation and monitoring
Management of epidemics Prevention methods Precautions.
UNIT VI
Disaster Management-II: Role of Hospital, Community, Voluntary agencies and
Government in disaster management.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.Shahunth and Panekar V, First Aid, Vora Publication.

2.First Aid Manual: Accident and Emergency, Vora Medical Publication.

351

Paper 3.3 - Gender and Development

Learner Objectives
1. To develop an understanding of the perspective of women and development in
Indian society.
2. To develop the ability to identify areas of work with women and understand
strategies to change the situation in terms of personal liberation as well as in
terms of making women a part of the developmental process.
3. To develop competencies to examine the social systems that effect women in
meeting growth needs and special needs.
Unit I
Introduction : The concept of development with reference to women:Women
and Development; Gender in Development, Patriarchal Structures in
India,Ideological and Socio-Cultural constructs,Changing perspectives of the
roles and obligations of women through history,The womens Movement with
reference to approaches to Feminism liberal,Radical, socialist and Post
Modern Feminism in India,Education and Womens Development,Sexism in
Education. Education as agent of sex role stereotyping,Reorganizing and using
the education system form raising the status of women,Alternatives to formal
education non formal education, Adult education,Continuing education,
Distance Education.
Unit II
Women and Employment : The concept of work and worker as defined by
National Sample Survey Organisation (NSSO),
And the Census of India
and its effect on womens employment. Womens dual role.Trends in Womens
Employment,Feminization of poverty.
Unit III
Women and Health : Mortality and Morbidity patterns among women, Health
as a
Gender issue. Family planning methods and their impact on women, differential
access to health services, rural and urban differential in health and its
implication for the health of the rural women.
Unit IV
Women and Law: Safeguards and provisions relating to women in the Indian
constitution
Legal rights of women in Indian with reference to marriage, Divorce,
Maintenance Inheritance, Adoption, Employment, Maternity benefits.
Legal provision regarding Dowry, Sati, Rape, Prostitution, Eveteasing,
Sexual, Harassment and their effect of women Violence against women in the
family, Work place, media.

352

Unit V
Intervention : Government policies and programmes, Action for ensuring
human rights of women, Role of womens organization and activities group for
ensuring human rights, Madar sangams and self-help Groups
References:
1. Bashin, kamala and Agarwal (ed) (1984), Women and the Media Analysis,
Alternatives and Actions Kali and Women, New Delhi.
2. Blumbrg R.L. and Dwaraki, L., (1980), Indias Educated Women Options
and Constrains, Hindustan Publishing Corporation, Delhi.
3. Devandar, Kiran, (1985), Status and Position of Women in India, Shakthi
Books, Delhi.

353

Paper 3.4 - Counseling

Learner Objectives:
1. To understand the Counseling method and its application in practice
2. To equip learners with theoretical knowledge for work with individuals and
families
3. To develop competencies in learners to use the method in practice while
working with
Individual clients and families.
4. To equip learners with values and skills necessary for working with
individuals and
families.
****
Unit I
Definition, Elements, Characteristics & Goals, Evolution of Counseling,
Foundations of Counseling: Philosophical Foundations Dignity of the human
person, Sociological Foundations Influence of Social system, Psychological
Foundations Concept of Self, goal directed behaviour, learning principles,
developmental needs at different stages.
Unit II
Theoretical foundations of Counseling: Psychoanalysis, Adlerian, Client-centered,
Transactional, Existential counseling, Gestalt, counseling, Rational- emotive
therapy, Behavioural Counseling, Reality therapy. Counseling relationship: Regard
and respect, Authenticity, Empathy.
Unit III
Theoretical Approaches to Counseling Client centered TA Rational
emotive therapy, Behavioural Counseling, Reality therapy. Counseling relationship:
Regard and respect, Authenticity, Empathy.
Unit IV
Counseling process Initiating Counseling attending skills nonverbal
interacting with clients termination, counseling techniques listening
responding goal setting exploration action, counseling in special situations
family alcoholism drug-sex-career-crisis.
Unit V
Counseling as a profession: Counselor as a professional, Nature of the
profession, ethical standards, research. Personal growth and efficiency of the
counselor. Concerns of self, attitudes, values, beliefs, relationships, self-esteem,
openness to others, accepting personal responsibility, realistic levels of
aspirations, self actualization.The portrait of the helper, the portrait of a trainee.
354

References:
1. Association of Counseling in Asia, perspective and practices, Psychological
and
educational counselors of Asia,Practices 1982
2. Bengalee, M.Ethroo :Guidance if you please, Macmillan, Bombay., 1972
3. Bellell, R.B. Interviewing and counseling, B.T. Botsford, London.
4. Charkhuff R., Beyond counseling and therapy, London.
5. Berason, B.S. Holt: The Art of helping, Better yourself books, Carkhuff R.
Pierce R
Bombay, Carkhuff Institute of Human Technology& Cannon
6. Currie, Fr. J: Barefoot Counseling A primer in building, relationship, Asiam
Tarding Cor, Bangalore,

355

Paper 3.5 Field Work Report

Learner objectives:
1. To make the course relevant to the needs of the society in order to
direct the content of the course socially relevant.
2. To involve the students in field works so that the society may benefit
out of their social works.
3. To understand the various fields of Social Work through voluntary
agencies
4. To analyze the theory and practice of Social Work methods such as
Case Work, Group Work, Community Organization and the
importance of these methods for the betterment of society.
5. To understand the various social and psychological problems and
role of social workers to address the social problems by using these
social work methods.
Mode of Working:
1. Case Work:
Learners shall have to handle two Case works and maintain case work
records (learners are advised to refer and follow the theoretical
background for Case Work - Paper 1.4)
2. Group Work / Community Organization:
One Group Work (learners are advised to refer and follow the theoretical
background for Group Work - Paper 2.1) or Community Organization
programme (learners are advised to refer and follow the theoretical
background for Community Organization Paper 2.2)

356

3. Guidance:
Learners are advised to get able guidance of Heads of NGOs and
Government organizations in their respective field work agency
(preferably MSW qualified).
4. Submission of Report and Duration of Field Work:
Learners should submit Case work record, group work or Community
Organization records as per the format prescribed by the University
along with 10 days attendance sheet from their respective Field Work
Agency.

357

Specialization Community Development

Paper 4.1.1 Rural Urban Community Development
Learner Objectives:
1. Understand Urban, Rural and Tribal social systems and their problems
2. Understand the change processes in Urban, Rural and Tribal Communities
3. Understand issues and their implications on Urban, Rural and Tribal
Communities
4. Understand the challenges for interventions by community workers
*****
Unit I
History of Rural Community Development in India: Origin and background,
early experiments, and Rural Community Development since indepence, Constitutional
provision and Community Development in the five year plans, Principles of
Community Development, Community Development Processes Roles of Community
Development worker.
Unit II
Community Development: Definition, Concept, Philosophy and Objective,
Scope of Rural Community Development: Approaches to Rural Community
Development. Casteism, ill health, housing, migration, illiteracy. And conservatism.
Integrated Rural Development: Objectives, Characteristics, Strategies and
administration. Role of Social Worker during disasters, floods, drought, earthquake, and
Tsunami.
Unit III
Concept of democratic decentralization: panchyat system and local self
government in ancient India, Balwantrai Mehta committee report: Administrative setup and functions, finance and problems of Panchayati Raj, Directive Principles of state
policy, Tamilnadu Panchyat Act.
Unit IV
Urban Development: Urban community Development, Urbanisation, Urbanism,
Differences between urban development and urban community development
principles of UCD; Approaches of UCD Government and Non-Governmental
approaches Urban community Development in India Delhi and Hyderabad projects
Urban community Development in Tamil Nadu MUDP and TNUDP structure and
functions of the Tamil Nadu Housing Board, HUDCO, Corporation of Chennai,
MMDA Non-Governmental agencies in Urban Community Development.
Unit V
Slum: Definition, Characteristics, types, causes and consequences of growth of
slums The Tamil Nadu Slum Areas (Slum Clearance and Improvement) Act, 1971
structure and functions Social Work Intervention in UCD Conscientization goal
settings; identifying and developing leadership, resource mobilization; resolving group
358

conflicts, programme planning and service delivery, enlisting peoples participation,

monitoring and evaluation.
References :
1. Ashok Narang (2006) Indian Rural Problems, New Delhi : Murari Lal & Sons
2. Dilip Shah (2005) Rural Sociology, India : ABD Publisher
3. N. Jayapalan (2002) Urban Sociology, New Delhi : Atlantic Publishers &
Distributors
4. Rajendra K.Sharma(2004) Rural Sociology, New Delhi : Atlantic Publishers and
Distributors
5. S L Doshi (2002) Rural Sociology Jaipur : Rawat Publications
6. Voices of the Poor Can anyone hear us ? (2000) New Delhi : Oxford University
Press

359

Paper 4.1.2 Welfare of the Weaker Sections

Learner Objectives:
1. To understand the concept & process of welfare of Weaker Sections
2. To understand the situation of Weaker Sections
3. To understand the history & philosophy of weaker sections
5. To know the rights of welfare of weaker sections.
6. To know the programmes & services for welfare of weaker sections
****
Unit I
Weaker section: definition, criteria for classification, meaning of Schedule
Caste, Schedule Tribes, denotified communities, nomadic and semi nomadic
communities, and most backward classes.
Unit II
Untouchability historical, sociological and psychological perspectives of
Untouchability, causes for Untouchability, contribution of social reformers and
voluntary agencies in the removal of Untouchability. Contribution and legislative
measures for the eradication of Untouchability.
Unit III
Schedule area, population, ecological distribution, demographic and socio
economic characteristics of scheduled caste. Ideologies relating to the development of
weaker section, programmes of govt. and NGO are for the welfare of scheduled castes
and its effect and impact.
Tribal: Characteristics, problems faced by Tribal in India, welfare measures taken by
government and NGOs. Impact of globalization on tribal people.
Unit IV
Bonded labour-meaning, causes, measures taken by the government to abolish it
Differently abled, types, welfare and rehabilitative measures taken by the government
and NGOs role of social workers in welfare of weaker section.
Unit V
Status of women in India, Role of NGOs in women empowerment.
Constitutional provision to safe guard the interest of weaker section. Role of social
workers in welfare of weaker section.
References :
1. Gravin, Charles D., Lorriae M. Gulier (Ed.) (2007) A Hand Book of Social
Work with Groups, Rawat Publication
2. Flippo, Osella and Katy, Gardner (2003) Contrivations to Indian Sociology ,
Migration, Modernity and Social Transformation in South Asia, New Delhi :
Sage Publication
3. Madan, G.R. 2002 (revised edition) Indian Social Problems, Mumbai : Allied
Publishers, Pvt. Ltd.
360

4. Mohanty, Manoranjan (2004) Class, Caste, Gender Readings in Indian

Governmentand Politics, New Delhi : Sage Publication.
5. Puniyani, Ram (2003) Communal Politics : Facts Versus Myths, New Delhi :
Sage Publication.
6. Shah, Ghanshyam (2001) Dalit Identity and Politics: Cultural Subordination and
Dalit Challenge, New Delhi : Sage Publication.
7. Ramaiah, A. (2007) Laws for Dalit Rights and Dignity : Experiences and
Responses from Tamilnadu, New Delhi : Rawat Publication

361

Paper 4.1.3 Management of Non-Governmental Organization

Learner Objectives:
1. To understand policies and procedures involved in establishing and
maintaining human service organization, need for change.
2. To understand the overall environment and its impact on the nature, structure
and development of the organization in corporate, public and voluntary,sectors
in context of social work profession.
3. To acquire skills to network and participate in the management of resources
human material, environmental and network.
*****
Unit-I
Non Governmental Organization in India: Concept-Genesis and GrowthTypes- Role of NGOs in Development and Welfare-Performance and Environment of
NGOs- Relationship to State and Civil Society.
Unit- II
Professional Management of NGOs-Professional Management Techniques and
Methods used by NGOs-Human Resource Development and capacity Building of
NGOs-Strengthening-Organization of NGO-Board-Trustee-Committees-Roles and
Functions.
Unit III
Mobilizing and Managing Financial Resources-Aid Agencies-Government and
Non-Government Sources-Corporate Support and Community Support-Methods of
Fund Raising.
Financial Accountability: Methods to enforce Accountability-Auditing and
Submitting Returns-Foreign Contribution Regulation Act-Procedures-Laws Related to
NGOs: Society Registration Act 1860-Trust Act 1882-Cooperative Societies Act 1904.
Unit IV
Project Management: Professional Management Techniques for Project
Planning-Scheduling-Monitoring
and
Evaluation-Cost-Benefit
Analysis-Ratio
Analysis-Rate-Programme Evaluation and Review Techniques (PERT & CPM) SWOP
Analysis-Environmental Impact Analysis-Management Information System (MIS) etc.
Unit V
Project Planning and Programming: Planning-Baseling Survey- Participatory
Project Planning Approach-Need Assessment-Methodologies-Expectation-Key Result
Areas Tangible / Intangible Supervision- Performance Appraisal-Evaluation.
Programes: Department of Social Welfare Board-Related Government Developments of
362

Social Defense and Donor Agencies- Procedure and Process and Availing above
Programmes / Grants.
References:
1. Clark J, Democratising Development: The Role of Voluntary Organisations, Earths,
London.
2. Pal & Arturo, Non-Governmental Organisations and World Bank, The World Ban,
Washington.

3. PRIA, Voluntary Development Organisations in India, Pria New Delhi.

4. SARCH, NGO Sector: Concepts, Process and Methods, Vol.XII No. 1,JanMar.1977 Search, Bangalore.

363

Specialization Medical & Psychiatric

Paper 4.2.1 - Medical & Psychiatric Social Work
Learner Objectives:
1. To orient learners to the field Medical & Psychiatric Social Work.
2. To develop understanding and expected competence about the task, role and
function of Medical & Psychiatric Social Workers in various settings.
****
Unit 1.
Concept of Medical and Psychiatric social work
i) Evolution of medical and psychiatric social work in UK, USA and in India.
ii) Functions of medical and psychiatric social workers.
Unit 2.
Present practice and equipment of medical social work in various settings:
a. General Hospitals, Government, Corporate and private, Specific disease
hospitals, Specialized Clinics, Community health centers, blood banks,
eye banks, health camps.
b. Schools for the physically and mentally challenged, sheltered
workshops, residential institutions for physically and mentally
challenged.
Unit 3.
Present practice and equipment of psychiatric social work in various clinical
settings
Mental health Institutions, psychiatric departments in general hospitals, private
psychiatric clinics, halt way homes, day care centres, sheltered workshops, child
guidance clinics, Departments of Teaching Hospitals including Dept of
Preventive and social Medicine in Medical Colleges.
(Note: The course will be strengthened with visits to all organizations
above)
Unit 4.
Practice of medical and psychiatric social work in facilitative settings:
a) Social Work in Schools.
b) Social Work in Industry.
Unit 5:
Supportive services and networking for practice of medical and psychiatric
Social Work. Teamwork in Medical and Psychiatric settings.
1. Skills and techniques used in medical and psychiatric social work practice.

364

References :
1. Park, J.E &Park, K.(1997) Preventive and Social Medicine, Jabalpur: Banaridas
Bhanot.
2. Varma, Ratna (1991) Psychiatric Social Work in India, New Delhi: Sage
Publication.
3. Banerjee, Gouri Rani(1998) The Tuberculosis Patient, Tata Institute of Social
Sciences.
4. Colin Pritchard (2006) Mental Health Social Work, USA:Routledge.
5. Patel Vikram(2002) where there is no Psychiatris, Delhi: Vhai(Voluntary of
Health Association of India)
6. Rukadhikar A., Rukadhikar P.(2007) Mental disorders and You Miraj:
Psychiatric Centre.

365

Paper 4.2.2-Foundation of Psychiatry

Learner Objectives:
1. To equip students with basic knowledge of human anatomy & physiology
2. To orient them to advanced medical information
3. To equip the students for their role as Medical Social Workers
****
Unit I
Concept of mental health characteristics of mentally healthy individual.
Psychiatry definition, historical development and growth of psychiatry. Symptoms
disorders of perception, thought, speech, memory, emotion, and motor disorders.
Unit II
Assessment in psychiatry psychiatric interview mental status examination.
Classification in psychiatry. Prevalence, etiology, clinical manifestation, treatment
modalities of neurosis anxiety disorders, phobia, OCD, depression, post traumatic
stress disorders, panic disorders.
Unit III
Prevalence, etiology, clinical manifestations, treatment modalities of psychosis
organic
psychosis schizophrenia and affective disorders)-functional psychosis personality
disorders.
Unit IV
Prevalence, etiology, clinical manifestation and treatment modalities
Psychosomatic disorders- alcoholism and substance abuse and psychosexual disorders.
STD prevalence of HIV/AIDS in India approach to patients with suspected HIV
infection, pre-test counseling.
Unit V
Prevalence, etiology, clinical manifestation and treatment modalities of
childhood psychiatric disorders- mental retardation, epilepsy. Trans cultural psychiatry
and cultural bound syndromes.

366

References
1. Rukadhikar A., Rukadhikar P. (2007) Mental disorders and You, Miraj :
Psychiatric Centre
2. Colin Pritchard (2006), Mental Health Social Work, USA : Routledge
3. Rowan Bayne, Paula Nicolson, Ian Horton (2000) Counselling &
Communication Skills for Medical & Health Practitioner University Press, P. P.
157
4. Patel Vikram(2002) Where there is no Psychiatrist, Delhi: VHAI (Voluntary of
Health Association of India)
5. Varma, Ratna ((1991) Psychiatric Social Work in India, New Delhi : Sage
Publication
6. Shariff Iqbal (2006) Personality Development and Social Work, Jaipur : Raj
Publishing House
7. Gilbreth, L. M. (2007) The Psychology Management, Intellectual Book Bureau
8. Berry, John W., Mishra R. C., Tripathi R. C. (2003) Psychology in Human and
Social Development, London : Sage Publications

367

Paper 4.2.3 - Medical Social Work

Learner Objectives:
1. To orient learners to the field Medical Social Work
2. To develop understanding and expected competence about the task, role and
function of Medical Workers in various settings
****
Unit I
The meaning of health, hygiene, illness and handicap. Historical development in
medical social work in the west and in India. Medical social work practice in different
settings-hospitals, out patient department, emergency care, special clinics and
community health. Problems encountered by medical social worker in the field.
Unit II
Organization and administration of medical social work department in hospitals.
Medical social work in relation to different disciplines, multi-disciplinary approach and
team work, patients right in health care.
Unit III
The psycho social problems and the role of medical social worker in dealing
patients with TB, STD, AIDS,POLIO, Malaria, Leprosy, Typhoid, Cancer, Hyper
tension, cardiac disorders, and asthma.
Unit IV
Concept of public health and preventive medicine, levels of prevention;
primary, secondary and tertiary prevention. Food and nutrition: importance of
nutritional constituent of food, balanced diet, nutritional deficiency diseases and
preventive measures, problems of mal nutrition in India and measures to tackle it.
Unit V
Role of medical social worker in rehabilitating a physically challenged patient,
team work involvement of the family members, importance of family planning, sex
education and school health programmes.
References
1. Rukadhikar A., Rukadhikar P. (2007) Mental disorders and You, Miraj :
Psychiatric Centre
2. Banerjee, G. R. (1988) Papers of Social Work, Mumbai : Tata Institute of Social
Service
3. Colin Pritchard (2006), Mental Health Social Work, USA : Routledge
4. Mane, Purnima (1990) Setting in Child Gridances Clinic, Mumbai : Tata
Institute of Social Service
5. Mane, Purnima Katy, Gandevia (1993) Mental Health In India, Mumbai : Tata
Institute of Social Sciences
6. Javeri D. R. (1996) Social Work in Hospital Set up, KEM Hospital, Mumbai
7. Patel Vikram(2002) Where there is no Psychiatrist, Delhi: VHAI (Voluntary of
Health Association of India)
368

8. Pathak, S. H. (1961) Medical social Work in India, Delhi : School of Social

Work
9. Rukadhikar A., Rukadhikar P. (2007) Mental disorders and You, Miraj :
Psychiatric Centre
10. Sathe, R. V. (1897 Ed.) You and Your Health, India : D. Bhave Book Trust
11. Werner David (1994 Ed.) Where there is no doctor, New Delhi : VHAI
(Voluntary of Health Association of India)

369

Specialization Personnel Management and Industrial Relations

Paper 4.3.1 - Fundamentals of Personnel Management
Leaner Objectives:
1. To understand the Philosophy, Principles and Policies of Personnel
Management.
2. To know the role, responsibilities and functions to be handled by the personnel
managers.
3. To develop the skills required to program the managerial functions.

Unit I
Personnel Management - Definition, Objectives and Functions - Characteristics
and qualities of Personnel Managers Functions of Personnel management
Functional areas of Personnel Management Organizational Structure of Personnel
Department.

Unit II
Philosophy of Personnel Management - Factors influencing Personnel
Management Philosophy Personnel Principles and Policies - Factors responsible for
the development of Personnel Management.

Unit III
Manpower Planning Need for Planning Objectives Process of Manpower
Planning Short range analysis Long range analysis Job analysis content and
methods of job analysis job descriptions job enrichment job specifications Job
evaluation .

Unit IV
Selection process: Placement and Induction Training and Development
Promotion Demotions Transfers Separation.

Unit V
Wage and Salary Administration : Factors Principles Compensation plan
Individual Group Incentives Bonus Fringe benefits Job evaluation systems
Wage and Salary Administration in relation to personal taxation.

Unit VI
Employee maintenance and integration Welfare and society Accident
prevention Administrative of Discipline Employees motivation Need and
measures. Grievances Causes of Grievances Need for a Grievance Procedure
Basic Elements of Grievance procedure Grievance Procedure Steps in unionized
organizations.

370

References:
1. Venkataratnam C S and Srivastava B K : Personnel Management and Human
Resource.
2. Dale Yodder and paul D Standohar : Personnel management and Industrial
Relations.
3. David A DecenZo and Stephen P Robbins : Personnel / Human Resource
Management
4. Thornhill,Adrian P.Lewis, M.Milmore, Mark Saunders (2000) Managing
Change Pearson Education Asia, Delhi.
5. Dale, H. Besterfield(2001) Total Quality Management, Delhi: Pearson
Education.
6. Robbins, Stephen P. and Decenzo, David A.(2002) Fundamentals of
Management, Delhi: (Essential Concepts and Applications) Pearson Education
Asia.

371

Paper 4.3.2 Labour Welfare and Legislation

Learner Objectives:
1. Develop the knowledge of employee welfare: pre-independence, post
independence and its changing nature in the era of globalization.
2. Understand the importance of Health, Hygiene and problems related to
industrial hazards, occupational diseases and its safety management.
3. Knowledge of various government organization working for employee welfare.
4. Develop insight of employee welfare programme and its relevance to work
culture and productivity.
Unit I
Employee Welfare: Welfare concept, definition, philosophy, objectives, principles,
scope and Machinery of Labour Welfare in India. Historical Development of labour
Welfare: Industrial revolution and changing welfare concept, impact of
industrialization, automation, computerization, Liberalization, Privatization on the
working conditions of workmen, remedial, ameliorative and preventive measures
undertaken by industrial and welfare organizations for the industrial workforce.
Unit II
Approaches to Labour Welfare: Philanthropic, utitatrian, legalistic humanitarian and
democratice approach. Traditional welfare to developmental approach. Labour Welfare
as a management philosophy.
Employee Welfare: Intra-mural & extra mural
measures / agencies of Labour Welfare, its special characteristics and facilities,
Statutory and Non-Statutory labour Welfare provisions/facilities & programmes.
Unit III
Welfare Officer: Duties, responsibilities, role and functions of welfare/labour welfare
officer in industry. Changing role and challenges before welfare officer in emerging
new industrial set-up. Health & Hygiene and Safety Management: Industrial hygiene
and Occupational health. Health at work and at home, problems of hygiene and
industrial safety in the factory, mines, plantations, safety management policy &
programmes, safety climate, role of safety officer. Industrial accidents: Nature types
and causes, human factor in industrial accidents. Prevention of industrial accidents,
rehabilitation of the disabled and their families, statutory role and responsibilities of
industry in reporting accidents.
Unit IV
Brief history of labour legislation in India. Laws relating to Working conditions in
industries The Factories Act 1948- The Apprentices Act 1961 The Contract Labour
and abolition Act The Tamil Nadu Shops and Establishment Act 1947.
Unit V
Concept of social security social insurance and social assistance. Legislations related
to Social Security. The E.S.I Act -1948- The Employees Provident Fund and
Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952 The Employees Pension Scheme, 1995- The
Payment of Gratuity Act 1972, the Maternity Benefit Act -1961.
372

References
1. Laldas, D. K. (1991) Personnel Management, Industrial relations & Labour
Welfare; Agra : Y.K. Publishers
2. Rao, Maju (1995) Labour Welfare Policy In India : First publication
3. Sharma, A. M. (1997) Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Mumbai:
Himalaya Publishing House.
4. Bhagolival, T.N, (1997), Personnel Management Industrial Relations.
5. Kapoor, N.D, (2000), Industrial Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi

373

Paper 4.3.3 Industrial Relations

Learner Objectives:
1. Develop the knowledge of Industrial Relations.
2. Understand the importance of Industrial Relations and forms of Industrial
Relations machinery.
3. Develop insight of employee communication health, safety and security.
UNIT 1 : Industrial Relations: Concept Definition Significance Objectives
Scope Approaches Principles of good industrial relations Role of State,
Employers and the Unions in industrial relations. Labour and the Constitution:
Constitutional framework Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles of State
policy in labour Relevant legal enactments.
UNIT 2 :Trade Unionism and Industrial Relations: Labour movement
Concepts Trade union movement Development of trade
unionism in India Functions and problems of trade unions.
International
Labour
Movement

International
Confederation of Free Trade Unions (ICFTU) World
Federation of Trade Unions (WFTC) International Labour
Organisations (ILO) Origin, history, objectives and
functions.
UNIT 3 : Industrial Disputes: Meaning Causes Forms Industrial
relations machinery Joint consultation Works committee
Conciliations Court of Enquiry Voluntary arbitration
Adjudication. Employee Discipline: Definition Causes of
indiscipline Code of discipline Disciplinary procedure
Code of conduct.
Grievance Handling:
Meaning of
grievances Causes of grievances Guidelines for
grievance handling Grievances redressal procedures.
UNIT

: Workers Participation in Management: Meaning

Significance Forms Situation in India.
Collective
Bargaining: Meaning Significance Principles Process.
Wage Administration and Industrial Relations Wage policy
Objectives Wage regulation machinery Wage Board:

374

Growth and development Composition and functions

Evaluation of wage boards.
UNIT 5 : Employee Communication: Meaning Significance Types
Barriers Methods of overcoming barriers Principles of
effective communication Employee Education and Training
Concept features Aims and objects Contents
Teaching techniques Training Schemes.
UNIT 6

:Employee Counseling Meaning Significance

Programmes Types and Process Conflict management:
Meaning Types of conflicts Conflict episode
Management of conflict Quality circle:
Meaning
Objectives Techniques.

REFERENCES :
1.
2.
3.
4.

Bhagoliwal T N, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Agra Publishers.

Arun Monappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill.
Michael V.P, HRM and Human Relations, Himalaya.
Mamoria and Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India, Himalaya.

375

Specialization Rehabilitation and Resettlement

Paper 4.4.1 - Social Work for Rehabilitation and Resettlement
Learner Objectives:
1. Understand the concept of Rehabilitation and Resettlement
2. Understand the change processes in Rehabilitation and Resettlement
3. Understand issues and their implications Rehabilitation and Resettlement
4. Understand the challenges for interventions by Social workers in the field of
Rehabilitation and Resettlement
Unit 1
Meaning of resettlement and rehabilitation, need for r&r, voluntary and
involundary resettlement resettlement action plan.
Unit 2
Principles and objectives governing resettlement. National policy on R&R
2003, 2007, 2009.state policy on R&R 2009. - l a-and R&R policy- l a process- by
private negotiation.
Unit 3
Frequently used R&R terms- project affected family- project affected person,
(hawkers, squatters, tenants, leaseholder, laborers, vulnerable p a p, entitled
person/beneficiaries, encroachers, corrider of impact (coi).
Unit 4
R&R benefit for affected family (as per E S F), issue of indendify cards,
payment of compensation, economic rehabilitation measures, relocation of CPR, public
disclosure.
Unit 5
Institutional mechanism- project management unit, technical review committee,
project implementing unit , R&R cell, l a cell, n g o role & involvement, public
information center, r& r committee, negotiation committee, grievance redressed
committee, national monitoring committee, role of community development
specialist/social workers,
References:
1. Resettlement action plan approved by Government of Tamil Nadu. Jan .2008.
2.Go.ms. no.145 dt.29.4.2005
3Go. ms. no.115-dt. 6.10.2006. municipal administration and water supply(ma ii)dept.
4.Ministry of rural development, govt.of. india. dept. of. land resources-

www.dolr.nic.in
5. www.cmdachennai.org/www.cmdatnudp.org
6. www.tnudf.com
376

Paper 4.4.2 Emerging Trends in Rehabilitation and Resettlement :

Environmental-Social-Impact-Management
Learner Objectives:
1. Understand the concept of Rehabilitation and Resettlement
2. Understand the Emerging Trends on Rehabilitation and Resettlement
3. Understand issues on Environmental Social Impact Management and their
implications Rehabilitation and Resettlement
4. Understand the challenges for interventions by Social workers in the field of
Rehabilitation and Resettlement
Unit 1
Environment-components of environment human impact on environment
issues-air, water, land, noise, solid waste.
Unit 2
Environmental policies-regulatory framework-, key environmental rules and
regulations-environmental categorization of projects.
Unit 3
Social impact- major- minor social regulatory framework-,social safeguard
entitlement framework or benefits, social categorization of projects.
Unit 4
E.M.P - mitigation measures, environmental codes of practices, landscape plan,
budget estimate, monitoring plan, institutional arrangement.
Unit 5
S . M. P-mitigation-measures environment and social appraisal and
management- social and environmental monitoring.
References:
1.Bodkin e., charles e.1982 environmental studies, merrill pub.co.,
Ccolumbus, Ohio.
2 .Chandna 1998 environmental awareness kalyani publishers, New delhi.
3 .Nobel and wright 1985 environmental science,w. b, saunders,
Phildedelphic.
4. Singh s. 1991 environmental geography, prayag publications, Allahabad.
5 ESF approved by govt .of. Tamil Nadu. TNUIFSL TNUDP- III

377

Paper 4.4.3

National and International Agencies for

Rehabilitation and Resettlement

Learner Objectives:
1. Understand the role of National and International agencies in the field of
Rehabilitation and Resettlement
2. Understand various contributions on National and International agencies in
the field of Rehabilitation and Resettlement
3. Understand the challenges for interventions by Social workers in the field of
Rehabilitation and Resettlement
Unit 1
Introduction of national and International agencies for Rehabilitation and
Resettlement
Unit 2
National and State Disaster Management Committee: History, Role and
Functions and Challenges
Unit 3
Institutional Mechanism- Project Management Unit, Technical Review
Committee, Project Implementing Unit, R&R cell, I A cell, NGO role & Involvement.
Unit 4
Public Information Center, R& R Committee, Negotiation Committee,
Grievance Redresses committee, National Monitoring Committee,
Unit 5
International Agencies for Rehabilitation and Resettlement and challenges for
interventions by Social workers in the field of Rehabilitation and Resettlement
References:
1.Bodkin e., charles e.1982 environmental studies, merrill pub.co.,
Ccolumbus, Ohio.
2 .Chandna 1998 environmental awareness kalyani publishers, New delhi.
3 .Nobel and wright 1985 environmental science,w. b, saunders,
Phildedelphic.
4. Singh s. 1991 environmental geography, prayag publications, Allahabad.
5 ESF approved by govt .of. Tamil Nadu. TNUIFSL TNUDP- III

378

Paper 4.4 Block Placement and Project Report

Learner objectives:
1. To make the course relevant to the needs of the society in order to direct
the content of the course socially relevant.
2. To involve the students in field works so that the society may benefit out
of their social works.
3. To understand the various field of Social Work through voluntary
agencies
4. To analyze the various role of social worker s in NGOs and Government
Agencies for the betterment of society and to know the various social
problems and role of NGOs to address the Social problems.
5. To train the learner to identify any individual social problem and to
submit a project report by employing research tools based on the
research experience or train the learners to study about the various
activities of the field work agency and to evaluate the programmes or
their achievement by preparing project report of the selected agency and
its achievement of the particular field in its working area.
Mode of Working:
1. Block Placement:
Learners have to select one organization depends on their specialization
(NGOs

for

Community

Development

and

Rehabilitation

and

Resettlement or Hospital (identify hospital which has Department of

Medical and Psychiatry or Industrial setting) for Block placement
2. Project Report Preparation:
Based on their Block placement experience they have to prepare their
Project Report as per the guidelines prescribed by the University.

379

3. Guidance:
Learners are advised to get able guidance of Heads of NGOs and
Government organizations in their respective field work agency
(preferably MSW qualified).
4. Submission of Project Report and Attendance sheet for Field Work:
Learners should submit their Project Report along with 10 days
attendance sheet from their respective Block Placement Agency, as per
the format prescribed by the University.

380

MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK

(MSW)

FIELD WORK MANUAL

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE
EDUCATION
ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
(Accredited with A Grade by NAAC)
KARAIKUDI 630003
381

Eligibility To Become A Field Work Instructor

(i)

Faculty Members having Masters degree in Social Work (Institutions in

the Department of Social Work

affiliated to any Indian University

recognized by the UGC and having minimum 3 years of teaching

experience or

(ii) Trained Social Workers or Head of the Department of Government

Departments like Panchayat(Village Level)/ Block Level/ District/State
Offices and Social Welfare/Rural Development/ Women Development/
Health Departments/ AIDS Control Board Society/ Physically and
Mentally Challenged Schools/ Orphanage/ Old age Homes/ Noon meals
Schemes Department/ Hospitals/ Industry. NGOs, Private Hospitals and
Industry or

(iii) Professionals holding Masters degree in Social Work with respective

areas of Social Work (Community Development/ Rural Development/
Rehabilitation and Resettlement/ Medical and Psychiatry/ Personnel
Management and Industrial Relations) having minimum of 3 years work
experience in the relevant area.
Field Work in Social Work Education: An Overview
Field Work is considered to be an integral part of social work education by all
the Schools of Social Work in India. In order to maintain the academic quality of social
work education, Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University also prepared
structured Social work curriculum. Distance learners also acquire theoretical as well as
field work knowledge in social work as per the guidelines formulated by the Review
Committee on Social Work Education (1978). It
objectives of field work:

382

has mentioned the following

1. Development of professional skills through learning to use knowledge

for the study and analysis of problems and selection of appropriate
means to solve them;
2. Development of skills in problem-solving at the macro and micro levels
3. Integration of class room learning with field practice
4. Development of skills required for professional practice.
5. Developing skills required for professional practice at the particular
level of training;
6. Development of professional attitudes, values and commitment; and
7. Development of self- awareness and professional ideal.
Further UGC Model Curriculum (2001) prepared by the University Grants Commission
recommended that Field Work is a learning task. The Field Instructor is required to
select tasks from these areas systematically. The sequencing of tasks is to range from
simple to complex. The broad aim is to provide opportunities for applying the
knowledge and the information gained in the theoretical background to reality
situations. This learning experience should provide an opportunity of working with
communities, groups, individuals/families and managing organization tasks. The Six
areas are:
1. Understanding both the agency and the clients as systems.
2. Developing

knowledge

about

administrative

procedures,

programme

management, and utilizing these skills in practice.

3. Developing Skills of problem solving process, and practice based research.
4. Acquiring skills in communication writing client records, documentation of
agency records, correspondence, and public relations skills.
5. Using instruction to learn practice.
6. Developing as a professional.

383

Objectives of the First Year Learner (Paper Code 2.5)

UGC Model Curriculum (2001) prepared by the University Grants Commission
recommended the following objectives for the first year learners:
1. Develop knowledge of the socio-economic and cultural realities, and their
impact on the client system with specific focus on marginalized groups.
2. Develop beginning skills to analyze the impact of the wider social system
on individuals, families, groups, communities and organizations.
3. Understand the agency as a system its philosophy, thrust, objectives,
structure and management of service/programmes.
4. Develop the ability to involve the client system in the problem solving
process, utilizing skills of social work interventions, including research.
5. Develop skills in documenting practice.
6. Develop skills in identifying and utilizing the community resources both
government and voluntary.
7. Develop ability to work as a member of a team.
8. Reinforce belief in the inherent strength of the people to meet their needs
and resolve problems.
9. Make consciousness use of professional values and ethics.
Note to the Field Work Instructor:
Work assigned should be with the Individuals, Families, Groups or
Communities who are victims of circumstances /Marginalized. For example
Exploited women, migrant workers, landless laborers, school dropouts, street
children, neglected elderly, and HIV or AIDS affected persons, persons with
various disabilities. Etc.
Areas of Work Assignment to First year Social Work Learners:
UGC Model Curriculum (2001) prepared by the University Grants Commission
recommended the following areas of work assignment for the first year learners:
384

Area 1: Social Work in the Organization/Community

Understanding the agency /community
Task provided should aid learner to.
1. Understand the socio-economic and cultural realities and their impact on the
organization/community and the client system.
2. Understand the administrative structure, the communication patterns,
leadership, power structure, decision making and functions of personnel, in
government and voluntary agencies.
3. Understand the programmes, programme management and participate in
their delivery with the use of appropriate programme media. Show ability to
write proposals for new programmes and initiate them.
4. Understand the relationship of the organization to others, and its overall
physical/ human environment and appreciate need for networking.
5. Understand the financial management, including source of funds, efforts at
fund raising.
6. Understand and appreciate the role of the social worker and the learners in
the organization.
Area II:

Developing Knowledge of Administrative Procedure and

Programme Management.

1. Involve learners in day to day administration planning, implementation and

evaluation.
2. Tasks like preparing project proposals for new programmes.
3. Administration of ongoing services, maintaining accounts, ledgers.
4. Correspondence and records of the organization.
5.

Budgeting and Fund raising.

6. Working with various categories of personnel in the organization and also as

a member of a team
385

7. Planning and implementing short term training programmes for personnel in

the organization.
Area III: Problem Solving Process and Practice Based Research
1. Identify problems and analyse them
a. Analyse the causative factors and dynamics in the problem
situations.
b. Select appropriate strategy, methods and techniques of problem
solving.
2. Establish and maintain relationships.
3. Identify focus of work together with client, groups/communities.
4. Involve the client system in the problem solving process.
5. Identify and utilize resources human material and financial
6. Select and utilize appropriate tools for problem-solving, such as interviews
individual/groups, home visits, programme media and research.
7. Integrate theory and practice and utilize the integrated approach in social
work practice.
8. Conduct a small practice based research.
Area IV. Develop Skills for Communication
1. Records to indicate :
a. Selection of material for recording
b. Sequential arrangement
c. Clarity and consistency
d. Feeling and attitudes
e. Perception of dynamics of interaction
f. Beginning ability to operationalize theoretical inputs in field
practice.
g. Growth as a professional practitioner
386

2. Ability to write different types of records like memos, letters, referral letters,
Minutes, reports, document practice.
3. Use appropriate media when presenting reports.
Area V: Learners Practice to Manifest
1. Internalization of Social Work principles like: respect for persons, social
justice, confidentiality, empathy, human dignity, right to decision making,
gender sensitivity.
2. Develop understanding of strengths and weakness, ability to see
preconceived notions of people and issues, recognize habitual patterns of
behavior and make efforts to change.
3. Openness to learn, in relation to client system, authority, team members and
others.
4. Conscious use of self as growing professional.
Area VI: Responsibility towards Self/ Profession/ Learn Practice
1. Responsibility Towards Self
a. Regularity and Punctuality at work and appointments
b. Recognition of the need for an on-going assessment of own capacity
to assume and manage responsibility.
c. Not giving false assurance.
d. Preparation of self and client system for termination.
e. Makes efforts to fulfill responsibilities assigned within the stipulated
time and gives importance to tasks.
f. Gradual identification with the agency and the profession.
2. Responsibility to the Profession
a. Develop a commitment to the profession, its ethics, and for
social change
b. Work towards enhancing the status of the profession
387

c. Disseminate information of the profession

d. Assume conscious responsibility for actions
e. Value efforts as more important than success and failure.
f. Dress appropriately and consciously develop behavior as a
disciplined self.
3. Using Instruction to Learn Practice
a. The Learner and the instructor use field instruction as a tool for
mutual professional growth.
b. Understand the importance of recording and their regular
submission
c. Integration of theory and practice should be reflected in records
and be discussed at conferences.
d. Shows willingness to accept strengths and limitations, and uses
guidance to for professional development.
e. Demonstrate self-discipline in practicing social work ethics and
values and norms to observe in behavior and dress.
f. Takes responsibility for learning by planning conferences and
participating in them through discussions.
g. Receive guidance for practice based research.
Type of Work Assignment at the Final Year Level
Note to the Field Instructor
Encourage the learner to locate the problems in larger groups, and understand the
relationship between micro and macro systems, and work with issues affecting large
groups and work with communities/group/individuals, for the same. The practice to
show more reflective ability along with that of task oriented work.

388

Encourage the learner to progress from Individual/families to issue based practice and
reinforce previous years learning.
Area I. Social Work Communities and Organizations
1. Develop skills to analyze complex situations, and evaluate the agencies
functions in relation to needs/ problems of the client system.
2.

Critically analyze the philosophy, policy, thrust and traditions of the

organization within the frame work of the national policy, constitutional rights,
human rights and international programmes.

3. Identify gaps in policy, develop initiative and use advocacy skills to bring about
change at local, state and national level.
4. Use selective skills of social worker and different roles to enable people meet
challenges.
Area II Working in Teams
1. Enhance skills of working with inter-disciplinary teams to support peoples
quest to meet needs and goals.
2. Take initiative, and leadership roles while working with teams.
Area III (A) Programme Management
1. Encourage learner involvement in programmes for social issues/concerns,
and projects, prepare proposal for new programmes.
2. Develop skills for evaluation of programmes, prepare reviews, and
document.
3. Develop plans and implement these for staff development.
4. Develop skills to guide and train front-line workers, like NSS and other
volunteers.
5. Collect information of other similar programmes, and develop skills of
networking effectively with other agencies.
389

Area III (B) Records

1. Records
i.

Analysis of problem solving situations for new and significant

areas of problem solving.

ii.

Internalization of professional values.

2. Independently prepares and utilizes records like summary records, case

studies, agency reports annual and six monthly, minutes of meetings, press
releases.
3. Masters skills for documentation of activities like projects, programmes, case
studies etc.
Area III (C) Plan
1. Plan, implement and evaluate programmes independently.
2. Be analytical and evaluate agency functions in relation to needs and
problems of the client systems.
3. Takes the initiative in leadership while working with various teams,
consciously assume different roles to suit different situations, and takes
leadership and helps other to do so.
4. Provide opportunities to use selectively, skills of social work and utilize
them to effect change.
Area IV Practice Strategies and Tools
Manifest selective and rational use of approaches, skills, techniques.
Introspect, in relation to own behavior, values-relative, absolute, intrinsic and
extrinsic and utilize this for growth.
Appreciate others contribution, however small, in the field.
Area V (A) Responsibility towards Self
Professional responsibility and concern for the client system is manifested below:
1. Mastery in time management, regularity and sincerity in work.
390

2. Demonstrates social work values.

3. Uses participatory approaches and problem solving skills.
4. Preparation for termination with a view to helping the client system for self
dependence.
Area V (B) Responsibility Towards the Organization
1. Functions confidently as a representative of the organization with respect to
tasks undertaken.
2. Guides Junior Colleagues/Volunteers to develop skills.
3. Provides leadership in specific tasks in the team of social workers, as well as in
the inter disciplinary teams.
4. Shows responsibility towards other organizations
5. Practices professional ethics.
Area VI. Profession and Professional
1. Enhances faith in the profession which is committed to social change. Willingly
takes up challenging tasks with confidence.
2. Represents the profession :
a. TO the public and other disciplines at meetings, seminars and enhances the
image of profession.
b. Writing
Conducts self as the bearer of professional values.

391

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
(Accredited with A Grade by NAAC)
KARAIKUDI 630003
MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (MSW)
CONFIDENTIAL RECORD
FIELD WORK - EVALUATION (1ST YEAR)
Name of the Candidate

Enrolment Number

Name of the Field Instructor

Name of the Field Work Agency

Details of Field Work

Maximum
Marks
10

Social Work in the Community

organization/Community
Administrative Procedure and Programme
management
Problem solving process and Practice Based
Research
Skills for Communication
Learners Practice to Manifest
Responsibility Towards Self/ The Profession/To
Learn Practice

10
10
10
10
Total

Signature of Field Work Instructor

50

Head of the Institution

Seal:

392

Marks Obtained

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
(Accredited with A Grade by NAAC)
KARAIKUDI 630003
MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (MSW)
CONFIDENTIAL RECORD
FIELD WORK - EVALUATION SHEETS (FINAL YEAR)
Name of the Candidate

Enrolment Number

Name of the Field Instructor

Name of the Field Work Agency

Details of Field Work

Social Work in the Community
organization/Community
Working with Teams
Programme Management ( Management , Records,
Developing Strategies)
Responsibility towards self/ organization
Profession and Professional
Total
Signature of Field Work Instructor

Maximum
Marks
10
10
10
10
10
50

Head of the Institution

Seal:

Front Page format for MSW Project Report

TITLE OF THE PROJECT
393

Marks Obtained

Project Report submitted to

Alagappa University
In partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of
MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (MSW)

By
(Name of the Student and Enrolment No.)

Under the guidance of

(Name & Designation of the Guide)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI 630 003.
Month and Year
MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (MSW) : GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT

394

OBJECTIVE
The objective of the Project is to help the student to develop his/her ability to
apply multi-disciplinary concepts, tools and techniques to solve Social Problems
and/or to evolve new/innovative theoretical frame work.
NATURE OF PROJECT
The project may take any one of the following forms:
1. Comprehensive Case Study (covering only specific social
problem /Application of one or more social work methods for
identifying/analyzing/ implementing /Evaluating any specific
social problem and to provide practical suggestions to
overcome such problem)
2. Social, Economical, Psychological, Health Problems which
affected individual or society.
3. Problems related to their respective specializations. For
example Community Development, Medical and Psychiatry,
personnel

Management

and

Industrial

Relations

or

Rehabilitation and Resettlement.

PROJECT PROPOSAL (SYNOPSIS)
PROPOSAL FORMULATION
Synopsis of the project should be prepared in consultation with the guide
and sent to The Director, Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa
University, Karaikudi 630 003 for approval. The synopsis should clearly state
the objectives of the study, scope of the study, tools to be employed for data
collection, methodology and chapter scheme of the proposed project to be

395

undertaken. It should cover adequate details of rationale of the study, sampling

method, data collection, statistical tools and limitations of the study.
A PROJECT GUIDE: ELIGIBILITY
(iv) Faculty Members having Masters degree in Social Work
(Institutions in the department of Social Work affiliated to any
Indian University recognized by the UGC and having minimum 3
years of teaching experience or
(v) Professionally

Qualified

Social

Workers

Working

in

any

Government organization or Head of the Department of Government

Departments
District/State

like

Panchayat(Village

Level)/

Block

Level/

Offices and Social Welfare/Rural Development/

Women Development/ Health Departments/ AIDS Control Board

Society/ Physically and Mentally Challenged Schools/ Orphanage/
Old age Homes/ Noon meals Schemes Department/ Hospitals/
Industry. NGOs, Private Hospitals and Industry or
(vi) Professionals holding Masters degree in Social Work with
respective areas of Social Work (Community Development/ Rural
Development/ Rehabilitation and Resettlement/ Medical and
Psychiatry/ Personnel Management and Industrial Relations) having
minimum of 3 years work experience in the relevant area.
Note:
Learners are advised to send their project synopsis as stipulated above
with duly signed bio-data of the guide along with attested copy of PG
degree Certificate to the Director, Directorate of Distance Education,
Alagappa University, Karaikudi 630 003.
396

 In case the proposed guide is not found eligible by the Directorate, the
student shall be advised to resubmit the proposal afresh, with the prior
approval of the Director.

In order to facilitate the learners, Directorate of Distance Education,

Alagappa University, Karaikudi, has uploaded a list of approved
guides who belong to various Heads of Departments / NGOs or
Institutions / Eligible Guides in the State of Tamil Nadu and other
States in our website www.alagappauniversity.ac.in. The Learners
may also contact them and get their acceptance.
Learners are advised to select guides who are active professionals
in the relevant area of selected topic, i.e., if the topic is in the areas
of Social Work, the guide should be a specialist in Social Work and
so on. Guides are also advised to restrict guiding projects to ten
candidates only per year in their core specialization area only.
PROJECT PROPOSAL SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL
After finalizing the topic and the selection of the guide, the student
should send the Project Proposal Proforma along with a Copy of the synopsis
and Bio-Data of the guide ( along with attested copy of the eligible educational
qualification prescribed by the university ) to The Director, Directorate of
Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi, for approval. Proposals
found incomplete will be rejected. Learners are advised to retain a copy of the
synopsis.

The Project Proposal/synopsis shall be submitted during their IV

397

semester on or before 15 th March for learners admitted in the Academic year

and 15th October for learners admitted in the Calendar year.
COMMUNICATION OF APPROVAL
A Written communication regarding the approval/non-approval of
the project proposal will be sent to the student concerned within one month of
the receipt of the proposal by the Director, Directorate of Distance Education.
RESUBMISSION OF PROJECT PROPOSAL
In case of non-approval of the proposal, comments / suggestions for
reformulating the project will be communicated to you by the Director. In such
cases, the revised project synopsis should be submitted with (i) revised project
proposal and (ii) a copy of the rejected synopsis bearing the comments of the
evaluator.
PROJECT REPORT
FORMULATION
a) The Project Report may contain a minimum of 90-100 typed pages in
one-half line space
b) The Report must adequately explain the rationale and objectives of the
study, sample design, statistical tools, limitations of the study,
chapterisation and the directions for future research.
c) The Project Report should also contain the following:
i) Copy of the approved Project Synopsis
ii) Certificate of originality of the work duly signed by the student
and the guide.
iii) Attendance Certificate from the respective Block Placement
Agency
398

SUBMISSION OF PROJECT REPORT

Two typed copies of the project report have to be submitted to the
Director, Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi.
ENQUIRIES
Enquiries (i) regarding the project approval should be addressed to
The Director Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi
(ii) Regarding results, it should be addressed to:
Examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi 630 003.

399

The Controller of

400